Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA Base Stations | Release 32.0
Operations, Administration and Maintenance

Alcatel-Lucent Internal
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

401-703-407
ISSUE 19
JUNE 2009

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by
anyone outside Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Notice

Every effort was made to ensure that this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to
change.
Mandatory customer information

See statements located in Appendix A, Product conformance statements.

Interference information: Part 15 of FCC rules

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits.
Security statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of access features.
Trademarks

5ESS is a registered trademark of Alcatel-Lucent.

AUTOPLEX is a registered trademark of Alcatel-Lucent. Flexent is a registered trademark of Alcatel-Lucent. Alcatel-Lucent is registered
trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company Ltd. X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Limited warranty

Alcatel-Lucent provides a limited warranty for this product.

Ordering information

The ordering number for this document is 401-703-407. To order this or other Alcatel-Lucent documents, see To obtain documentation,
training, and technical support or submit feedback on the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Documentation DVD, 401-010-005 or web site.
Technical support

For technical support, see To obtain documentation, training, and technical support or submit feedback on the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network
Documentation DVD, 401-010-005 or web site.
Notice

Every effort was made to ensure that this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to
change.
Mandatory customer information

This is an example of an FCC notice. It is up to the developer to ensure that the correct notice is used. If there is no notice, include the
following statement:
This document does not contain any mandatory customer information.
Interference information: Part 15 of FCC rules

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits.

Alcatel-Lucent Internal
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Ordering information

The ordering number for this document is 401-703-407. For information on how to order Alcatel-Lucent documents, see About this
document.
Support

Technical support
If applicable, add technical support. For example:
Technical assistance can be obtained by calling the Regional Technical Assistance Center (RTAC) at 1 866 582 3688 (continental U.S.) or +1
630 224 4672 for in-hours and emergency out-of-hours support.

Alcatel-Lucent Internal
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
About this document
Purpose

xxvii

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Reason for revision

xxvii

..............................................................................................................................................................

Intended audience

...................................................................................................................................................................

xxix

Supported systems

..................................................................................................................................................................

xxix

How to use this document

..................................................................................................................................................

xxxi

Safety information

................................................................................................................................................................

xxxii

Conventions used

..................................................................................................................................................................

xxxii

Related documentation

......................................................................................................................................................

...........................................

xxxv

...................................................................................................................................................................

xxxv

To obtain technical support, documentation, and training or submit feedback

How to comment

xxxiii

Part I: Types of maintenance

1

Operation and maintenance overview

Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Structure of safety statements

..............................................................................................................................................

1-3

Operation versus maintenance

.............................................................................................................................................

1-5

................................................................................................................................................................

1-7

Maintenance process
2

1-1

Before beginning maintenance

Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Test equipment maintenance

Precautionary steps

2-1

................................................................................................................................................

2-3

...................................................................................................................................................................

2-4

Required maintenance equipment

......................................................................................................................................

Before beginning trouble-clearing procedures

..............................................................................................................

2-5
2-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
v
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preventive maintenance
Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Preventive maintenance schedule

Maintenance records

3-1

.......................................................................................................................................

3-2

................................................................................................................................................................

3-3

Part II: Fault detection, isolation, and recovery

4

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Base station maintenance features

.....................................................................................................................................

4-2

Hardware error handling strategy

......................................................................................................................................

4-3

Fault detection mechanisms for manual recovery

Drive testing

.......................................................................................................

4-5

................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6

Performance measurements
Overload control

..................................................................................................................................................

4-7

........................................................................................................................................................................

4-8

Remote T1/E1 monitoring

5

.....................................................................................................................................................

4-9

......................................................................................................................................................................................

5-1

Alarms
Overview

Alarm types
6

4-1

.................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro LP alarm information
Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
CPC alarms

6-1

........................................................................................................................................................................

6-3

.................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6

..............................................................................................................................................................

6-7

URC alarms

.................................................................................................................................................................................

6-8

CMU alarms

................................................................................................................................................................................

6-9

CTU and OM alarms

OCM-II alarms
IOU alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

6-10

................................................................................................................................................................................

6-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

vi

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarms
UCR alarms

......................................................................................................................................................................

6-12

..............................................................................................................................................................................

6-13

TxAMP alarms
TDU alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

6-14

..............................................................................................................................................................................

6-18

Fan tray alarms

User alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

6-19

...............................................................................................................................................................................

6-20

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

........................................................................................................................

..................................

6-31

....................................................................

6-37

....................................................................................................................

6-42

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 block for indoor cabinet
User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218 Macro
Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

Outdoor cabinet user alarm cable connections (external and power)

..............................................................

6-46

Power alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

6-49

Frame alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

6-58

9218 Macro PowCom software

Procedure 6-1: Alarm testing
7

6-25

........................................................................................................................................

6-60

............................................................................................................................................

6-62

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216 Compact Distributed alarm information
Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
CPC alarms

7-1

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-2

.................................................................................................................................................................................

7-4

CTU and OM alarms

..............................................................................................................................................................

7-5

URC alarms

.................................................................................................................................................................................

7-6

CMU alarms

................................................................................................................................................................................

7-7

..................................................................................................................................................................................

7-8

IOU alarms

Intrusion alarm
UCR alarms

..............................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP alarms
TDU alarms

...........................................................................................................................................................................

7-9

7-10

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-11

..............................................................................................................................................................................

7-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
vii
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

User alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-17

...............................................................................................................................................................................

7-18

Power alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

7-39

Frame alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

7-49

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-2

..............................................................................................................................................................

8-4

URC alarms

.................................................................................................................................................................................

8-5

CMU alarms

................................................................................................................................................................................

8-6

CTU and OM alarms

OCM-II alarms

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8-7

Intrusion alarm

...........................................................................................................................................................................

8-8

.................................................................................................................................................................................

8-9

UCR alarms

TxAMP alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-12

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-13

...............................................................................................................................................................................

8-14

Fan tray alarms

User alarms

8-10

............................................................................................................

Tower Top Test Module (TTTM) alarm LED

8-1

Power alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

8-20

Frame alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

8-23

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Overview

......................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection

........................................................................................................................................................................

9-1
9-2

..............................................................................................................................................................

9-4

URC alarms

.................................................................................................................................................................................

9-5

CMU alarms

................................................................................................................................................................................

9-6

CTU and OM alarms

Intrusion alarms

.........................................................................................................................................................................

9-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

viii

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCR alarms

9-9

...........................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

9-11

...............................................................................................................................................................................

9-13

Power Alarms

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9-20

Frame alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

9-29

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection

.....................................................................................................................................................................

10-1
10-2

............................................................................................................................................................

10-4

URC alarms

..............................................................................................................................................................................

10-5

CMU alarms

.............................................................................................................................................................................

10-6

CTU and OM alarms

Intrusion alarms
UCR alarms

......................................................................................................................................................................

10-7

..............................................................................................................................................................................

10-8

TxAMP alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

.....................................................................................................................................................................

10-9

10-11

.............................................................................................................................

10-12

.....................................................................................................................................

10-17

Power Alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

10-22

Frame alarms

.........................................................................................................................................................................

10-31

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

11

9-8

TxAMP alarms

User alarms

10

.................................................................................................................................................................................

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection

.....................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

11-1
11-2

............................................................................................................................................................

11-4

URC alarms

..............................................................................................................................................................................

11-5

CMU alarms

.............................................................................................................................................................................

11-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
ix
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OCM-II alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

11-7

Intrusion alarm

.........................................................................................................................................................................

11-8

Fan tray alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................

11-9

User alarms

.........................................................................................................................................................................

11-14

Frame alarms

.........................................................................................................................................................................

11-21

............................................................................................................................................................................

11-23

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

12-1

........................................................................................................................................................................

12-3

RRH alarms

..............................................................................................................................................................................

12-4

User alarms

...............................................................................................................................................................................

12-5

Intrusion alarm

Frame alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

12-6

Power alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................

12-7

VSWR monitoring

...............................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance procedures for RRH

RRH field support

12-12

................................................................................................................................

12-13

...............................................................................................................................................................

12-15

RRH operational test

..........................................................................................................................................................

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

13

11-10

Power alarms

RRH alarms
12

.............................................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

12-16
12-18

Diagnostic tests
Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Testing overview

.....................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance hierarchy

.........................................................................................................................................................

Fault isolation principles

.....................................................................................................................................................

Testing and diagnostics framework

Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................

13-1
13-3
13-4
13-6
13-8

13-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnostic tests for base station

Stable clear recovery times

....................................................................................................................................

13-12

..............................................................................................................................................

13-16

Outline of MSC-based diagnostics

ECPless MSC

...............................................................................................................................

13-17

........................................................................................................................................................................

13-19

Procedure 13-1: Diagnose the base station

...............................................................................................................

.........................................................

13-23

...........................................................................

13-24

..................................................................................................................

13-27

Procedure 13-2: Test base station using the RMT (direct connection)
Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)
Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

13-20

Operation of Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC)

.................................................................................................

13-36

.....................................................................................................................

13-38

Calibration philosophy

.......................................................................................................................................................

13-41

Parameter descriptions

.......................................................................................................................................................

13-42

Enhanced Digital Predistortion (EDPD)

When field re-calibration is needed

.............................................................................................................................

Procedure 13-5: CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

..............................................................................................

13-43
13-45

Part III: Replace and repair components

14

Replacement/repair process
Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 14-1: Replacement/repair process

15

..............................................................................................................

14-1
14-2

Replace and repair common components between base stations

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

Replace the TxAMP

15-1

..................................................................................................................................

15-2

..............................................................................................................................................................

15-7

Replace the CTU

.................................................................................................................................................................

15-10

Replace the UCR

.................................................................................................................................................................

15-11

Replace the MCR

................................................................................................................................................................

15-13

....................................................................................................................................................................

15-15

Replace a CMU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xi
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the URC

.................................................................................................................................................................

.........................

15-28

...................................................................................................................................................................

15-30

Procedure 15-2: Replace Ethernet Backhaul URC with firewall and security enabled
Replace the OM

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor cabinets

16

15-20

.................................................................

15-32

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement and repair

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

16-1

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218 Macro cabinets

......................................................

16-2

Procedure 16-2: Replace the Fan Tray for outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet

.......................................................

16-8

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro cabinet

...........................................................................

........................................................................

16-14

.....................................................................................................................

16-18

.........................................................................................................................................................

16-22

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro cabinet

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM
Replace circuit packs

16-10

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

........................................................................................................

16-24

Modify or decommission battery box for outdoor cabinets with integrated power and batteries only
........................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-4716-47
16-47
Procedure 16-7: Realign Door on outdoor cabinet
17

................................................................................................

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

17-2

.....................................................................................

17-6

.............................

17-10

...........................................................................................................................

17-13

Procedure 17-3: Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector for outdoor 9216 Compact
Summary for replacing circuit packs

17-1

.............................................................................

Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216 Compact

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for outdoor 9216 Compact
18

16-48

..............................................

17-15

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and repair

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module (PIM)

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

.............................................................................

........................................................................................................................

18-1
18-2

18-24

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xii

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

..................................................................................................

18-32

.......................................................................................................................

18-36

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

..............................................................................................................................

18-43

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

.............................................................................................................................

18-47

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

............................................................................................................................

18-54

................................................................................................................................

18-58

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

19

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

...........................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

......................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

.............................................................................................

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor cabinet

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor cabinet
20

19-16
19-23
19-34

.........................................................................

19-49

...........................................................................

19-58

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 20-1: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet

.....................................

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet
Procedure 20-3: Replace the front-door filter

20-1
20-2

...........................

20-5

............................................................................................................

20-9

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement and repair

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement

22

19-2

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Overview

21

19-1

.........................................................................................................

21-1
21-2

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Field replaceable unit

...........................................................................................................................................................

RRH maintenance functions

..............................................................................................................................................

22-1
22-2
22-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xiii
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

23

.....................................................................................................................

22-4

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

23-1

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

.............................................................................................................................................

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

..................................................................................................................................

Country PM10 Level Classification

.............................................................................................................................

23-3
23-4
23-9

23-10

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens and acoustic mufflers

...........................................................................

23-12

........................................................

23-13

.....................................................................

23-15

...................................................................................

23-20

Procedure 23-1: Inspect and clean front heat exchanger intake screen
Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler screen
Procedure 23-3: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-11

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

...........................................................................................

Procedure 23-5: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet

23-22
23-23
23-24

...................................................................................

23-29

........................................................................................................................................

23-31

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

......................................................................................

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

...................................................................................

23-33
23-34
23-35
23-40

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xiv

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

.........................................................................................

Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

................................................................................

23-45
23-46
23-47
23-50

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

.......................................................................................

Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

................................................................................

23-52
23-53
23-54
23-59

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

.......................................................................................

23-61
23-62
23-63

................................................................................

23-66

.................................................................................................................................................................................

23-68

Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning
Overview

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

..................................................................

23-70

..........................................................................

23-74

...........................................................................................................

23-80

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if applicable)

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel screens
Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

23-69

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

....................................................................................

23-85

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean screens/replace filters

Overview

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

........................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct

............................................................................................

23-88
23-89
23-90

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xv
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

24

................................................................................

23-93

Other types of maintenance

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

24-2

...............................................................................................................................

24-6

Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

24-1

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat Exchanger inspect and clean

......................................

24-14

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat Exchanger inspect and clean

........................................

24-22

Part IV: Configuration management

25

Security management
Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

25-1

Feature description - Restrict Root Login Phase 1: RBAC Roles and Centralized User Account
Management for MM-APs (FID 13003.2) ............................................................................................................... 25-2
Enabling RRL

..........................................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................

25-4

......................................................................................................................................................

25-5

CDMA network login with RRL

Relevant documentation

..................................................................................................................................

25-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................

26-1

RRL and RBAC feature summary

26

Before you begin

Overview

References

.................................................................................................................................................................................

Translations

...............................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration options
27

25-3

...........................................................................................................................................................

26-2
26-4
26-5

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

27-2

...........................................................................................................

27-4

..........................................................................................................................................

27-7

Base station initialization or RCS reboot process

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update process
Procedure 27-1: Update NVM

27-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xvi

Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

28

Growth procedures
Overview

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

Carrier assignment and activation

....................................................................................

28-24

.................................................................................................................................

28-28

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the network

28-30

29-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station

........................................................................................................................

29-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................

30-1

Voice interface DS0 functionality

Overview

Grow the voice interface DS0 functionality to a CDM

A

.............................................................................

Degrowth procedures
Overview

30

28-3

......................................................................................................................

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

29

28-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................

30-2

.........................................................................................

Product conformance statements

Overview

.....................................................................................................................................................................................

A-1

Antenna exposure statements

..............................................................................................................................................

A-3

FCC conformance statements

.............................................................................................................................................

A-4

Industry Canada conformance statements

China

.....................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................

European Union
United States

A-7

A-10

.....................................................................................................................................................................

A-12

...........................................................................................................................................................................

A-17

Eco-environmental statements

.........................................................................................................................................

A-22

Glossary
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xvii
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

List of tables
1

Document and product name changes

xxx

Wire sizes

6-1

9218/9228 Macro/Macro HD system alarm reporting

6-2

9218/9228 Macro CPC alarms

6-3

9218/9228 Macro CPC LED

6-4

9218/9228 Macro CTU LEDs

6-5

9218/9228 Macro OM LEDs

6-6

9218/9228 Macro URC LEDs

............................................................................................................................

6-8

6-7

9218/9228 Macro CMU LEDs

...........................................................................................................................

6-9

6-8

9228 Macro Distributed OCM-II LEDs

6-9

............................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

xxxii

..............................................................................

6-4

............................................................................................................................

6-6

...............................................................................................................................

6-6

.............................................................................................................................

6-7

...............................................................................................................................

6-7

.......................................................................................................

6-10

9218/9228 Macro IOU LEDs

............................................................................................................................

6-11

6-10

9218/9228 Macro UCR LEDs

..........................................................................................................................

6-13

6-11

9218/9228 Macro TxAMP LEDs

....................................................................................................................

6-15

6-12

9218/9228 Macro TxAMP alarms

...................................................................................................................

6-15

6-13

9218/9228 Macro RxAMP alarms

..................................................................................................................

6-17

6-14

9218/9228 Macro TDU LED

............................................................................................................................

6-18

6-15

9218/9228 Macro fan tray LED

6-16

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable pair assignments

6-17

9218/9228 Macro primary frame user alarms

6-18

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable color code for Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 blocks

6-19

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 0-6 cable pin assignments for NIU

6-20

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 7-15 cable pin assignments for NIU

6-21

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 16-23 cable pin assignments for NIU

......................................................................................................................

6-19

.............................................................................

6-21

............................................................................................

6-22

................

6-31

................................................

6-38

..............................................

6-39

...........................................

6-40

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xix
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-22

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 24-31 cable pin assignments for NIU

6-23

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro external user alarm cable pin assignments for EFIM terminal blocks
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-46

6-24

9218/9228 Macro defined power alarms

6-25

9218/9228 Macro defined rectifier alarms

6-26

9218/9228 Macro defined rectifier controller alarm LEDs

6-27

Outdoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet power alarm cable pin assignments

6-28

Indoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet power alarm cable pin assignments

6-29

Outdoor 9228 Macro dual-band cabinet with integrated power for power alarm cable pin
assignments ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-57

6-30

9218/9228 Macro frame alarms

.......................................................................................................................

6-58

6-31

9228 Macro only frame alarms

........................................................................................................................

6-59

7-1

9216/9226 Compact system alarm reporting

7-2

9216/9226 Compact CPC alarms

7-3

9216/9226 Compact CPC LED

7-4

9216/9226 Compact CTU LEDs

7-5

9216/9226 Compact OM LEDs

7-6

9216/9226 Compact URC LEDs

........................................................................................................................

7-6

7-7

9216/9226 Compact CMU LEDs

......................................................................................................................

7-7

7-8

9216/9226 Compact IOU LED

...........................................................................................................................

7-8

7-9

9216/9226 Compact UCR LEDs

7-10

9216/9226 Compact TxAMP LEDs

7-11

9216/9226 Compact shelf alarms

7-12

9216/9226 Compact TxAMP alarms

..............................................................................................................

7-14

7-13

9216/9226 Compact RxAMP alarms

.............................................................................................................

7-15

7-14

9216/9226 Compact TDU LED

.......................................................................................................................

7-16

7-15

9216/9226 Compact fan tray LED

7-16

9216/9226 Compact alarms cable list

...........................................

6-41

....................................................................................................

6-52

..................................................................................................

6-53

................................................................

6-54

................................

6-55

.....................................

6-56

................................................................................................

7-3

.....................................................................................................................

7-4

..........................................................................................................................

7-4

........................................................................................................................

7-5

..........................................................................................................................

7-5

.....................................................................................................................

7-10

...............................................................................................................

7-12

....................................................................................................................

7-12

.................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

7-17
7-24

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xx

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-17

9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable at Z-IDC block

7-18

9216 Compact Distributed user alarm cable at Z-IDC block

7-19

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

7-20

Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

7-21

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external 0-7 user alarm cable connections at NIU

7-22

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external 16-23 user alarm cable connections at NIU

....................

7-33

7-23

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external 24-29 user alarm cable connections at NIU

....................

7-34

7-24

9216/9226 Compact without integrated power user alarm mapping

................................................

7-34

7-25

9216/9226 Compact with integrated power user alarm mapping

......................................................

7-35

7-26

9216 Compact Distributed without integrated power remote configuration user alarms

7-27

9216 Compact Distributed with integrated power remote configuration user alarms

7-28

9216 Compact power alarms

7-29

9216/9226 Compact power controller alarms

7-30

9216/9226 Compact power alarm cable pin assignments

7-31

9216 Compact standard and rural configuration frame alarms

...........................................................

7-49

7-32

9216 Compact Distributed remote configuration frame alarms

..........................................................

7-49

8-1

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm reporting summary

8-2

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed CTU LEDs

8-3

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed OM LED

8-4

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed URC LEDs

...................................................................................................

8-5

8-5

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed CMU LEDs

..................................................................................................

8-6

8-6

9222 Micro Distributed OCM-II LEDs

...........................................................................................................

8-7

8-7

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed UCR LEDs

8-8

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed TxAMP LEDs

8-9

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed TTTM Alarm LED

8-10

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed fan tray LED

8-11

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable functions

..........................................................................

7-24

..............................................................

7-26

...................................................................

7-27

................................................................

.........................

7-29
7-32

........

7-36

...............

7-37

............................................................................................................................

7-46

............................................................................................

.....................................................................

7-47
7-48

.......................................................................

8-3

...................................................................................................

8-4

.......................................................................................................

8-4

...................................................................................................

...........................................................................................

8-9

8-11

.................................................................................

8-12

.............................................................................................

8-13

...................................................................

8-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxi
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-12

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed RJ-45 alarm cable pin assignments

.................................................

8-17

8-13

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed facilities cable connections

.................................................................

8-17

8-14

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable pin assignments

8-15

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed (without integrated power) user alarm mapping

8-16

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable functions

8-17

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed frame alarms

9-1

9223 Ultra-Compact (without integrated power) user alarm mapping

10-1

9224 Sub-Compact/EN system alarm reporting

10-2

Power alarm cable assignment and connections at the NIU for outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact
....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2810-28
10-28

10-3

Power alarm cable assignment and connections on the NIU or optional Z-IDC for indoor 9224
Sub-Compact ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-29

10-4

User alarm wiring for 9224 Sub-Compact EN

10-5

Power alarm cable assignment connections for 9224 Sub-Compact EN

10-6

Frame alarms for the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN

11-1

9234 d2U Distributed OCM-II LEDs

............................................................................................................

15-1

Tools for heat exchanger replacement

........................................................................................................

18-1

PIM cable connections for 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet

23-1

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

26-1

Configuration Management reference documents

28-1

Standard CMU/URC configuration

28-2

CMU/URC load sharing configuration example

.....................................................

8-17

........................

8-18

...................................................................

8-21

..............................................................................................

8-24

............................................

9-17

........................................................................................

10-3

.......................................................................................

10-30

.....................................

10-30

.........................................................................................

10-31

.............................................................

15-32
18-19

..................................................................................................................

....................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

....................................................................................

11-7

23-9
26-3

28-25
28-26

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxii

List of procedures
Part II: Fault detection, isolation, and recovery
6

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro LP alarm information
6-1

13

Alarm testing

...........................................................................................................................................................

6-62

Diagnostic tests
13-1

Diagnose the base station

13-2

Test base station using the RMT (direct connection)

13-3

Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)

13-4

Antenna functional tests

13-5

CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

.................................................................................................................................

13-20

...........................................................................

13-23

.............................................................................................

13-24

...................................................................................................................................

13-27

...............................................................................................................

13-45

Part III: Replace and repair components

14

Replacement/repair process
14-1

15

16

Replacement/repair process

................................................................................................................................

14-2

Replace and repair common components between base stations

15-1

Replace the TDU

15-2

Replace Ethernet Backhaul URC with firewall and security enabled

15-3

Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor cabinets

...................................................................................................................................................

15-2

...........................................

15-28

..................................................................................

15-32

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement and repair

16-1

Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218 Macro cabinets

.......................................................................

16-2

16-2

Replace the Fan Tray for outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet

.........................................................................

16-8

16-3

Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro cabinet

16-4

Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro cabinet

16-5

Replace the EEPROM

............................................................................................

16-10

..........................................................................................

16-14

.......................................................................................................................................

16-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxiii
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

18

19

20

16-6

Add new URC for IPBH cell

16-7

Realign Door on outdoor cabinet

.........................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................

16-24
16-48

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

17-1

Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216 Compact

..............................................................................................

17-2

17-2

Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

.......................................................................................................

17-6

17-3

Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector for outdoor 9216 Compact

17-4

Replace the Heater Assembly for outdoor 9216 Compact

...............................................

17-10

...............................................................

17-15

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and repair

18-1

Replace the Power Interface Module (PIM)

18-2

Replace the Rectifier

18-3

Replace the Rectifier Controller

18-4

Replace the Fan Tray

18-5

...............................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................

18-2

18-24

....................................................................................................................

18-32

.........................................................................................................................................

18-36

Replace the DLM

................................................................................................................................................

18-43

18-6

Replace the heater

...............................................................................................................................................

18-47

18-7

Replace the TTTM

..............................................................................................................................................

18-54

18-8

Replace the SPM

.................................................................................................................................................

18-58

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

19-1

Replace the RF filter

19-2

Replace the DLM

19-3

Replace the Amplifier

19-4

Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

19-5

Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor cabinet

19-6

Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor cabinet

............................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

19-2

19-16
19-23
19-34

...........................................................................................

19-49

.............................................................................................

19-58

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

20-1

Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet

20-2

Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet

.......................................................

............................................

20-2
20-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxiv

List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

20-3
23

Replace the front-door filter

..............................................................................................................................

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

23-1

Inspect and clean front heat exchanger intake screen

23-2

Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler screen

23-3

Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-4

Inspect and clean side panel screen

23-5

Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-6

Close cabinet

23-7

Inspect and clean access panel screen

23-8

Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-9

Inspect and clean front louver cover

..........................................................................

23-13

.......................................................................................

23-15

.....................................................................................................

23-20

.............................................................................................................

23-24

.....................................................................................................

23-29

.........................................................................................................................................................

23-31

........................................................................................................

23-11 Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-40

...........................................................................................................

23-47

.....................................................................................................

23-50

...........................................................................................................

23-54

23-12 Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-13 Inspect and clean front louver cover

.....................................................................................................

23-59

...........................................................................................................

23-63

23-14 Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

.....................................................................................................

23-15 Remove and clean solar shields (if applicable)

23-66

......................................................................................

23-70

..............................................................................................

23-74

...............................................................................................................................

23-80

23-16 Remove and clean side duct panel screens

23-17 Re-install side duct panels

23-35

.....................................................................................................

23-10 Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-18 Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

23-19 Remove and clean air intake duct

........................................................................................................

23-85

................................................................................................................

23-90

23-20 Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

24

20-9

.....................................................................................................

23-93

Other types of maintenance

24-1

VRLA battery maintenance

24-2

Repair EZBFo Fan

24-3

Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat Exchanger inspect and clean

................................................................................................................................

24-2

................................................................................................................................................

24-6

........................................................

24-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxv
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

24-4

Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat Exchanger inspect and clean

..........................................................

24-22

Part IV: Configuration management

27

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

27-1

28

29

Update NVM

...........................................................................................................................................................

27-7

Growth procedures
28-1

RC/V database updates

28-2

Integrate the base station into the network

........................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................

28-3

28-30

Degrowth procedures
29-1

Degrow a base station

..........................................................................................................................................

29-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxvi

About this document

About this document

Purpose

This document provides information on the operation, administration, and maintenance

of the following Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations:

9216/9226 Base Station Compact

9216 Base Station Compact Distributed

9218/9228 Base Station Macro

9218/9228 Base Station Macro HD

9222 Base Station Micro/Micro Distributed

9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact

9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN

9224 Base Station Sub-Compact

9228 Base Station Macro LP/Distributed

9234 Base Station d2U Distributed

CDMA 450/850 Remote Units

This manual was formerly known as the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Base Stations - 4.0,
4.0B, 8400, 4400 and 2400 Series Operations, Administration and Maintenance,
401-703-407.
Reason for revision

This document has been reissued for Release 32.0 to include the following updates:
FID 13003.2, Restrict Root Login Phase 1: RBAC Roles and Centralized User
Account Management for MM-APs

This feature (FID 13003.2) enhances MM-AP security by restricting access to MM-AP
resources and information with the use of a Restricted Root Login (RRL) and
Role-Based Access Control (RBAC). Updates can be found at:

Removing existing URC boards from service (p. 15-21), see the step-action table.
Chapter 25, Security management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxvii
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FID 12860.8, 60WCPAM

This feature provides OA&M support for the a new high efficiency power amplifier
module in the cellular band. The 60WCPAM supports up to 3 CDMA carriers
(maximum capacity of 60 W) as compared to the existing C2PAM which only supports
up to 2 CDMA carriers (maximum capacity of 40 W). Updates can be found at:

Added 60WCPAM considerations for installation or replacement under the heading,

60WCPAM installation/replacement considerations (FID 12860.8) (p. 15-9), in
Replace the TxAMP (p. 15-7).

Added 60WCPAM to the Alarm reporting summary table for 9224

Sub-Compact/EN inTable 10-1, 9224 Sub-Compact/EN system alarm reporting
(p. 10-3)
Added 60WCPAM to the Alarm reporting summary table for 9216/9226 Compact
in Table 7-1, 9216/9226 Compact system alarm reporting (p. 7-3)

FID 14152.0, OMC-RAN Remote Maintenance Tool Interface

This feature allows the existing Personal Computer (PC) client based Remote
Maintenance Tool (RMT) application to be launched from the OMC-RAN GUI. The
RMT is a portable PC-based network management tool that is used to configure and
install CDMA cells. This feature provides an On-Line RMT connection via the
OMC-RAN and can be useful to verify/inspect backplane parameters. Refer to the
9253/9254 OMC RAN OAM&P, 401-380-835 for further details and limitations.
Updates can be found at:

Levels of testing (p. 13-3)

Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0) (p. 13-24)

Open RMT connection wizard (p. 13-24) - updated procedure to clear

OMCPR00119307.

FID 13736.8, MMC Lifecycle Management - Delivery of MMCv2-APs

Updated as follows:

Added description of FID at ECPless MSC (p. 13-19). More detailed information
can be found in CDMA Network CDMA2000 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network
Overview, 401-610-102

Changed the term ECP to MSC throughout document, except for RC/V forms
and menus.
Added definition for ECPless MSC in the Glossary.

New Procedure

Added 9228 Macro Heat Exchanger cleaning procedures. Updates can be found at:

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat Exchanger inspect and clean
(p. 24-14)

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat Exchanger inspect and clean
(p. 24-22)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxviii

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

General updates

Updates to improve usefulness of document:

Updated outline to bring base station information up a level.

FID 13019.6, Enhancements to RRHs

This feature provides functionality to configurations with daisy-chained RRHs. Updates

can be found at:

Provide new RRHEQP form

Support a maximum of 6 RRHs per cell

Provide RRH with user defined alarms on OMC-RAN/ORCA

Updated Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates (p. 28-3) as follows:

Insert cmodeqp form (p. 28-6), Step 14

Added Insert rrheqp form (p. 28-10)

Updated Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station (p. 29-2) as follows:

Added Step 5

Added OCM-II alarms (p. 6-10) to Chapter 6, 9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228

Macro HD, and 9228 Macro LP alarm information
Added OCM-II alarms (p. 8-7) to Chapter 8, 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed
alarm information

Added OCM-II alarms (p. 11-7) to Chapter 11, 9234 d2U Distributed alarm
information

OMCPR00119307

Updated Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0) (p. 13-24) as
follows:

Open RMT connection wizard (p. 13-24)

Disconnect RMT and teardown ssh tunnel (p. 13-26)

Intended audience

The intended audience for this document consists of base station technicians.
Supported systems

This document supports the CDMA base stations listed in the following table.
Alcatel-Lucent has changed the name of products within the CDMA portfolio. The use
of any of these names in this document refer to the same product and functionality.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxix
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 1

Document and product name changes

New Doc
Name

Old Doc Name

Old Naming
Convention

New Naming
Convention

Abbreviated Name

AlcatelLucent Base
Stations
Macro 9218,
9228, 9228
LP, 9228
HD, and
9228
Distributed
System
Description,
401-703-486

Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA
Modular Cell
4.0/4.0B Series
and BTS 8420
System
Description

Modular Cell 4.0

9218 Base Station

Macro

9218 Macro

Modular Cell 4.0

High Density

9218 Base Station

Macro HD

9218 Macro HD

Modular Cell
4.0B

9228 Base Station

Macro

9228 Macro

Modular Cell
4.0B High
Density

9228 Base Station

Macro HD

9228 Macro HD

Base Station BTS

8420

9228 Base Station

Macro LP

9228 Macro LP

Base Station BTS

8430

9228 Base Station

Macro Distributed

9228 Macro
Distributed

Base Station
2400

9222 Base Station

Micro

9222 Micro

Base Station
2430

9222 Base Station

Micro Distributed

9222 Micro
Distributed

Base Station
4400

9224 Base Station

Sub-Compact

9224 Sub-Compact

Base Station
4401

9224 Base Station

Sub-Compact EN

9224 Sub-Compact
EN

AlcatelLucent 9222
and 9222
Base Stations
Micro
Distributed
(formerly
AlcatelLucent
CDMA Base
Station 2400)
System
Description,
401-703-487

Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA Base
Station 2400
Series System
Description

AlcatelLucent 9224
Base Station
Sub-Compact
/ EN System
Description,
401-703-488

Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA Base
Station 4400
Series System
Description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxx

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 1

Document and product name changes

(continued)

New Doc
Name

Old Doc Name

Old Naming
Convention

New Naming
Convention

Abbreviated Name

AlcatelLucent
9216/9226
Base Station
Compact
Series
(formerly
Modular Cell
4.0/4.0B
Compact
Series)
System
Description,
401-703-489

Alcatel-Lucent
CDMA
Modular Cell
4.0/4.0B
Compact Series
System
Description

Modular Cell 4.0

Compact

9216 Base Station

Compact

9216 Compact

Modular Cell 4.0

LX

9216 Base Station

Compact LX

9216 Compact LX

Modular Cell 4.0

Compact RU/BU

9216 Base Station

Compact Distributed

9216 Compact
Distributed

Modular Cell
4.0B Compact

9226 Base Station

Compact

9226 Compact

9234 Base
Station d2U
Distributed
System
Description,
401-703-509

NA

Base Station
3430

9234 Base Station d2U

Distributed

9234 d2U
Distributed

How to use this document

This document is divided into the following chapters:

About this document describes the intended use and structure of the document.
Part I: Types of maintenance describes the different types of maintenance used to
maintain the base stations.
Part II: Fault detection, isolation, and recovery describes the fault detection,
isolation, and recovery of the cell.
Part III: Replace and repair components provides instruction on how to replace
components in the base station.
Part IV: Configuration management provides configuration management
procedures for growth degrowth and software updates.
Appendix A, Product conformance statements provides product conformance
statements.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxxi
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given
at points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist.
Failure to follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious
consequences.
Conventions used

The following conventions are used in this document:

Illustrations

The illustrations shown in this information product are schematics. They do not contain
all details and exceptions, but are rather intended to highlight main points. Dimensions
are shown in millimeters with inches in parenthesis. As an example, 680.0 (26.77)
equals 680 millimeters (mm) or 26.77 inches. Tolerances shall be held to 1.52 (0.06)
and are not cumulative.
Standard cross-sections and wire diameters of round copper conductors

The following table is from CEI/IEC 60947-1:2004, Table 1, Standard cross-sections of

round copper conductors and approximate relationship between mm 2 and AWG/kcmil
sizes for reference. Additional wire sizes are included in this information product as
appropriate for the topic.
Table 2

Wire sizes

ISO rated cross-sectional area (mm2)

AWG/kcmil size

0.2

24

0.34

22

0.5

20

0.75

18

1.5

16

2.5

14

12

10

10

16

25

35

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxxii

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2

Wire sizes

(continued)

ISO rated cross-sectional area (mm2)

AWG/kcmil size

50

0 (1/0)

70

00 (2/0)

95

000 (3/0)

0000 (4/0)

120

250 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

185

350 kcmil

400 kcmil

240

500 kcmil

300

600 kcmil

NOTE: The dash, when it appears, counts as a size when considering connecting
capacity (see 7.1.7.2 in the standard).

Related documentation

Base station personnel must have the appropriate reference material, and all applicable
local, regional and national code documentation.
A password-protected web site is available where customers can obtain the most recent
information about Mobility products. That web site is the documentation download
area of the Alcatel-Lucent customer support web site. You can access that site at the
following URL: http://support.alcatel-lucent.com
Alcatel-Lucent documents

Base station personnel should have access to the following Alcatel-Lucent documents:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Documentation DVD, 401-010-005

Alcatel-Lucent 9253/9254 Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio Access

Network (Alcatel-Lucent 9253/9254 OMC-RAN) Operations, Administration,
Maintenance, and Provisioning, 401-380-835, hereafter referred to as 9253/9254
OMC RAN OAM&P, 401-380-835
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Database Update Manual, 401-610-036

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

CDMA Network CDMA2000 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Overview, 401-610-102

CDMA Network Recommended Spare Parts and Sparing Strategies, 401-610-120

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxxiii
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Status Display Pages (SDPs) Reference Guide,

401-610-166

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA2000 Wireless Networks CMU-IVB Optional Feature

Description, 401-612-857

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network CDMA Modem Unit - V (CMU-V) Channel Card

and Related Features Optional Feature Description, 401-612-896

Flexent /AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions,

401-660-101

AUTOPLEX Series II Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit Maintenance Procedures,

401-660-125

Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) Operations,

Administration, and Maintenance, 401-662-108

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Centralized Security Management Security

Administration Guide, 401-662-112

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network RRL and RBAC Feature Description, 401-662-119

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437
CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438
CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0, Microcell, and
CDBS, 401-703-439
Alcatel-Lucent Base Stations Macro 9218, 9228, 9228 LP, 9228 HD, and 9228
Distributed System Description, 401-703-486
Alcatel-Lucent 9222 and 9222 Base Stations Micro Distributed (formerly AlcatelLucent CDMA Base Station 2400) System Description, 401-703-487

Alcatel- Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact / EN System Description,

401-703-488

Alcatel- Lucent 9216/9226 Base Station Compact Series (formerly Modular Cell
4.0/4.0B Compact Series) System Description, 401-703-489

9234 Base Station d2U Distributed System Description, 401-703-509

CDMA Backhaul Networks, IP Backhaul and Ethernet Backhaul, 401-710-090

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Radio Cluster Server Operations, Administration,

and Maintenance, 401-710-102

Alcatel-Lucent 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Operations,

Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-201

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

xxxiv

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Related training

The following training is referred to in this document:

CDMA Modular Cell Description, Operation and Maintenance, CL5690

To obtain technical support, documentation, and training or submit feedback

The Online Customer Support (OLCS) web site, http://support.alcatel-lucent.com,

provides access to technical support, related documentation, related training, and
feedback tools. The site also provides account registration for new users.
How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www.

lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
xxxv
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Part I: Types of maintenance

Overview
Purpose

At the end of this chapter, readers will be able to do the following:

Describe the types of maintenance.

Prepare to perform cell site maintenance.

Perform cell site preventive maintenance.

Contents
Chapter 1, Operation and maintenance overview

1-1

Chapter 2, Before beginning maintenance

2-1

Chapter 3, Preventive maintenance

3-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
I-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

1 peration and
O
maintenance overview

Overview
Purpose

This chapter is designed to enable base station technicians to perform the tasks
necessary to ensure sustained and continued service from base stations.
Maintenance types

Maintenance activities can be classified into one of three categories:

Preventive (or routine) maintenance, which includes activities necessary to prevent

cell malfunction

Corrective maintenance, which includes activities that take place to correct a cell
malfunction

On-demand maintenance, which includes optional activities (such as the upgrade of

cell generic) that are aimed at improving cell operation in the absence of cell
malfunction

Excluding housekeeping tasks (leaf and snow removal, cleaning of filters, etc.), most
of the preventive maintenance, such as routine diagnostics, can be done from the MSC.
The operation and maintenance concept

Operation and maintenance can be defined as the set of tasks that must be performed
by individuals responsible for the continued operation of the various base stations.
Depending on the circumstances, operation and maintenance tasks may be performed:

Routinely, to ensure that the base station is operating according to specifications

Correctively, to respond to a base station malfunction

On demand, to improve upon the base station operating condition

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
1-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Operation and maintenance overview

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Contents
Structure of safety statements

1-3

Operation versus maintenance

1-5

Maintenance process

1-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

1-2

Operation and maintenance overview

Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Structure of safety statements

Overview

Safety statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks on
Alcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazards
may have serious consequences.
General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

D
CAUTION
Lifting hazard

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury

due to the size and weight of the equipment.
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment.
[ABC123]

F
G
H

Item

Structure element

Purpose

Safety alert symbol

Indicates the potential for personal injury

(optional)

Safety symbol

Indicates hazard type (optional)

Signal word

Indicates the severity of the hazard

Hazard type

Describes the source of the risk of damage

or injury

Safety message

Consequences if protective measures fail

Avoidance message

Protective measures to take to avoid the

hazard

Identifier

The reference ID of the safety statement

(optional)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
1-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Operation and maintenance overview

Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word

Meaning

DANGER

Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

1-4

Operation and maintenance overview

Operation versus maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Operation versus maintenance

Perspective

Operation, administration, and maintenance involve overlapping activities with a

common goal of maximizing base station availability and performance. These three
functions correspond to different perspectives:

Operation includes the activities necessary to operate the cell site when conditions
are stable and there are no failures in the cell site. Initialization, measurements, and
overload control are aspects of operation.

Administration includes the activities necessary to accommodate changes in the

environment. Translations and software downloads, which allow the cell site to
adjust to changes in the environment, are aspects of administration.
Maintenance includes the activities to identify failures and to restore service if
there are failures. Alarms, tests, fault localization, management of equipment states,
and recovery are all aspects of maintenance.

The distinction is important in cases of conflicting requirements, such as routine

maintenance that conflicts with operational staff availability.
Management issues

Operation essentially involves user issues, such as selection of personnel or records

retention practices.
Maintenance involves contractual issues, such as risks of loss of warranties if
recommended practices are not followed.
A successful maintenance program will optimize the operational costs of maintenance.
Logistics issues

One way to keep maintenance costs down is to optimize maintenance logistics.

Examples of where logistics can be optimized are as follows:

Balancing maintenance workload between the MSC and the base station
Pooling of test equipment

Reasons for maintenance

The purpose of maintenance is to minimize the possibility and effects of a system

failure. To support that purpose, the maintenance process must be able, in the event of
a system failure, to collect information as to its cause, and to provide the tools
necessary to correct the situation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
1-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Operation and maintenance overview

Operation versus maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objectives

The objective of the maintenance process is to maximize system performance and

availability at the lowest cost possible. Costs can be reduced by eliminating
initialization, diagnostics, and cell site visits.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

1-6

Operation and maintenance overview

Maintenance process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance process
Maintenance activities/maintenance levels

There are three different types of maintenance, each with specific concerns:

Preventive (or routine) maintenance is concerned with tasks that will reduce the
probability of failure. Examples of such tasks are the cleaning of the base station
and the monitoring of its performance.

Corrective maintenance is concerned with the speedy elimination of a cause or

potential source of failure. An example of corrective maintenance is the
replacement of failing circuit boards.

On-demand maintenance is concerned with tasks that are performed on a base

station , even though the base station is still operating properly. An example of
on-demand maintenance is the addition of capacity.

Responsibilities

Responsibilities for maintenance are shared between the following:

The cell site that reports any base station malfunction to the RCS
The RCS that analyzes and attempts to correct these malfunctions through software

The base station technician who performs any required physical intervention.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
1-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

2 efore beginning
B
maintenance

Overview
Purpose

Preventive maintenance may identify potential sources of base station failure before
they interfere with service. For instance, preventive maintenance may locate a failing
board in a redundant unit, and thus allow its timely replacement.
Corrective maintenance concerns the detection of failing units while in service.
Procedures to remedy a failing unit, whether it has been diagnosed as part of
preventive or corrective maintenance, are the same once the cause of failure has been
identified.
Levels of corrective maintenance

Corrective maintenance is event-driven and is usually triggered by an alarm, or by

visual observation of physical damage to the cell or the cell site in the following
levels:

MSC-level corrective maintenance includes maintenance actions that do not require

technician intervention at the cell. These actions are software-initiated, such as
through a restore command to reset the cell after an outage.
Base station-level of maintenance requires physical intervention at the cell site.
Base station-level maintenance usually corresponds to the need to replace a base
station component.
Advanced level of maintenance corresponds to situations where corrective actions
require expert assistance. An example of such a situation would be the replacement
of components destroyed by lightning.

Contents
Test equipment maintenance

2-3

Precautionary steps

2-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
2-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before beginning maintenance

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Required maintenance equipment

2-5

Before beginning trouble-clearing procedures

2-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

2-2

Before beginning maintenance

Test equipment maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Test equipment maintenance

Overview

Test equipment must be maintained to ensure that its outputs are meaningful.
Equipment maintenance checks

The components that need to be maintained are cables and probes, as well as
calibration devices, such as attenuators. Equipment maintenance should be performed
according to manufacturers specifications, using up-to-date software.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
2-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before beginning maintenance

Precautionary steps

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Precautionary steps
Overview

Proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) practices must be followed whenever handling

circuit packs or working inside a base station cabinet.
Other precautions

Whenever handling cables and connections:

Avoid sharp bends.

Follow required procedures for the handling of connections, especially those

requiring the use of torque wrenches.

Live RF cables

DANGER

Never disconnect a live RF cable or apply power to an RF unit that is in a transmit

mode.

Handling circuit packs

Follow the ESD procedures listed in AUTOPLEX Series II Modular Linear Amplifier
Circuit Maintenance Procedures, 401-660-125. That information can also be found in
Alcatel-Lucent CD-ROM documentation by searching for the term esd.
When handling equipment or working in the backplane area, a grounded antistatic wrist
strap must be worn to protect the equipment from ESD. The following guidelines
should be used when handling circuit packs:

Turn off power before inserting or removing a circuit pack only if directions
require it.
Carry the circuit pack in its electrostatic bag and other packing materials to the
replacement site before removing it from packaging.
Before replacing a circuit pack, check the identification code to ensure the proper
board is being used.
Identify and count circuit packs before removing them from their antistatic
packaging material.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

2-4

Before beginning maintenance

Required maintenance equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Required maintenance equipment

Overview

Equipment required for maintenance:

Radio and control equipment

Power measurement equipment

Building and site maintenance equipment

Radio and control equipment

Radio and control equipment includes frequency generators and analyzers (test sets),
and calibrated connectors and cables.
Power measurement equipment

Test sets can be used to measure and analyze RF power. In addition, equipment such as
multimeters should be available to check the operation of AC and DC components.
Building and site maintenance equipment

To maintain the base station site, it is usually necessary to have tools and equipment
for general maintenance work available at the site.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
2-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before beginning maintenance

Before beginning trouble-clearing procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before beginning trouble-clearing procedures

Before performing the procedures

To expedite diagnostics, technicians should verify that the following items are readily
available:

Base station configuration records that provide the history of installed components
and software

Base station maintenance records that provide a history of earlier failures and
corrective actions

Required maintenance equipment, including ESD protection.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

2-6

Preventive maintenance
3

Overview
Purpose

This chapter covers a suggested preventive maintenance schedule and record keeping
practices.
Contents
Preventive maintenance schedule

3-2

Maintenance records

3-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
3-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance schedule

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preventive maintenance schedule

Sample preventive maintenance schedules

Shown below are some suggestions for preventive maintenance checks on base
stations.

Typical Preventive Maintenance Schedule

PREVENTIVE CHECK

INTERVAL

Site condition

Each visit or 3 months

Frame

Each visit or 3 months

- Cabling
- Weather seals
- Alarm LEDs
- Electrical power levels
- Ventilation (cooling fins and, if equipped, cooling fans)
FCC Measurements
Antenna Sweeps

Every 6 months

Fresh Air Filter

See Replacement of Fresh

Air Filter Section

VLRA Battery Maintenance

Every 6 months

Preventive base station site maintenance

Some of the preventive maintenance tasks that are performed outside a base station are
often out sourced. These tasks include the following:

Visual inspection of antennas, groundings, and other equipment, to identify and

remedy potential sources of hazards

Maintenance of the site, such as snow removal, and trimming of shrubs

Drive testing is performed on a periodic basis to meet regulatory requirements and
to identify progressive degradation of performance. It involves measuring and
comparing wireless signals to original specifications.

Preventive base station equipment maintenance

Preventive base station equipment maintenance tasks include the following:

Inspection of frame hardware to verify its proper functioning

Automatic software diagnostics to identify failing units (such diagnostics are

scheduled to minimize impact on service)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

3-2

Preventive maintenance

Maintenance records

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance records
Need for maintenance Records

Maintenance records keep a history of maintenance activities. Maintenance records are

necessary to document base station operation, and to facilitate the performance of any
required corrective actions.
Types of maintenance records

Typical records would include the following:

Dates of maintenance visits to the base station

Description of maintenance tasks performed

Repair and performance logs, such as performance measurements

Reference documents (such as base station installation and engineering diagrams)

Up-to-date base station configuration data (for example, software release)

Guidelines for maintenance of records

Maintenance records should be kept at the base station site for use by maintenance
personnel and for audit purposes. Maintenance records should be neatly organized in
folders, with drawings and logs kept in an organized format to ensure their long-term
availability.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
3-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Part II: Fault detection, isolation,

and recovery

Overview
Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide an introduction to the principles and tools
used for cell site diagnostics. This chapter, enables the reader to do the following:

Recognize the types of alarms and what they signify.

Identify the characteristics of the different types of diagnostic tests.

Identify the MSC-based diagnostic sequence.

Description

Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indications and diagnostic
test results. Alarm indications, in most instances, are generated by dedicated monitoring
circuits. These circuits provide identification of trouble and indications of faulty or
suspect units. Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines run on a
functional circuit block. In most instances, the results identify faults to one or more
suspected units within a functional area.
Contents
Chapter 4, Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

4-1

Chapter 5, Alarms

5-1

Chapter 6, 9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro LP

alarm information

6-1

Chapter 7, 9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216 Compact

Distributed alarm information

7-1

Chapter 8, 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

8-1

Chapter 9, 9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

9-1

Chapter 10, 9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

10-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
II-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Fault detection, isolation, and recovery

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Chapter 11, 9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

11-1

Chapter 12, CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

12-1

Chapter 13, Diagnostic tests

13-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

II-2

4 ell site fault detection

C
and recovery tools

Overview
Purpose

This chapter contains descriptions of the detection and automatic recovery tools that
restore the system when faults occur.
Sources of errors

Sources of errors that will require corrective action are as follows:

Hardware errors due to, for instance, a faulty microprocessor or a synthesizer out
of lock. These errors are detected by on-board self tests and monitoring.

Software errors due to, for instance, loss of program control

Voice channel errors, such as access/failure rates

Mobile errors due to, for instance, poor transmission conditions

Software detection of audit errors

Contents
Base station maintenance features

4-2

Hardware error handling strategy

4-3

Fault detection mechanisms for manual recovery

4-5

Drive testing

4-6

Performance measurements

4-7

Overload control

4-8

Remote T1/E1 monitoring

4-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
4-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Base station maintenance features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Base station maintenance features

Configuration management

There are various tools used to maintain the system configuration.

Non-volatile Memory (NVM) update and the download of new software generics

Selective initialization and configuration of hardware

Configuration of facilities

Technology-specific parameter setting

RF engineering parameters
Base station self-inventory of hardware and firmware components.

Fault management

The technician needs a knowledge of and access to tools to isolate faults and return the
system components to service.

Diagnostics -- Routine and on-demand

Equip and unequip hardware

Remove/restore hardware from operation

Display status of hardware

Board-Level Self Test (BLST) and reporting of results to a controlling subsystem

Alarms

Status display and monitoring

Recovery procedure (simple failures: amplifiers, etc.)

Fault detection and isolation (low-level diagnostics of maintenance objects)

Facilities interface fault management and recovery

Overload detection/control
CFR (FCC) testing.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

4-2

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Hardware error handling strategy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware error handling strategy

Alarm management

There are two subsystems (HEH and Alarm Scanning) responsible for handling error
conditions in the base station cells. This philosophy is consistent with the
implementation of previous platforms including Alcatel-Lucent CDMA and Series II.
This CDMA base station OA&M document supports the following 3 types of alarms:
1. Frame alarm: This includes cell site door open alarm, fan alarm, CPC alarms etc.
2. User defined alarm: The software supports defined alarms. These are provided for
the service providers to report alarms for the non-base station alarms. The alarm is
a 2-lead current loops where a closed circuit may indicate a normal circuit and a
open circuit may indicate an alarm. The user alarm sense can be inverted by
software through RC/V.
3. In Release 24.0 or higher, the base stations support hardware errors on all shared
equipment, shared radios, TDU, CTU, TxAMP, and RxAMP alarms.
Hardware errors

All of the errors are analyzed by the Hardware Error Handler (HEH) at the RCS.
Depending upon the severity of the error, HEH either takes immediate recovery action
through the Maintenance Request Administrator, waits until the error has occurred a
predefined number of times before taking action, or only prints an error report.
HEH performs the following types of error analysis:

Immediate action

All tests pass (ATP) analysis

Single time-period analysis

Fail/Pass analysis

Leaky bucket analysis

Immediate action

For severe errors that are service-affecting, such as loss of communication between the
RCS and the cell, HEH takes immediate action. For on-board hardware errors, HEH
will request a conditional restore of the suspect unit.
The conditional restore maintenance action schedules an event or process to restore the
suspect unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test. If the unit fails the diagnostic test,
the conditional restore aborts. The failed unit remains in the out-of-service state.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
4-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Hardware error handling strategy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

All tests pass (ATP) analysis

For an HEH-initiated conditional restore request, if the unit passes all diagnostic tests,
the unit is restored to service. HEH then adds a count to an ATP counter for the unit. If
that count exceeds an assigned threshold within a predefined time period (typically
three in 40 minutes, or five in 24 hours), HEH will request an unconditional remove of
the unit (the diagnostic tests for the unit may not be robust enough to detect the
problem, or the problem is external to the unit). This type of error analysis prevents a
recovery cycle that might otherwise continue indefinitely.
Single time-period analysis

Single time-period analysis refers to the use of error counters assigned to each
hardware unit (URC, CMU, UCR, and so on). If an error count for a unit remains
below a predefined threshold for a specific period of time, HEH clears the counter.
This type of error analysis is based on the theory that if a unit has remained reliable
for an extended period of time, its error history should be disregarded.
Fail/pass analysis

HEH performs the fail/pass type of error analysis on call-processing-detected errors,

such as voice channel confirmation failures. When the number of failures exceeds
some predefined value relative to the number of successful attempts (such as 2400
failures in 4000 attempts), HEH takes recovery action.
Leaky bucket analysis

Leaky bucket analysis refers to the decrements of non-zero error counters for the
configurable hardware units. The decrements are done at set time intervals. This
technique is more flexible than a simple analysis based on the number of errors in a
single fixed period of time. That is, the count increments each time the error being
tracked occurs on the circuit involved. If a specified number of errors have
accumulated in a specific amount of time, the circuit is usually taken out-of-service. If
the error has not occurred in a given amount of time, the count decrements. If the
count reaches zero, the error block is released.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

4-4

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Fault detection mechanisms for manual recovery

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault detection mechanisms for manual recovery

Trouble indicators

There are various sources from which a technician can learn about the health of the
base station. Those sources include:

Alarms

Cell site diagnostic software

System performance measurements

Subscriber complaints

Drive testing

Fault isolation process

The fault isolation process follows a systematic top-down path with decision points
designed to identify likely causes of failure through a process of elimination. Unlike
the individual diagnostic functions that target a specific Field Replaceable Unit (FRU),
the fault isolation process is performed automatically by the system, or under the
control of the RMT (direct or OMC-RAN) to isolate a faulty FRU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
4-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Drive testing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Drive testing
Overview

Drive testing equates to driving a motor vehicle (complete with mobile transceiver) in
a specific area of coverage while attempting to complete or monitor mobile calls. Drive
testing is a performance analysis activity that may be used to find service-affecting
problems. Drive testing an entire cellular system to find problems is very effective at
directly assessing system performance. However, it is very time consuming and
expensive. Therefore, system-level drive testing is not normally performed, except after
a retune or major configuration change.
Drive testing may be performed using a normal mobile or a test mobile. The test
mobile is virtually identical to a normal mobile but has incorporated an automatic
answer and the ability to loop back the line to the cell site. It can also check RF
propagation because the test receiver measures the cell site RF off-air.
Trouble isolation

For a system fault involving the cell site, it is important to determine whether the fault
is from the 5ESS Switch, the transmission link, the site controller, or the RF. The test
mobile is an important tool used to differentiate between these categories.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

4-6

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Performance measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance measurements
Overview

Measurements are unique in that they can be used to identify cell-site-related faults
that may not be detected by the base station and the RCS. Such faults could include
call processing coverage problems, or hardware units with partial performance
degradation. For example, catastrophic and severe failures will be detected by the base
station and the RCS, but less severe service-affecting failures may escape detection.
Examples of performance degradation

The following problems can cause reduced radiated power (and therefore, reduced
coverage) without detection:

Damaged antenna
Partial lightning damage to antenna/cable

Damaged feeder

Damaged, faulty, or waterlogged connectors

New (since the base station installation) buildings, foliage growth, and other
obstructions

Types

There are four types of measurements collected by the RCS and reported to the MSC:

Service measurements
Plant measurements

Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements

Power-level measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
4-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Overload control

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overload control
Traffic overload control

When RCS is informed that a URC is in overload (URC Processor Occupancy is above
the threshold), RCS does the following:
1. Routine diagnostic tests on subordinate units are skipped
2. Functional tests on the overload URC are skipped
3. VCSA activity is not sent
4. All the PLM measurements are not sent.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

4-8

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Remote T1/E1 monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remote T1/E1 monitoring

Overview

In order to offer service providers operators the capability to monitor the status of the
T1/E1 facilities to better assist in the isolation of faults in the span in case of an
ensuing T1/E1 outage, this feature allows for the monitoring and collection of error
conditions. The data provided by these alarms before the T1/E1 outage can help make
a better determination on which section of the span the fault may have occurred.
This feature monitors and collects certain error conditions that occurred in the T1/E1
lines. Alarms are generated for key error conditions that exceed pre-defined thresholds.
These error conditions are as follows:
1. Collect and report:

Frame errors
Bipolar Violations (BPV) errors

CRC 6 errors for T1 and CRC 4 errors for E1.

Note that during a T1/E1 outage when all signaling links are down,
communications between the MSC and the cell are lost, hence removing all
possibilities to diagnose the cell remotely from the Switching Center. The data
provided by these alarms before the T1/E1 outage can help make a better
determination on which section of the span the fault may have occurred. For
example, in cases where all fault indications point to the line and not the cell, only
a call to the Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) to check the line may be necessary and
not a cell site visit.
2. Provide Service Measurements for Packet Pipe Call Usage (PPCU) for short
durations. This feature will give the customer the ability to better manage the BTS
backhaul requirements, as well as a way to properly isolate a T1/E1 problem. Also
part of this feature ID is the capability of the 9218 Macro to provide to customers
the ability to monitor the Packet Pipe Occupancy in order to help them engineer
their packet pipes (PPs). The PP capacity is sampled for Voice calls, Packet Data
calls and Supplemental Channel (SCH) bursts and individual counts for the highest
peak and average capacities for each of these types of calls as well as an aggregate
count of all these call types are reported in Service Measurement.
3. The capability to query the Performance Monitoring (PM) Cumulative (15-minute)
Statistics from the Technician Interface is also provided.
Currently, the following DS1 Alarms exists and are reported to the SDP on DS1 icon
(2138 page):

Out-Of-Frame (OOF)

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

Loss of Signal (LOS)

Loss of Frame (LOF)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
4-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Cell site fault detection and recovery tools

Remote T1/E1 monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remote Alarm Indicator (RAI)

Excessive Error Rate (EER) (Major)

Excessive Error Rate EER (Minor)

Controlled Slips (CS)

Two new minor alarms are being added to the above list: Bipolar violations (BPV) and
Excess zeros (EXZ) alarms. This helps isolate problems generally attributed to line
problems or physical links. The BTS collects several Performance Report
Measurements (PRMs) and statistics which is available for post-processing. Typically,
access to these measurements was available only via special purpose external
equipment. With this feature, a technician command allows performance statistics to be
reported to the ROP.
The Performance Report Measurements (PRMs) can be categorized as follows:
1. Instantaneous measurements and status: this includes the signal strength measured
by the BTS, the current alarm status and name of the alarms, if any.
2. Accumulated performance statistics over time: this is further broken down into 15
minute, 1 hour and 24 hour summaries. The technician commands will also allow
for clearing the PRMs collected. This will clear all the statistics (15 minute, 1 hour
and 24 hours).
There is a technician (TI) command to obtain Performance Report Measurement
(PRM) of DS1 statistics on, if equipped:

a specific DS1 on a CDM

There is four command options available for PRM summary data reporting:

Report 1: include only the current 15 minute and the aggregate 24 hour summary
data.
Report 2: include only the current and previous aggregate 1 hour data as well as 24
hour summary.

Report 3: include only the specified 1 hour (in the past 24 hours) data in 15 minute
increments and 24 hour aggregate summary.

Report 4: Current measured signal level, Current Alarm condition, Loop state.

Packet Pipe Occupancy

Also part of this feature is the capability of the 9218 Macro to provide to customers
the ability to monitor the Packet Pipe Occupancy in order to help them engineer their
packet pipes (PPs). The PP capacity is sampled for Voice calls, Packet Data calls and
Supplemental Channel (SCH) bursts and individual counts for the highest peak and
average capacities for each of these types of calls as well as an aggregate count of all
these call types are reported in Service Measurement. This feature is offered with any
backhaul mode supported on T1/E1, for example, FR, IP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

4-10

Alarms
5

Overview
Purpose

This chapter contains general information about the function of alarms for the CDMA
base stations.
Contents
Alarm types

5-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
5-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Alarms

Alarm types

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm types
Alarm roles

Alarms are the first indication of cell site trouble. Alarms indicate one of the
following:

Hardware failure

User-defined condition

Alarm indications can be supplemented by other signs of failures, such as board level
self-test (BLST) error messages.
Alarm indications

The majority of alarm conditions reported to the MSC can be visually identified at the
cell site by observing equipment alarm indicators. Some alarm indications are latched
(that is, they remain until they are reported). Non-latched alarms may or may not
remain long enough to be read and reported.
Alarm severity

Alarms are also classified by level of severity/priority of required action:

1. Critical
2. Major
3. Minor
Alarm reporting

CDMA base station alarms are reported via the URC to the RCS and then to the MSC.
In addition, some alarms activate an LED display on the appropriate equipment.
The URC collects all frame and user alarms and sends them to the MSC.
Alarm scanning

The scanned alarms can be classified as follows:

Transmit and receive amplifier alarms

Frame alarms

User alarms

LED summary

All maintenance objects have a minimum of red and green LEDs. Upon power up all
FRUs turn on all LEDs. If BLST passes the unit turns off LEDs. If BLST fails it keeps
red LED on.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

5-2

Alarms

Alarm types

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BLST

Upon passing all LEDs are turned-off except for the Green LED, which remains
illuminated while power is applied to the circuit pack/unit. The green LED might not
be on during BLST.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
5-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

6218/9228 Macro,
9
9218/9228 Macro HD, and
9228 Macro LP alarm
information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the 9218/9228 Macro,
9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro LP.
Contents
Alarm collection

6-3

CPC alarms

6-6

CTU and OM alarms

6-7

URC alarms

6-8

CMU alarms

6-9

OCM-II alarms

6-10

IOU alarms

6-11

Intrusion alarms

6-12

UCR alarms

6-13

TxAMP alarms

6-14

TDU alarms

6-18

Fan tray alarms

6-19

User alarms

6-20

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

6-25

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 block for indoor

cabinet

6-31

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218 Macro

6-37

Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

6-42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor cabinet user alarm cable connections (external and power)

6-46

Power alarms

6-49

Frame alarms

6-58

9218 Macro PowCom software

6-60

Procedure 6-1: Alarm testing

6-62

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-2

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
Alarm collection

The following figure shows the alarm collection in the 9218/9228 Macro.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm reporting

Most alarms are collected by the I2C with the exception of the following:

The CPC alarms connect directly to the URC via the I2C bus through the IOU and
the backplane.

The Input/Output Unit serves as a physical alarm collection point, as well as a

supplier of digital output signals. Since it is an alarm collection point, the IOU
proxy performs alarm monitoring.

The I2C serial bus is used to interconnect the URC(s), CPCs, TxAMPs and the IOU
for purposes of alarm collection, inventory control and other potential (future)
control/status reporting functions.

LNA over current and DC-DC converter alarms are reported via a discrete cable to
the TDU. The TDU passes the alarms by the I2C bus, through the FAC/FAC-D and
IOU to the URC(s). The TDU sets the appropriate bit(s) on its 16-bit I2C port
expander(s) to indicate the alarm condition, where they are reported to the URC.
The following devices report their alarms to the URC via the I2C bus with the
name of the alarm indicating the type of failure reported as follows:

Digital Shelf Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 1 Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 2 Fan Failure

Cabinet Intrusion Alarm

Heat Management System Overtemp

Primary frame heat management system fan alarm

Primary frame heat management system heat alarm

Heat Management System Undertemp

Heat Management System Controller Fail

Heat Management System Compressor Fail

Alarm reporting summary

System alarm reporting is summarized in the following table for the 9218/9228 Macro
and 9218/9228 Macro HD.
Table 6-1

9218/9228 Macro/Macro HD system alarm reporting

Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

RF

TxAMP

I 2C

TDU

ARCNET

LNA

Discrete connection to the TDU then to the

IOU and URC via I2C in backplane

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-4

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

9218/9228 Macro/Macro HD system alarm reporting

(continued)

Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

Digital

UCR

ARCNET

URC

Directly to RCS over facilities interface

CMU

IEEE-1394

CTU

ARCNET

OMR, OMQ

Parallel bus to CTU and then to URC(s) via

ARCNET

CPC

I 2C

Amplifier Shelf Fans

Cabled Frame alarm connection to IOU and

to URC via I2C; logically OR of each of all
fans in tray

Digital Shelf Fans

Cabled Frame alarm connection to IOU and

to URC via I2C; logically OR of each of all
fans in tray

Heat Management
System

Cabled Frame alarm connection to IOU and

to URC via I2C

External Power Cabinet

Collected via user alarm interface

Other

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

CPC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CPC alarms
CPC alarms

The frame alarm listed below is generated for the CPC.

Table 6-2

9218/9228 Macro CPC alarms

Alarm

Condition

CPC Failure

Reported back to RCS

CPC LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on each CPC.

Table 6-3
Label/color
FAIL-RED
RDY-GRN
(binary)

9218/9228 Macro CPC LED

Condition
Failure
Ready

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-6

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

CTU and OM alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

CTU hardware errors

The CTU generates hardware errors on the peripheral bus due to these conditions:

GPS satellites cannot be traced

Satellite lock has been lost and flywheeling is in process

GPS receiver failure.

CTU LEDs

The LED indicators listed below are available for each CTU.
Table 6-4

9218/9228 Macro CTU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

CTU failure

NVM (yellow)

Context-sensitive event in progress (for example, NVM

download)

RDY (green)

CTU enabled for generating clock signals, and the OM

and GPS are functional

OM FAIL (red)

OM failure

FLY EX (red)

CTU has exceeded the maximum flywheel time

LOCK GPS (green)

GPS unit is locked to the GPS satellite signal

OM LEDs

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the OM.

Table 6-5

9218/9228 Macro OM LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

RDY (green)

Ready, indicates that at least one of the six

analog clock outputs is active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

URC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

URC alarms
URC LEDs

The URC provides the following LEDs to indicate status and alarms conditions:
Table 6-6

9218/9228 Macro URC LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Board failure

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

URC operational

L1 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L2 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L3 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L4 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-8

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

CMU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CMU alarms
CMU LEDs

The three LED indicators listed below are available for the CMU.
Table 6-7

9218/9228 Macro CMU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

The CMU has failed diagnostics, one or

more CEs have failed to initialize, or
another component has failed to initialize

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

The CCU is functioning properly and at

least one CE is enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

OCM-II alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OCM-II alarms
OCM-II LEDs

The eight LED indicators listed in the following table are available on the OCM-II
faceplate.
Table 6-8

9228 Macro Distributed OCM-II LEDs

Label/color

Condition

STAT (red/green/yellow)

a unit status indicator (1 LED)

FL (red/green)

one port status indicator (pass/fail) for each CPRI port (3

LEDs)

SW (red/green)

one transmit state indicator per CPRI port switch (3 LEDs).

ETH (yellow)

Maintenance port status indicator (1 LED).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-10

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

IOU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IOU alarms
IOU LED

One LED indicator listed below is available for the IOU.

Table 6-9

9218/9228 Macro IOU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

PWR ON (green)

Power is on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Intrusion alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarms
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-12

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

UCR alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCR alarms
UCR LEDs

The LEDs for the UCRs indicate these conditions on the 9218/9228 Macro.
Table 6-10

9218/9228 Macro UCR LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

FLT (yellow)

Fault (does not light up with NVM

download)

RDY (green)

Ready

Tx ON (green)

Transmit on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP alarms
Overview

Amplifier (AMP) alarms indicate failures in the receive or transmit amplifiers.

Transmit amplifier (TxAMP) alarms indicate a failure condition in the transmit
amplifier that impacts call transmission capability.
Over-temperature alarm

The Over-temperature alarm is indicated when the amplifier baseplate exceeds a

threshold temperature. The TxAMP includes an internal thermal overload shutdown
circuit to prevent destruction due to lack of airflow from fan failure. Under this
condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged. This may be accomplished
by reducing the bias and switching off the input power. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating temperature, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance.
The alarm light flashes at a 1-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
RF overdrive alarm

The Overdrive alarm is triggered when the input power level exceeds +7.0 dBm 0.75
dB. The amplifier shall not be damaged by an input signal, which is up to a level of
+14 dBm (the continuous Non-damaging Input Power level). This condition can last
indefinitely. Under this condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged.
This may be accomplished by attenuating the input signal. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating input level, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance. The TxAMP amplifier generates an
overdrive alarm during this condition. The amplifier automatically recovers to the
normal mode when the input overdrive condition ceases to exist for at least a period of
4 seconds.
The alarm light flashes at a 1/2-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
Amplifier failure alarm

The Amplifier Failure alarm is triggered when internal monitor circuits within the
TxAMP detect that the drain current is out of operating range or the output power level
is too low. Alarm hysteresis is such that power glitches will not cause false alarms.
The LAM has two LEDs located on the front plate: one green and one red. The green
LED is illuminated when the LAM is powered on and no alarms are detected. The red
LED is illuminated when any LAM alarm is activated. A flashing RED LED indicates
a transient failure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-14

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP LEDs

The LEDs for the TxAMPs indicate these conditions.

Table 6-11

9218/9228 Macro TxAMP LEDs

Label/color

Condition

ALM (red)

Alarm flashes at different rate depending

on fault

ACT (green)

Active

TxAMP Alarms

The following table describes the MCPA TxAMP alarms for the 9218/9228 Macro.
Table 6-12
MCPA TxAMP Alarm

9218/9228 Macro TxAMP alarms

Definition

Name

TxAMP Critical
circuit Failure

Critical Circuit
Failure that disables
RF Output

Alarm Level/TxAMP LED

TxAMP Autonomous

Indication

Error Auto-Recovery

Critical (Red)

1.No Recovery
2. No Recovery

Possible Error
Conditions:
1. Output
Overpower Disables
MCPA immediately
if power is >+2 dB
over rated RF
Power.

System Response

1. RCS will RMV

Amplifier

3. Auto-recovery when
loop converges. MCPA
tries to auto recovery ten
times before shut down.
No auto-recovery after
shut down.

2. SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP shows
as OOS

Auto-recovery once
voltage is within range.
Shuts down if voltage
does not recover then
alarm is triggered

1. RCS will RMV

Amp

No auto-recovery after
shutdown

3. Manual RST to
place back into
service

3. Manual RST to
place back into
service

2. Automatic Power
Control Circuitry
Failure
APC is enabled
when output power
> 52.67 dBm
3. Loop fail
(Linearization
Alarm) Disables
MCPA if Loop
convergence fails
TxAMP Internal
Voltage Out of
Range

Alarm when
internal voltages
goes out of range

Critical (Red)

2. SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP shows
as OOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-12
MCPA TxAMP Alarm

9218/9228 Macro TxAMP alarms (continued)

Definition

Name

TxAMP High
Reverse Power

TxAMP shuts down

if Reverse Power is
detected at 49 dBm
for a duration of 1
minute

Alarm Level/TxAMP LED

TxAMP Autonomous

Indication

Error Auto-Recovery

LED flashes Red for 1

minute. If condition
remains an alarm is
triggered Critical (Red)

Validation period for 1

minute then amplifier
shuts down. No
auto-recovery after
shutdown

System Response

1. RCS will RMV

amp
2. SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP shows
as OOS
3. Manual RST to
place back into
service

TxAMP Input
Overdrive

rF drive is >-5 dBm

Major (Red)

Clamps power until input

decreases to -11.2 dBm

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

TxAMP High
Temperature

TxAMP sends a
message to sub-rack
indicating High
Temp condition

Minor (Red Flashing)

Warning goes away

when temp decreases to
+83 oC. Warning until
Temp increases past +85
C then goes over temp

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

TxAMP Over
Temperature

TxAMP shuts down

if temp sensor
threshold is
exceeded

Major (Red)

Shut down until temp

decreases to +85 oC

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

TxAMP Loss of
Communication

Loss of
communications
between Sub-rack
IM controller and
TxAMP

Major (Yellow)

Auto-recovery.
TxAMPs left in last state

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP report
indeterminate state
for TxAMPs

TxAMP DC Input
Power Fail

Exceeds maximum
voltage. Disables
MCPA immediately
if DC support
voltage > 30.5
VDC.

Major (Red)

Auto-recovery when
supply volage drops to <
+29.5 VDC

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

Auto-recovery whens
upply voltage increases
to > +22.4 VDC

or
Below minimum
voltage. Disables
MCPA immediately
if DC supply
voltage < +20.5
VDC
TxAMP RF
Degraded

RF power on but
degraded

Minor (Red Flashing)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

TxAMP Warm-up

TxAMP in
warm-up. Waits up
to 15 minutes

Minor (Red Flashing)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-16

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-12
MCPA TxAMP Alarm

9218/9228 Macro TxAMP alarms (continued)

Definition

Name

Alarm Level/TxAMP LED

TxAMP Autonomous

Indication

Error Auto-Recovery

System Response

TxAMP Warm-up
Fail

TxAMP fails to
warm-up

Major (Red)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

TxAMP Switch Off

TxAMP Face Plate

Switch is set to
off

Major (Red)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
reports status

RxAMP Alarms

The following table shows the RxAMP Alarms for the 9218/9228 Macro.
Table 6-13

9218/9228 Macro RxAMP alarms

Alarm Name

Definition

Alarm
Level/LED

AutoRecovery

System
Response

RxAMP Fail
(LNA)

RxAMP
Hardware Failure

Major (Red)

No
Recovery

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
displays status

TTLNA Fail

TTLNA is
operating outside
DC current limit

Major (Red)

Change to
bypass
mode

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
displays status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

TDU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TDU alarms
TDU LED

A bi-color LED indicator listed below is available on the TDU.

Table 6-14

9218/9228 Macro TDU LED

Label/color

Condition

red

Failure

green

Ready

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-18

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

Fan tray LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the fan trays.

Table 6-15

9218/9228 Macro fan tray LED

Label/color

Condition

GREEN

Normal

RED

Fault

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
There are no user alarms for the 9218/9228 Macro HD.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
The IOU does not provide any alarms of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame
alarms and user alarms to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
User alarm routing

User alarm routing varies based on the configuration.

The following list shows alarm routing for 9218/9228 Macro.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms are connected in the primary cabinet.

When the cell is . . .

then user alarms are connected . . .

outdoor

through the Facilities Interface Tray

an outdoor cell with

integrated power

internal to the cell to the Primary EFIM-12 J13G User Alarms

test connector

indoor

at the hatchplate on top of the cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-20

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms are routed to the EFIT-12.

When the cell is ...

the user alarms are sent ...

outdoor

to a punchdown block then routed to the IOU

indoor

directly to the IOU. The Primary EFIM-12 is not needed (due

to UL requirements)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

The IOU applies the user alarms to the I2C bus

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

The I2C sends the user alarms to the URC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

The URC sends the alarms over the T1/E1 lines to the switch.
Important! User alarms occur in the primary frame only, growth cabinets do not
support user alarms.

User alarm wiring codes

The following table shows the user alarm cable pair assignments for the 9218/9228
Macro.
Table 6-16

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable pair assignments

Pair No.

Colors
1

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

10

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

11

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

12

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-16

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable pair assignments (continued)

Pair No.

Colors
13

Black-Green

Green-Black

14

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

15

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

16

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

17

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

18

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

19

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

20

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

21

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

22

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

23

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

24

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

25

White-Blue

Blue-White

26

White-Orange

Orange-White

27

White-Green

Green-White

Primary frame user alarms description

Up to 34 (0-33) user alarms are connected to the primary frame of the 9218/9228
Macro. The alarms are routed through the IOU, for secondary lightning protection, and
then provided to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
Table 6-17

9218/9228 Macro primary frame user alarms

User Alarm #

Punchdown Designator
(CPE)**

Description

Pair

Punchdown
block

01

J3

Power Major**

11

J3

Power Minor

21

J3

AC Failure

J3

Intrusion

J3

Batteries on
Discharge

51

J3

Fuse Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-22

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-17

9218/9228 Macro primary frame user alarms (continued)

User Alarm #

Punchdown Designator
(CPE)**

Description

Pair

Punchdown
block

61

J3

Battery Disconnect

J3

Customer defined

J3

Customer defined

10

10

J3

Customer defined

11

11

J3

Customer defined

12

12

J3

Customer defined

13

13

J3

Customer defined

14

14

J3

Customer defined

15

15

J3

Customer defined

16

16

J4

Customer defined

17

17

J4

Customer defined

18

18

J4

Customer defined

19

19

J4

Customer defined

20

20

J4

Customer defined

21

21

J4

Customer defined

22

22

J4

Customer defined

23

23

J4

Customer defined

24

24

J4

Customer defined

25

25

J4

Customer defined

26

26

J4

Customer defined

27

27

J4

Customer defined

28

28

J4

Customer defined

29

29

J4

Customer defined

30

30

J4

Customer defined

30

30

J4

Customer defined

30

30

J4

Customer defined

30

30

J4

Customer defined

31

31

J4

Customer defined

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-17

9218/9228 Macro primary frame user alarms (continued)

User Alarm #

Punchdown Designator
(CPE)**

Description

Pair

Punchdown
block

32

32

J4

Customer defined

33

33

J4

Customer defined

Notes:

1.

Alarms 0 through 6 are reserved for an outdoor cabinet with integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-24

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

Power alarms and user alarms capacity

The indoor 9218/9228 Macro provides capacity for 32 power and user alarms. Alarm 0
through alarm 6 are reserved for power alarms. Alarm 7 through alarm 31 are available
for customer-assignable user alarms (alarms 7 through 15 are not available if utilizing
the 3GP24i power cabinet).
Power alarm cabling is provided by power manufacture. User alarm cabling is provided
as part of site preparation.
General requirements

Each power alarm generated shall be provided by a set of isolated dry relay contacts.
An alarm state may be indicated by a closed circuit or an open circuit. If an
alarm condition is indicated by a closed circuit, the alarm contacts shall present a
contact closure when the alarm circuit fails or loses power. If an alarm condition is
indicated by an open circuit, the alarm contacts shall present an open circuit when
the alarm circuit fails or loses power. The resistance of a closed circuit shall be less
than 100 ohms. The resistance of an open circuit shall be greater than 1 megohms.
User Alarms for the indoor 9218 Macro cabinet

The following figure shows the location of the user alarms 0-15 for the indoor 9218
Macro without integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarms 16-31 for the 9218 Macro without
integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-26

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms for the indoor 9228 Macro cabinet

The following figure shows the location of the user alarms 0-15 for the indoor 9228
Macro without integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarms 16-31 for the 9228 Macro without
integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-28

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the User Alarms 16-31 for the 9228 Macro with integrated
power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Indoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-30

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25

block for indoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 block

for indoor cabinet
User alarm cable termination at the Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 punchdown block

The cables from the Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 blocks terminate on 37 pin D-Sub
connectors that plug into the top of the indoor 9228 Macro, 9228 Macro IN, and 9228
Macro LP. External and power alarms are punched down on external 110 blocks.
The following user alarms are NOT used when the Integrated Power Shelf is equipped
on indoor 9228 Macro, 9228 Macro IN, and 9228 Macro LP cabinets: 3 (Intrusion
Alarm) and 5 (Fuse Alarm)
The user alarm cables are terminated on the Z-IDC or 110ANA punchdown block as
shown in the following table.
Table 6-18
Alarm
name
or
Cable
#

Alarm #

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable color code for Z-IDC or

110ANA1-25 blocks
Wire Color

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions for
9218 Macro
2

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions
for 9228
Macro 2

110ANA1-25
OSP
terminal
block pair
for 9218
Macro only

110ANA125 OSP
terminal
block pair
color code
for 9218
Macro
only

Power Alarms
Power
Major
(PMJ)

User 0 Alarm

Power
Minor
(PMN)

User 1 Alarm

AC
Fail
(ACF)

User 2 Alarm

User 3 Alarm
Power
Cabinet
Intrusion
(INTR)

White-Blue

5-1 upper

7-1 upper

1 Left

Blue

Blue-White

5-1 lower

7-1 lower

1 Right

Blue

WhiteOrange

5-2 upper

7-2 upper

2 Left

Orange

OrangeWhite

5-2 lower

7-2 lower

2 Right

Orange

White-Slate

5-3 upper

7-3 upper

3 Left

Green

Slate-White

5-3 lower

7-3 lower

3 Right

Green

Red-Blue

5-4 upper

7-4 upper

4 Left

Brown

Blue-Red

5-4 lower

7-4 lower

4 Right

Brown

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25

block for indoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-18
Alarm
name
or
Cable
#

Alarm #

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable color code for Z-IDC or

110ANA1-25 blocks (continued)
Wire Color

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions for
9218 Macro
2

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions
for 9228
Macro 2

110ANA1-25
OSP
terminal
block pair
for 9218
Macro only

110ANA125 OSP
terminal
block pair
color code
for 9218
Macro
only

Batteries User 4 Alarm

on
Discharge
(BD)

White-Green

5-5 upper

7-5 upper

5 Left

Grey

Green-White

5-5 lower

7-5 lower

5 Right

Grey

Fuse
Alarm

WhiteBrown

5-6 upper

7-6 upper

6 Left

Blue

BrownWhite

5-6 lower

7-6 lower

6 Right

Blue

WhiteBrown

5-7 upper

7-7 upper

7 Left

Orange

BrownWhite

5-7 lower

7-7 lower

7 Right

Orange

Red-Green

6-1 Upper (+)

8-1 Upper
(+)

8 Left

Green

Green-Red

6-1 Lower (-)

8-1 Lower
(-)

8 Right

Green

Red-Brown

6-2 Upper (+)

8-2 Upper
(+)

9 Left

Brown

Brown-Red

6-2 Lower

8-2 Lower

9 Right

Brown

Red-Slate

6-3 Upper (+)

8-3 Upper
(+)

10 Left

Grey

Slate-Red

6-3 Lower

8-3 Lower

10 Right

Grey

Black-Blue

6-4 Upper (+)

8-4 Upper
(+)

11 Left

Blue

Blue-Black

6-4 Lower

8-4 Lower

11 Right

Blue

User 5 Alarm

Batteries User 6 Alarm

on
Discharge
(BD) 2
Cable #1 (7-15)
User 7
Alarm

User 8
Alarm
User 9
Alarm
User 10
Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-32

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25

block for indoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-18
Alarm
name
or
Cable
#

Alarm #

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable color code for Z-IDC or

110ANA1-25 blocks (continued)
Wire Color

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions for
9218 Macro
2

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions
for 9228
Macro 2

110ANA1-25
OSP
terminal
block pair
for 9218
Macro only

110ANA125 OSP
terminal
block pair
color code
for 9218
Macro
only

User 11
Alarm

User 12

BlackOrange

6-5 Upper (+)

8-5 Upper
(+)

12 Left

Orange

OrangeBlack

6-5 Lower

8-5 Lower

12 Right

Orange

Black-Green

6-6 Upper (+)

8-6 Upper
(+)

13 Left

Green

Green-Black

6-6 Lower

8-6 Lower

13 Right

Green

Black-Brown

6-7 Upper (+)

8-7 Upper
(+)

14 Left

Brown

Brown-Black

6-7 Lower

8-7 Lower

14 Right

Brown

Black-Slate

6-8 Upper (+)

8-8 Upper
(+)

15 Left

Grey

Slate-Black

6-8 Lower

8-8 Lower

15 Right

Grey

Yellow-Blue

6-9 Upper (+)

8-9 Upper
(+)

16 Left

Blue

Blue-Yellow

6-9 Lower

8-9 Lower

16 Right

Blue

White-Blue

8-1 Upper (+)

9-1 Upper
(+)

1 Left

Blue

Blue-White

8-1 Lower (-)

9-1 Lower
(-)

1 Right

Blue

WhiteOrange

8-2 Upper (+)

9-2 Upper
(+)

2 Left

Orange

OrangeWhite

8-2 Lower (-)

9-2 Lower
(-)

2 Right

Orange

Alarm
User 13
Alarm
User 14
Alarm
User 15
Alarm
Cable #2 (16-23)
User 16
Alarm

User 17
Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25

block for indoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-18
Alarm
name
or
Cable
#

Alarm #

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable color code for Z-IDC or

110ANA1-25 blocks (continued)
Wire Color

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions for
9218 Macro
2

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions
for 9228
Macro 2

110ANA1-25
OSP
terminal
block pair
for 9218
Macro only

110ANA125 OSP
terminal
block pair
color code
for 9218
Macro
only

User 18

White-Green

8-3 Upper (+)

9-3 Upper
(+)

3 Left

Green

Green-White

8-3 Lower (-)

9-3 Lower
(-)

3 Right

Green

WhiteBrown

8-4 Upper (+)

9-4 Upper
(+)

4 Left

Brown

BrownWhite

8-4 Lower (-)

9-4 Lower
(-)

4 Right

Brown

White-Slate

8-5 Upper (+)

9-5 Upper
(+)

5 Left

Grey

Slate-White

8-5 Lower (-)

9-5 Lower
(-)

5 Right

Grey

Red-Blue

8-6 Upper (+)

9-6 Upper
(+)

6 Left

Blue

Blue-Red

8-6 Lower (-)

9-6 Lower
(-)

6 Right

Blue

Red-Orange

8-7 Upper (+)

9-7 Upper
(+)

7 Left

Orange

Orange-Red

8-7 Lower (-)

9-7 Lower
(-)

7 Right

Orange

Red-Green

8-8 Upper (+)

9-8 Upper
(+)

8 Left

Green

Green-Red

8-8 Lower (-)

9-8 Lower
(-)

8 Right

Green

Red-Brown

9-1 Upper (+)

10-1 Upper
(+)

9 Left

Brown

Brown-Red

9-1 Lower (-)

10-1 Lower
(-)

9 Right

Brown

Alarm

User 19
Alarm

User 20
Alarm

User 21
Alarm

User 22
Alarm

User 23
Alarm

Cable #2 (24-31)
User 24
Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-34

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25

block for indoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-18
Alarm
name
or
Cable
#

Alarm #

9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable color code for Z-IDC or

110ANA1-25 blocks (continued)
Wire Color

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions for
9218 Macro
2

Z-IDC
punchdown
block
positions
for 9228
Macro 2

110ANA1-25
OSP
terminal
block pair
for 9218
Macro only

110ANA125 OSP
terminal
block pair
color code
for 9218
Macro
only

User 25

Red-Slate

9-2 Upper (+)

10-2 Upper
(+)

10 Left

Grey

Slate-Red

9-2 Lower (-)

10-2 Lower
(-)

10 Right

Grey

Black-Blue

9-3 Upper (+)

10-3 Upper
(+)

11 Left

Blue

Blue-Black

9-3 Lower (-)

10-3 Lower
(-)

11 Right

Blue

BlackOrange

9-4 Upper (+)

10-4 Upper
(+)

12 Left

Orange

OrangeBlack

9-4 Lower (-)

10-4 Lower
(-)

12 Right

Orange

Black-Green

9-5 Upper (+)

10-5 Upper
(+)

13 Left

Green

Green-Black

9-5 Lower (-)

10-5 Lower
(-)

13 Right

Green

Black-Brown

9-6 Upper (+)

10-6 Upper
(+)

14 Left

Brown

Brown-Black

9-6 Lower (-)

10-6 Lower
(-)

14 Right

Brown

Black-Slate

9-7 Upper (+)

10-7 Upper
(+)

15 Left

Grey

Slate-Black

9-7 Lower (-)

10-7 Lower
(-)

15 Right

Grey

Yellow-Blue

9-8 Upper (+)

10-8 Upper
(+)

16 Left

Blue

Blue Yellow

9-8 Lower (-)

10-8 Lower
(-)

16 Right

Blue

Alarm

User 26
Alarm

User 27
Alarm

User 28
Alarm

User 29
Alarm

User 30
Alarm

User 31
Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25

block for indoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Notes:

1.

User alarms 0 through 6 are utilized for power alarms (punch downs not used with integrated power).
User alarms 7 through 31 utilized for external user alarms.

2.

For Cable #1 (7-15), Z-IDC position 10 is not used. For Cable #2 (16-23), Z-IDC positions 9 and 10 are
not used. For Cable #2 (24-31), Z-IDC positions 9 and 10 are not used.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-36

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218

Macro

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218

Macro
Before you begin

The user alarm cable(s) must have been previously connected to the Indoor 9218
Macro cabinet according to the instructions provided during installation of the base
station cabinet.
Important! In order for the power alarms 0-6 to be routed back to the 9218 Macro
primary cabinet (from the Equipment side of the NIU, via the 10 M (33 feet)
0-15 alarm cable), the power alarms from the customer-supplied power source, or
the GPS 2424 power frame, if applicable, must have been previously punched
down on the Network side of the NIU.
Punch down tables for user alarm cable connections at the NIU

Important! The columns Alarm # and Wire Color Code are used to determine
the correct punchdowns for each user alarm.
Important! The following cables are used for direct connections to the NIU, as
applicable.

Cable 0-15: Refer to User Alarm 0-6 cable pin assignments (for NIU
connection) (p. 6-38) for power alarms and User Alarm 7-15 cable pin
assignments (for NIU connection) (p. 6-39) for external user alarms 7-15
Cable 16-31: Refer to User Alarm 16-23 cable pin assignments (for NIU
connection) (p. 6-40) for external user alarms 16-23 and User Alarm 24-31
cable pin assignments (for NIU connection) (p. 6-41) for external user alarms
24-31.

Important! The columns Alarm # and Wire Color Code are used to determine
the correct punchdowns for each user alarm.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218

Macro

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User Alarm 0-6 cable pin assignments (for NIU connection)

The following table lists the cable pin assignments for the User Alarm 0-6 cable
connected between the indoor 9218 Macro cabinet and the NIU.
Table 6-19

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 0-6 cable pin assignments for NIU

Alarm cable and connector 1

Alarm #2

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin D-Sub connector

Alarm 0-15 cable

User Alarm 0

White-Blue

Blue-White

20

White-Orange

Orange-White

21

White-Green

Green-White

22

White-Brown

Brown-White

23

White-Slate

Slate-White

24

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

25

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

26

Power Alarms 0-6

User Alarm 1

User Alarm 2

User Alarm 3

User Alarm 4

User Alarm 5

User Alarm 6

Notes:

1.

This cable is not used if the power source is a 3GP24i power cabinet.

2.

In order for the power alarms 0-6 to be routed back to the 9218 Macro primary cabinet (from the
Equipment side of the NIU, via the 10 M (33 feet) 0-15 alarm cable), the power alarms from the
customer-supplied power source, or the GPS 2424 power frame, if applicable, must have been previously
punched down on the Network side of the NIU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-38

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218

Macro

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User Alarm 7-15 cable pin assignments (for NIU connection)

The following table lists the cable pin assignments for the User Alarm 7-15 cable
connected between the indoor 9218 Macro cabinet and the NIU.
Table 6-20

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 7-15 cable pin assignments for NIU

Alarm Cable and connector 1

Alarm #2

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin D-Sub connector

Alarm 0-15 cable

User 7

Red-Green

External User Alarms 7-15

Alarm

Green-Red

27

User 8

Red-Brown

Alarm

Brown-Red

28

User 9

Red-Slate

10

Alarm

Slate-Red

29

User 10

Black-Blue

11

Alarm

Blue-Black

30

User 11

Black-Orange

12

Alarm

Orange-Black

31

User 12

Black-Green

13

Alarm

Green-Black

32

User 13

Black-Brown

14

Alarm

Brown-Black

33

User 14

Black-Slate

15

Alarm

Slate-Black

34

User 15

Yellow-Blue

16

Alarm

Blue-Yellow

35

Notes:

1.

This cable is not used if the power source is a 3GP24i power cabinet

2.

External user alarms for sites with any power source except the 3GP24i power cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218

Macro

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User Alarm 16-23 cable pin assignments (for NIU connection)

The following table lists the cable pin assignments for the User Alarm 16-23 cable
connected between the indoor 9218 Macro cabinet and the NIU.
Table 6-21

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 16-23 cable pin assignments for NIU

Alarm Cable and connector

Alarm #

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin D-Sub connector

Alarm 16-31 cable

User 16

White-Blue

External User Alarms 16-23

Alarm

Blue-White

20

User 17

White-Orange

Alarm

Orange-White

21

User 18

White-Green

Alarm

Green-White

22

User 19

White-Brown

Alarm

Brown-White

23

User 20

White-Slate

Alarm

Slate-White

24

User 21

Red-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Red

25

User 22

Red-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Red

26

User 23

Red-Green

Alarm

Green-Red

27

(37-Pin D-Sub)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-40

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for indoor 9218

Macro

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User Alarm 24-31 cable pin assignments (for NIU connection)

The following table lists the cable pin assignments for the User Alarm 24-31 cable
connected between the indoor 9218 Macro cabinet and the NIU.
Table 6-22

Indoor 9218 Macro user alarm 24-31 cable pin assignments for NIU

Alarm Cable and connector

Alarm #

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin D-Sub connector

Alarm 16-31 cable

User 24

Red-Brown

External User Alarms 24-31

Alarm

Brown-Red

28

User 25

Red-Slate

10

Alarm

Slate-Red

29

User 26

Black-Blue

11

Alarm

Blue-Black

30

User 27

Black-Orange

12

Alarm

Orange-Black

31

User 28

Black-Green

13

Alarm

Green-Black

32

User 29

Black-Brown

14

Alarm

Brown-Black

33

User 30

Black-Slate

15

Alarm

Slate-Black

34

User 31

Yellow-Blue

16

Alarm

Blue Yellow

35

(37-Pin D-Sub)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

Purpose

This section describes outdoor 9218/9228 Macro user alarm cables.

User alarm cables are only connected for primary cabinets.
User alarm cables are twisted-pair cables that are connected on one side to the
Network Interface Unit (NIU) and on the other side to the outdoor 9218/9228 Macro.
The user alarm cables were first installed during site preparation.
User alarm requirements

Each generated user alarm is generated by a set of isolated dry relay contacts.
An alarm state may be indicated by a closed circuit or an open circuit.

If an alarm condition is indicated by a closed circuit, the alarm contacts must

present a contact closure when the alarm circuit fails or loses power.

If an alarm condition is indicated by an open circuit, the alarm contacts must

present an open circuit when the alarm circuit fails or loses power.

The resistance of a closed circuit must be less than 100 ohms. The resistance of an
open circuit must be greater than 1 megohms.
The user alarm switches (if desired) must be installed as part of site preparation. The
9218/9228 Macro cabinet is equipped with primary surge protection.
Number of user alarm cables

One user alarm cable is connected to the primary cabinet only. If more than 24 alarms
are required, two user alarm cables are used.
User alarm cable routing

User alarm cables are routed through the conduits that are already in place for the
primary cabinet and then are routed within the cabinets to the additional cabinet.
The following figure shows location of the external user alarm interface wiring for the
outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-42

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows location of the internal user alarm (0-15) cabling for the
outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows location of the internal user alarm (16-31) cabling for the
outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-44

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm cable connections (external

and power)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor cabinet user alarm cable connections (external and

power)
Purpose

This section describes outdoor 9218/9228 Macro user alarm cable connections (external
and power).
External user alarm cable pin assignments (for EFIM terminal blocks)

The following table lists the cable pin assignments for the external user alarm cable
connected between the outdoor 9218/9228 Macro primary cabinet and the EFIM
terminal blocks.
Table 6-23
Alarm #

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro external user alarm cable pin

assignments for EFIM terminal blocks
Wire Color

J Conn.

Terminal Block

Block color

Pair

code

Protector

USER ALARMS 0 THROUGH 6 UTILIZED FOR INTERNAL POWER ALARMS

User 0

J3

Alarm

+ 0 (Top)

Blue

J9A (0 / 1)

- 0 (Bottom)

User 1

J3

Alarm

+ 1 (Top)

Orange

- 1 (Bottom)

User 2

J3

Alarm

+ 2 (Top)

Green

J9A (2 / 3)

- 2 (Bottom)

User 3

J3

Alarm

+ 3 (Top)

Brown

- 3 (Bottom)

User 4

J3

Alarm

+ 4 (Top)

Blue

J9A (4 / 5)

- 4 (Bottom)

User 5

J3

Alarm

+ 5 (Top)

Orange

- 5 (Bottom)

User 6

J3

Alarm

+ 6 (Top)

Green

- 6 (Bottom)

J9A (6 / 7)
Shared

START EXTERNAL USER ALARM PUNCHDOWNS HERE

User 7

White-Blue

Alarm

Blue-White

J3

+ 7 (Top)
- 7 (Bottom)

Brown

J9A (6 / 7)
Shared

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-46

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm cable connections (external

and power)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-23
Alarm #

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro external user alarm cable pin

assignments for EFIM terminal blocks (continued)
Wire Color

User 8

White-Orange

Alarm

Orange-White

User 9

White-Green

Alarm

Green-White

User 10

White-Brown

Alarm

Brown-White

User 11

White-Slate

Alarm

Slate-White

User 12

Red-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Red

User 13

Red-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Red

User 14

Red-Green

Alarm

Green-Red

User 15

Red-Brown

Alarm

Brown-Red

User 16

Red-Slate

Alarm

Slate-Red

User 17

Black-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Black

User 18

Black-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Black

User 19

Black-Green

Alarm

Green-Black

User 20

Black-Brown

Alarm

Brown-Black

User 21

Black-Slate

Alarm

Slate-Black

User 22

Yellow-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Yellow

User 23

Yellow-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Yellow

J Conn.

J3

Terminal Block

Block color

Pair

code

+ 8 (Top)

Blue

Protector

J9B (8 / 9)

- 8 (Bottom)
J3

+ 9 (Top)

Orange

- 9 (Bottom)
J3

+ 10 (Top)

Green

J9B (10 / 11)

- 10 (Bottom)
J3

+ 11 (Top)

Brown

- 11 (Bottom)
J3

+ 12 (Top)

Blue

J9B (12 / 13)

- 12 (Bottom)
J3

+ 13 (Top)

Orange

- 13 (Bottom)
J3

+ 14 (Top)

Green

J9B (14 / 15)

- 14 (Bottom)
J3

+ 15 (Top)

Brown

- 15 (Bottom)
J4

+ 16 (Top)

Blue

J9C (16 / 17)

- 16 (Bottom)
J4

+ 17 (Top)

Orange

- 17 (Bottom)
J4

+ 18 (Top)

Green

J9C (18 / 19)

- 18 (Bottom)
J4

+ 19 (Top)

Brown

- 19 (Bottom)
J4

+ 20 (Top)

Blue

J9C (20 / 21)

- 20 (Bottom)
J4

+ 21 (Top)

Orange

- 21 (Bottom)
J4

+ 22 (Top)

Green

J9C (22 / 23)

- 22 (Bottom)
J4

+ 23 (Top)

Brown

- 23 (Bottom)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Outdoor cabinet user alarm cable connections (external

and power)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-23
Alarm #

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro external user alarm cable pin

assignments for EFIM terminal blocks (continued)
Wire Color

User 24

Yellow-Green

Alarm

Green-Yellow

User 25

Yellow-Brown

Alarm

Brown-Yellow

User 26

Yellow-Slate

Alarm

Slate-Yellow

User 27

Violet-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Violet

User 28

Violet-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Violet

User 29

Violet-Green

Alarm

Green-Violet

User 30

Violet-Brown

Alarm

Brown-Violet

User 31

White-Blue*

Alarm

Blue-White*

User 32

White-Orange*

Alarm

Orange-White*

User 33

White-Green*

Alarm

Green-White*

J Conn.

J4

Terminal Block

Block color

Pair

code

+ 24 (Top)

Blue

Protector

J9D(24 / 25)

- 24 (Bottom)
J4

+ 25 (Top)

Orange

- 25 (Bottom)
J4

+ 26 (Top)

Green

J9D (26 / 27)

- 26 (Bottom)
J4

+ 27 (Top)

Brown

- 27 (Bottom)
J4

+ 28 (Top)

Blue

J9D(28 / 29)

- 28 (Bottom)
J4

+ 29 (Top)

Orange

- 29 (Bottom)
J4

+ 30 (Top)

Green

J9D (30 / 31)

- 30 (Bottom)
J4

+ 31 (Top)

Brown

- 31 (Bottom)
J4

+ 32 (Top)

Blue

J9D (32 / 33)

- 32 (Bottom)
J4

+ 33 (Top)

Orange

- 33 (Bottom)

Notes:

1.

* A second cable is required

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-48

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarms
Overview

This topic discusses the power alarms for the 9218/9228 Macro cabinets.
The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms.

The following figure shows the location of the Power Alarms for the 9228 Macro with
integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-49
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of the Power Alarms for the Dual-Band 9228
Macro with integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-50

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Number of alarm cables

One or two alarm cables are connected to the primary cabinet. If more than 24 alarms
are required, two user alarm cables are used.
Alarms and Status

The power module provides alarms and indicators. The primary power controller
collects alarms from the internal and external battery cabinets as well as growth
cabinet rectifiers. Alarms are reported to the user interface panel in the form of relay
contact closures. Alternative implementations may utilize solid-state relays or
opto-coupled devices to provide isolation from the controller circuitry and achieve the
equivalent contact closure. The - designation of each alarm is referenced to the

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-51
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

system ground. The relay or solid-state devices have an open circuit voltage rating of
30 VDC. A total of six alarms are reported. The alarm interface and general description
is in the table below.
Table 6-24

9218/9228 Macro defined power alarms

Alarm Name

ID

Relay

Name

DsubM

Description

1 Pin

Urgent Power
(Power
Major)

PMJ

Form B

PowMaj+
Pow Maj-

8, 24

Issued by power controller when

any condition occurs that
impacts the capabilities of the
users equipment, thereby
requiring immediate attention.

Non-Urgent
Power (Power
Minor)

PMN

Form B

PowMin+
PowMin-

9, 28

Issued by power controller when

any condition occurs that would
require service but does not
immediately impact the users
equipment. Also generated by a
contact closure between BAT
FAN ALM RTN and BAT FAN
ALM NC indicating that a fan in
the internal or external battery
compartment is not operational.

Mains Failure
(AC Fail)

ACF

Form B

AcFail+
AcFail-

10, 29

Issued by the power controller

when it recognizes that AC input
power to any of the rectifiers
has been disrupted.

Urgent Fuse

FA

Form B

FuseAlm+
FuseAlm-

11, 30

Issued by the controller if a

battery protection fuse (either in
the primary, growth, or battery
cabinets) opens. Generated by
contact closure between ALM+
and ALM- signals.

Battery
Discharge

BD

Form B

BattDis+
BattDis-

12, 31

Issued by the power controller

when the system output voltage
drops below 25.0 VDC (user
adjustable from between 23 to
26.5 VDC).

Battery
Discharge 2

BD2

Form B

BattDis2+
BattDis2-

13, 32

Issued by the power controller

when the Battery output voltage
drops below 22.0 VDC (may be
user adjustable)

Notes:

1.

Relays are energized open and close on alarm.

2.

Refer to Alarm Reference for alarm conditions.

The following table lists the system conditions for each alarm. Reference is made to
rectifier specifications for alarm indication definition. Each alarm is supported by
close on alarm type floating contacts.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-52

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-25
Condition

9218/9228 Macro defined rectifier alarms

Caused By

Normal Operation

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Failed Controller

No power

BD/Low Volt Alarm

Output < 25V

High Volt Alarm

Output >
29.0V

BD2

Output < 22V

Battery Disconnect

Loss of AC
Input on one
Rectifier

AC Failure

Loss of AC
Input on two
or more
Rectifiers

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating
fuse tripped
with load
applied
Battery or
LVBD open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery
Fuse

Battery Failure

Output < 23.0

V during test

Rectifier Alarm

Malfunction
on one
Rectifier

Rectifier Current
Share

Current Share
failure or
Rectifier Fuse
Open

Rectifier Failure

Malfunction
on more than
one Rectifier

Communication
Failure

0
Module Loss
of
Communication

Low Temperature
Alarm

Temperature <
-30 oC

High Temperature
Alarm

Temperature >
75 oC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-53
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-25
Condition

9218/9228 Macro defined rectifier alarms (continued)

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Temperature Probe
Failure

No probe
connected

Fan Alarm

Internal/External 0
Battery Fan
Failure

Failed Controller

No

BD2

Output L22V

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating
Fuse Tripped
with Load
Applied
Battery or
LVBM Open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery
Fuse

An RS-232 computer interface connector is available on the controller for the user to
access the controller alarm conditions and program some of its functions. The alarms
reported on this interface could be limited to rectifier related functions.
Rectifier Controller Alarms

The List 1 and List 2 Power Controllers are equipped with seven LEDs. The LEDs are
viewable through the front panel and defined as shown in the following table.
Table 6-26

9218/9228 Macro defined rectifier controller alarm LEDs

Function

Color

Label

Description

Major Power Alarm

Red

PJM

Shall light when a major

alarm is detected

Minor Power Alarm

Yellow

RMN

Shall light when a minor

alarm is detected

AC Mains Failure Alarm

Red

ACF

Shall light when AC mains

failure is detected

Battery Discharge

Red

BD

Shall light when batteries

are discharging

Temp Fault

Red

TEMP

Shall light when

temperature related fault
detected

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-54

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-26

9218/9228 Macro defined rectifier controller alarm LEDs

(continued)

Function

Color

Label

Description

Fuse Fault

Red

FUSE

Shall light when battery

fuse opened or LVBD
contactor failed

Power On

Green

PWR

Shall light when input

power is applied to the
controller

Power alarm connections for the outdoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet

User/Power alarms (in primary frame only) are collected through the Enhanced
Facilities Interface Module (EFIM). They are routed to the EFIM that, for outdoor
applications, is sent to a punchdown block that contains lightning protection. A cable
from the secondary EFIM output sends the alarms to the CTU that formats and sends
them to the peripheral bus to the URC, which is then sent over the T1/E1 lines.
For the 9218 Macro with integrated power, the power alarms are generated internal to
the cabinet and then routed over the primary EFIM user alarms test connector.
The following table describes the power alarm cable pin assignments for the outdoor
9228 Macro primary cabinet.
Table 6-27
Alarm

Wire Color 1

User
Alarm 0

White-Blue

User
Alarm 1

White-Orange

User
Alarm 2

White-Slate

User
Alarm 3

Red-Blue

User
Alarm 4

White-Green

Outdoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet power alarm cable pin

assignments
EFIM J

Terminal Block

Block Color

Connector

Pair

Code

J3

+ 0 (Top)

Blue

Blue-White
J3

Orange-White
J3

Power Major (PMJ)

+ 1 (Top)

Orange

Power Minor (PMN)

+ 2 (Top)

Green

J9A (2 / 3)

AC Fail (ACF)

- 2 (Bottom)
J3

Blue-Red

Brown-White

J9A (0 / 1)

- 1 (Bottom)

Slate-White

White-Brown

Function

- 0 (Bottom)

+ 3 (Top)

Brown

Power Cabinet
Intrusion (INTR)

- 3 (Bottom)
J3

Green-White
User
Alarm 5

Protector

+ 4 (Top)

Blue

- 4 (Bottom)
J3

+ 5 (Top)

Orange

J9A (4 / 5)

Batteries on
Discharge, First Stage
(BD) 3
Fuse Alarm (FA)3

- 5 (Bottom)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-55
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-27
Alarm

Outdoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet power alarm cable pin

assignments (continued)

Wire Color 1

User
Alarm 6

EFIM J

Terminal Block

Block Color

Connector

Pair

Code

J3

+ 6 (Top)

Green

Protector

Function

J9A (6 /7)

Batteries on
Discharge, Second
Stage (BD-2)

- 6 (Bottom)

Notes:

1.

Shown is the wire color code of the recommended cable. The customers wire color code may differ.

2.

User (power) alarm 6 shares the protector P9A (6 / 7) with user (external) alarm 7.

3.

Optional alarm

Power alarm cable for the indoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet

External and power alarms are punched down on external 110 blocks. The cables from
the 110 blocks terminate on 37 pin D-Sub connectors that plug into the top of the 9228
Macro, 9228 Macro IN, and 9228 Macro LP.
The following table describes the power alarm cable pin assignments for the indoor
9228 Macro primary cabinet.
Table 6-28
External alarms

Indoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet power alarm cable pin

assignments

Wire Color 1

D-sub Pin #

110 Block Color Code

Function

Power Major
(PMJ) (User
Alarm 0)

White-Blue

Blue

Power Major (PMJ)

Blue-White

20

Power Minor
(PMN) (User
Alarm 1)

White-Orange

Orange

Power Minor (PMN)

Orange-White

21

AC Fail (ACF)
(User Alarm 2)

White-Slate

Green

AC Fail (ACF)

Slate-White

22

Intrusion (INTR)
(User Alarm 3)

Red-Blue

Brown

Blue-Red

23

Power Cabinet
Intrusion (INTR)

Batteries on
Discharge Alarm
First Stage (BD)
(User Alarm 4)

White-Green

Blue

Green-White

24)

Batteries on
Discharge, First
Stage (BD) 3

White-Brown

Orange

Fuse Alarm (FA)3

Brown-White

25

0-15 D-Sub
Connector

Fuse Alarm (FA)

(User Alarm 5)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-56

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-28
External alarms

Indoor 9228 Macro primary cabinet power alarm cable pin

assignments (continued)

Wire Color 1

D-sub Pin #

110 Block Color Code

Function

Green

Batteries on
Discharge, Second
Stage (BD-2)

0-15 D-Sub
Connector

Batteries on
Discharge Alarm
Second Stage
(BD-2) (User
Alarm 6)

26

Notes:

1.

Shown is the wire color code of the recommended cable. The customers wire color code may differ.

2.

User (power) alarm 6 shares the protector P9A (6 / 7) with user (external) alarm 7.

3.

Optional alarm

Power alarm cable for the outdoor 9228 Macro dual-band cabinet with integrated power

The power alarm cable for the outdoor 9228 Macro dual-band cabinet with integrated
power is connected to the EFIM punchdowns in the primary cabinet.
The following table describes the power alarm cable pin assignments for the outdoor
9228 Macro dual-band cabinet with integrated power.
Table 6-29

Outdoor 9228 Macro dual-band cabinet with integrated power for

power alarm cable pin assignments

Alarm

Terminal
Block Pair
(J3)

Wire Color

Function

User Alarm 0

0+

Blue-White

Power Major (PMJ)

0-

White-Blue

1+

Orange-White

1-

White-Orange

2+

Green-White

2-

White-Green

3+

Not applicable

3-

Not applicable

4+

Brown-White

4-

White-Brown

User Alarm 1

User Alarm 2

User Alarm 3

User Alarm 4

Power Minor (PMN)

AC Fail (ACF)

Not Used

Batteries on Discharge (BD)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-57
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

Frame alarms indicate the failure of Power Converter Units (PCUs) and provide an
indication of intrusion.
Frame alarms for 9218/9228 Macro

The following table lists the frame alarms for the 9218/9228 Macro.
Table 6-30

9218/9228 Macro frame alarms

Frame Alarm
Number

Alarm Name

Reserved

PCU

Equipment indicated

All 3 PCUs tied together

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

Not used in High Density 4.0

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

8*

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

9*

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

10*

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

11*

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

12*

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

13*

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

14

Not used in 9218 Macro HD

15

Digital Fan

16

Reserved

17

Reserved

Digital fan tray

Frame alarms for 9228 Macro only

The following table lists the frame alarms for the 9228 Macro only.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-58

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-31

9228 Macro only frame alarms

Frame Alarm
Number

Alarm Name

Equipment indicated

Digital Shelf fan failure

Fan

Undesignated frame alarm

Undesignated frame alarm

Amplifier Shelf 1 fan failure

Fan

Undesignated frame alarm

Undesignated frame alarm

Amplifier Shelf 2 fan failure

Fan

Undesigned frame alarm

Undesignated frame alarm

Cabinet intrusion alarm

Frame

Heat management system overtemp

HMS

Primary frame heat management system fan

failure

HMS

10

Primary frame heat management system

heater alarm

HMS

11

Heat management system undertemp

HMS

12

Heat management system controller fail

HMS

13

Heat management system compressor fail

HMS

14

Undesignated alarms

Undesignated alarms

15

Undesignated alarms

Undesignated alarms

16

Undesignated alarms

Undesignated alarms

17

Undesignated alarms

Undesignated alarms

N/A

Thermal switch control

Thermal switch control

18-24

Reserved for future use

Reserved for future use

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-59
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

9218 Macro PowCom software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9218 Macro PowCom software

Overview

Access to the power system via the RS-232 port requires PowCom software which is
available through the Alcatel-Lucent OLCS. If PowCom is required, order it with the
following: PowCom Software for Flexent Modular Cell Products--PowCom Software
and User Documentation, 300630241. This software has extensive capabilities beyond
the requirements of the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA products. Therefore, not all of the
features are utilized in this application.
In addition, the alarm relay assignments and system setting have been optimized to
work with the Mobility Solutions products.
For example, the following figure shows the main display and the alarm relay
assignments for the 9218 Macro applications.

The following figure shows the system parameters setting page. The factory default
settings for the 9218 Macro are displayed. These settings are optimized for
Alcatel-Lucent use and may not match what is depicted in the PowCom Software user
document provided with the software.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-60

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

9218 Macro PowCom software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! These settings must not be changed without the approval of

Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-61
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Procedure 6-1: Alarm testing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 6-1: Alarm testing

Overview

Alarm testing is used to verify that alarms are being reported to the switch. Alarm
scanning detects and reports alarm messages to the switch. When installed, the use of
the Selectable Cell Site Messaging (SCSM) feature allows technicians to reroute
messages related to a specific cell to its terminal.
Procedure summary

The following actions must be performed in preparation for the test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Determine if SCSM is available.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Clear registers and report alarms that are currently invoked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Produce a list of cells in which the SCSM feature is routing messages to a specific
terminal.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion and user alarm test

The following actions must be performed for the intrusion and user alarm test:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unlatch the door latches and open the base station door.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close and securely latch the base station door. Clear intrusion alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove ground from user alarm 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Test the remaining user alarms.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-62

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Procedure 6-1: Alarm testing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preparation for the test

The test requires preparation before it can be conducted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Determine if SCSM is available.

alw:cell a,scsm <CR>

a = RCS 1- max. cells

Important! The SCSM feature will be active after this command is entered, and it
supports at the RCS level. This means the command will activate the SCSM feature
for all base stations under the same RCS.
Result OK (Feature is available and activated for the specified base station.)

or
FEATURE NOT ACTIVE (SCSM is not activated in feature activation file.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Clear registers and report alarms that are currently invoked.

init:cell a:spp as <CR>

Important! An alarm will report only when its state (OFF NORMAL or
NORMAL) changes.
Result OK (When no alarms are present)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Produce a list of cells in which the SCSM feature is routing messages to a specific
terminal.
op:cell,scsm <CR>

Important! If ROP messages are not being routed to the terminal on which they
were allowed, reenter the alw:cell a, scsm command.
Result List of cells
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Intrusion and user alarm test

To test the intrusion alarms and user alarms in the base station perform the following
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unlatch the door latches and open the base station door.
Intrusion alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
6-63
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, and 9228 Macro

LP alarm information

Procedure 6-1: Alarm testing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: REPT:CELL a ALARM SCANNING SCAN POINT:ALARM GROUP 3, ALARM

ID 6 ALARM:CELL DOOR OPEN STATE: OFF NORMAL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close and securely latch the base station door.

Clear intrusion alarm
Result: REPT:CELL a ALARM SCANNING SCAN POINT:ALARM GROUP 3, ALARM
ID 6 ALARM:CELL DOOR OPEN STATE: NORMAL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set dip switch 1 to the ON position.

Ground Pin User Alarm 1
Result: REPT:CELL a ALARM SCANNING SCAN POINT:ALARM GROUP 2, ALARM
ID 1 ALARM:USER ALARM 1 STATE: OFF NORMAL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set dip switch 1 back to the OFF position.

Remove ground from User Alarm 1.
Result: REPT:CELL a ALARM SCANNING SCAN POINT:ALARM GROUP 2, ALARM
ID 1 ALARM:USER ALARM 1 STATE: NORMAL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Test the remaining user alarms.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 for user alarms 2 - 6.
Result: REPT:CELL a ALARM SCANNING SCAN POINT:ALARM GROUP 2, ALARM
ID (2- 6) ALARM:USER ALARM (2 6) STATE: NORMAL
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

6-64

7216/9226 Compact, 9216

9
Compact LX, and 9216
Compact Distributed alarm
information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the 9216/9226 Compact, 9216
Compact LX, and 9216 Compact Distributed cabinets.
Contents
Alarm collection

7-2

CPC alarms

7-4

CTU and OM alarms

7-5

URC alarms

7-6

CMU alarms

7-7

IOU alarms

7-8

Intrusion alarm

7-9

UCR alarms

7-10

TxAMP alarms

7-11

TDU alarms

7-16

Fan tray alarms

7-17

User alarms

7-18

Power alarms

7-39

Frame alarms

7-49

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
Alarm collection

The following figure shows the alarm collection in the 9216/9226 Compact.
Alarm reporting

Important! IOU is being used as a general term in the following text. Wherever
IOU is mentioned, please note that in the 9216/9226 Compact there can be three
different types of IOUs: HIOU, EHIOU, or CIOU.
Most alarms are collected by the I2C with exceptions noted in the descriptions.

The CPC alarms connect directly to the URC via the I2C bus through the IOU and
the backplane.
The Input/Output Unit serves as a physical alarm collection point, as well as a
supplier of digital output signals. Since it is an alarm collection point, the IOU
proxy performs alarm monitoring.
The I2C serial bus is used to interconnect the URC(s), CPCs, TxAMPs and the IOU
for purposes of alarm collection, inventory control and other potential (future)
control/status reporting functions.
LNA over current and DC-DC Converter alarms are reported via a discrete cable to
the TDU. The TDU passes the alarms by the I2C bus, through the FAC/FAC-D and
IOU to the URC(s). The TDU sets the appropriate bit(s) on its 16-bit I2C port
expander(s) to indicate the alarm condition, where they are reported to the URC.
The following devices report their alarms to the URC via the I2C bus with the
name of the alarm indicating the type of failure reported.

Digital Shelf Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 1 Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 2 Fan Failure

Cabinet Intrusion Alarm

Heat Management System Overtemp

Primary frame heat management system fan alarm

Primary frame heat management system heat alarm

Heat Management System Undertemp

Heat Management System Controller Fail

Heat Management System Compressor Fail.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-2

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm reporting summary

System alarm reporting is summarized in the following table for the 9216/9226
Compact.
Table 7-1

9216/9226 Compact system alarm reporting

Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

RF

TxAMP (2CPAM,
60WCPAM)

I 2C

TDU

ARCNET

LNA

Discrete connection to the TDU then to

the IOU and URC via I2C in backplane

UCR

ARCNET

URC

Directly to RCS over facilities interface

CMU

IEEE-1394

CTU

ARCNET

OMR, OMQ

Parallel bus to CTU and then to URC(s)

via ARCNET

CPC

I 2C

Amplifier Shelf Fans

Cabled Frame alarm connection to IOU

and to URC via I2C; logically OR of
each of all fans in tray

Digital Shelf Fans

Cabled Frame alarm connection to IOU

and to URC via I2C; logically OR of
each of all fans in tray

Heat Management System

Cabled Frame alarm connection to IOU

and to URC via I2C

External Power Cabinet

Collected via user alarm interface

Digital

Other

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

CPC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CPC alarms
CPC alarms

The frame alarm listed below is generated for the CPC.

Table 7-2

9216/9226 Compact CPC alarms

Alarm

Condition

CPC Failure

Reported back to RCS

CPC LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on each CPC.

Table 7-3
Label/color
FAIL-RED
RDY-GRN
(binary)

9216/9226 Compact CPC LED

Condition
Failure
Ready

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-4

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

CTU and OM alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

CTU hardware errors

The CTU generates hardware errors on the peripheral bus due to these conditions:

GPS satellites cannot be traced

Satellite lock has been lost and flywheeling is in process

GPS receiver failure.

CTU LEDs

The LED indicators listed below are available for each CTU.
Table 7-4

9216/9226 Compact CTU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

CTU failure

NVM (yellow)

Context-sensitive event in progress (for example, NVM download)

RDY (green)

CTU enabled for generating clock signals, and the OM and GPS
are functional

OM FAIL (red)

OM failure

FLY EX (red)

CTU has exceeded the maximum flywheel time

LOCK GPS
(green)

GPS unit is locked to the GPS satellite signal

OM LEDs

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the OM.

Table 7-5

9216/9226 Compact OM LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

RDY (green)

Ready, indicates that at least one of the six analog

clock outputs is active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

URC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

URC alarms
URC LEDs

The URC provides the following LEDs to indicate status and alarms conditions:The
following table describes the LEDs on the URC in the 9216/9226 Compact, 9216
Compact LX, and 9216 Compact Distributed.
Table 7-6

9216/9226 Compact URC LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Board failure

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

URC operational

L1 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L2 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L3 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L4 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-6

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

CMU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CMU alarms
CMU LEDs

The three LED indicators listed below are available for the CMU.
Table 7-7

9216/9226 Compact CMU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

The CMU has failed diagnostics, one or

more CEs have failed to initialize, or
another component has failed to initialize

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

The CCU is functioning properly and at

least one CE is enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

IOU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IOU alarms
IOU LED

One LED indicator listed below is available for the IOU.

Table 7-8

9216/9226 Compact IOU LED

Label/color

Condition

PWR ON (green)

Power is on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-8

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Intrusion alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarm
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

UCR alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCR alarms
UCR LEDs

The LEDs for the UCRs indicate these conditions.

Table 7-9

9216/9226 Compact UCR LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

FLT (yellow)

Fault (does not light up with NVM

download)

RDY (green)

Ready

Tx ON (green)

Transmit on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-10

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP alarms
Overview

Amplifier (AMP) alarms indicate failures in the receive or transmit amplifiers.

The TxAMP alarms indicate a failure condition in the transmit amplifier that impacts
call transmission capability.
Over-temperature alarm

The over-temperature alarm is indicated when the amplifier baseplate exceeds a

threshold temperature. The TxAMP includes an internal thermal overload shutdown
circuit to prevent destruction due to lack of airflow from fan failure. Under this
condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged. This may be accomplished
by reducing the bias and switching off the input power. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating temperature, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance.
The alarm light flashes at a 1-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
RF overdrive alarm

The Overdrive alarm is triggered when the input power level exceeds +7.0 dBm 0.75
dB. The amplifier shall not be damaged by an input signal, which is up to a level of
+14 dBm (the continuous Non-damaging Input Power level). This condition can last
indefinitely. Under this condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged.
This may be accomplished by attenuating the input signal. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating input level, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance. The TxAMP amplifier generates an
overdrive alarm during this condition. The amplifier automatically recovers to the
normal mode when the input overdrive condition ceases to exist for at least a period of
4 seconds.
The alarm light flashes at a 1/2-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
Amplifier failure alarm

The Amplifier Failure alarm is triggered when internal monitor circuits within the
TxAMP detect that the drain current is out of operating range or the output power level
is too low. Alarm hysteresis is such that power glitches will not cause false alarms.
The LAM has two LEDs located on the front plate: one green and one red. The green
LED is illuminated when the LAM is powered on and no alarms are detected. The red
LED is illuminated when any LAM alarm is activated. A flashing RED LED indicates
a transient failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP LEDs

The LEDs for the TxAMPs indicate these conditions.

Table 7-10

9216/9226 Compact TxAMP LEDs

Label/color

Condition

ALM (red)

Alarm flashes at different rate depending on

fault

ACT (green)

Active

Shelf alarms

The following table describes the shelf alarms on the 9216/9226 Compact.
Table 7-11
Alarm Name

9216/9226 Compact shelf alarms

Definition

SDP/OMC-RAN

Autonomous Subrack

GUI/TI/Alarm

Error Auto-Recovery

System Response

Level Sub-rack
LED Indication

TxAMP
Loss of
Shelf Loss
Communications
of
between IM
Communication Controller and base
station

1.OOS Yellow
(solid)

TxAMP
Shelf
Critical
Hardware
Failure

Critical sub-rack
Red (Solid)

TxAMP
Shelf Minor
Hardware
Fail

1. Combiner Power
Failure of the Active
Tx path and/or
Combiner or

2.INDT Yellow
(solid)

1. RESET IM
Processor after
time-out.

1. Initialization Case: RCS tries to

restore Shelf with TxAMP being off
at this time.

2. Attempt to reset IM
Processor but leave
TxAMPs in last state
(on)

2. During normal Operation Case:

(have loss of heart beat); RCS
reports Shelf and TxAMPs as
indeterminate. If communications
comeback RCS HEH Audit for
TxAMP status.

No Recovery

1. RCS RMV Sub-rack and TxAMP.

Blocks call processing on the
associated path
2. SDP, OMC-RAN GUI, TI, ROP
status

2. Input Pre-amp both

paths fail

Input Pre-AMP single

path fails

3. Manual RST to place back into

service
Minor Red
(Flashing)

No Recovery

SDP, OMC-RAN GUI, TI, ROP

displays status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-12

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-11
Alarm Name

9216/9226 Compact shelf alarms (continued)

Definition

SDP/OMC-RAN

Autonomous Subrack

GUI/TI/Alarm

Error Auto-Recovery

System Response

Level Sub-rack
LED Indication

TxAMP
Shelf RF
Fail

Multiple - when last

equipped ? in the
shelf fails an alarm is
raised

Critical Sup-rack
Red (solid)

No Recovery

When last TxAMP in the sub-rack

has a Critical or Major Alarm, RCS
will block CP
Shelf remains active in alarm state
SDP, OMC-RAN GUI, TI, ROP
displays status
If TxAMP is restored or alarm
clears CP unblocked

TxAMP
Shelf
Antenna
VSWR Fail
(For
Continuous
Monitoring)

Filter Panl VSWR

reading exceeds
threshold

Major Red (solid)

TxAMP
Shelf Fan
Failure

One or both Fan

Units fail

Minor Red
(flashing)

No Recovery

SDP, OMC-RAN GUI, TI, ROP

displays status

TxAMP
shelf High
Temperature

Shelf Temperature
Sensor exceeds
acceptable limit

Minor Red
(flashing)

No Recovery

SDP, OMC-RAN GUI, TI, ROP

displays status

No Recovery

SDP, OMC-RAN GUI, TI displays

status
ROP output VSWR measurement
report

TxAMP alarms

The following table describes the TxAMP alarms on the 9216/9226 Compact.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-12
TxAMP Alarm Name

TxAMP Critical
circuit Failure

9216/9226 Compact TxAMP alarms

Definition

Critical Circuit Failure

that disables RF
Output

Alarm Level/TxAMP

TxAMP Autonomous

LED Indication

Error Auto-Recovery

Critical (Red)

1. No Recovery
2. No Recovery

Possible Error
Conditions:
1. Output Overpower
Disables radio
immediately if power
is > +2 dB over rated
RF Power.

System Response

1. RCS will RMV

Amplifier

3. Auto-recovery when
loop converges. radio
tries to auto recovery
ten times before shut
down. No
auto-recovery after
shut down.

2. SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP shows
as OOS

Auto-recovery once
voltage is within
range. Shuts down if
voltage does not
recover then alarm is
triggered

1. RCS will RMV

Amp

3. Manual RST to
place back into
service

2. Automatic Power
Control Circuitry
Failure
APC is enabled when
output power > 52.67
dBm
3. Loop fail
(Linearization Alarm)
Disables radio if Loop
convergence fails
TxAMP Internal
Voltage Out of Range

Alarm when internal

voltages goes out of
range

Critical (Red)

No auto-recovery after
shutdown
TxAMP High
Reverse Power

TxAMP shuts down if

Reverse Power is
detected at 49 dBm for
a duration of 1 minute

LED flashes Red for

1 minute. If condition
remains an alarm is
triggered Critical
(Red)

Validation period for 1

minute then amplifier
shuts down. No
auto-recovery after
shutdown

2. SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP shows
as OOS
3. Manual RST to
place back into
service
1. RCS will RMV
amp
2. SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP shows
as OOS
3. Manual RST to
place back into
service

TxAMP Input
Overdrive

rF drive is > -5 dBm

Major (Red)

Clamps power until

input decreases to
-11.2 dBm

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

TxAMP High
Temperature

TxAMP sends a
message to sub-rack
indicating High Temp
condition

Minor (Red Flashing)

Warning goes away

when temp decreases
to +83C. Warning
until Temp increases
past +85C then goes
over temp

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-14

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-12
TxAMP Alarm Name

9216/9226 Compact TxAMP alarms (continued)

Definition

Alarm Level/TxAMP

TxAMP Autonomous

LED Indication

Error Auto-Recovery

System Response

TxAMP Over
Temperature

TxAMP shuts down if

temp sensor threshold
is exceeded

Major (Red)

Shut down until temp

decreases to +85C

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

TxAMP Loss of
Communication

Loss of
communications
between Sub-rack IM
controller and TxAMP

Major (Yellow)

Auto-recovery.
TxAMPs left in last
state

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP report
indeterminate state
for TxAMPs

TxAMP DC Input
Power Fail

Exceeds maximum
voltage. Disables radio
immediately if DC
support voltage > 30.5
VDC.

Major (Red)

Auto-recovery when
supply volage drops to
< +29.5 VDC

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

Auto-recovery when
supply voltage
increases to > +22.4
VDC

or
Below minimum
voltage. Disables radio
immediately if DC
supply voltage < +20.5
VDC
TxAMP RF Degraded

RF power on but
degraded

Minor (Red Flashing)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

TxAMP Warm-up

TxAMP in warm-up.
Waits up to 15 minutes

Minor (Red Flashing)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

TxAMP Warm-up
Fail

TxAMP fails to
warm-up

Major (Red)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

TxAMP Switch Off

TxAMP Face Plate

Switch is set to off

Major (Red)

None

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP reports
status

RxAMP alarms

The following table describes the RxAMP alarms on the 9216/9226 Compact.
Table 7-13

9216/9226 Compact RxAMP alarms

Alarm Name

Definition

Alarm Level/LED

Auto-Recovery

System Response

RxAMP Fail (LNA)

RxAMP Hardware
Failure

Major (Red)

No Recovery

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
displays status

TTLNA Fail

TTLNA is operating
outside DC current
limit

Major (Red)

Change to bypass
mode

SDP, OMC-RAN
GUI, TI, ROP
displays status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

TDU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TDU alarms
TDU LED

A bi-color LED indicator listed below is available on the TDU.

Table 7-14

9216/9226 Compact TDU LED

Label/color

Condition

red

Failure

green

Ready

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-16

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

Fan tray LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the fan trays.

Table 7-15

9216/9226 Compact fan tray LED

Label/color

Condition

GREEN

Normal

RED

Fault

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
The IOU (which can be one of the following: HIOU, EHIOU, or CIOU) does not
provide any alarms of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame alarms and user
alarms to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
Each Compact cabinet uses up to 24 user alarms.
The following figure shows the location of the user alarms for the Indoor 9216
Compact primary frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-18

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of the user alarms for the Indoor 9216
Compact primary frame, without integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of the User Alarms 0-7 for the Outdoor 9216
Compact primary frame, without integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-20

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of the User Alarms 16-19 for the Outdoor
9216 Compact primary frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of the User Alarms 20-29 for the Outdoor
9216 Compact primary frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-22

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms cable list

The following table shows the cable information for the standard 9216/9226 Compact
cabinet configuration.
Table 7-16

9216/9226 Compact alarms cable list

Cable and connector

Connector type for cabinet

end of cable

Cable type

Power alarms 0-7

37-pin D-sub, male

16 twisted pairs

External user alarms

16-29 and User Relays
2-3

37-pin D-sub, male

16 twisted pairs

Notes:

1.

No user or power alarm cables are connected to the dual-band cabinet.

User alarms for standard 9216/9226 Compact cabinet

The standard 9216/9226 Compact cabinet is equipped with ports J3 and J4 (37-pin
connector each). J3 port is reserved for Power alarms 0 through 7; J4 port is reserved
for 2 relays and 14 user alarms.
Refer to the following table for wire color-coding and punchdown information for user
alarms between the standard radio cabinet and the Z-IDC punchdown block.
Table 7-17
Alarm Number

9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable at Z-IDC block

Wire Color

Z-IDC Punchdown block positions

2,3

First 10 positions of Z-IDC assigned to relays and user alarms

User

Black/Slate

4-1 Upper (+)

Relay 2

Slate/Black

4-1 Lower (-)

User

Yellow/Blue

4-2 Upper (+)

Relay 3

Blue/Yellow

4-2 Lower (-)

User Alarm 16

White/Blue

4-3 Upper (+)

Blue/White

4-3 Lower (-)

White/Orange

4-4 Upper (+)

Orange/White

4-4 Lower (-)

White/Green

4-5 Upper (+)

Green/White

4-5 Lower (-)

User Alarm 17

User Alarm 18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-24

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-17
Alarm Number
User Alarm 19

User Alarm 20

User Alarm 21

User Alarm 22

User Alarm 23

9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable at Z-IDC block (continued)

Wire Color

Z-IDC Punchdown block positions

White/Brown

4-6 Upper (+)

Brown/White

4-6 Lower (-)

White/Slate

4-7 Upper (+)

Slate/White

4-7 Lower (-)

Red/Blue

4-8 Upper (+)

Blue/Red

4-8 Lower (-)

Red/Orange

4-9 Upper (+)

Orange/Red

4-9 Lower (-)

Red/Green

4-10 Upper (+)

Green/Red

4-10 Lower (-)

2,3

Second 10 positions of Z-IDC assigned to relays and user alarms

User Alarm 24

User Alarm 25

User Alarm 26

User Alarm 27

User Alarm 28

User Alarm 29

Red/Brown

5-1 Upper (+)

Brown/Red

5-1 Lower (-)

Red/Slate

5-2 Upper (+)

Slate/Red

5-2 Lower (-)

Black/Blue

5-3 Upper (+)

Blue/Black

5-3 Lower (-)

Black/Orange

5-4 Upper (+)

Orange/Black

5-4 Lower (-)

Black/Green

5-5 Upper (+)

Green/Black

5-5 Lower (-)

Black/Brown

5-6 Upper (+)

Brown/Black

5-6 Lower (-)

Notes:

1.

User alarms 0 through 7 utilized for power alarms.

2.

5-2 Upper = Fifth user alarm Z-IDC, position #2 upper 5-1 Lower = Fifth user alarm T1/E1 Z-IDC,
position #1 lower (+) Alarm/Relay (-) Return

3.

Z-IDC positions 7 to 10 are not used.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9216 Compact Distributed cabinet user alarms

The 9216 Compact Distributed cabinet is equipped with 2 ports, J3 and J4 (37-pin
connector each). J3 port is reserved for Power alarms and can accept up to 5 power
alarms (0 through 4), J4 port has capacity for 4 alarms (16 through 19) which could be
used as user alarm or can be shared as 2 for additional power alarms and 2 user alarms
as requested by customer. During the installation, J3 and J4 ports are connected to the
Z-IDC punchdown block at NIU using 2 Alcatel-Lucent provided user alarm cable (16
twisted pair with 37-pin D-sub at one end).
Refer to the following table for wire color-coding and punchdown information for user
alarms between the BU radio cabinet and the Z-IDC punchdown block.
Table 7-18

9216 Compact Distributed user alarm cable at Z-IDC block

Terminal
block

Alarm Number

Wire Color

Punchdown position
(Z-IDC
block and position)1

Third
Z-IDC

Power alarm #0

White/Blue

3-1 Upper (+)

(power major)

Blue/White

3-1 Lower (-)

Power alarm #1

White/Orange

3-2 Upper (+)

(power minor)

Orange/White

3-2 Lower (-)

Power alarm #2

White/Green

3-3 Upper (+)

(AC fail)

Green/White

3-3 Lower (-)

Power alarm #3

White/Brown

3-4 Upper (+)

(intrusion)

Brown/White

3-4 Lower (-)

Power alarm #4

White/Slate

3-5 Upper (+)

Slate/White

3-5 Lower (-)

User alarm #16 *

Red/Blue

4-1 Upper (+)

(fuse alarm)

Blue/Red

4-1 Lower (-)

User alarm #17 *

Red/Orange

4-2 Upper (+)

Orange/Red

4-2 Lower (-)

Red/Green

4-3 Upper (+)

Green/Red

4-3 Lower (-)

Red/Brown

4-4 Upper (+)

Brown/Red

4-4 Upper (+)

Cable #1

(battery on
discharge)
Fourth
Z-IDC
Cable #2

(battery on
discharge)
User alarm #18

User alarm #19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-26

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Notes:

1.

Denotes that these positions can be used for additional user alarms, if not used for power alarms.

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

The following table shows user alarm cable connections for the indoor 9216/9226
Compact base stations.
Table 7-19
Function

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

Wire Color for the

recommended User Alarm
Cable

Pin # on D-Sub
Connector of
Junction Box

Pin # on J8 or
HIOU/CIOU

User Alarms 0 through 7 are utilized for power alarms

Relay 2 and Relay 3 are not supported
User 16 Alarm

User 17 Alarm

User 18 Alarm

User 19 Alarm

User 20 Alarm

User 21 Alarm

User 22 Alarm

User 23 Alarm

User 24 Alarm

User 25 Alarm

Red/Brown

Brown/Red

20

20

Red/Slate

Slate/Red

21

21

Black/Blue

Blue/Black

22

22

Black/Orange

Orange/Black

23

23

Black/Green

Green/Black

24

24

Black/Brown

Brown/Black

25

25

Black/Slate

Slate/Black

26

26

Yellow/Blue

Blue/Yellow

27

27

Yellow/Orange

Orange/Yellow

28

28

Yellow/Green

10

10

Green/Yellow

29

29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-19
Function

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

(continued)

Wire Color for the

recommended User Alarm
Cable

Pin # on D-Sub
Connector of
Junction Box

Pin # on J8 or
HIOU/CIOU

User Alarms 0 through 7 are utilized for power alarms

Relay 2 and Relay 3 are not supported
User 26 Alarm

User 27 Alarm

User 28 Alarm

User 29 Alarm

Yellow/Brown

11

11

Brown/Yellow

30

30

Yellow/Slate

12

12

Slate/Yellow

31

31

Violet/Blue

13

13

Blue/Violet

32

32

Violet/Orange

14

14

Orange/Violet

33

33

Notes:

1.

Example: 3-7 Upper refers to the Z-IDC Module 3, position #7 upper.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-28

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

The following table shows user alarm connections for the Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact
base stations.
Table 7-20
Terminal
Block

Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

Function

Wire Color for the

recommended
User Alarm Cable

Punch down
Assignments
(Z-IDC block and
position)

Pin # on
J8 or
HIOU/CIOU

User Alarms 0 through 7 are utilized for power alarms

Relay 2 and Relay 3 are not supported
10-position
Z-IDC
assigned to
User Alarms
(Module 3)

User 16
Alarm

Red/Brown

3-7 Upper

Brown/Red

3-7 Lower

20

User 17
Alarm

Red/Slate

3-8 Upper

Slate/Red

3-8 Lower

21

User 18
Alarm

Black/Blue

3-9 Upper

Blue/Black

3-9 Lower

22

User 19
Alarm

Black/Orange

3-10 Upper

Orange/Black

3-10 Lower

23

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-20
Terminal
Block

Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact user alarm cable connections

(continued)
Function

Wire Color for the

recommended
User Alarm Cable

Punch down
Assignments
(Z-IDC block and
position)

Pin # on
J8 or
HIOU/CIOU

User Alarms 0 through 7 are utilized for power alarms

Relay 2 and Relay 3 are not supported
10-position
Z-IDC
assigned to
User Alarms
(Module 4)

User 20
Alarm

Black/Green

4-1 Upper

Green/Black

4-1 Lower

24

User 21
Alarm

Black/Brown

4-2 Upper

Brown/Black

4-2 Lower

25

User 22
Alarm

Black/Slate

4-3 Upper

Slate/Black

4-3 Lower

26

User 23
Alarm

Yellow/Blue

4-4 Upper

Blue/Yellow

4-4 Lower

27

User 24
Alarm

Yellow/Orange

4-5 Upper

Orange/Yellow

4-5 Lower

28

User 25
Alarm

Yellow/Green

4-6 Upper

10

Green/Yellow

4-6 Lower

29

User 26
Alarm

Yellow/Brown

4-7 Upper

11

Brown/Yellow

4-7 Lower

30

User 27
Alarm

Yellow/Slate

4-8 Upper

12

Slate/Yellow

4-8 Lower

31

User 28
Alarm

Violet/Blue

4-9 Upper

13

Blue/Violet

4-9 Lower

32

User 29
Alarm

Violet/Orange

4-10 Upper

14

Orange/Violet

4-10 Lower

33

Notes:

1.

Example: 3-7 Upper refers to the Z-IDC Module 3, position #7 upper.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-30

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External user alarm cable connections at the Indoor Compact cabinet

The external user alarm cable(s) must have been previously connected to the Indoor
9216 Compact cabinet according to the instructions provided in the Site Preparation
Manual.
Important! In order for the power alarms 0-7 to be routed back to the Compact
primary cabinet (from the Equipment side of the NIU, via the 10 meter (33 feet)
0-7 alarm cable), the power alarms from the customer-supplied power source
must have been previously punched down on the Network side of the NIU.
Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external user alarm cable connections at NIU

Important! The columns Alarm # and Wire Color Code are used to determine
the correct punchdowns for each user alarm.
Important! The following cables are used for direct connections to the NIU, as
applicable.

Cable 0-7: Refer to 0-7 User Alarm connections at NIU (p. 7-31) for power
alarms 0-7.

Cable 16-29: Refer to User Alarm 16-23 cable pin assignments (for NIU
connection) (p. 6-40) for external relays and user alarms 16-23 and User
Alarm 24-31 cable pin assignments (for NIU connection) (p. 6-41) for external
user alarms 24-29.

Important! The columns Alarm # and Wire Color Code are used to determine
the correct punchdowns for each user alarm.
0-7 User Alarm connections at NIU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-21

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external 0-7 user alarm cable

connections at NIU

Alarm Cable and

connector at Indoor
Compact Cabinet1

Alarm #2

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin
D-Sub at Indoor
Compact
Cabinet

Alarm 0-7 cable

User 0

White-Blue

Power Alarms 0-7

Alarm

Blue-White

20

(37-Pin D-Sub)

User 1

White-Orange

Alarm

Orange-White

21

User 2

White-Green

Alarm

Green-White

22

User 3

White-Brown

Alarm

Brown-White

23

User 4

White-Slate

Alarm

Slate-White

24

User 5

Red-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Red

25

User 6

Red-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Red

26

User 7

Red-Green

Alarm

Green-Red

27

Notes:

1.

This cable is not used if the power source is a 3GP24i power cabinet.

2.

In order for the power alarms 0-7 to be routed back to the Compact primary cabinet (from the Equipment
side of the NIU, via the 10 meter (33 feet) 0-7 alarm cable), the power alarms from the
customer-supplied power source must have been previously punched down on the Network side of the
NIU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-32

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-23 User Alarm connections at NIU

Table 7-22

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external 16-23 user alarm cable

connections at NIU

Alarm Cable
and connector
at Indoor
Compact
Cabinet

Alarm #

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin
D-Sub at Indoor
Compact Cabinet

Alarm 16-29
cable

User 2

Black-Slate

15

Relay

Slate-Black

34

User 3

Yellow-Blue

16

Relay

Blue-Yellow

35

User 16

White-Blue

Alarm

Blue-White

20

User 17

White-Orange

Alarm

Orange-White

21

User 18

White-Green

Alarm

Green-White

22

User 19

White-Brown

Alarm

Brown-White

23

User 20

White-Slate

Alarm

Slate-White

24

User 21

Red-Blue

Alarm

Blue-Red

25

User 22

Red-Orange

Alarm

Orange-Red

26

User 23

Red-Green

Alarm

Green-Red

27

External User
Relays 2-3 and
User Alarms
16-23
(37-Pin D-Sub)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

24-29 User Alarm connections at NIU

Table 7-23

Indoor 9216/9226 Compact external 24-29 user alarm cable

connections at NIU

Alarm Cable
and connector
at Indoor
Compact
Cabinet

Alarm #

Wire Color Code

Pin # at 37-Pin
D-Sub at Indoor
Compact Cabinet

Alarm 16-29
cable

User 24

Red-Brown

Alarm

Brown-Red

28

User 25

Red-Slate

10

Alarm

Slate-Red

29

User 26

Black-Blue

11

Alarm

Blue-Black

30

User 27

Black-Orange

12

Alarm

Orange-Black

31

User 28

Black-Green

13

Alarm

Green-Black

32

User 29

Black-Brown

14

Alarm

Brown-Black

33

External User
Alarms 24-29
(37-Pin D-Sub)

9216/9226 Compact without integrated power user alarm mapping

This topic provides user alarm mapping information for the 9216/9226 Compact
without integrated power.
The following table provides the customer definable Compact base station user alarms
recommendations for configurations without integrated power (using external power).
Table 7-24

9216/9226 Compact without integrated power user alarm mapping

User Alarm #

Source Unit

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Major Power Fail

000

Minor Power Fail

000

AC Fail

000

Power Cabinet Intrusion

Alarm

000

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-34

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-24

9216/9226 Compact without integrated power user alarm

mapping (continued)

User Alarm #

Source Unit

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Battery Discharge

000

Battery Fuse

000

Battery Disconnect

000

Spare

000

16-29

General User Alarm

001

0-13

0-1

User Relays

010

2-3

Important! For Rural Configurations, only Alarms 16-23 are provided.

9216/9226 Compact with integrated power user alarm mapping

The following table provides the customer definable Compact base station user alarms
for configurations with integrated power.
Table 7-25

9216/9226 Compact with integrated power user alarm mapping

User Alarm #

Source Unit

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg2)

I2C Bit

16-29

General User
Alarms

001

0-13

2-3

User Relays

010

2-3

Important! For Rural Configurations, only Alarms 16-23 are provided.

Remote configuration user alarms for 9216 Compact Distributed without integrated power

The following table provides the customer-definable user alarms for the 9216 Compact
Distributed without integrated power recommendations if the rectifier is not equipped
in the base unit frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-26

9216 Compact Distributed without integrated power remote

configuration user alarms

User
Alarm #

Meaning

Source
Unit

IOU I2C
Port
Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Comments

1-7

Power
Alarms

Extended
DC Power
Plant

000

0-6

For external DC power

plant there are seven
alarms that may be
connected as user alarms
in the based unit frame.

CFM1 Alarm

CFM1

000

CFMA1/Link
Alarm

CFM1

000

10

RU1 Cabinet
Intrusion
Alarm

CFM1

000

RU1 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA1 and
linked to CFM1

11

RU1
Rectifier
Alarm

CFM1

000

10

RU1 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA1 and
linked to CFM1

12-14

RU1 User
Alarms

CFM1

000

11-13

RU1 user defined alarms

15

CFM2 Alarm

CFM2

000

14

16

CFMA2/Link
Alarm

CFM2

000

15

17

RU2 Cabinet
Intrusion
Alarm

CFM2

001

RU2 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA2 and
linked to CFM2

18

RU2
Rectifier
Alarm

CFM2

001

RU2 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA2 and
linked to CFM2

19-21

RU2 User
Alarms

CFM2

001

2-4

RU2 user defined alarms

22

CFM3
Alarms

CFM3

001

23

CFMA3/Link
Alarm

CFM3

001

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-36

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-26

9216 Compact Distributed without integrated power remote

configuration user alarms (continued)

User
Alarm #

Meaning

Source
Unit

IOU I2C
Port
Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Comments

24

RU3 Cabinet
Intrusion
Alarm

CFM3

001

RU3 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA3 and
linked to CFM3

25

RU3
Rectifier
Alarm

CFM3

001

RU3 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA3 and
linked to CFM3

26-28

RU3 User
Alarms

CFM3

001

9-11

RU3 user defined alarms

29-32

BU User
Alarms

001

12-15

BU frame user defined

alarms

Remote configuration user alarms for 9216 Compact Distributed with integrated power

The following table provides the customer-definable user alarms for the 9216 Compact
Distributed with integrated power recommendations if the rectifier is not equipped in
the base unit frame.
Table 7-27

9216 Compact Distributed with integrated power remote

configuration user alarms

User
Alarm #

Meaning

Source
Unit

IOU I2C
Port
Address
(MUX1/Leg
2)

I2C Bit

Comments

1-5

Power Alarm

Integrated
Rectifier

000

0-4

For integrated rectifier

there are five alarms
connected as user alarms
in Base Unit frame

6-7

Base Unit User

Alarms

000

5-6

Base Unit frame user

defined alarms

CFM1 Alarm

CFM1

000

CFMA1/Link
Alarm

CFM1

000

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-27

9216 Compact Distributed with integrated power remote

configuration user alarms (continued)

User
Alarm #

Meaning

Source
Unit

IOU I2C
Port
Address
(MUX1/Leg
2)

I2C Bit

Comments

10

RU1 Cabinet
Intrusion Alarm

CFM1

000

RU1 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA1 and
linked to CFM1

11

RU1 Rectifier
Alarm

CFM1

000

10

RU1 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA1 and
linked to CFM1

12-14

RU1 User
Alarms

CFM1

000

11-13

RU1 user defined alarms

15

CFM2 Alarm

CFM2

000

14

16

CFMA2/Link
Alarm

CFM2

000

15

17

RU2 Cabinet
Intrusion Alarm

CFM2

001

RU2 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA2 and
linked to CFM2

18

RU2 Rectifier
Alarm

CFM2

001

RU2 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA2 and
linked to CFM2

19-21

RU2 User
Alarms

CFM2

001

2-4

RU2 user defined alarms

22

CFM3 Alarm

CFM3

001

23

CFMA2/Link
Alarm

CFM3

001

24

RU3 Cabinet
Intrusion Alarm

CFM3

001

RU3 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA3 and
linked to CFM3

25

RU3 Rectifier
Alarm

CFM3

001

RU3 Intrusion alarm

collected by CFMA3 and
linked to CFM3

26-28

RU3 User
Alarms

CFM3

001

9-11

RU3 user defined alarms

29-32

BU User Alarms

CFM3

001

12-15

BU frame user defined

alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-38

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarms
Overview

User alarms 0 through 7 are reserved for power alarms. The following table shows the
power alarm function per J4 pin number for the Indoor 9216/9226 Compact and per
punchdown for the Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact.
Important! The Z-IDC block requires the use of a Krone blade.
The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Primary Frame, with integrated power, and KS-24688
rectifier shelf.

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Primary Frame, with integrated power, KS-24688 rectifier
shelf, and W1024 cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Primary Frame, with integrated power, KS-24688 rectifier
shelf, and W1124 cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-40

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Primary Frame, with integrated power, and KS-24751
rectifier shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Primary Frame, with integrated power, KS-24751 rectifier
shelf, and W1124 cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-42

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Dual-Band Frame, with integrated power, and KS-24688
rectifier shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms for a 9216
Compact configured as a Dual-Band Frame, with integrated power, and KS-24751
rectifier shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-44

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms and Status

The power module provides alarms and indicators. The primary power controller
collects alarms from the internal and external battery cabinets as well as growth
cabinet rectifiers. Alarms are reported to the user interface panel in the form of relay
contact closures. Alternative implementations may utilize solid-state relays or
opto-coupled devices to provide isolation from the controller circuitry and achieve the
equivalent contact closure. The - designation of each alarm is referenced to the
system ground. The relay or solid-state devices have an open circuit voltage rating of
30 VDC. A total of six alarms are reported. The Alarm interface and general
description is in the table below.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-28
Alarm

ID

9216 Compact power alarms

Relay

Name

Name

DsubM

Description

1 Pin

Urgent Power (Power

Major)

PMJ

Form B

PowMaj+ Pow
Maj-

8, 24

Issued by power
controller when any
condition occurs that
impacts the capabilities
of the users
equipment, thereby
requiring immediate
attention.

Non-Urgent Power
(Power Minor)

PMN

Form B

PowMin+
PowMin-

9, 28

Issued by power
controller when any
condition occurs that
would require service
but does not
immediately impact the
users equipment. Also
generated by a contact
closure between BAT
FAN ALM RTN and
BAT FAN ALM NC
indicating that a fan in
the internal or external
battery compartment is
not operational.

Mains Failure (AC

Fail)

ACF

Form B

AcFail+ AcFail-

10, 29

Issued by the power

controller when it
recognizes that AC
input power to any of
the rectifiers has been
disrupted.

Urgent Fuse

FA

Form B

FuseAlm+
FuseAlm-

11, 30

Issued by the controller

if a battery protection
fuse (either in the
primary, growth, or
battery cabinets) opens.
Generated by contact
closure between ALM+
and ALM- signals.

Battery Discharge

BD

Form B

BattDis+ BattDis-

12, 31

Issued by the power

controller when the
system output voltage
drops below 25.0 VDC
(user adjustable from
between 23 to 26.5
VDC).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-46

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-28
Alarm

9216 Compact power alarms (continued)

ID

Relay

Name

Name

DsubM

Description

1 Pin

Battery Discharge 2

BD2

Form B

BattDis2+
BattDis2-

13, 32

Issued by the power

controller when the
Battery output voltage
drops below 22.0 VDC
(may be user
adjustable)

Notes:

1.

Relays are energized open and close on alarm.

2.

Refer to Alarm Reference for alarm conditions.

Rectifier Controller Alarms

The List 1 and List 2 Power Controllers are equipped with seven T1 size, right angle,
LEDs. The LEDs are viewable through the front panel and defined as shown in the
following table.
Table 7-29

9216/9226 Compact power controller alarms

Function

Color

Label

Description

Major Power
Alarm

Red

PJM

Shall light when a major alarm is

detected

Minor Power
Alarm

Yellow

RMN

Shall light when a minor alarm is

detected

AC Mains
Failure
Alarm

Red

ACF

Shall light when AC mains failure is

detected

Battery
Discharge

Red

BD

Shall light when batteries are

discharging

Temp Fault

Red

TEMP

Shall light when temperature related

fault detected

Fuse Fault

Red

FUSE

Shall light when battery fuse opened or

LVBD contactor failed

Power On

Green

PWR

Shall light when input power is applied

to the controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarm cable pin assignments for Indoor and Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact cabinets

User alarms 0 through 7 are reserved for power alarms. The following table specifies
the power alarm cable assignment and connections.
Table 7-30

9216/9226 Compact power alarm cable pin assignments

Alarm
function

Alarm Pair
Typical Wire
numbernumber color

Indoor
compact Pin # on J4
(37 Pin
D-sub
connector)

Outdoor
compact Punchdown
position on
Z-IDC block for
power alarms 1
-8

Pin # on
J7 of HIOU
/ CIOU

Power Major
(PMJ)

White/Blue

2-7 Upper

Blue/White

20

2-7 Lower

20

Power Minor
(PMN)

White/Orange

2-8 Upper

Orange/White

21

2-8 Lower

21

AC Fail
(ACF)

White/Green

2-9 Upper

Green/White

22

2-9 Lower

22

Power
Cabinet
Intrusion
(INTR)

White/Brown

2-10 Upper

Brown/White

23

2-10 Lower

23

Batteries on
Discharge First Stage
(BD)

White/Slate

3-1 Upper

Slate/White

24

3-1 Lower

24

Fuse Alarm

Red/Blue

3-2 Upper

Blue/Red

25

3-2 Lower

25

Red/Orange

3-3 Upper

Orange/Red

26

3-3 Lower

26

Red/Green

3-4 Upper

Green/Red

27

3-4 Lower

27

Batteries on
Discharge Second Stage
(BD-2)

Customer
Definable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-48

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

Frame alarms indicate the failure of Power Converter Units (PCUs) and provide an
indication of intrusion.
Standard and rural configuration frame alarms for 9216 Compact

Below is a table which lists the frame alarms for the9216 Compact Rural
Configuration. These frame alarms are valid for all V2 Outdoor Compact
configurations equipped with the heater assembly option. Note that the interface will be
supported on the IOU1 using a 25-pin D-Type connector rather than the 37-pin D-Type
connector used on the Compact Cell.
Table 7-31

9216 Compact standard and rural configuration frame alarms

Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Digital Shelf Fan

Failure

011

Hybrid Fan Alarm

Cabinet Intrusion
Alarm

011

Cabinet Intrusion
Alarm

Heat Management
System Overtemp

011

Heat Management
System Overtemp

11

Heat Management
System
Undertemp

011

10

Heat Management
System Undertemp

Remote configuration frame alarms for 9216 Compact Distributed without integrated power

The following table provides the customer-definable frame alarms for the 9216
Compact Distributed without integrated power.
Table 7-32

9216 Compact Distributed remote configuration frame alarms

Frame
Alarm
#

Message*

Source Unit

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Compact
Meaning

Digital Shelf
Fan Failure

Hybrid Fan
Tray

011

BU Fan Failure

Undesignated Frame Alarm

011

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-49
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-32

9216 Compact Distributed remote configuration frame alarms

(continued)

Frame
Alarm
#

Message*

Source Unit

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Compact
Meaning

Amplifier
Shelf 1 Fan
Failure

RU1 Fan
Tray

011

RU1 Fan Failure

Undesignated Frame Alarm

011

Amplifier
Shelf 2 Fan
Failure

011

Undesignated Frame Alarm

011

Cabinet
Intrusion
Alarm

Base Unit
Frame

011

BU Intrusion
Alarm (Outdoor
configuration
only)

Heat
Management
System
Overtemp

Heat
Management
System

011

BU Heat
Management
System Overtemp
(Outdoor
configuration
only)

Primary
frame heat
management
system fan
alarm

RU3 Fan
Tray

011

RU3 Fan Failure

10

Primary
Frame Heat
Management
System
Heater
Alarm

Heat
Management
System

011

11

Heat
Management
System
Undertemp

Heat
Management
System

011

10

RU2 Fan
Tray

RU2 Fan Failure

BU Heat
Management
System
Undertemp
(Outdoor
configurations
only)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

7-50

9216/9226 Compact, 9216 Compact LX, and 9216

Compact Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 7-32

9216 Compact Distributed remote configuration frame alarms

(continued)

Frame
Alarm
#

Message*

Source Unit

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

12

Heat
Management
System
Controller
Fail

Heat
Management
System

011

11

13

Heat
Management
System
Compressor
Fail

Heat
Management
System

011

12

14

Undesignated Alarms

011

13

15

Undesignated Alarms

011

14

16

Undesignated Alarms

011

15

Compact
Meaning

Notes:

1.

* This column represents the 9218 Macro meaning. For the 9216 Compact, this column is the message
that is sent indicating the Compact meaning (last column).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
7-51
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

8222 Micro/Micro
9
Distributed alarm
information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the 9222 Micro and 9222
Micro Distributed.
Contents
Alarm collection

8-2

CTU and OM alarms

8-4

URC alarms

8-5

CMU alarms

8-6

OCM-II alarms

8-7

Intrusion alarm

8-8

UCR alarms

8-9

TxAMP alarms

8-10

Tower Top Test Module (TTTM) alarm LED

8-12

Fan tray alarms

8-13

User alarms

8-14

Power alarms

8-20

Frame alarms

8-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
Alarm collection

The following figure shows the alarm collection in the 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed.
Alarm reporting

Most alarms are collected by the I2C with exceptions noted in the descriptions.

The CPC alarms connect directly to the URC via the I2C bus through the IOU and
the backplane.
The Input/Output Unit serves as a physical alarm collection point, as well as a
supplier of digital output signals. Since it is an alarm collection point, the IOU
proxy performs alarm monitoring.
The I2C serial bus is used to interconnect the URC(s), CPCs, TxAMPs and the IOU
for purposes of alarm collection, inventory control and other potential (future)
control/status reporting functions.
LNA over current and DC-DC Converter alarms are reported via a discrete cable to
the TDU. The TDU passes the alarms by the I2C bus, through the FAC/FAC-D and
IOU to the URC(s). The TDU sets the appropriate bit(s) on its 16-bit I2C port
expander(s) to indicate the alarm condition, where they are reported to the URC.
The following devices report their alarms to the URC via the I2C bus with the
name of the alarm indicating the type of failure reported.

Digital Shelf Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 1 Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 2 Fan Failure

Cabinet Intrusion Alarm

Heat Management System Overtemp

Primary frame heat management system fan alarm

Primary frame heat management system heat alarm

Heat Management System Undertemp

Heat Management System Controller Fail

Heat Management System Compressor Fail.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-2

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm reporting summary

System alarm reporting is summarized in the table below for the 9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed.
Table 8-1

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm reporting summary

Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

RF

TxAMP (C1PAM,
C2PAM, P2PAM, iPAM)

I2C via cable to PIM and then backplane to URC via

I 2C

LNA on DLM

Use filter 1 2C bus address (via backplane to URC

via 12C

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

Use filter 12C bus address (via backplane to URC

via 12C), monitoring is via A/D converter with 12C
interface in the TTTM

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane to

URC)

RET

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane to

URC)

UCR/MCR/UCRe

ARCNET bus

URC/URC-II

Directly to RCS over facilities interface

CMU

IEEE-1394 packet bus (Firewire)

CTU-II

ARCNET

PIM (secondary power

alarm)

Use CPC 12C bus address (via backplane to URC

via I2C)

Fan Tray

Use frame alarm (via cable to PIM and then to URC

via I2C bus)

Heat Management
System

Cabled Frame alarm connection to PIM then

backplane to URC

Rectifier power
(rectifier battery)

Use user alarms (via cable to PIM and then

backplane to URC via I 2C

Digital

Other

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

CTU and OM alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

CTU hardware errors

The CTU generates hardware errors on the peripheral bus due to these conditions:

GPS satellites cannot be traced

Satellite lock has been lost and flywheeling is in process

GPS receiver failure.

CTU LEDs

The LED indicators listed below are available for each CTU.
Table 8-2

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed CTU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

CTU failure

NVM (yellow)

Context-sensitive event in progress (for example,

NVM download)

RDY (green)

CTU enabled for generating clock signals, and the

OM and GPS are functional

OM FAIL (red)

OM failure

FLY EX (red)

CTU has exceeded the maximum flywheel time

LOCK GPS (green)

GPS unit is locked to the GPS satellite signal

OM LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the OM.

Table 8-3

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed OM LED

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

RDY (green)

Ready, indicates that at least one of the six analog

clock outputs is active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-4

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

URC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

URC alarms
URC LEDs

The following LEDs listed below are available for the URC.
Table 8-4

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed URC LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Board failure

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

URC operational

L1 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L2 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L3 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L4 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

CMU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CMU alarms
CMU LEDs

The three LED indicators listed below are available for the CMU.
Table 8-5

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed CMU LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

The CMU has failed diagnostics, one or more CEs have

failed to initialize, or another component has failed to
initialize

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

The CCU is functioning properly and at least one CE is

enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-6

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

OCM-II alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OCM-II alarms
OCM-II LEDs

The eight LED indicators listed in the following table are available on the OCM-II
faceplate.
Table 8-6

9222 Micro Distributed OCM-II LEDs

Label/color

Condition

STAT (red/green/yellow)

a unit status indicator (1 LED)

FL (red/green)

one port status indicator (pass/fail) for each CPRI port (3

LEDs)

SW (red/green)

one transmit state indicator per CPRI port switch (3 LEDs).

ETH (yellow)

Maintenance port status indicator (1 LED).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Intrusion alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarm
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-8

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

UCR alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCR alarms
UCR LEDs

The LEDs for the UCRs indicate these conditions.

Table 8-7

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed UCR LEDs

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

FLT (yellow)

Fault (does not light up with NVM download)

RDY (green)

Ready

Tx ON (green)

Transmit on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP alarms
Overview

Amplifier (AMP) alarms indicate failures in the receive or transmit amplifiers.

Transmit amplifier (TxAMP) alarms indicate a failure condition in the transmit
amplifier that impacts call transmission capability.
Over-temperature alarm

The Over-temperature alarm is indicated when the amplifier baseplate exceeds a

threshold temperature. The TxAMP includes an internal thermal overload shutdown
circuit to prevent destruction due to lack of airflow from fan failure. Under this
condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged. This may be accomplished
by reducing the bias and switching off the input power. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating temperature, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance.
The alarm light flashes at a 1-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
The RF overdrive alarm

The Overdrive alarm is triggered when the input power level exceeds +7.0 dBm 0.75
dB. The amplifier shall not be damaged by an input signal, which is up to a level of
+14 dBm (the continuous Non-damaging Input Power level). This condition can last
indefinitely. Under this condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged.
This may be accomplished by attenuating the input signal. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating input level, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance. The TxAMP amplifier generates an
overdrive alarm during this condition. The amplifier automatically recovers to the
normal mode when the input overdrive condition ceases to exist for at least a period of
4 seconds.
The alarm light flashes at a 1/2-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
Amplifier failure alarm

The Amplifier Failure alarm is triggered when internal monitor circuits within the
TxAMP detect that the drain current is out of operating range or the output power level
is too low. Alarm hysteresis is such that power glitches will not cause false alarms.
The LAM has two LEDs located on the front plate: one green and one red. The green
LED is illuminated when the LAM is powered on and no alarms are detected. The red
LED is illuminated when any LAM alarm is activated. A flashing RED LED indicates
a transient failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-10

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP LEDs

The LEDs for the TxAMPs indicate these conditions.

Table 8-8

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed TxAMP LEDs

Label/color

Condition

ALM (red)

Alarm flashes at different rate depending on fault

ACT (green)

Active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Tower Top Test Module (TTTM) alarm LED

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tower Top Test Module (TTTM) alarm LED

TTTM Alarm LED

The TTTM displays one bi-color LED per TTLNA, which is controlled by software via
the 12C bus,. which is able to be set in an off, red, or green state.
Table 8-9

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed TTTM Alarm LED

Function

Color

Description

Off

--

When the TTLNA is present, when an

antenna test is running, and when Tx or Rx
path calibration is occurring

Normal Operation

Green

When a TTLNA is present and operating

normally

Alarming

Red

When a TTLNA is present by indicating an

alarm via overcurrent or undercurrent
detection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-12

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

Fan alarms

The following figure shows the location of the Fan Alarms for the 9222 Micro cabinet.

Fan tray LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the fan trays.

Table 8-10

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed fan tray LED

Label/color

Condition

GREEN

Normal

RED

Fault

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms
Purpose

This chapter provides information on user alarm requirements for a 9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed cell sites.
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
The IOU does not provide any alarms of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame
alarms and user alarms to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
General requirements for 9222 Micro

Each 9222 Micro cabinet utilizes up to eight user alarms. For cabinet without
integrated power, an additional four power alarms for external power can be connected.
Each cable is good for four user alarms.
The following figure shows the location of the user alarms for the 9222 Micro cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-14

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarm cable functions for 9222 Micro

The following table describes the functions of the facilities cables.

Table 8-11

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable functions

Cable

Use

Cable type

Number of
lines per cable

Max
Cables

Connector
type

User
/Power
alarms

User alarms defined by

customer

4 twisted pair

RJ-45
on both
ends

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-16

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RJ-45 alarm cable pin assignments

The following table provides the pin assignments for the facilities alarm cable for the
9222 Micro/Micro Distributed.
Table 8-12

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed RJ-45 alarm cable pin assignments

Facilities cable

Number of RJ-45
jacks

RJ-45 pin #

Function

Alarm cable

2 (user alarms)

User_Alm+

1 (power alarm)

User_Alm-

User_Alm+

User_Alm-

User_Alm+

User_Alm-

User_Alm+

User_Alm-

Facilities cable connections for 9222 Micro

This topic describes the facilities cable connections. The individual user alarm twisted
pair lines are to be connected to the cabinet SPM.
The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the SPM.
Table 8-13
Cable

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed facilities cable connections

Line #

User alarms

Power alarm

Interface at SPM
Alarms 8 to 11

J12

Alarms 12 to 15

J13

0, 1, 2, 4

J14

User alarm cable pin assignments for the 9222 Micro

The following table shows the user alarm pin assignments for the 9222 Micro cabinet.
Table 8-14

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable pin assignments

User alarm wire

color

User Alarm Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Orange

User alarm 8+

User alarm 12+

Orange

User alarm 8-

User alarm 12-

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 8-14

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable pin assignments

(continued)

User alarm wire

color

User Alarm Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Green

User alarm 9+

User alarm 13+

Green

User alarm 9-

User alarm 13-

Blue

User alarm 10+

User alarm 14+

White-Blue

User alarm 10-

User alarm 14-

White-Brown

User alarm 11+

User alarm 15+

Brown

User alarm 11-

User alarm 15-

User Alarm mapping for 9222 Micro without integrated power

The following table provides the customer definable user alarms recommendations for
configurations without integrated power (using external power).
Table 8-15

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed (without integrated power) user alarm

mapping

User Alarm
#

Alarm Definition

Alarm
Group

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Major power failure

including battery fuse
fail1 (or User Alarm
0)

000

User Alarm 0

Minor power failure 1

(or User Alarm 1)

000

User Alarm 1

AC failure1 (or User

Alarm 2)

000

User Alarm 2

N/A

N/A

000

N/A

Battery discharge (or

User Alarm 4)

000

User Alarm 4

N/A

N/A

000

User Alarm 5

N/A

N/A

000

User Alarm 6

N/A

N/A

000

User Alarm 7

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 8

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-18

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 8-15

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed (without integrated power) user alarm

mapping (continued)

User Alarm
#

Alarm Definition

Alarm
Group

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

10

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 10

11

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 11

12

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 12

13

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 13

14

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 14

15

Customer defined

000

User Alarm 15

Notes:

1.

Alarm is dedicated to power alarms in AC Rectifier equipped system, otherwise available

for user alarms (using J14 connector on SPM).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarms
Overview

User/Power alarms (in primary frame only) are collected through the Enhanced
Facilities Interface Module (EFIM). They are routed to the EFIM that, for outdoor
applications, is sent to a punchdown block that contains lightning protection. A cable
from the secondary EFIM output sends the alarms to the CTU that formats and sends
them to the peripheral bus to the URC, which is then sent over the T1/E1 lines.
The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms.

General requirements for 9222 Micro

Each 9222 Micro cabinet utilizes up to eight user alarms, for of which are used for
Power alarms. For cabinet without integrated power, an additional four power alarms
for external power can be connected. Each cable is good for four user alarms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-20

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarm cable functions for 9222 Micro

The following table describes the functions of the facilities cables.

Table 8-16

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed user alarm cable functions

Cable

Use

Cable type

Number of
lines per cable

Max
Cables

Connector
type

User
/Power
alarms

User alarms defined by

customer

4 twisted pair

RJ-45
on both
ends

8-position modular jack pin numbers requirements

The following table provides the pin numbers and functions for the facilities cables.
Facilities cable

Number of
8-position modular
jacks

RJ-45 pin #

Function

Alarm cable

2 (user alarms)

User_Alm+

1 (power alarm)

User_Alm-

User_Alm+

User_Alm-

User_Alm+

User_Alm-

User_Alm+

User_Alm-

Facilities cable connections for 9222 Micro

This topic describes the facilities cable connections. The individual user alarm twisted
pair lines are to be connected to the cabinet SPM.
The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the SPM.
Cable

Line #
User alarms

Power alarm

Interface at SPM
Alarms 8 to 11

J12

Alarms 12 to 15

J13

0,1,2,4

J14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarm wiring codes for the 9222 Micro

The following table shows the power alarm assignments for the 9222 Micro cabinet.
Power alarm wire color

Function
J14

RJ-45 pin #

White-Orange

0+

Orange

0-

White-Green

1+

Green

1-

Blue

2+

White-Blue

2-

White-Brown

4+

Brown

4-

Power alarms mapping for 9222 Micro without integrated power

The following table provides the customer definable user alarms recommendations for
configurations without integrated power (using external power).
User Alarm
#

Alarm Definition

Alarm
Group

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Major power failure

including battery
fuse fail1 (or User
Alarm 0)

000

User Alarm
0

Minor power
failure1 (or User
Alarm 1)

000

User Alarm
1

AC failure 1 (or
User Alarm 2)

000

User Alarm
2

N/A

N/A

000

N/A

Battery discharge1
(or User Alarm 4)

000

User Alarm
4

Notes:

1.

Alarm is dedicated to power alarms in AC Rectifier equipped system, otherwise available

for user alarms (using J14 connector on SPM).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-22

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

Frame alarms indicate the failure of Power Converter Units (PCUs) and provide an
indication of intrusion.
The following figure shows the location of the Frame Alarms for the 9222 Micro
cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
8-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed frame alarms

The following table lists the frame alarms for the 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed.
Table 8-17

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed frame alarms

Frame Alarm
Number

Alarm Name

Equipment
indicated

Alarm Group

Text
Indicated on
ROP

Fan alarm

Fan Tray

Digital Shelf
Fan Failure

Not used

N/A

--

--

Not used

N/A

--

--

Not used

N/A

--

--

Aux Cabinet
fan alarm

N/A

--

--

Not used

N/A

--

--

Cabinet
intrusion alarm

Door switch

Cabinet
Intrusion

Overtemperature
alarm

Cabinet thermal
sensor

Heat
Management
System
Overtemperature

Clogged Fresh
Air Filter alarm

Pressure switch

Heat
Management
System Fan
Fail

10

Reserved

N/A

--

--

11

Undertemperature
alarm

Cabinet thermal
sensor

Heat
Management
System
Undertemperature

12

Not used

N/A

--

--

13

Not used

N/A

--

--

14

Not used

N/A

--

--

15

Not used

N/A

--

--

16

Not used

N/A

--

--

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

8-24

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm

information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the 9223 Ultra-Compact.
Contents
Alarm collection

9-2

CTU and OM alarms

9-4

URC alarms

9-5

CMU alarms

9-6

Intrusion alarms

9-7

UCR alarms

9-8

TxAMP alarms

9-9

Fan tray alarms

9-11

User alarms

9-13

Power Alarms

9-20

Frame alarms

9-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
Alarm collection

The following figure shows the alarm collection in the 9223 Ultra-Compact.
Alarm reporting

Most alarms are collected by the I2C with exceptions noted in the descriptions.

The CPC alarms connect directly to the URC via the I2C bus through the IOU and
the backplane.
The Input/Output Unit serves as a physical alarm collection point, as well as a
supplier of digital output signals. Since it is an alarm collection point, the IOU
proxy performs alarm monitoring.
The I2C serial bus is used to interconnect the URC(s), CPCs, TxAMPs and the IOU
for purposes of alarm collection, inventory control and other potential (future)
control/status reporting functions.
LNA over current and DC-DC Converter alarms are reported via a discrete cable to
the TDU. The TDU passes the alarms by the I2C bus, through the FAC/FAC-D and
IOU to the URC(s). The TDU sets the appropriate bit(s) on its 16-bit I2C port
expander(s) to indicate the alarm condition, where they are reported to the URC.
The following devices report their alarms to the URC via the I2C bus with the
name of the alarm indicating the type of failure reported.

Digital Shelf Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 1 Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 2 Fan Failure

Cabinet Intrusion Alarm

Heat Management System Overtemp

Primary frame heat management system fan alarm

Primary frame heat management system heat alarm

Heat Management System Undertemp

Heat Management System Controller Fail

Heat Management System Compressor Fail.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-2

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm reporting summary

System alarm reporting is summarized in the table below for the 9223 Ultra-Compact.
Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

RF

TxAMP (C1PAM,
C2PAM, P2PAM, i)

I2C via cable to PIM and then backplane to

URC via I2C

LNA on DLM

Use filter 1 2C bus address (via backplane to

URC via 12C

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

Use filter 12C bus address (via backplane to

URC via 12C), monitoring is via A/D converter
with 12C interface in the TTTM

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane

to URC)

RET

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane

to URC)

UCR/MCR/UCRe

ARCNET bus

URC/URC-II

Directly to RCS over facilities interface

CMU

IEEE-1394 packet bus (Firewire)

CTU-II

ARCNET

PIM (secondary
power alarm)

Use CPC 12C bus address (via backplane to

URC via I2C)

Fan Tray

Use frame alarm (via cable to PIM and then to

URC via I2C bus)

Heat Management
System

Cabled Frame alarm connection to PIM then

backplane to URC

Rectifier power
(rectifier battery)

Use user alarms (via cable to PIM and then

backplane to URC via I 2C

Digital

Other

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

CTU and OM alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

CTU hardware errors

The CTU generates hardware errors on the peripheral bus due to these conditions:

GPS satellites cannot be traced

Satellite lock has been lost and flywheeling is in process

GPS receiver failure.

CTU LEDs

The LED indicators listed below are available for each CTU.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

CTU failure

NVM (yellow)

Context-sensitive event in progress (for example,

NVM download)

RDY (green)

CTU enabled for generating clock signals, and the

OM and GPS are functional

OM FAIL (red)

OM failure

FLY EX (red)

CTU has exceeded the maximum flywheel time

LOCK GPS (green)

GPS unit is locked to the GPS satellite signal

OM LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the OM.

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

RDY (green)

Ready, indicates that at least one of the six analog

clock outputs is active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-4

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

URC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

URC alarms
URC LEDs

The seven LED indicators listed below are available for the URC.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Board failure

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

URC operational

L1 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L2 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L3 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L4 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

CMU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CMU alarms
CMU LEDs

The three LED indicators listed below are available for the CMU.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

The CMU has failed diagnostics, one or more CEs have

failed to initialize, or another component has failed to
initialize

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

The CCU is functioning properly and at least one CE is

enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-6

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Intrusion alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarms
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

UCR alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCR alarms
UCR LEDs

The LEDs for the UCRs indicate these conditions.

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

FLT (yellow)

Fault (does not light up with NVM download)

RDY (green)

Ready

Tx ON (green)

Transmit on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-8

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP alarms
Overview

Amplifier (AMP) alarms indicate failures in the receive or transmit amplifiers.

Transmit amplifier (TxAMP) alarms indicate a failure condition in the transmit
amplifier that impacts call transmission capability.
Over-temperature alarm

The Over-temperature alarm is indicated when the amplifier baseplate exceeds a

threshold temperature. The TxAMP includes an internal thermal overload shutdown
circuit to prevent destruction due to lack of airflow from fan failure. Under this
condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged. This may be accomplished
by reducing the bias and switching off the input power. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating temperature, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance.
The alarm light flashes at a 1-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
The RF overdrive alarm

The Overdrive alarm is triggered when the input power level exceeds +7.0 dBm 0.75
dB. The amplifier shall not be damaged by an input signal, which is up to a level of
+14 dBm (the continuous Non-damaging Input Power level). This condition can last
indefinitely. Under this condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged.
This may be accomplished by attenuating the input signal. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating input level, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance. The TxAMP amplifier generates an
overdrive alarm during this condition. The amplifier automatically recovers to the
normal mode when the input overdrive condition ceases to exist for at least a period of
4 seconds.
The alarm light flashes at a 1/2-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
Amplifier failure alarm

The Amplifier Failure alarm is triggered when internal monitor circuits within the
TxAMP detect that the drain current is out of operating range or the output power level
is too low. Alarm hysteresis is such that power glitches will not cause false alarms.
The LAM has two LEDs located on the front plate: one green and one red. The green
LED is illuminated when the LAM is powered on and no alarms are detected. The red
LED is illuminated when any LAM alarm is activated. A flashing RED LED indicates
a transient failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP LEDs

The LEDs for the TxAMPs indicate these conditions.

Label/color

Condition

ALM (red)

Alarm flashes at different rate depending on fault

ACT (green)

Active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-10

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

Fan tray alarms

The following figure shows the location of the fan alarms for the indoor configuration
of the cabinet

The following figure shows the fan alarms for the outdoor configuration of the cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the fan trays.

Label/color

Condition

GREEN

Normal

RED

Fault

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-12

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms
Purpose

This section provides information on user alarm requirements for a 9223

Ultra-Compact.
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
The Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact is available with an optional nPM for facilities cable
interface. The nPM provides primary protection to the T1/E1, Ethernet, and user
alarms. Note that if the 9223 is provided with the nPM, only 8 user alarms are
available. If the 9223 Ultra-Compact is not provided with the nPM, then the facilities
cables (T1/ E1, Ethernet, user alarms) interface to the IOU. The IOU assembly is part
of the Digital Module which provides secondary protection only.
Each 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet utilizes 12 user alarms (including four Power
Alarms).
The 9223 Ultra-Compact is designed with an IOU assembly as part of the Digital
Module that provides secondary protection. The facilities cables interface with the
Digital Module.
The IOU does not provide any alarms of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame
alarms and user alarms to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
The following figure shows the locations of the user alarms for the Indoor 9223
cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the locations of the user alarms for the Outdoor 9223
Ultra-Compact.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-14

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of user alarms, indoor and outdoor
configurations, without NPM.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the location of user alarms, outdoor configurations, with
NPM.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-16

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9223 Ultra-Compact (without integrated power) user alarm mapping

The following table provides the customer-definable user alarm recommendations for
9223 Ultra-Compact configurations without integrated power (using external power).
Table 9-1

9223 Ultra-Compact (without integrated power) user alarm mapping

User Alarm #

Alarm Definition

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Major Power Fail

incl. battery fuse
fail

000

Minor Power Fail

incl. battery fan fail

000

AC Fail

000

N/A

000

Battery Discharge

000

N/A

000

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 9-1

9223 Ultra-Compact (without integrated power) user alarm

mapping (continued)

User Alarm #

Alarm Definition

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

N/A

000

N/A

000

User Alarm 8 customer definable

000

User Alarm 9 customer definable

000

10

User Alarm 10 customer definable

000

10

11

User Alarm 11 customer definable

000

11

12

User Alarm 12 customer definable

000

12

13

User Alarm 13 customer definable

000

13

14

User Alarm 14 customer definable

000

14

15

User Alarm 15 customer definable

000

15

0-15

Device not
populated

001

0-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-18

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable functions

The following table provides the pin numbers, wire colors, and functions for the
facilities cables provided with the 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Facilities cable

RJ-45 pin #

Wire Color of the

Cable

Function

Alarm cable No. 1

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm+

White-Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm+

White-Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm+

White-Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

Alarm cable No. 2

Alarm cable No. 3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power Alarms
Overview

The following topics discusses the DC power alarms for both the indoor and the
outdoor versions of the 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinets.
Each alarm generated by the power system shall be provided by a set of isolated dry
relay contacts, an alarm state may be indicated by a closed circuit or an open
circuit. If an alarm condition is indicated by a closed circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present a contact closure when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. If an alarm condition is indicated by a open circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present an open circuit when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. The resistance of a closed circuit shall be less than 100 ohms. The resistance
of an open circuit shall be greater than 1 megohms.
The Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact is available with an optional nPM for facilities cable
interface. The nPM provides primary protection to the T1/E1, Ethernet, and user
alarms. Note that if the 9223 is provided with the nPM, only 8 user alarms are
available. If the 9223 Ultra-Compact is not provided with the nPM, then the facilities
cables (T1/ E1, Ethernet, user alarms) interface to the IOU. The IOU assembly is part
of the Digital Module which provides secondary protection only.
The 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet can have four external power alarms.
The following figure shows electrical interfaces for power alarms for a typical power
system.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-20

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PMJ

Typical Power System

PMN

Alarms to
9223
Ultra-Compact

ACF
Denotes contact
closure when alarm
conditions exists

BD

AC Input
Power

-48 VDC

One DC power
feeder pair
to 9223
Ultra-Compact

Frame ground
PMJ: Power Major Alarm
PMN: Power Minor Alarm
ACF: AC Fail
BD: Batteries on Discharge

The following figure shows the user alarm assignment for power alarms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable functions

The following table describes the functions of the facilities alarm cables.
Cable

Use

Cable type

Number of
lines/alarms
per cable

Max
Cables

Connector type

Power
alarm

User alarms defined

by customer

4 twisted pair

4 alarms

RJ-45 on both
ends

Facilities cable connections at the cabinet

The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the cabinets
PIM.
Cable

Lines

Interface at PIM

Power alarm

0,1,2,4

Rectifier alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-22

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm cable functions for indoor and outdoor cabinets

The following table provides the pin numbers, wire colors, and functions for the
facilities alarm cables provided with the indoor and outdoor cabinets.
Facilities cable

RJ-45 pin #

Wire Color of the

Cable

Function

Alarm cable No. 1

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm+

White-Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm+

White-Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm+

White-Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

Alarm cable No. 2

Alarm cable No. 3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms and Status

The power module provides alarms and indicators. The primary power controller
collects alarms from the internal and external battery cabinets as well as growth
cabinet rectifiers. Alarms are reported to the user interface panel in the form of relay
contact closures. Alternative implementations may utilize solid-state relays or
opto-coupled devices to provide isolation from the controller circuitry and achieve the
equivalent contact closure. The - designation of each alarm is referenced to the
system ground. The relay or solid-state devices have an open circuit voltage rating of
30 VDC. The Alarm interface and general description is in the table below.
Alarm
Name

ID

Relay

Name

Description

Urgent
Power
(Power
Major)

PMJ

Form B

PowMaj+ Pow
Maj-

Issued by power
controller when any
condition occurs that
impacts the capabilities
of the users equipment,
thereby requiring
immediate attention.

Non-Urgent
Power
(Power
Minor)

PMN

Form B

PowMin+
PowMin-

Issued by power
controller when any
condition occurs that
would require service
but does not
immediately impact the
users equipment. Also
generated by a contact
closure between BAT
FAN ALM RTN and
BAT FAN ALM NC
indicating that a fan in
the internal or external
battery compartment is
not operational.

Mains
Failure (AC
Fail)

ACF

Form B

AcFail+ AcFail-

Issued by the power

controller when it
recognizes that AC
input power to any of
the rectifiers has been
disrupted.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-24

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm
Name

ID

Relay

Name

Description

Battery
Discharge

BD

Form B

BattDis+ BattDis-

Issued by the power

controller when the
system output voltage
drops below 25.0 VDC
(user adjustable from
between 23 to 26.5
VDC).

Notes:

1.

Relays are energized open and close on alarm.

2.

Refer to Alarm Reference for alarm conditions.

The table below lists the system conditions for each alarm. Reference is made to
Rectifier specification for Alarm indication definition. Each alarm shall be supported
by close on alarm type floating contacts.
Condition

Caused By

Normal Operation

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed,

0=open)
PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Failed Controller

No power

BD/Low Volt Alarm

Output < 25V

High Volt Alarm

Output > 29.0V

BD2

Output < 22V

Battery Disconnect

Loss of AC Input on one

Rectifier

AC Failure

Loss of AC Input on two

or more Rectifiers

Distribution Fuse Alarm

Indicating fuse tripped

with load applied
Battery or LVBD open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

Battery Failure

Output < 23.0 V during

test

Rectifier Alarm

Malfunction on one
Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Condition

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed,

0=open)
PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Rectifier Current Share

Current Share failure or

Rectifier Fuse Open

Rectifier Failure

Malfunction on more
than one Rectifier

Communication Failure

Module Loss of
Communication

Low Temperature Alarm

Temperature < -30C

High Temperature Alarm

Temperature > 75C

Temperature Probe
Failure

No probe connected

Fan Alarm

Internal/External Battery
Fan Failure

Failed Controller

No

BD2

Output L22V

Distribution Fuse Alarm

Indicating Fuse Tripped

with Load Applied
Battery or LVBM Open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

An RS-232 computer interface connector is available on the controller for the user to
access the controller alarm conditions and program some of its functions. The alarms
reported on this interface could be limited to rectifier related functions.
Rectifier Controller Alarms

The List 1 and List 2 Power Controllers are equipped with seven T1 size, right angle,
LEDs. The LEDs are viewable through the front panel and defined as shown in the
following table.
Function

Color

Label

Description

Major Power Alarm

Red

PJM

Shall light when a

major alarm is detected

Minor Power Alarm

Yellow

RMN

Shall light when a

minor alarm is detected

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-26

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Function

Color

Label

Description

AC Mains Failure Alarm

Red

ACF

Shall light when AC

mains failure is
detected

Battery Discharge

Red

BD

Shall light when

batteries are discharging

Temp Fault

Red

TEMP

Shall light when

temperature related
fault detected

Fuse Fault

Red

FUSE

Shall light when battery

fuse opened or LVBD
contactor failed

Power On

Green

PWR

Shall light when input

power is applied to the
controller

DC Power system alarms for indoor and outdoor cabinets

The following table also provides for the standard power system alarm assignments
and connection points for the 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
The 9223 Ultra-Compact software configuration must be programmed to report an
open circuit or closed circuit for an alarm condition. (The 9223 Ultra-Compact
software is configured for a contact closure for power system alarms. A software
change to the user alarm definitions is required to announce a power system an open
circuit as an alarm condition). Therefore, each specific power alarm function
maintains its identity throughout the network and can not be used for any other
purpose.
The following table lists a minimum set of alarm functions to be provided to alert and
announce power system failures. The following table shows the power alarms which
can be reported.
Important! If the DC power system does not support some of the alarms as
described below, it is strongly recommended that the customer not connect alarms
from different pieces of equipment to these user alarms. Since these power alarms
are reported back to the core network, it is important that the customer maintains
the circuit integrity to avoid misinterpretations when reporting equipment alarms
and failures.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table shows the power alarm cable connections at the NIU for the 9223
Ultra-Compact cabinets.
Power alarm cable connections at the NIU
Alarm Function

Alarm
Number

Power Major

(PMJ)
Power Minor

(PMN)
AC Fail (ACR)

Batteries on
Discharge (BD)

Wire color
(recommended)

RJ-45 Pin #

White-Orange

Orange

White-Green

Green

Blue

White-Blue

White-Brown

Brown

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-28

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

Frame alarms indicate the failure of Power Converter Units (PCUs) and provide an
indication of intrusion.
Frame Alarms

The following figure shows the frame alarms for the outdoor configuration of the
cabinet.

The following figure shows the frame alarms for the indoor configuration of the
cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Below is a table which lists the frame alarms for the 9223 Ultra-Compact.
Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Digital Module
Fan Tray

011

DM & DEM
Fan Failure

Not Used

011

N/A

Amplifier
Module Fan
Tray

011

Amplifier
Module Fan
Failure (up to
3 Amplifier
Module fan
alarms)

Not Used

011

N/A

Not Used

011

N/A

Not Used

011

N/A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

9-30

9223 Ultra-Compact alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Module
Enclosure

011

Cabinet
Intrusion
Alarm

Heat
Management
System

011

Heat
Management
System
Overtemp

Heat
Management
System

011

Module
Enclosure Heat
Management
System fan
alarm

10

Heat
Management
System

011

Primary Frame
Heat
Management
System Heater
Alarm

11

Heat
Management
System

011

10

Heat
Management
System
Undertemp

12

Heat
Management
System

011

11

Heat
Management
Controller Fail

13

Heat
Management
System

011

12

Clogged Fresh
Air Filter
Alarm

14

Not Used

011

13

N/A

15

Not Used

011

14

N/A

16

Not Used

011

15

N/A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
9-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

10

10 Sub-Compact/EN
9224
alarm information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the 9224 Sub-Compact and
9224 Sub-Compact EN.
Contents
Alarm collection

10-2

CTU and OM alarms

10-4

URC alarms

10-5

CMU alarms

10-6

Intrusion alarms

10-7

UCR alarms

10-8

TxAMP alarms

10-9

Fan tray alarms

10-11

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

10-12

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

10-17

Power Alarms

10-22

Frame alarms

10-31

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
Alarm collection

The following figure shows the alarm collection in the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN.
Alarm reporting

Most alarms are collected by the I2C with exceptions noted in the following
descriptions:

The CPC alarms connect directly to the URC via the I2C bus through the IOU and
the backplane.

The Input/Output Unit serves as a physical alarm collection point, as well as a

supplier of digital output signals. Since it is an alarm collection point, the IOU
proxy performs alarm monitoring.
The I2C serial bus is used to interconnect the URC(s), CPCs, TxAMPs and the IOU
for purposes of alarm collection, inventory control and other potential (future)
control/status reporting functions.

LNA over current and DC-DC Converter alarms are reported via a discrete cable to
the TDU. The TDU passes the alarms by the I2C bus, through the FAC/FAC-D and
IOU to the URC(s). The TDU sets the appropriate bit(s) on its 16-bit I2C port
expander(s) to indicate the alarm condition, where they are reported to the URC.

The following devices report their alarms to the URC via the I2C bus with the
name of the alarm indicating the type of failure reported.

Digital Shelf Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 1 Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 2 Fan Failure

Cabinet Intrusion Alarm

Heat Management System Overtemp

Primary frame heat management system fan alarm

Primary frame heat management system heat alarm

Heat Management System Undertemp

Heat Management System Controller Fail

Heat Management System Compressor Fail.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-2

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm reporting summary

System alarm reporting is summarized in the following table for the 9224
Sub-Compact/EN.
Table 10-1

9224 Sub-Compact/EN system alarm reporting

Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

RF

TxAMP (C1PAM,
C2PAM, P2PAM, iPAM,
60WCPAM)

I2C via cable to PIM and then backplane to URC via

I 2C

LNA on DLM

Use filter 1 2C bus address (via backplane to URC

via 12C

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

Use filter 12C bus address (via backplane to URC

via 12C), monitoring is via A/D converter with 12C
interface in the TTTM

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane to

URC)

RET

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane to

URC)

UCR/MCR/UCRe

ARCNET bus

URC/URC-II

Directly to RCS over facilities interface

CMU

IEEE-1394 packet bus (Firewire)

CTU-II

ARCNET

PIM (secondary power

alarm)

Use CPC 12C bus address (via backplane to URC

via I2C)

Fan Tray

Use frame alarm (via cable to PIM and then to URC

via I2C bus)

Heat Management
System

Cabled Frame alarm connection to PIM then

backplane to URC

Rectifier power
(rectifier battery)

Use user alarms (via cable to PIM and then

backplane to URC via I 2C

Digital

Other

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

CTU and OM alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

CTU hardware errors

The CTU generates hardware errors on the peripheral bus due to these conditions:

GPS satellites cannot be traced

Satellite lock has been lost and flywheeling is in process

GPS receiver failure.

CTU LEDs

The LED indicators listed below are available for each CTU.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

CTU failure

NVM (yellow)

Context-sensitive event in progress (for example,

NVM download)

RDY (green)

CTU enabled for generating clock signals, and the

OM and GPS are functional

OM FAIL (red)

OM failure

FLY EX (red)

CTU has exceeded the maximum flywheel time

LOCK GPS (green)

GPS unit is locked to the GPS satellite signal

OM LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the OM.

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

RDY (green)

Ready, indicates that at least one of the six analog

clock outputs is active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-4

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

URC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

URC alarms
URC LEDs

The seven LED indicators listed below are available for the URC.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Board failure

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

URC operational

L1 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L2 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L3 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L4 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

CMU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CMU alarms
CMU LEDs

The three LED indicators listed below are available for the CMU.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

The CMU has failed diagnostics, one or more

CEs have failed to initialize, or another
component has failed to initialize

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

The CCU is functioning properly and at least one

CE is enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-6

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Intrusion alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarms
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

UCR alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCR alarms
UCR LEDs

The LEDs for the UCRs indicate these conditions.

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

FLT (yellow)

Fault (does not light up with NVM

download)

RDY (green)

Ready

Tx ON (green)

Transmit on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-8

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP alarms
Overview

Amplifier (AMP) alarms indicate failures in the receive or transmit amplifiers.

Transmit amplifier (TxAMP) alarms indicate a failure condition in the transmit
amplifier that impacts call transmission capability.
Over-temperature alarm

The Over-temperature alarm is indicated when the amplifier baseplate exceeds a

threshold temperature. The TxAMP includes an internal thermal overload shutdown
circuit to prevent destruction due to lack of airflow from fan failure. Under this
condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged. This may be accomplished
by reducing the bias and switching off the input power. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating temperature, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance.
The alarm light flashes at a 1-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
The RF overdrive alarm

The Overdrive alarm is triggered when the input power level exceeds +7.0 dBm 0.75
dB. The amplifier shall not be damaged by an input signal, which is up to a level of
+14 dBm (the continuous Non-damaging Input Power level). This condition can last
indefinitely. Under this condition, the TxAMP protects itself from being damaged.
This may be accomplished by attenuating the input signal. When the condition clears,
after detection of normal operating input level, the TxAMP returns to the normal
operational state, without degraded performance. The TxAMP amplifier generates an
overdrive alarm during this condition. The amplifier automatically recovers to the
normal mode when the input overdrive condition ceases to exist for at least a period of
4 seconds.
The alarm light flashes at a 1/2-Hz rate to indicate this alarm.
Amplifier failure alarm

The Amplifier Failure alarm is triggered when internal monitor circuits within the
TxAMP detect that the drain current is out of operating range or the output power level
is too low. Alarm hysteresis is such that power glitches will not cause false alarms.
The LAM has two LEDs located on the front plate: one green and one red. The green
LED is illuminated when the LAM is powered on and no alarms are detected. The red
LED is illuminated when any LAM alarm is activated. A flashing RED LED indicates
a transient failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

TxAMP alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TxAMP LEDs

The LEDs for the TxAMPs indicate these conditions.

Label/color

Condition

ALM (red)

Alarm flashes at different rate depending on fault

ACT (green)

Active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-10

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

Fan tray LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the fan trays.

Label/color

Condition

GREEN

Normal

RED

Fault

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

Purpose

This section provides information on user alarm requirements for a 9224 Sub-Compact
EN cabinet cell site.
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
Each cable supports four alarms.
The IOU does not provide any alarms of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame
alarms and user alarms to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
The following figures shows the location of the user alarms for the 9224 Sub-Compact
EN cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-12

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable functions

The following table describes the functions of the facilities alarm cables.
Cable

Use

Cable type

Number of
lines/alarms
per cable

Max
Cables

Connector
type

User
alarms

User alarms defined

by customer

4 twisted pair

4 alarms

RJ-45 on both
ends

User alarm cable connections at the cabinet

The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the cabinets
PIM.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable

Lines

Interface at PIM

User alarms

Alarms 8 to 11

User alarms 1 to 4

Alarms 12 to 15

User alarms 5 to 8

User alarm wiring

The following table shows the user alarm wiring for 9224 Sub-Compact EN.
Jack

User alarms

Signal

Pin
number

J1-C

User alarm 8+

User alarm 8-

User alarm 9+

User alarm 9-

User alarm 10+

User alarm 10-

User alarm 11+

User alarm 11-

User alarm 12+

User alarm 12-

User alarm 13+

User alarm 13-

User alarm 14+

User alarm 14-

User alarm 15+

User alarm 15-

10

11

J1-G

12

13

14

15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-14

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Jack

User alarms

Signal

Pin
number

J1-H

0 - PMJ

Power Major Alarm +

Power Major Alarm -

Power Minor Alarm +

Power Minor Alarm -

AC Main Fail +

AC Main Fail -

Battery discharge +

Battery Discharge -

1 - PMN

2 - ACF

4- BD

User alarm cable description

The following table provides the pin numbers, wire colors and, functions for the
facilities cables provided with the cabinet.
Facilities
cable
Alarm cable

Lines
User alarms 8
to 11 or 12 to
15
Power alarms
0,1,2 4

RJ-45 pin
#

Wire Color of
the Cable

Function

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

White-Blue

User_Alm+

Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

User alarm cable connections at the NIU

If the NIU have punchdown terminals instead of 8-position modular jacks.

User alarm wire color

Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Orange

User alarm 8+ or 12+

Orange

User alarm 8- or 12-

White-Green

User alarm 9+ or 13+

Green

User alarm 9- or 13-

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact EN user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarm wire color

Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Blue

User alarm 10- or 14-

Blue

User alarm 10+ or 14+

White-Brown

User alarm 11+ or 15+

Brown

User alarm 11- or 15-

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-16

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

Purpose

This chapter provides information on user alarm requirements for an indoor and
outdoor9224 Sub-Compact cell site.
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
The IOU (can be either one of HIOU, CIOU, or IOU-1) does not provide any alarms
of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame alarms and user alarms to the URC(s) via
the I2C bus.
User/power alarm twisted pair cable

A 9224 Sub-Compact equipped with an HIOU or CIOU can accept eight power alarms
and 14 user alarms. One user alarm cable is required for 16 alarms.
A 9224 Sub-Compact equipped with an IOU-1 can accept a maximum of 12 user
alarms. These user alarms can be used for power and/or other user alarms.
Cable functions

The following table describes the functions of the facilities alarm cables for the 9224
Sub-Compact.
Cable

Use

Cable type

Number of Max
lines/alarms Cables
per cable

Connector type

User alarms

User alarms defined

by customer

4 twisted pair

4 alarms

RJ-45 on both
ends

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Facilities cable connections at the cabinet

The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the PIM of the
cabinet .
Cable

Lines

Interface at PIM

User alarms

Alarms 8 to 11

User alarms 1 to 4

Alarms 12 to 15

User alarms 5 to 8

User alarm cable description for outdoor cabinet

The following table provides the pin numbers, wire colors and, functions for the
facilities cables provided with the Outdoor cabinet.
Facilities
cable

Lines

RJ-45
pin #

Wire Color of the

Cable

Function

Alarm cable

User alarms
8 to 11 or 12
to 15

White-Orange

User_Alm+

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm+

Green

User_Alm-

White-Blue

User_Alm+

Blue

User_Alm-

White-Brown

User_Alm+

Brown

User_Alm-

Power alarms
0,1,2-4

User alarm cable connections for outdoor cabinet

Refer to the following table for wire color codes and punchdown information at the
NIU or optional Z-IDC punchdown blocks.
User alarm #

Function

Wire color in user

alarm cable from
BTS 4400 to be
punched down at
NIU or optional
Z-IDC

Punchdown
position on
optional Z-IDC
block
(See Note)

User Alarms 0-7 are used for Power Alarms if HIOU or CIOU is installed in BTS 4400
(See Appendix C)
User 16 Alarm

White/Blue

(+)

4-1 Upper

Blue/White

(-)

4-1 Lower

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-18

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Function

Punchdown
position on
optional Z-IDC
block
(See Note)

User alarm #

Wire color in user

alarm cable from
BTS 4400 to be
punched down at
NIU or optional
Z-IDC

User 17 Alarm

White/Orange

(+)

4-2 Upper

Orange/White

(-)

4-2 Lower

White/Green

(+)

4-3 Upper

Green/White

(-)

4-3 Lower

White/Brown

(+)

4-4 Upper

Brown/White

(-)

4-4 Lower

White/Slate

(+)

4-5 Upper

Slate/White

(-)

4-5 Lower

Red/Blue

(+)

4-6 Upper

Blue/Red

(-)

4-6 Lower

Red/Orange

(+)

4-7 Upper

Orange/Red

(-)

4-7 Lower

Red/Green

(+)

4-8 Upper

Green/Red

(-)

4-8 Lower

Red/Brown

(+)

4-9 Upper

Brown/Red

(-)

4-9 Lower

Red/Slate

(+)

4-10 Upper

Slate/Red

(-)

4-10 Lower

Black/Blue

(+)

5-1 Upper

Blue/Black

(-)

5-1 Lower

Black/Orange

(+)

5-2 Upper

Orange/Black

(-)

5-2 Lower

Black/Green

(+)

5-3 Upper

Green/Black

(-)

5-3 Lower

Black/Brown

(+)

5-4 Upper

Brown/Black

(-)

5-4 Lower

User 18 Alarm

User 19 Alarm

User 20 Alarm

User 21 Alarm

User 22 Alarm

User 23 Alarm

User 24 Alarm

User 25 Alarm

User 26 Alarm

User 27 Alarm

User 28 Alarm

User 29 Alarm

Z-IDC positions 5 to 10 are not used.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Notes:

1.

5-2 Upper = Z-IDC Module 5, Position #2 Upper

2.

5-1 Lower = Z-IDC Module 5, Position #1 Lower

3.

(+) = Alarm

4.

(-) = Return

5.

A BTS 4400 equipped with an IOU-1 can accept a maximum of 12 user alarms (Alarms
16-27). This includes both power and other user alarms. Z-IDC blocks 4 and 5 are used
for these alarms.

User alarm cable connections at the NIU for outdoor cabinet

If the NIU have punchdown terminals instead of 8-position modular jacks.

User alarm wire color

Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Orange

User alarm 8+ or 12+

Orange

User alarm 8- or 12-

White-Green

User alarm 9+ or 13+

Green

User alarm 9- or 13-

White-Blue

User alarm 10- or 14-

Blue

User alarm 10+ or 14+

White-Brown

User alarm 11+ or 15+

Brown

User alarm 11- or 15-

User alarm cable connections for Indoor cabinet

Refer to the following table for wire color codes and user alarm wiring information.
User alarm
#

HIOU or CIOU
Typical Wire
color

IOU1
J8 (37-pin
D-Sub pin #)

Typical Wire
color

J7 (25-pin
D-Sub pin #)

User Alarms 0-7 are used for Power Alarms if HIOU or CIOU is installed in BTS 4400
(See Appendix C)
User 16
Alarm

Red/Brown

Black/Slate

Brown/Red

20

Slate/Black

14

User 17
Alarm

Red/Slate

Yellow/Blue

Slate/Red

21

Blue/Yellow

15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-20

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

9224 Sub-Compact user alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarm
#

HIOU or CIOU

IOU1

Typical Wire
color

J8 (37-pin
D-Sub pin #)

User 18
Alarm

Black/Blue

White/Blue

Blue/Black

22

Blue/White

16

User 19
Alarm

Black/Orange

White/Orange

Orange/Black

23

Orange/White

17

User 20
Alarm

Black/Green

White/Green

Green/Black

24

Green/White

18

User 21
Alarm

Black/Brown

White/Brown

6 Upper

Brown/Black

25

Brown/White

19

User 22
Alarm

Black/Slate

White/Slate

Slate/Black

26

Slate/White

20

User 23
Alarm

Yellow/Blue

Red/Blue

Blue/Yellow

27

Blue/Red

21

User 24
Alarm

Yellow/Orange

Red/Orange

Orange/Yellow

28

Orange/Red

22

User 25
Alarm

Yellow/Green

10

Red/Green

10

Green/Yellow

29

Green/Red

23

User 26
Alarm

Yellow/Brown

11

Red/Brown

11

Brown/Yellow

30

Brown/Red

24

User 27
Alarm

Yellow/Slate

12

Red/Slate

12

Slate/Yellow

31

Slate/Red

25

User 28
Alarm

Violet/Blue

13

N/C

N/C

Blue/Violet

32

N/C

N/C

User 29
Alarm

Violet/Orange

14

N/C

N/C

Orange/Violet

33

N/C

N/C

Typical Wire
color

J7 (25-pin
D-Sub pin #)

Notes:

1.

A BTS 4400 equipped with an IOU-1 can accept a maximum of 12 user alarms (Alarms
16-27). This includes both power and other user alarms. Z-IDC blocks 4,5 are used for
these alarms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power Alarms
Overview

Each alarm generated by the power system shall be provided by a set of isolated dry
relay contacts, an alarm state may be indicated by a closed circuit or an open
circuit. If an alarm condition is indicated by a closed circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present a contact closure when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. If an alarm condition is indicated by a open circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present an open circuit when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. The resistance of a closed circuit shall be less than 100 ohms. The resistance
of an open circuit shall be greater than 1 megohm.
The software configuration must be programmed to report an open circuit or closed
circuit for an alarm condition. (The software is configured for a contact closure for
power system alarms. A software change to the user alarm definitions is required to
announce a power system an open circuit as an alarm condition). Therefore, each
specific power alarm function maintains its identity throughout the network and cannot
be used for any other purpose.
User/power alarm twisted pair cable

A 9224 Sub-Compact equipped with an HIOU or CIOU can accept eight power alarms
and 14 user alarms. One user alarm cable is required for 16 alarms.
A 9224 Sub-Compact equipped with an IOU-1 can accept a maximum of 12 user
alarms. These can be used to connect both power and other user alarms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-22

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Typical power system interface for power alarms

The following figure shows the electrical interfaces for alarms in a typical power
system in the 9224 Sub-Compact EN.
PMJ

Typical Power System

PMN
ACF

Denotes contact

Alarms to Sub-Compact-EN
BTS 4400
00

closure when alarm

INTR

conditions exists

AC Input
Power

BD
FA
BD-2

N/D
- 48V DC
- 48V DC

Up to two DC power
feeder pair
ir
to BTS 4400
00
1

Frame ground

PMJ: Power Major Alarm

PMN: Power Minor Alarm
ACF: AC Fail
INTR: Intrusion Alarm
BD: Batteries on Discharge, first stage
FA: Fuse Alarm
BD-2: Batteries on Discharge, second stage
N/D Not Defined (customer definable)

Cable functions

The following table describes the functions of the facilities alarm cables.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable

Use

Cable type

Number of
lines/alarms
per cable

Max
Cables

Connector
type

Power
alarm

User alarms defined by

customer

4 twisted pair

4 alarms

RJ-45
on both
ends

Power alarm cable connections at the cabinet

The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the cabinets
PIM.
Cable

Lines

Interface at PIM

Power alarm

0,1,2,4

Rectifier alarm

Power alarm cable connections at the NIU

If the NIU have punchdown terminals instead of 8-position modular jacks.

Power alarm wire color

Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Orange

User alarm 0+

Orange

User alarm 0-

White-Green

User alarm 1+

Green

User alarm 1-

White-Blue

User alarm 2-

Blue

User alarm 2+

White-Brown

User alarm 4+

Brown

User alarm 4-

Alarms and Status

The power module provides alarms and indicators. The primary power controller
collects alarms from the internal and external battery cabinets as well as growth
cabinet rectifiers. Alarms are reported to the user interface panel in the form of relay
contact closures. Alternative implementations may utilize solid-state relays or
opto-coupled devices to provide isolation from the controller circuitry and achieve the
equivalent contact closure. The - designation of each alarm is referenced to the
system ground. The relay or solid-state devices have an open circuit voltage rating of
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-24

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 VDC. The Alarm interface and general description is in the table below.
Alarm
Name

ID

Relay

Name

Description

Urgent
Power
(Power
Major)

PMJ

Form B

PowMaj+ Pow
Maj-

Issued by power controller when any

condition occurs that impacts the
capabilities of the users equipment,
thereby requiring immediate
attention.

Non-Urgent
Power
(Power
Minor)

PMN

Form B

PowMin+
PowMin-

Issued by power controller when any

condition occurs that would require
service but does not immediately
impact the users equipment. Also
generated by a contact closure
between BAT FAN ALM RTN and
BAT FAN ALM NC indicating that a
fan in the internal or external battery
compartment is not operational.

Mains
Failure (AC
Fail)

ACF

Form B

AcFail+ AcFail-

Issued by the power controller when

it recognizes that AC input power to
any of the rectifiers has been
disrupted.

Battery
Discharge

BD

Form B

BattDis+ BattDis-

Issued by the power controller when

the system output voltage drops
below 25.0 VDC (user adjustable
from between 23 to 26.5 VDC).

Notes:

1.

Relays are energized open and close on alarm.

2.

Refer to Alarm Reference for alarm conditions.

The table below lists the system conditions for each alarm. Reference is made to
Rectifier specification for Alarm indication definition. Each alarm shall be supported
by close on alarm type floating contacts.
Condition

Caused By

Normal Operation

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Failed Controller

No power

BD/Low Volt Alarm

Output < 25 V

High Volt Alarm

Output > 29.0 V

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condition

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

BD2

Output < 22 V

Battery Disconnect

Loss of AC Input on one

Rectifier

AC Failure

Loss of AC Input on two

or more Rectifiers

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating fuse tripped

with load applied Battery
or LVBD open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

Battery Failure

Output < 23.0 V during

test

Rectifier Alarm

Malfunction on one
Rectifier

Rectifier Current Share

Current Share failure or

Rectifier Fuse Open

Rectifier Failure

Malfunction on more than

one Rectifier

Communication Failure

Module Loss of
Communication

Low Temperature
Alarm

Temperature < -30C

High Temperature
Alarm

Temperature > 75C

Temperature Probe
Failure

No probe connected

Fan Alarm

Internal/External Battery
Fan Failure

Failed Controller

No

BD2

Output L22V

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating Fuse Tripped

with Load Applied
Battery or LVBM Open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

An RS-232 computer interface connector is available on the controller for the user to
access the controller alarm conditions and program some of its functions. The alarms
reported on this interface could be limited to rectifier related functions.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-26

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rectifier Controller Alarms

The List 1 and List 2 Power Controllers are equipped with seven T1 size, right angle,
pwb mount LEDs. The LEDs are viewable through the Front panel and defined as
shown in the following table.
Function

Color

Label

Description

Major Power Alarm

Red

PJM

Shall light when a major

alarm is detected

Minor Power Alarm

Yellow

RMN

Shall light when a minor

alarm is detected

AC Mains Failure
Alarm

Red

ACF

Shall light when AC mains

failure is detected

Battery Discharge

Red

BD

Shall light when batteries

are discharging

Temp Fault

Red

TEMP

Shall light when

temperature related fault
detected

Fuse Fault

Red

FUSE

Shall light when battery

fuse opened or LVBD
contactor failed

Power On

Green

PWR

Shall light when input

power is applied to the
controller

DC power system alarms for outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact

The outdoor 9224 Sub-Compactconfiguration can have eight power alarms. The
following tables list a minimum set of alarm functions provided, which alert and
announce power system failures.
Important! If the DC power system does not support some of the alarms as
described below, it is strongly recommended that the customer do not connect
alarms for different equipment to these user alarms. Because these power alarms
are reported back to the core network, it is important that the customer maintains
the circuit integrity to avoid misinterpretations when reporting equipment alarms
and failures.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table shows power alarm cable assignment connections for the outdoor
9224 Sub-Compact cabinet
Table 10-2

Power alarm cable assignment and connections at the NIU for

outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact

Alarm function

Alarm #

Wire color (recommended)

Power Major (PMJ)

White/Blue
Blue/White

Power Minor (PMN)

White/Orange
Orange/White

AC Fail (ACF)

White/Green
Green/White

Power Cabinet Intrusion

(INTR)

Batteries on Discharge (BD)

White/Brown
Brown/White
White/Grey
Grey/White

Fuse Alarm

Red/Blue
Blue/Red

Batteries on Discharge (BD)

2

Customer Definable

Red/Orange
Orange/Red
Red/Green
Green/Red

DC power system alarms for indoor 9224 Sub-Compact

The indoor 9224 Sub-Compact can have eight power alarms. All alarms are punched
down at Z-IDC punchdown blocks external to the radio cabinet. The Z-IDC accepts
0.25 mm2(24 AWG), solid, tinned twisted pair cables. Alarms are reported to the radio
cabinet from Z-IDC blocks through a twisted pair cable during installation.
The following table lists a minimum set of alarm functions provided, which alert and
announce power system failures, and power alarm cable pin assignments and
connections on the NIU or Z-IDC block.
Important! If the DC power system does not support some of the alarms as
described below, it is strongly recommended that the customer do not connect
alarms for different equipment to these user alarms. Because these power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-28

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

are reported back to the core network, it is important that the customer maintains
the circuit integrity to avoid misinterpretations when reporting equipment alarms
and failures.
Table 10-3
Alarm
function

Power alarm cable assignment and connections on the NIU or

optional Z-IDC for indoor 9224 Sub-Compact
Alarm #

Power Major
(PMJ)

Power
Minor
(PMN)

AC Fail
(ACF)

Power
Cabinet
Intrusion
(INTR)

Batteries on
Discharge
(BD)

Fuse Alarm

Batteries on
Discharge
(BD) 2

Customer
Definable

Wire color code

for NIU and Z-IDC
blocks

Function

Punchdown
position on
optional Z-IDC
block1

White/Blue

(+)

3-1 Upper

Blue/White

(-)

3-1 Lower

White/Orange

(+)

3-2 Upper

Orange/White

(-)

3-2 Lower

White/Green

(+)

3-3 Upper

Green/White

(-)

3-3 Lower

White/Brown

(+)

3-4 Upper

Brown/White

(-)

3-4 Lower

White/Grey

(+)

3-5 Upper

Grey/White

(-)

3-5 Lower

Red/Blue

(+)

3-6 Upper

Blue/Red

(-)

3-6 Lower

Red/Orange

(+)

3-7 Upper

Orange/Red

(-)

3-7 Lower

Red/Green

(+)

3-8 Upper

Green/Red

(-)

3-8 Lower

Notes:

1.

3-1 Upper = Z-IDC Module 3, Position # 1.Upper and 3-2 Lower = Z-IDC Module 3,
Position #1 Lower.

DC power system alarms for 9224 Sub-Compact EN

The 9224 Sub-Compact EN configuration can have eight power alarms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Power Alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following tables list a minimum set of alarm functions provided, which alert and
announce power system failures.
Important! If the DC power system does not support some of the alarms as
described below, it is strongly recommended that the customer do not connect
alarms for different equipment to these user alarms. Because these power alarms
are reported back to the core network, it is important that the customer maintains
the circuit integrity to avoid misinterpretations when reporting equipment alarms
and failures.
The following table shows the user alarm wiring for 9224 Sub-Compact EN.
Table 10-4

User alarm wiring for 9224 Sub-Compact EN

Jack

User alarms

Signal

Pin #

J1-H

0 - PMJ

Power Major Alarm +

Power Major Alarm -

Power Minor Alarm +

Power Minor Alarm -

AC Main Fail +

AC Main Fail -

Battery discharge +

Battery Discharge -

1 - PMN

2 - ACF

4- BD

The following table shows power alarm cable assignment connections for the 9224
Sub-Compact EN.
Table 10-5

Power alarm cable assignment connections for 9224 Sub-Compact

EN

Alarm function

Alarm #

RJ-45 pin #

Power Major

White-Orange

Orange

White/Green

Green

Blue

White-Blue

White-Brown

Brown

(PMJ)
Power Minor

(PMN)
AC Fail (ACF)

Batteries on Discharge
(BD)

Wire color

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-30

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

Frame alarms indicate the failure of Power Converter Units (PCUs) and provide an
indication of intrusion on the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN.
The following figure shows the location of the frame alarms in the cabinet.

Frame Alarms

The following table lists the frame alarms for the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN.
Table 10-6

Frame alarms for the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN

Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Digital Module
Fan Tray

011

DM & DEM Fan

Failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
10-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact/EN alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 10-6

Frame alarms for the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN (continued)

Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Not Used

011

N/A

Amplifier Module
Fan Tray

011

Amplifier Module
Fan Failure (up to
3 Amplifier
Module fan
alarms)

Not Used

011

N/A

Not Used

011

N/A

Not Used

011

N/A

Module Enclosure

011

Cabinet Intrusion
Alarm

Heat Management
System

011

Heat Management
System Overtemp

Heat Management
System

011

Module Enclosure
Heat Management
System fan alarm

10

Heat Management
System

011

Primary Frame
Heat Management
System Heater
Alarm

11

Heat Management
System

011

10

Heat Management
System
Undertemp

12

Heat Management
System

011

11

Heat Management
Controller Fail

13

Heat Management
System

011

12

Clogged Fresh Air

Filter Alarm

14

Not Used

011

13

N/A

15

Not Used

011

14

N/A

16

Not Used

011

15

N/A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

10-32

11

11
9234
d2U Distributed
alarm information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the 9234 d2U Distributed.
Contents
Alarm collection

11-2

CTU and OM alarms

11-4

URC alarms

11-5

CMU alarms

11-6

OCM-II alarms

11-7

Intrusion alarm

11-8

Fan tray alarms

11-9

User alarms

11-10

Power alarms

11-14

Frame alarms

11-21

RRH alarms

11-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm collection
Alarm collection

The following figure shows the alarm collection in the 9234 d2U Distributed cabinet.
Alarm reporting

Most alarms are collected by the I2C with exceptions noted in the descriptions.

The CPC alarms connect directly to the URC via the I2C bus through the IOU and
the backplane.
The Input/Output Unit serves as a physical alarm collection point, as well as a
supplier of digital output signals. Since it is an alarm collection point, the IOU
proxy performs alarm monitoring.
The I2C serial bus is used to interconnect the URC(s), CPCs, TxAMPs and the IOU
for purposes of alarm collection, inventory control and other potential (future)
control/status reporting functions.
LNA over current and DC-DC Converter alarms are reported via a discrete cable to
the TDU. The TDU passes the alarms by the I2C bus, through the FAC/FAC-D and
IOU to the URC(s). The TDU sets the appropriate bit(s) on its 16-bit I2C port
expander(s) to indicate the alarm condition, where they are reported to the URC.
The following devices report their alarms to the URC via the I2C bus with the
name of the alarm indicating the type of failure reported.

Digital Shelf Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 1 Fan Failure

Amplifier Shelf 2 Fan Failure

Cabinet Intrusion Alarm

Heat Management System Overtemp

Primary frame heat management system fan alarm

Primary frame heat management system heat alarm

Heat Management System Undertemp

Heat Management System Controller Fail

Heat Management System Compressor Fail.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-2

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Alarm collection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm reporting summary

System alarm reporting is summarized in the table below for the 9234 d2U Distributed.
Type

Unit

Alarm Reporting Mechanism

RF

TxAMP (C1PAM,
C2PAM, P2PAM, iPAM)

I2C via cable to PIM and then backplane to URC via

I 2C

LNA on DLM

Use filter 1 2C bus address (via backplane to URC

via 12C

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

Use filter 12C bus address (via backplane to URC

via 12C), monitoring is via A/D converter with 12C
interface in the TTTM

TTLNA (non AISG

compliant)

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane to

URC)

RET

RS-485 bus (cabled to PIM and then backplane to

URC)

UCR/MCR/UCRe

ARCNET bus

URC/URC-II

Directly to RCS over facilities interface

CMU

IEEE-1394 packet bus (Firewire)

CTU-II

ARCNET

PIM (secondary power

alarm)

Use CPC 12C bus address (via backplane to URC

via I2C)

Fan Tray

Use frame alarm (via cable to PIM and then to URC

via I2C bus)

Heat Management
System

Cabled Frame alarm connection to PIM then

backplane to URC

Rectifier power
(rectifier battery)

Use user alarms (via cable to PIM and then

backplane to URC via I 2C

Digital

Other

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

CTU and OM alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU and OM alarms

CTU hardware errors

The CTU generates hardware errors on the peripheral bus due to these conditions:

GPS satellites cannot be traced

Satellite lock has been lost and flywheeling is in process

GPS receiver failure.

CTU LEDs

The LED indicators listed below are available for each CTU.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

CTU failure

NVM (yellow)

Context-sensitive event in progress (for example,

NVM download)

RDY (green)

CTU enabled for generating clock signals, and the

OM and GPS are functional

OM FAIL (red)

OM failure

FLY EX (red)

CTU has exceeded the maximum flywheel time

LOCK GPS (green)

GPS unit is locked to the GPS satellite signal

OM LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the OM.

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

RDY (green)

Ready, indicates that at least one of the

six analog clock outputs is active

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-4

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

URC alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

URC alarms
URC LEDs

The URC provides the following LEDs to indicate status and alarms conditions:
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Board failure

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

URC operational

L1 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L2 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L3 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

L4 (red)

T1/E1 line failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

CMU alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CMU alarms
CMU LEDs

The three LED indicators listed below are available for the CMU.
Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

The CMU has failed diagnostics, one or more CEs

have failed to initialize, or another component has
failed to initialize

NVM (yellow)

NVM update in progress

RDY (green)

The CCU is functioning properly and at least one CE

is enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-6

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

OCM-II alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OCM-II alarms
OCM-II LEDs

The eight LED indicators listed in the following table are available on the OCM-II
faceplate.
Table 11-1

9234 d2U Distributed OCM-II LEDs

Label/color

Condition

STAT (red/green/yellow)

a unit status indicator (1 LED)

FL (red/green)

one port status indicator (pass/fail) for each CPRI port (3

LEDs)

SW (red/green)

one transmit state indicator per CPRI port switch (3 LEDs).

ETH (yellow)

Maintenance port status indicator (1 LED).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Intrusion alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarm
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-8

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Fan tray alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan tray alarms

Fan tray LED

A binary LED indicator listed below is available on the fan trays.

Label/color

Condition

GREEN

Normal

RED

Fault

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms
Overview

User alarms are provided for use by the service provider to report cell site alarms that
are not triggered by the base station itself.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

User alarm description

User alarm points are external to the base station and their lines are surge-protected.
Since they connect to external equipment, these user alarms are electrically isolated
from the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Unit (RFDU) circuitry. They are two-lead current
loops where a closed circuit indicates a normal condition and an open circuit indicates
an alarm. The user alarm polarity can be inverted by software according to cell
translations.
The IOU does not provide any alarms of its own. Its main purpose is passing frame
alarms and user alarms to the URC(s) via the I2C bus.
The 9234 d2U Distributed cabinet uses up to eight user alarms. Each cable with RJ-45
supports four user alarms.
If power alarms are provided by an external power cabinet, they are treated as user
alarms.
The following figure shows the locations for User Alarms 0-7.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-10

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the locations for User Alarms 8-31.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable functions

This table describes the user alarms for the 9234 d2U Distributed cabinet. The number
of lines to be connected at each conduit entry port will vary. The minimum and
maximum number of lines in each conduit entry port is given in the following table.
Cable

Use

Cable
type

Number Max.
Cables
of
lines
per
cable

Connector
type

Conduit /Cable
Gland (outdoor)

User/
Power
alarms

User alarms
defined by
customer

8
twisted
pair

RJ-45 on
both ends

One inch conduit

(35 mm holes)

Facilities cable connections

The following table shows where the facilities cables are connected at the
nano-Protection Module (nPM) or indoor 9234 d2U Distributed.
Cable

Line number

Interface at nPM/d2U indoor

User alarms

Alarms 0 to 3

USR 03

Alarms 4 to 7

USR 47

User alarms wire colors and punchdown positions

The user alarms are conducted via two identical cables (alarms 0 to 3 and alarms 4 to
7) as follows:
User alarm wire color

Function

RJ-45 pin #

White-Orange

User alarm 0+ or 4+

Orange

User alarm 0 or 4

White-Green

User alarm 1+ or 5+

Green

User alarm 1 or 5

Blue

User alarm 2+ or 6+

White-Blue

User alarm 2 or 6

White-Brown

User alarm 3+ or 7+

Brown

User alarm 3 or 7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-12

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Facilities cable wire colors and pin assignments

The following table shows wire colors and pin assignments when 8-pair user alarms
cable is used for 8 alarms:
Facilities
cable

Cable #

RJ-45 pin #

Wire color

Function

Alarm Cable
No. 1

P1

White-Orange

User_Alm

Orange

User_Alm-

White-Green

User_Alm

Green

User_Alm-

Blue

User_Alm

White-Blue

User_Alm-

Whit-Brown

User_Alm

Brown

User_Alm-

Red-Blue

User_Alm

Blue-Red

User_Alm-

Red-Orange

User_Alm

Orange-Red

User_Alm-

Gray-White

User_Alm

White-Gray

User_Alm-

Red-Green

User_Alm

Green-Red

User_Alm-

Alarm Cable
No. 2

P2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarms
Overview

Each alarm generated by the power system shall be provided by a set of isolated dry
relay contacts, an alarm state may be indicated by a closed circuit or an open
circuit. If an alarm condition is indicated by a closed circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present a contact closure when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. If an alarm condition is indicated by a open circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present an open circuit when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. The resistance of a closed circuit shall be less than 100 ohms. The resistance
of an open circuit shall be greater than 1 megohm. The following table also provides
for the standard power system alarm assignments and connection points for the 9234
d2U Distributed.
Typical power system interface for alarms

The following figure shows the electrical interfaces for power alarms of a typical
power system.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-14

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PMJ

Typical Power System

Denotes contact
closure when alarm
conditions exist

PMN
ACF

Alarms to d2U cabinet

BD

AC Input
Power from
utility

+24/-48V DC
+24/-48V DC

Up to eight (8) DC power

connectorized feeds:
Up to two (2) for d2U cabinets
and up to six (6) for the
RRH cabinets

Frame ground
PMJ: Power Major Alarm
PMN: Power Minor Alarm
ACF: AC Fail
BD: Batteries on Discharge, first stage

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms and Status

The power module provides alarms and indicators. The primary power controller
collects alarms from the internal and external battery cabinets as well as growth
cabinet rectifiers. Alarms are reported to the user interface panel in the form of relay
contact closures. Alternative implementations may utilize solid-state relays or
opto-coupled devices to provide isolation from the controller circuitry and achieve the

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-16

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

equivalent contact closure. The - designation of each alarm is referenced to the

system ground. The relay or solid-state devices have an open circuit voltage rating of
30 VDC. The Alarm interface and general description is in the table below.
Alarm
Name

ID

Relay

Name

Description

Urgent
Power
(Power
Major)

PMJ

Form B

PowMaj+
Pow Maj-

Issued by power controller when any

condition occurs that impacts the
capabilities of the users equipment,
thereby requiring immediate
attention.

Non-Urgent
Power
(Power
Minor)

PMN

Form B

PowMin+
PowMin-

Issued by power controller when any

condition occurs that would require
service but does not immediately
impact the users equipment. Also
generated by a contact closure
between BAT FAN ALM RTN and
BAT FAN ALM NC indicating that a
fan in the internal or external
battery compartment is not
operational.

Mains
Failure (AC
Fail)

ACF

Form B

AcFail+
AcFail-

Issued by the power controller when

it recognizes that AC input power to
any of the rectifiers has been
disrupted.

Battery
Discharge

BD

Form B

BattDis+
BattDis-

Issued by the power controller when

the system output voltage drops
below 25.0 VDC (user adjustable
from between 23 to 26.5 VDC).

Notes:

1.

Relays are energized open and close on alarm.

2.

Refer to Alarm Reference for alarm conditions.

The following table lists the system conditions for each alarm. Reference is made to
Rectifier specification for Alarm indication definition. Each alarm shall be supported
by close on alarm type floating contacts.
Condition

Normal Operation

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Condition

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Failed Controller

No power

BD/Low Volt
Alarm

Output < 25 V

High Volt Alarm

Output > 29.0 V

BD2

Output < 22 V

Battery Disconnect

Loss of AC Input on
one Rectifier

AC Failure

Loss of AC Input on
two or more
Rectifiers

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating fuse
tripped with load
applied Battery or
LVBD open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

Battery Failure

Output < 23.0 V

during test

Rectifier Alarm

Malfunction on one
Rectifier

Rectifier Current
Share

Current Share
failure or Rectifier
Fuse Open

Rectifier Failure

Malfunction on
more than one
Rectifier

Communication
Failure

Module Loss of
Communication

Low Temperature
Alarm

Temperature <
-30C

High Temperature
Alarm

Temperature > 75C

Temperature Probe
Failure

No probe connected

Fan Alarm

Internal/External
Battery Fan Failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-18

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Condition

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Failed Controller

No

BD2

Output L22V

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating Fuse
Tripped with Load
Applied Battery or
LVBM Open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

An RS-232 computer interface connector is available on the controller for the user to
access the controller alarm conditions and program some of its functions. The alarms
reported on this interface could be limited to rectifier related functions.
Rectifier Controller Alarms

The List 1 and List 2 Power Controllers are equipped with seven LEDs. The LEDs are
viewable through the front panel and defined as shown in the following table.
Function

Color

Label

Description

Major Power Alarm

Red

PJM

Shall light when a major alarm

is detected

Minor Power Alarm

Yellow

RMN

Shall light when a minor alarm

is detected

AC Mains Failure
Alarm

Red

ACF

Shall light when AC mains

failure is detected

Battery Discharge

Red

BD

Shall light when batteries are

discharging

Temp Fault

Red

TEMP

Shall light when temperature

related fault detected

Fuse Fault

Red

FUSE

Shall light when battery fuse

opened or LVBD contactor
failed

Power On

Green

PWR

Shall light when input power is

applied to the controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DC Power system alarms

The 9234 d2U Distributed cabinet has provisions to accept eight user alarm positions
total provided through two RJ-45 connectorized cables (four alarms maximum for each
RJ-45) at the 9234 d2U Distributed only. These user alarms are available at the 9234
d2U Distributed cabinet to alarm additional equipment.
The 9234 d2U Distributed software configuration must be programmed to report an
open circuit or closed circuit for an alarm condition. (The software is configured
for a contact closure for power system alarms. A software change to the user alarm
definitions is required to announce a power system an open circuit as an alarm
condition).
The following table lists a maximum set of alarm functions that can be provided to
alert and announce power system failures. There are four alarms that are specially
dedicated and provisioned ONLY for power available at the 9234 d2U Distributed only.
Important! If the DC power system does not support some of the alarms as
described below, it is strongly recommended that the customer do not connect
alarms for different equipment to these user alarms. Since these power alarms are
reported back to the core network, it is important that the customer maintains the
circuit integrity to avoid misinterpretations when reporting equipment alarms and
failures. Therefore, each specific power alarm function maintains its identity
throughout the network and should not be used for any other purpose..
Power alarm cable assignment connections
Alarm function

Alarm #

Power Major (PMJ)

User 0 Alarm

Power Minor (PMN)

User 1 Alarm

AC Fail (ACF)

User 2 Alarm

Batteries on Discharge (BD)

User 3 Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-20

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

Frame alarms indicate the failure of Power Converter Units (PCUs) and provide an
indication of intrusion.
The following figure shows the location of the frame alarms for the cabinet.

Frame Alarms for the 9234 d2U Distributed

The following table lists the frame alarms for the 9234 d2U Distributed.
Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Digital Module Fan

Tray

011

DM & DEM Fan

Failure

Not Used

011

N/A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Frame
Alarm
#

Message

IOU I2C Port

Address
(MUX1/Leg 2)

I2C Bit

Meaning

Amplifier Module Fan

Tray

011

Amplifier Module Fan

Failure (up to 3
Amplifier Module fan
alarms)

Not Used

011

N/A

Not Used

011

N/A

Not Used

011

N/A

Module Enclosure

011

Cabinet Intrusion
Alarm

Heat Management
System

011

Heat Management
System Overtemp

Heat Management
System

011

Module Enclosure
Heat Management
System fan alarm

10

Heat Management
System

011

Primary Frame Heat

Management System
Heater Alarm

11

Heat Management
System

011

10

Heat Management
System Undertemp

12

Heat Management
System

011

11

Heat Management
Controller Fail

13

Heat Management
System

011

12

Clogged Fresh Air

Filter Alarm

14

Not Used

011

13

N/A

15

Not Used

011

14

N/A

16

Not Used

011

15

N/A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

11-22

9234 d2U Distributed alarm information

RRH alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RRH alarms
Overview

RRH alarms are described in Chapter 12, CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm
information.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
11-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

12

12
CDMA
Remote Radio
Head alarm information

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents alarm information that pertains to the CDMA Remote Radio
Head (RRH).
The CDMA Remote Radio Head is used with the following base stations:

9234 d2U Distributed

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed

9228 Macro Distributed

Components

The RRH is a single-sector, self-contained radio module that includes the following
components:

RF transceiver for Band Class 1, 6, and 15.

Amplifier

One duplexing system

Optical interface

Power system

The RRH delivers a nominal 32 W long term average composite RF power at the
antenna port for AWS. The RRH is an outdoor product with an operating temperature
range of -40 C to +50 C, and uses natural convection cooling, so no fans are
required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For a complete functional description of the RRH, review one of the following system
descriptions:

9234 Base Station d2U Distributed System Description, 401-703-509

Alcatel-Lucent Base Stations Macro 9218, 9228, 9228 LP, 9228 HD, and 9228
Distributed System Description, 401-703-486

Alcatel-Lucent 9222 and 9222 Base Stations Micro Distributed (formerly AlcatelLucent CDMA Base Station 2400) System Description, 401-703-487

Contents
Intrusion alarm

12-3

RRH alarms

12-4

User alarms

12-5

Frame alarms

12-6

Power alarms

12-7

VSWR monitoring

12-12

Maintenance procedures for RRH

12-13

RRH field support

12-15

RRH operational test

12-16

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

12-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-2

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Intrusion alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Intrusion alarm
Intrusion alarm

An intrusion alarm is generated when the door of an outdoor cell site is opened.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

RRH alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RRH alarms
RRH LEDs

The LEDs for the RRH indicate the following conditions:

Label/color

Condition

FAIL (red)

Failure

FLT (yellow)

Fault (does not light up with NVM

download)

RDY (green)

Ready

Tx ON (green)

Transmit on

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-4

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

User alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

User alarms
Overview

A BTS is generally allocated 30 user alarms, numbered in the user interface as 0

through 29. These user alarms are generally collected at the BTS by a single unit. In
an RRH configuration, however, user alarms are collected by the BBU and by each
RRH. This use of multiple alarm collection points is accommodated with a
modification to the existing alarm mechanism. To deal with the multiple user alarm
collection points we designate only the BU-collected external alarms as user alarms,
while the RRH-collected external alarms are designated as (and handled as) frame
alarms.
With the introduction of FID-13019.19:

RRH user alarms can be equipped and unequipped using a screen on the cmodeqp
form.

RRH user alarm polarities can be entered (normal polarity can be either opened or
closed).

RRH monitors and reports the status on eight user alarms. These RRH user alarms
continue to be reported as frame alarms, however. Refer to Frame alarms
(p. 12-6) for requirements regarding the handling of RRH external alarms.
For FID 13019.1, user-specified text strings cannot be printed when an RRH
external alarm is generated, so a generic alarm string such as
CELL xxx RRH y EXTERNAL ALARM z SET or
CELL xxx RRH y EXTERNAL ALARM z CLEAR is printed and the user must
consult a local table to determine the alarm meaning.

When an RRH is OOS or not in contact with the cell controller, all user alarms
associated with that RRH are set to a state of INDETERMINATE. Changing from
SET/CLEAR to INDETERMINATE and back is not considered a change of state and
so is not reported to ROP.
RRH-reported user alarms are printed to ROP with an alarm severity of Minor unless
this is overridden by the User Defined Alarms feature.
User alarm parameters

User alarm parameters are defined in the cmodeqp RC/V form.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Frame alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Frame alarms
Overview

From an alarm collection perspective, a BTS supporting RRHs is composed of two

major alarmed units:

RRH- RRHs themselves do not actually generate frame alarms, all hardware fault
conditions that might typically be reported as frame alarms (high temperature,
intrusion, etc.) are reported as errors and handled by the defined error handling
mechanism. RRHs do however collect and report the status of eight external
alarms, which are essentially user alarms. These RRH external alarms are reported
using the frame alarm mechanism. The following requirements describe this
reporting.

BU- The base unit collects and reports its frame alarms as it does for non-RRH
configurations.

With the introduction of FID-13019.19, eight user alarms per RRH can be monitored
and reported for each RRH. The status of eight RRH external alarms are reported to
the user as frame alarms. The alarm reports identify the RRH unit number and the
external alarm number, as well as the new state of the alarm. For FID 13019.6, the
user-defined text string is added to the alarm report in place of the generic text string
previously used.
When an RRH is OOS or not in contact with the cell controller all frame alarms
associated with that RRH are set to a state of INDETERMINATE. Changing from
SET/CLEAR to INDETERMINATE and back is not considered a change of state and
so is not reported to ROP.
RRH alarm text strings

Text strings for RRH-reported frame alarms follow this format (where x is the RRH
unit number and y is the external alarm number):

When the external alarm contact transitions from open to closed an alarm is
generated with the following text string: RRH x External Alarm y OPEN. This
condition is considered to be an alarm state of CLEAR or NORMAL.
When the external alarm contact transitions from closed to open an alarm is
generated with the following text string: RRH x External Alarm y CLOSED.
This condition is considered to be an alarm state of SET or OFF-NORMAL.

RRH-reported frame alarms are printed to ROP with an alarm severity of Minor.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-6

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power alarms
Overview

Each alarm generated by the power system shall be provided by a set of isolated dry
relay contacts, an alarm state may be indicated by a closed circuit or an open
circuit. If an alarm condition is indicated by a closed circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present a contact closure when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. If an alarm condition is indicated by a open circuit, the DC power system
alarm contacts shall present an open circuit when the alarm circuit fails or looses
power. The resistance of a closed circuit shall be less than 100 ohm. The resistance
of an open circuit shall be greater than 1 megohm. The table on the next page also
provides for the standard power system alarm assignments and connection points for
the Remote Radio Head.
Alarms and Status

The power module provides alarms and indicators. The primary power controller
collects alarms from the internal and external battery cabinets as well as growth
cabinet rectifiers. Alarms are reported to the user interface panel in the form of relay
contact closures. Alternative implementations may utilize solid-state relays or
opto-coupled devices to provide isolation from the controller circuitry and achieve the
equivalent contact closure. The - designation of each alarm is referenced to the
system ground. The relay or solid-state devices have an open circuit voltage rating of
30 VDC. The Alarm interface and general description is in the table below.
Alarm
Name

ID

Relay

Name

Description

Urgent
Power
(Power
Major)

PMJ

Form B

PowMaj+
Pow Maj-

Issued by power controller when any

condition occurs that impacts the
capabilities of the users equipment,
thereby requiring immediate
attention.

Non-Urgent
Power
(Power
Minor)

PMN

Form B

PowMin+
PowMin-

Issued by power controller when any

condition occurs that would require
service but does not immediately
impact the users equipment. Also
generated by a contact closure
between BAT FAN ALM RTN and
BAT FAN ALM NC indicating that a
fan in the internal or external
battery compartment is not
operational.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm
Name

ID

Relay

Name

Description

Mains
Failure (AC
Fail)

ACF

Form B

AcFail+
AcFail-

Issued by the power controller when

it recognizes that AC input power to
any of the rectifiers has been
disrupted.

Battery
Discharge

BD

Form B

BattDis+
BattDis-

Issued by the power controller when

the system output voltage drops
below 25.0 VDC (user adjustable
from between 23 to 26.5 VDC).

Notes:

1.

Relays are energized open and close on alarm.

2.

Refer to Alarm Reference for alarm conditions.

The following table lists the system conditions for each alarm. Reference is made to
Rectifier specification for Alarm indication definition. Each alarm is supported by
close on alarm type floating contacts.
Condition

Caused By

Normal Operation

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Failed Controller

No power

BD/Low Volt
Alarm

Output < 25 V

High Volt Alarm

Output > 29.0 V

BD2

Output < 22 V

Battery Disconnect

Loss of AC Input on
one Rectifier

AC Failure

Loss of AC Input on
two or more
Rectifiers

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating fuse
tripped with load
applied Battery or
LVBD open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

Battery Failure

Output < 23.0 V

during test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-8

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Condition

Caused By

Operation of alarm contacts (1=closed, 0=open)

PMJ

PMN

ACF

FA

BD

BD2

Rectifier Alarm

Malfunction on one
Rectifier

Rectifier Current
Share

Current Share
failure or Rectifier
Fuse Open

Rectifier Failure

Malfunction on
more than one
Rectifier

Communication
Failure

Module Loss of
Communication

Low Temperature
Alarm

Temperature <
-30C

High Temperature
Alarm

Temperature > 75C

Temperature Probe
Failure

No probe connected

Fan Alarm

Internal/External
Battery Fan Failure

Failed Controller

No

BD2

Output L22V

Distribution Fuse
Alarm

Indicating Fuse
Tripped with Load
Applied Battery or
LVBM Open

Battery Fuse

Open Battery Fuse

An RS-232 computer interface connector is available on the controller for the user to
access the controller alarm conditions and program some of its functions. The alarms
reported on this interface could be limited to rectifier related functions.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rectifier Controller Alarms

The List 1 and List 2 Power Controllers are equipped with seven T1 size, right angle,
pwb mount LEDs. The LEDs are viewable through the Front panel and defined as
shown in the following table.
Function

Color

Label

Description

Major Power Alarm

Red

PJM

Shall light when a major alarm

is detected

Minor Power Alarm

Yellow

RMN

Shall light when a minor alarm

is detected

AC Mains Failure
Alarm

Red

ACF

Shall light when AC mains

failure is detected

Battery Discharge

Red

BD

Shall light when batteries are

discharging

Temp Fault

Red

TEMP

Shall light when temperature

related fault detected

Fuse Fault

Red

FUSE

Shall light when battery fuse

opened or LVBD contactor
failed

Power On

Green

PWR

Shall light when input power is

applied to the controller

DC Power system alarms

The RRH cabinet reports user alarms back to the Remote Radio Head.
The Remote Radio Head has provisions to accept eight user alarm positions total
provided through two RJ-45 connectorized cables (four alarms maximum for each
RJ-45) at the Remote Radio Head only. These user alarms are available at the Remote
Radio Head to alarm additional equipment.
The Remote Radio Head software configuration must be programmed to report an
open circuit or closed circuit for an alarm condition. (The software is configured
for a contact closure for power system alarms. A software change to the user alarm
definitions is required to announce a power system an open circuit as an alarm
condition).
The following table lists a maximum set of alarm functions that can be provided to
alert and announce power system failures. There are four alarms that are specially
dedicated and provisioned ONLY for power available at the Remote Radio Head only.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-10

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Power alarms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! If the DC power system does not support some of the alarms as
described below, it is strongly recommended that the customer do not connect
alarms for different equipment to these user alarms. Since these power alarms are
reported back to the core network, it is important that the customer maintains the
circuit integrity to avoid misinterpretations when reporting equipment alarms and
failures. Therefore, each specific power alarm function maintains its identity
throughout the network and should not be used for any other purpose..
Power alarm cable assignment connections
Alarm function

Alarm #

Power Major (PMJ)

User 0 Alarm

Power Minor (PMN)

User 1 Alarm

AC Fail (ACF)

User 2 Alarm

Batteries on Discharge (BD)

User 3 Alarm

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

VSWR monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VSWR monitoring
For any TX signal above 23 dBm, the VSWR meter measures whether the VSWR is
below or above the following pre-defined thresholds:
Threshold

Accuracy

1.5:1

2 dB

2:1

+2 dB/-1.5 dB

3:1

1.5 dB

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-12

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Maintenance procedures for RRH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance procedures for RRH

Purpose

The following sections describe, at a high level, the maintenance operations supported
by base stations relevant to the RRH.
RUI maintenance operations

The following maintenance actions are supported for an RUI:

RMV

RST
DGN

Each of these actions results in a reset of the RUI, which interrupts communication to
the attached RRHs. This leads to the following requirements related to these RUI
maintenance actions:

a camp-on must be executed for all paths supported by RRHs served by this RUI

these paths must be blocked

once the camp-on has completed the RRHs associated with this RUI are removed
from service

When the RUI returns to service the RRHs are then restored to service since they were
out of service due to parent.
Note: RRHs do not autonomously reset on loss of communication with the RUI
until after a period of one hour has expired. They will therefore generally be in
their previous state once communication is restored, with the exception that RF
transmission will be disabled if the communication is lost for more than 30
seconds.
RRH maintenance operations

The following maintenance actions are supported for an RRH:

RMV

RST

DGN

Each of these actions results in a reset of the RRH, which interrupts calls on all paths
supported by this RRH. This leads to the following requirements related to these RRH
maintenance actions:

a camp-on must be executed for all paths supported by the RRH

these paths must then be blocked

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

Maintenance procedures for RRH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note that RUI port errors will be generated as the RRH resets since there will be a
temporary disruption of the CPRI link received at that RUI port. These errors are
reflected in the RUI port state (including the SDP indication) but they are not written
to ROP since this is due to a normal maintenance operation.
URC maintenance operations

The RUI and RRHs are children of the primary URC. Prior to resetting the last URC,
the RRHs are transmit-disabled and their paths are blocked. The RRHs and RUI are
reset. A change of owning URC does not affect RUI or RRH operation.
CTU maintenance operations

Interruption of the clock signal to the RUI causes the RUI ports to stop functioning,
interrupting the flow of data to and from the RRH. RUI ports and RRHs are therefore
dependent on the clock unit (active CTU), in that they cannot perform their primary
function when the clock is not present. Call paths associated with the RRHs served by
the RUI are blocked (following camp-on) prior to CTU maintenance operations, and
the RRHs removed from service, but the RUIs may otherwise remain active during a
clock switch.
Note: The RUI remains in communication with the controller when clocks are not
available. RRHs are not in communication with the controller when clocks are not
available since the CPRI link is not functioning, but they do not autonomously
reset until a one hour timer has expired.
Modem maintenance operations

RUI backplane data (LVDS) ports must enabled and disabled as modems (CMU or
EVM) are initialized and reset or removed. This operation is performed similar to
enabling of radio backplane data ports.
Inventory data requests

The technician can request a summary of all inventory data records from BTS units.
(Inventory data requests may also be scheduled.) These requests are handled much as
usual except the RUI and RRH inventory data records are included in the set of
records sent up from the BTS. Refer to SRD-1928-Mod-01-5164 for details of
inventory data reporting.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-14

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

RRH field support

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RRH field support

Overview

The following capabilities are available for field support of the RUI and RRHs:

standard maintenance commands (RMV/RST/DGN)

TI commands to retrieve RUI and RRH unit status and log data (refer to the TI
Capabilities description earlier in this section)

TI commands to read and overwrite RRH-local stored data

TI commands to initiate OCNS and FLUS traffic on RRH paths (CFR is not
supported since local calibration is not necessary and since the OCI supports a
locally-generated RF test signal)

OCI capabilities for on-site (RRH-local) reading of RRH status and execution of
RRH operational tests and generation of RF test signal (refer to OCI Capabilities
description earlier in this section),

RMT capabilities for on-site (BU-local) configuration of RRH local parameters and
execution of loopback tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

RRH operational test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RRH operational test

Purpose

The following sections provide a high level description of the operational tests
supported by the RUI and RRH.
Loopback test

The CPRI connection between the BU and RRH may be verified in one of two ways:

The RUI may be commanded by the RMT to run a RUI Local Loopback test in
which a physical jumper is placed on the CPRI connection (either at the RUI port
itself or at the remote (RRH) end of the CPRI interconnection cable) to loop RUI
transmit data back to the RUI receive port. The RUI performs a frame error rate
calculation on the returned data and makes the test results (total frames and errored
frames) available to the RMT. This test is supported only via the RMT since a
technician must be on site to insert the loopback jumper.

The BU may be commanded to run an RRH Remote Loopback test. In this case the
CPRI connection remains in place between the BU and the RRH and the RUI is
commanded to generate a test pattern on the RUI port (and CPRI data containers)
serving that RRH. The RRH is instructed to loop the RRH-received data onto its
transmit port back to the RUI. The RUI compares its received data against
generated pattern and calculates a frame error rate. The test results are made
available to the test originator, which is currently limited to the RMT.

Antenna operational test

The RRH supports receive antenna tests. These are enabled and their alarm threshold
levels set based on RC/V antenna test parameters. RRH antenna test runs (semi-)
continuously within the RRH and so is not scheduled by the RCS as is done for
non-RRH paths. Antenna tests may be requested via TI command. In this case the
input/output message formats align with the existing antenna test requests.
Diversity imbalance

RRH diversity imbalance monitoring is always enabled whenever a non-zero imbalance

threshold is provided in RC/V.
The diagram below includes the maintenance hierarchy for RUI-RRH configurations.
In the LP-BBU case there are only controllers, channel cards, clock, RUIs, and RRHs.
RUIs and RRHs are children of the CRC. They are associated with the primary CRC
of the digital shelf and so remain in service until the last CRC becomes inactive.
Although the RUI needs a clock signal for its ports to operate, the RUI itself can
initialize and communicate with the CRC when clocks are not available.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-16

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

RRH operational test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The RRH is a child of the RUI since the RUI ports serve as the sole means of the
RRH communicating with the controller (and the RRH transmission turns off when this
communication fails). When multiple RUIs are present in the assemblage, an RRH is a
child of only one of these RUIs. This RUI-RRH association is defined in translations.
The RRH is also a child of the TFU since the RUI ports do not function without clock
signals from the TFU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

Purpose

The 2338 - RUI Status page indicates the RUI unit state and RUI port state, and also
provides a list of Remote Radio frequency Heads (RRHs) associated with this RUI.
This RRH list may not be accurate until a short while after the RUI initialization has
completed since it may take up to 30 seconds for RRHs to connect to the controller
once the RUI ports are operational.
The following figure illustrates SDP 2338 (screen 1 of 4) monitoring RUI Ports 1 and
2 inhibited and Port 3 indicating normal activity of daisy-chained RRHs.

The following figure illustrates SDP 2338 (screen 2 of 4) monitoring the status of
RRH-1.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-18

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure illustrates SDP 2338 (screen 1 of 7) monitoring RUI-1 Ports 1-3
indicating normal activity of daisy-chained RRHs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure illustrates SDP 2338 (screen 2 of 7) monitoring the status of
RRH-1.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-20

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page details

This page includes the following indicators:

equipage state - Indicates whether the unit is expected to be present in the BTS.

maintenance state - Indicates whether the unit is ready to support call processing.
fault state - Indicates current alarm status of the unit.

normal - Indicates no faults exist and the RRH supports normal operation.

degrade - Indicates one or more faults are present and this state is for the RUI port
only, and it does not work for RRH. Call processing is still (though perhaps only
partially) supported.

inhibit - Indicates that the RUI port is switched off in case there is no RRH
connected to it.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
12-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

CDMA Remote Radio Head alarm information

2338 - Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Status page

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

external fail - Indicates the RRH is itself capable of supporting calls (it has no
critical faults present) but is not operational due to failure of an outside resource.
(Although the state of the RUI port switch could be considered here since it
controls the I/Q data flow to the RRH, the switch state is unknown by the RRH
and so is not a factor in determining RRH fault state. The RUI port switch state
affects only the RUI port fault state and RUI unit fault state.)
fail - Indicates a fault exists that prevents the RRH from providing normal
operation, or there is a loss of communication to the RRH.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

12-22

13

Diagnostic tests
13

Overview
Purpose

Diagnostic tests that are run from the RMT (direct or OMC-RAN) or MSC serve to
isolate system faults. This chapter reviews the types and execution of diagnostic tests
other than the functional tests.
Contents
Testing overview

13-3

Maintenance hierarchy

13-4

Fault isolation principles

13-6

Testing and diagnostics framework

13-8

Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

13-10

Diagnostic tests for base station

13-12

Stable clear recovery times

13-16

Outline of MSC-based diagnostics

13-17

ECPless MSC

13-19

Procedure 13-1: Diagnose the base station

13-20

Procedure 13-2: Test base station using the RMT (direct connection)

13-23

Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)

13-24

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

13-27

Operation of Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC)

13-36

Enhanced Digital Predistortion (EDPD)

13-38

Calibration philosophy

13-41

Parameter descriptions

13-42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When field re-calibration is needed

13-43

Procedure 13-5: CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

13-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-2

Diagnostic tests

Testing overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Testing overview
Cell site housekeeping software

Cell site fault detection is performed using cell site housekeeping software. Faults such
as transmitter failure, power and entry alarms, and speech path conditions are
constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the MSC. In most cases, fault
detection, diagnosis, and recovery are automatic.
Levels of testing

The base station supports highly flexible testing and diagnostics facilities, including the
following:

MSC-based, where the MSC initiates the diagnostics either automatically (routine
diagnostics) or following a manual command.
RMT-based, with the RMT connected to the base station. RMT-based testing and
diagnostics (see .Procedure 13-2: Test base station using the RMT (direct
connection) (p. 13-23)
RMT-based wizard that can be launched from the OMC-RAN GUI enabling remote
access to the base station for testing and diagnostics (FID 14152.0) (see Procedure
13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0) (p. 13-24).

Using the RMT for diagnostics

Testing and diagnostics using the RMT requires physical connection of the RMT to the
base station.
Fault detection and correction mechanisms

Most faults trigger an alarm that is displayed on the SDP/OMC-RAN GUI, and may be
confirmed on circuit pack LEDs.
The system also provides the operator the ability to disable Radio Diagnostics from
Routine Diagnostics execution.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Maintenance hierarchy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance hierarchy
Hierarchy diagram

The Alcatel-Lucent CDMA wireless network system supports a parent-child

hierarchy. This means that it is impossible to restore a child when the parent is
out-of-service (OOS).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-4

Diagnostic tests

Maintenance hierarchy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hierarchy description

Many of the 9218 Macro components rely on others to be able to function properly.
For example, the radio and channel coders need the clock unit operational before they
can become active. This maintenance hierarchy is summarized in Hierarchy diagram
(p. 13-4).
1. The URC lies at the top of the hierarchy. Without the URC there is no
communication to the RCS.
2. The URC controls the heartbeat operation to all its subordinate units. If there is a
second or third URC in the shelf, it exists on the same hierarchical level as the
primary URC: the primary URC can be removed and the next URC will take over.
3. The next level down includes the CTU and the transmit amplifiers. These units rely
only on the URC heartbeats to continue to operate, and they need the configuration
messages passed down through the URCs.
4. The CTU has a secondary dependence on the OM as a source of 15-MHz for
generating clocks. The OM is controlled by the CTU and so has no direct
dependence on the URC.
5. The lowest level down includes the CMUs and UCR. These units rely on the URC
for the configuration messages passed down.
The CMUs are dependent on clock signals from the CTU and so will not function
without a CTU being first placed into operation. Also, both the CLGC and RF test
sections of the TDU are dependent on the 15-MHz of the OM for their frequency
synthesizers.
The UCR uses the TDU for closed loop gain control algorithms, but is not directly
dependent on the TDU since the radio can run at reduced power when the TDU is
not present. The UCR does depend on the CTU for clocks.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Fault isolation principles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fault isolation principles

What is fault isolation?

Fault isolation covers activities that are designed to do the following:

Identify the source of trouble.

Correct the failure condition.

Corrective action may require hardware component replacement.

Fault isolation steps

Fault isolation begins with an analysis of symptoms, followed by trouble isolation

going down the data path. The next step involves the identification of the point of
failure, using techniques such as measuring the output signal down the data path. The
last activity involves corrective action, such as restoring and/or replacing a faulty
component.
Most fault isolation follows these guidelines:
1. Analysis of symptoms
2. Trouble isolation
- Follow data path
3. Identify point of failure
- Manual trouble-locating procedures
- Measure output signal down the data path
4. Corrective action (for example, restore, replace faulty component, etc.)
Fault isolation triggers

Fault isolation is triggered by events such as ROP output, SDP alarms, and sometimes
customer complaints or degradation in system performance.

ROP output

SDP alarms

Customer complaints
Degradation in system performance

User alarms

The primary frame provides an external interface for 30 (0-29) user alarm inputs for
the 9218/9228 Macro. This interface caters for alarms in the form of contact closures.
These alarms are only terminated on one digital shelf within this primary frame, but
are visible by any URC within that shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-6

Diagnostic tests

Fault isolation principles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External interface for user alarm inputs for 9222 Micro Distributed

The primary frame provides an external interface for 8 user alarm inputs for the 9222
Micro Distributed. This interface caters for alarms in the form of contact closures.
These alarms are only terminated on one digital shelf within this primary frame, but
are visible by any URC/URC-II within that shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Testing and diagnostics framework

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Testing and diagnostics framework

Testing and diagnostics

Testing and diagnostics for the base station are implemented in three stages of
activities:
1. Board level self-test (BLST)
2. Other automated tests
3. Functional tests.
Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

The first stage of testing, Board Level Self-Test (BLST), is invoked from software that
resides in boot memory for each of the processing components in the base station.
These tests represent a core set of low-level hardware tests designed to verify the basic
functionality of a processor module.
Other automated tests

The second stage of testing covers tests that are not handled under the initial self-test
suite.
The tests are conducted through an automated suite of tests that return failure
messages.
Tests can be downloaded to the URC from the RMT (direct or OMC-RAN). They are
then downloaded from the URC to the other processing components for execution
directly from RAM using the RMT.
These tests are intrusive in nature, and require that the cell equipment be offline.
Functional tests

The third and final stage of testing involves functional tests, which test the
functionality of the system call processing generic software.
These functional tests are oriented towards performance monitoring. They also provide
isolated hardware testing while the remainder of the equipment is online and
operational. These test functions are similar to those provided by the AUTOPLEX
system framework. They are controlled via interactions from the MSC, or locally via
the test port interface at the URC. The RMT communicates with the online base station
via messaging, and provides the environment with which to monitor base station
activity.
The antenna test is the only functional test for the base station.
Important! There are no functional tests for the 9218 Macro HD for the Remote
Unit/Base Unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-8

Diagnostic tests

Testing and diagnostics framework

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Functional tests assume the presence of an equipped and functioning TDU or MCR
or a TTSM/TTTM. The 9218/9228 Macro and 9216 Compact use a TDU when
equipped with a UCR. When a 9218/9228 Macro and 9216 Compact are equipped
with an MCR, that board also functions as a test unit.
The 9224 Sub-Compact uses a TTSM equipped with an MCR.
The 9222 Micro Distributed uses a TTTM equipped with a MCR. If those
conditions are not met, functional tests cannot be run.
The goals of the Stage 3 functional tests are to monitor system performance
characteristics, and to report trends or conditions that may indicate an equipment
failure. They also provide a means of creating high-level operating test modes. For
example, the establishment of a connection to a test mobile, concurrent with
commercial call processing activity.
A failure indication from the functional tests indicates the need to invoke a more
intrusive diagnostic to verify a hard failure, and to localize the problem to a Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU). These functions can be run either from the MSC or via the
test port interface.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

Overview

The Board Level Self-Test (BLST) represents a portion of the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA
base station diagnostic design. This test is executed either during board power-up or
board level reset. BLSTs verify as much circuit pack functionality as can be
accomplished in a stand-alone environment.
General description

Board Level Self Test (BLST) is run by every processor board as one of the first tasks
when it powers up or resets. BLST verifies as much as possible the hardware operation
of the board including:

Processor
Memory (NVM and RAM)

Registers

UARTs and other I/O devices

Board specific hardware such as phase locked loops (PLL), latches, and
communication devices (framers, ATM chips, etc.).

Results storage

The results of the BLST are stored in nonvolatile memory (NVM or EEPROM) for
later analysis when a failed board is returned to the factory. This data is typically
stored in one or two pages of memory set aside for storage of BLST results.
Scope of test

BLST executes in a single board environment and is not aware of the status of the rest
of the cell. BLST of a board may therefore be limited in which components can be
tested since off-board resources may not be available at the time of BLST execution.
For example, BLST cannot fully test a frequency synthesizer since, if the synthesizer
reports an out of lock condition, the BLST code cannot determine if the synthesizer
has truly failed or if the out of lock condition is due to the cell frequency reference not
being available. BLST-detected failures are reported to the RCS as part of the board
initialization sequence; specifically, the reset response message. A summary byte
indicating the results of the BLST tests is forwarded to the URC and the RCS in this
message.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-10

Diagnostic tests

Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Boards tested

BLSTs automatically test the following processors:

Universal Radio Controller (URC)

CDMA Modem Unit (CMU)

Common Timing Unit (CTU)

UMTS CDMA Radio (UCR)

Multi-carrier Radio (MCR)

Transmit Amplifier (TxAMP)

Test & Diagnostic Unit (TDU).

Single Board EVM (SB-EVM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Diagnostic tests for base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnostic tests for base station

Overview

The base station supports two types of diagnostics:

MSC-based

RMT-based (direct or OMC-RAN)

How to run diagnostic tests

Diagnostic tests can be initiated and controlled without operator intervention from the
MSC. The cell site performs the requested diagnostic test and returns the test results to
the MSC.
Diagnostic tests can also be initiated manually, either from the MSC or the RMT. The
cell site performs the requested diagnostic test and returns the test results to the MSC
or RMT.
Routine diagnostic tests are run on a regularly scheduled basis to verify that the cell
site hardware units are operational. Routine diagnostic tests are run
daily/weekly/monthly. The time of day at which these tests are run is specified in the
cell site translations.
During the execution of routine diagnostics, the base station must be in the active state.
The RCS takes the unit out-of-service. Upon completion, the tested base station units
are restored back to the active state. During the execution of diagnostics, the base
station will not process calls. If calls are being processed when the routine diagnostics
request is initiated, the request will camp-on for 5 minutes. If during those 5 minutes
the calls are terminated, the request is granted. If not, the request is denied.
RMT-based diagnostic tests

RMT-based diagnostics are menu-driven, and are initiated from a menu in the RMT
command bar.
Using diagnostic test results

Diagnostic test results provide the starting point for clearing diagnostic faults
(non-alarm). It should be noted that alarm conditions (such as power, fuse, etc.) can
cause diagnostic faults to appear. Therefore, alarm indications should be cleared before
attempting to clear diagnostic troubles. In some instances, it may be difficult to relate
an existing alarm condition to a diagnostic fault condition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-12

Diagnostic tests

Diagnostic tests for base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Automatic fault isolation

When using the RMT, fault isolation is launched by clicking on the Test menu in the
task bar, and selecting the fault isolation option. In the RMT message window, the
RMT returns a list of maintenance objects with their associated BLSTs and the result
of the fault isolation process.
When using the MSC approach, automated tests are run in groups which address
specific areas of a wireless system. Within each test group, individual tests are broken
into phases that are themselves broken down into segments, enabling a top-down fault
isolation process.
When a test fails, results are displayed as follows:

In the RMT mode, test displays directly indicate the probable failing unit.

In the MSC mode, test displays indicate the point in the test sequence where the
test failed, in terms of the phase, segment, and test that has failed. Identification of
the failing unit requires an analysis of that indication.
Refer to the following documents to perform the fault isolation process for MSC
mode diagnostics:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

Flexible Routine Diagnostics Enhancements

Currently base station Routine Diagnostics can only be set to run once a day.
Customers would like the flexibility to set time of day, day of week and day of month.
9218 Macro circuit packs have higher density. When these are taken out-of-service for
diagnostics, customers perceive higher blocked call rates over Modular cell 3.0. As a
result, this feature also introduces the option to disable Radio Diagnostics from
Routine Diagnostics.
The system provides an operator interface that allows a technician to set a
pre-specified time to schedule Routine Diagnostics which includes the following
options:

Time of day for every day execution, or

A day and time of week for weekly execution,

A day of the month (time of day) for monthly execution

In pre-R27.0 systems, the RC/V displays the cmodeqp screen values that are
applicable to this feature. These values in a pre-R27.0 software load are translated to
old values in the system as the values will not be applicable until a R27.0 software
load. Below is an example of the pre-R27.0 cmodeqp screen and the R27.0 cmodeqp
screen.
The following figure is applicable to pre-R27.0 systems:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Diagnostic tests for base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure is an example of the cmodeqp R27.0 and above with the new
values displayed for the Routine Diagnostics:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-14

Diagnostic tests

Diagnostic tests for base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The values below will be mapped by the system in pre-R27.0 software as follows:

RTDIAG type = 1 or 2 - there is no change

RTDIAG type = 3 or 4 - RTDIAG type will be translated as 1 to the system

RTDIAG scheduling = Daily - there is no change

RTDIAG scheduling = Monthly or Weekly - RTDIAG scheduling will be translated
as Daily to the system

Inventory Control Execution time - will not have a value in the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Stable clear recovery times

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stable clear recovery times

Release letter paragraph

The following paragraph, 9.2.4, from the R20 release letter provides information
concerning the recovery times.
This release includes new Time Frequency Unit (TFU) firmware. The units will remain
Out of Service (OOS) after the RCS is restarted and the cell completes stable clear. A
routine audit, RATP, that runs approximately every five minutes, will detect the
different firmware, initiate the update, and restore the units to service. It is not
necessary to perform any manual recovery action on the cell. Verify that the RATP
audit is allowed on the Status Display Page 2132. It is expected that, when the
mismatch in firmware is detected, an error is reported per identified unit. If the audit
error continues to be reported and/or the unit remains OOS for an extended period of
time, contact the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support Center.
Stable clear

Stable clear takes longer with new CTU, UCR, and/or TDU images. Stable clear will
finish without bringing up these units. There are many timers in the system that will
trigger if things go too long, potentially bringing down the RCS as well.
These units will be NVMd and restored after stable clear to prevent more system wide
problems.
For a system performing a stable clear without NVM update, 9218 Macro is faster than
Modular Cell 2.0 or 3.0. 9218 Macro takes about 4 minutes while Modular Cell 2.0
and 3.0 take about 5 minutes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-16

Diagnostic tests

Outline of MSC-based diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outline of MSC-based diagnostics

Overview

MSC-based diagnostics use Alcatel-Lucent CDMA commands to communicate with the

MSC. These commands are entered through the OMP from a laptop computer
connected to the base stations craft interface port.
MSC-based diagnostics are performed under operator control. They check on the health
of the entire base station, circuit by circuit.
Example of diagnostic command sequence

Routine diagnostics provide an example of MSC-based diagnostics, and require the

performance of the following tasks:

Invoke Selectable Cell Site Messaging (SCSM) to enable the operator to limit the
display of ROP messages to only those that relate to the base station.

Launch routine diagnostics to verify that all circuits are operating properly.
Inhibit SCSMs once the routine diagnostics have been run to return the base station
monitoring capabilities to their original status.

System response

Upon receiving an input command, the system acknowledges the command with one of
the following messages:

IP = Request has been accepted and will be sent to the cell site. Output messages
will follow
RL = Retry later; system is unavailable

NG = Cell site is not equipped with the unit specified in the input command.

Once the diagnostics have been completed, the test results are displayed: All Tests Pass
(ATP), Conditional ATP (CATP), or Some Tests Failed (STF).
The CATP message is displayed whenever a given module is not available for testing.
Interpreting failing messages

To enter commands and interpret failing messages, consult the following documents:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Outline of MSC-based diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For a description of input commands and output messages of the Alcatel-Lucent

CDMA system, consult

Flexent /AUTOPLEX Wireless Networks Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions,

401-660-101

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-18

Diagnostic tests

ECPless MSC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ECPless MSC
Introduction

Described here is the evolution of the Alcatel-Lucent 9290 MM-Based Access Manager
to an ECPless configuration.
Need

As the number of subscribers grows, and as the number of attempted calls per hour
grows, service providers need to improve call capacity of existing networks. In the
traditional Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) architecture, the 3B21D
computer and the Common Network Interface (CNI)/Interprocessor Message Switch
(IMS) ring, limit the network capacity. Service providers need a method of increasing
call capacity that reduces the need to deploy additional ECPCs as the service
providers network grows.
Solution

The solution to this problem is to migrate the functionality of the ECPC, and the
CNI/IMS ring, to 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processors (9290 MM-APs).
This migration gives service providers higher, scalable, capacity and supports an
increased number of base stations per Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The result is
called the ECPless MSC.
Phased approach

The conversion to an ECPless MSC is being carried out in phases. In Release 33.0
ECPless MSC is available on the MMCv2. In future releases, the ECPless
configuration will be available for the MM-AP and the MMCv1. Once this process is
completed, all functionality that used to be carried out by the ECPC will be carried out
by software on the MM-APCC or MMC-APCC. Once that point is reached, the ECPC
and its components (the ECP, the CNI/IMS ring, and any hardware elements not
migrating to the 9290 MM architecture, will be removed from the system.
More detailed information can be found in CDMA Network CDMA2000 3G1X and
1xEV-DO Network Overview, 401-610-102.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-1: Diagnose the base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 13-1: Diagnose the base station

Overview

The following section provides a summary of diagnostic procedures for a number of

base station components. These procedures identify steps, stimuli, and responses to
diagnostic actions.
The purpose of diagnostics is to identify failing components and the source of alarms.
Diagnose base station components

Diagnosing base station components involves the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the unit under diagnostics from service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnose the unit and take any necessary corrective action.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restore the unit after corrective action has been taken.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Results

Diagnostics should pass once corrective action has been taken.

Diagnose the URC

To diagnose the URC, perform the actions outlined below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the URC.

rmv:cell a,cdm b, crc<CR>

a = RCS 1 max cells

b = CDM number

Result: RMV:CELL a URC COMPLETED

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnose the URC.

dgn:cell a,cdm b,crc x<CR>

Result: DGN:CELL a CRC x, ATP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-20

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-1: Diagnose the base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DGN:CELL a CRC, COMPLETED

ALL TESTS PASSED
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restore the URC.

rst:cell a,cdm b,crc x;ucl<CR>

Result: RST:CELL a CRC x, ATP

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Diagnose the CMU

To diagnose the CMU, perform the actions outlined below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove, Diagnose CMU 1, then restore it back to service if ATP.

rst:cell a,cdm b, ccu x <CR>

a = RCS 1 max cells

b = CDM number

x = the number of the specific CMU 1-12. The CMU can only be assigned to one
URC.

Result: RST: CELL a CMU x, ATP

RST: CELL a, CMU x, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS PASSED
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove, Diagnose CMU 2, then restore it back to service if ATP.

rst:cell a,cdm b,ccu x <CR>

Result: RST: CELL a, CMU x, ATP

Result: RST: CELL a, CMU 2, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS PASSED
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Diagnose the CTU

To diagnose the CTU, perform the actions outlined below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the CTU from service.

rmv:cell a,tfu b;ucl <CR>

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-1: Diagnose the base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

a = URC 1 6
b= CTU number 1-4

Result: RMV:CELL a CTU, COMPLETED

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnose and restore the CTU.

rst:cell a, tfu b<CR>

Result: RST: CELL a, CTU b, ATP

RST: CELL a CTU, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS PASSED
E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnose the UCR

To diagnose the UCR, perform the actions outlined below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the UCR from service.

rmv:cell a,cdm b,cbr x;ucl <CR>

a = URC 1 6

b= CDM number

x = the number of the specific UCR 1-6

Result: RMV:CELL a UCR, COMPLETED

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnose and restore the UCR.

rst:cell a,cdm b, cbr X<CR>

Result: RST: CELL a UCR, ATP

RST: CELL a UCR, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS PASSED
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-22

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-2: Test base station using the RMT (direct

connection)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 13-2: Test base station using the RMT (direct

connection)
Overview

This procedure enables the technician to connect to the base station and use the RMT
to run diagnostic tests.
Access base station with RMT
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect an Ethernet cable to the PC and the J9 port on the IOU of the base station.
See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use a screwdriver to turn the Ethernet/Select switch (S3) to connect to the URC
needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Follow the procedures in RMT help to perform the desired work on the base station.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)

Overview

This procedure describes how to access the base station using the OMC-RAN RMT.
Note: This procedure assumes the OMC-RAN RMT is properly installed. This
document does not include procedures to install/configure the OMC-RAN client or
OMC-RAN server.
RMT does not support Micro base stations, Series II cells, and other vendor base
stations. A toggle license key for the RMT must reside on the OMC-RAN server and
be enabled so the OMC-RAN GUI can start the wizard. Technicians with this assigned
task are only allowed to launch the RMT connection wizard from the OMC-RAN GUI.
This restricts unauthorized access to RMT and hence to the base station configuration
and test parameters.
The following conditions must be verified before using the RMT connection wizard:

RMT license is installed.

EATN global zone interface is plumbed and IP address assigned.

EATN omcran zone IP address resource is added to omcran zone.

RMT software is installed and licensed.

OMC-RAN GUI client PC is upgraded to 2 GB of RAM. An error message is

generated if RAM is less than 2 GB and the wizard cannot launch.

When the OMC-RAN server is rebooted the ssh tunnel setup between the RMT and
base station is broken and the RMT is automatically disconnected from the base
station. When the OMC-RAN server is stopped, the ssh tunnel setup for the RMT
connection is not broken. The RMT connection continues to be available until an RMT
disconnect or RMT disconnect and ssh tunnel teardown is done.
Refer to the 9253/9254 OMC RAN OAM&P, 401-380-835 for further details and
limitations.
Open RMT connection wizard

Perform the following procedure to open the RMT connection wizard.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch the RMT connection wizard from the Mod1btsCrc object context in the
Mod1bts NE tree only.
The RMT connection wizard can be launched through either the
Tools > Cut through > Launch RMT or the right-click popup menu on the
Mod1bts CRC object (enabled when the Mod1btsCrc object context is selected in the
NE tree).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-24

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the following information:

Field

Content

URC IP Address

This is an editable text field that accepts an IP address. Enter

the URC IP Address if the wizard does not auto-populate the
field.
Note: BTS BackhualMode does not support frame relay.

URC user id

This is an editable text field that accepts string inputs. Enter

the URC user ID.

URC password

Enter the URC password for the user id entered in the URC
user id field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click OK to make the connection to the base station.

Result: The RMT GUI and BTS Tunnel window are launched automatically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Connect on RMT GUI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Connection type as Direct, Cell Name as 127.0.0.1, and click OK. The RMT
establishes the connection with the base station over the entered IP address and port
5500 on the client PC. Testing and maintenance can be performed.
Note: If a second user attempts to connect to same URC on the BTS after the first
user has executed this connection successfully, second user receives a connection
rejection message.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Disconnect RMT

Perform the following procedure to disconnect the RMT connection with the base
station. This procedure does not disconnect the BTS tunnel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Disconnect on the RMT GUI.

Note: Note that at this point only the RMT and URC level application link is
disconnected and the ssh tunnel is still intact. The user can reconnect the RMT to
same URC without going though the RMT connection wizard.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-3: Using the OMC-RAN RMT (FID 14152.0)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect RMT and teardown ssh tunnel

Perform the following procedure to disconnect the RMT and ssh tunnel connection
with the base station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Disconnect on the RMT GUI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Disconnect Tunnel on the BTS Tunnel window.

Note: This operation tears down the ssh tunnel and releases port 5500 for future
RMT connections.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-26

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

Test diagram

The following figure shows the antenna (ANT) functional test diagram.

Test overview

The Antenna Test (ANT FT) allows the technician to determine when a CDMA
antenna is not operating correctly. A CDMA antenna can fail for several reasons. The
most common cause is damage due to severe weather. Without this test, the operator
might be unaware of any degraded transmission or reception from a sector of a cell
which appears to be operating correctly.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Antenna test

The Antenna Test is performed on a specified sector by measuring the signal (RF
energy) incident to and reflected from the receive antenna. The TDU is switched
between directional couplers that extract RF energy in the two directions from the
antenna. The transmit and receive antennas are assumed to be duplexed.
The TDU emits a test tone that reflects off the antenna interface, and the radio card
detects the reflected power (via the reflected-wave coupler in the filter panel) and
compares it to the incident power (via the incident-power coupler in the filter panel).
This method works for both duplexed Tx/Rx antennas and Rx-only antennas.
An antenna fault could occur either due to an open circuit or a short circuit. When
either of these conditions occurs, almost all the (TDU reflected tone) signal energy gets
returned back to the radio instead of being transmitted out of the antenna. The
difference between the TDU injected incident tone power and the TDU injected
reflected tone power, measured by the radio, is called the Return Loss (RTL). The test,
therefore, fails if the antenna is inefficiently coupled to the air. The RTL value is small
when there is a fault and high when there is no fault.
Besides a pass/fail antenna test result, an indeterminate test condition can also occur.
An indeterminate result is reported by the test when the incident tone power, measured
by the radio, is below a minimum expected hard-coded threshold. This can, most
likely, imply a possible breakage in the path taken by the incident tone from the
TDU to the radio and assists in fault isolation.
RF antenna test configuration

When enabled, the RF Antenna Test performs a Return-Loss (RTL) calculation for each
receive antenna and compares that to a threshold which is set in RC/V form.
The default value Return Loss can be set at 14 dB. The following procedure shall be
followed to set the default threshold:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access Page 2 of the CMODEQP form for the cell site

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Test Thresh field set the default value to 14 dB for each antenna.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-28

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To account for cell-to-cell variations in the receive-path component tolerances and

cable losses, the following procedure may be followed to obtain a baseline threshold
specific to each antenna and sector:
1. After cell is operational, manually conduct the test a minimum of 3 times.
2. Average the RETURN LOSS results, in column 4, for each specific diversity
receive antenna in each sector, reported on the ROP. Call this the AVERAGE_RTL.
3. Subtract 5 dB from the AVERAGE_RTL computed above:
a. If the [AVERAGE_RTL-5] dB > 14 dB, retain the default as 14 dB.
b. If the 10 dB < [AVERAGE_RTL-5] dB < 14 dB, then use the threshold
(AVERAGE_RTL-5) dB.
c. If [AVERAGE_RTL-5] dB < 10 dB, then check the antenna and receive path
connections and cabling to ensure proper configuration of the cell site and
receive path components.
In R20, in the Mixed Frame Configuration, RF Functional Tests are supported via
the CTRM.
Antenna failure

When the antenna fails this test, it is not taken out-of-service. The technician is
notified of the failure by means of a major alarm on the Status Display Page (SDP),
OMC-RAN GUI and the ROP output report. This report is in the form of a text
message. The technician then decides on further maintenance action.
Swept-tone receive antenna test enhancement

This is an enhancement to the single tone antenna test, primarily implemented to help
mitigate the effects of RF leakage signals and very long cable lengths on the antenna
test results. In the Swept tone Receive Test, the TDU sequentially radiates a series of
discrete test tones over the entire carrier bandwidth into both the incident and reflected
ports of the filter panel. The radio then proceeds to measure and compare the two
signals so that it can estimate and, then, compensate for any undesired signal leakage
components from the desired reflected tone power while computing the return loss.
Scheduling the Antenna Functional Test

The Antenna Functional Test can be performed on demand or as part of a scheduled

functional test. When executed as a scheduled functional test, only test failures are
reported to the ROP. When executed on demand, the results of the test will be reported
to the ROP regardless of whether the test was successful or not.
The manual input command for performing the antenna test is as follows:
EXC:CELL x, FT ANT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Where x is the cell site number.

Output Report

Below is an example of an output report which will be reported on the ROP. The
meaning of each column is provided below the test results.

For each diversity receive antenna:

Column

Description

Column 1

Test sectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-30

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Column

Description

Column 2

TDU used for the test, if equipped with more than one.

Column 3

Measured Receive Path gain on the specific receive path used for
the test. This additional information is useful for fault isolation
purposes.

Column 4

Measured Return Loss values, which indicates the antenna health.

Very low values indicate a faulty antenna or cabling to the
antenna.

Column 5

Threshold values specified in the RC/V forms.

Column 6

Offset value, which is just the difference between Column 4 and

Column 5. A negative value shows that the RTL has fallen below
the configured RC/V baseline expected value.

Column 7

Results can be PASSED, FAILED or Indeterminate. Indeterminate

results can be due to faults in the receive path taken by the TDU
RF signal in the incident path as shown in the figure at the
beginning.

Below is the SDP 2136 page showing the Antenna Functional Test results.

Note that a similar alarm can be seen on the OMC-RAN GUI.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Receive Path Gain Test

The Receive Path Gain Test is used to verify the overall condition of the base station
receive path. This test essentially takes a test signal of known power level and injects
it into the front end of the system. The signal traverses the entire RF front end of the
system and then is measured by the radio. The signal level measured by the radio is
recorded and compared to the known test signal power level. The difference is
essentially the gain of the receive path.
A Continuous Wave (CW) test tone is generated within the TDU and injected into the
filter panel via the Filter Panels Incident Coupler port. This coupler permits the CW
test tone to enter into the receive path at a known power level. The signal goes through
receive filter, becomes amplified by the LNA, and then enters into the radio where the
test tone power level is measured.
The Receive Path Gain Test is designed to measure the path gain (in dB) of the receive
path from the filters incident port (J4), close to the External Antenna Connector (EAC),
to the receive port on the radio. The principle purpose is to assist in troubleshooting,
fault isolation and, potentially, long-term trending of receive path degradations.
While the focus of Antenna test is to measure only the health of the antenna, it is
performed only on a single receive path. The manual receive path gain test, on the
other hand, can be run on each receive path in a sector allowing for troubleshooting
the receive paths from the J4 to the radio port. No Alarms are generated for this
manual test.
The nominal receive path gains is between 22 and 26 dBm.
When the test is requested via TI command (on demand), the TDU will generate a tone
and injects a known power it into the filters incident port. The radio measures the tone
and the difference between the level transmitted and the level received is the gain. The
outcome of the test is then sent to the ROP.
The following command will execute the Receive Path Gain Test:
exc:cell x, cdm y, cbr z, ft rxgain

This test allows technicians to choose specific CDM and CBR on which the path gain
test can be performed.
Output Report

An example of the RX. GAIN test report is shown below:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-32

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Column

Description

Column 1

The specific diversity receive path on which the measured path gain
test was conducted.

Column 2

Actual measured gain.

Column 3

Results. This will show COMPLETED if a valid test result was

obtained. In case the measured signal power by the radio is very low,
then an INDETERMINATE result is printed, indicating a potential
fault in the incident path from TDU to the radio incident port.

Diversity Imbalance Test

There is a receive diversity gain that is achieved from deploying the second receive
antenna. Assuming that the power received on the two antennas is equal on average,
deploying the second antenna gives a 3 dB power gain, statistically, on the reverse
link. So in addition to the gain that comes from the mitigation of the fading
characteristics of the channel (because the two antenna signals are fading nearly
independently), there is an additional power gain on the reverse link when using
receive diversity. The sum of these two gains can be very significant. Therefore, the
required energy-per-bit to noise ratio (Eb/No) is strongly affected by whether receive
diversity is operational or not. It is evident that there is capacity loss that results either
from foregoing RX diversity or if there is a significant imbalance which exists between
the diversity paths.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This test is designed to detect significant imbalances between the two receive paths.
The difference in average Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) measurements is
used as the primary trigger for detecting imbalance. The radio monitors both the
receive paths and if the average power gain between the paths varies by more than a
set RCV threshold for more than 15 minutes, an error is reported.
The imbalance may exist at cell installation time, or develop over time due to
degradations in the RF components in one of the receive paths. The Diversity
Imbalance test is always running in the background on the radio. There are no TI
commands to run the test. An autonomous alarm is reported whenever an imbalance is
detected.
Receive Imbalance Threshold Determination:

An RC/V translation parameter provides the imbalance threshold, between the two
receive paths, used by the test to declare an alarm.
The operator sets the diversity imbalance threshold on the btseqp form. The default
values is set to 5.0 dB but can range from 0.5 to +15.0 dB.
If the two receive paths are calibrated with exact gains in each path, then it is expected
that, over time, the receive path energy in each path is approximately equal. However,
due to inherent path gain and loss differences in each individual path, a small
imbalance may exist. Every effort must be made to calibrate the paths during
installation. Any residual path gain difference can be added to the RCV translations
parameter.
The results of a technician input command, reported to the ROP, is used to access
average RSSI measured values. These values provide a mechanism to monitor the
existing residual imbalance. During initial set-up, this report must be used to estimate
the baseline imbalance. Typically, an additional 3 dB is added to the existing measured
baseline imbalance to populate the RC/V imbalance threshold.
The diversity imbalance alarm will then be displayed on SDP 2138 and OMC-RAN
GUI. The failure will only clear when the average between the two paths fall below
the threshold value.
op:cell x, cdm y, cbr z RSSI

This gives the Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) for path 1 and path 2. An
alarm will be present when the difference is greater than the threshold value set on the
btseqp form. Below is an example of an output report which will be recorded on the
ROP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-34

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-4: Antenna functional tests

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Below is an example of SDP 2138 indicating the diversity imbalance alarm.

Note that a similar alarm can be seen on the OMC-RAN GUI.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Operation of Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Operation of Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC)

Signal Flow

Before detailing any calibration procedures, it is important to understand how the base
station operates to control its output power, because this operation affects to what
degree RF calibration of base station output power is needed.

Description

Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC) is a method by which a feedback path is used
within the base station to ensure each Tx paths output RF power is maintained to a set
value within plus/minus 0.5 dB. It is not possible to factory-calibrate the base station
Primary RF Path and expect to hold such a tolerance, because component gain
variations with changing temperatures will cause larger output power variations than
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-36

Diagnostic tests

Operation of Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

0.5 dB. Therefore, it is necessary to monitor the output RF power and compensate for
changes induced by temperature variations. In practice the CLGC coupler output is
monitored at the TDU, and detected changes are used to control a variable attenuator
within the UCR to maintain the desired output power. It is expected that feedback
power level correction is needed. This feedback mechanism is CLGC.
CLGC is not supported in the mixed frame configuration or on the HD 4.0.
CLGC in systems employing 5 MHz UCRs

Based on the factory calibration, the gain of the RF path between the radio and the
Equipment Antenna Connector (EAC) becomes known. Also known is the loss between
the EAC and the TSSI Peak Power Detector on the TDU. The Transmit Signal Strength
Indicator (TSSI), is a measure of the Tx signals strength, made by the TDU. There is
a known relationship between the RF power as generated in the radio, and the RF
power as detected in the TDU.
Parameter storage

The calibrated path losses (or gains) are determined in the factory calibration and are
dependent on internally-stored component parameters. These are parameters of the
filter panel and TDU programmed by the supplier of the filter and TDU. The path
losses are also dependent on cables and connectors that are not characterized by the
supplier, and can be a function of the torque on the connectors.
CLGC measurements

CLGC works by simultaneously measuring, in the radio and in the TDU, the RF power
of the CDMA signal being transmitted at a given point in time. This yields two
measured values:
1. The measured value in the radio
2. The measured value in the TDU.
Adjust power levels

If the TDU-measured value indicates a slightly low EAC power, this indicates the Tx
Primary RF Path loss is a bit more than expected, probably due to temperature
variations. If the TDU-measured value indicates a slightly high EAC power, this
indicates the Tx RF Primary Path loss is a little bit less than expected, again probably
due to temperature variations. To correct this situation, the system adjusts a
programmable attenuator on the radio (there are actually two attenuators working in
concert) to bring the EAC power to its intended value (the presence of this variable
attenuator is of course accounted for in the expected factory-calibrated Tx RF path
loss). This programmable attenuator is located within the UCR.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Enhanced Digital Predistortion (EDPD)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enhanced Digital Predistortion (EDPD)

ETDU Support for EDPD

Basic functions the ETDU to support EDPD include the following:

Communicate with radio over ARCNET Peripheral Bus to coordinate sample

waveform capture.
Down convert and capture post amplifier-assembly sample waveform data.
Send post amplifier-assembly sample waveform data to the radio via the ARCNET
Peripheral bus.

Description

The MCR uses EDPD to digitally compensate for phase and amplitude distortion that
naturally exists within the transmit path RF amplification.
For EDPD, the MCR software calculates a set of correction tables, which are loaded
into the digital hardware section of the MCR. The MCRs digital hardware performs
complex correction on the combined multi-carrier signal to pre-distort each I and Q
sample at the baseband frequency. This pre-distorted signal is affected by natural
distortion during amplification in such a way that the fully-amplified RF signal is
significantly more linear than it would have been without EDPD. The more linear
signal means lower spectral growth and an improved FCC compliance margin.
EDPD process

The following list summarizes how the MCR uses the ETDU to support the EDPD
algorithm. The ETDU can perform the following EDPD related functions:

observes the post-corrected, fully-amplified RF signal at the DPD coupler just prior
to the Tx filter]

provides two separate first-in-first-out task queues, one queue is dedicated to

EDPD; the other supports all other non-EDPD measurements such as CLGC.

synchronizes the starting time of a data capture. This tight synchronization assists
the UCR in minimizing the amount of data to be transferred from the ETDU to the
MCR.

provides message handling and data transfer between the ETDU and MCR

Requirements

EDPD and CLGC are required for all Wideband Filter Configurations regardless of
TxAMP Type. EDPD on requires CLGC on and signifies that wideband filters are
in use.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-38

Diagnostic tests

Enhanced Digital Predistortion (EDPD)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EDPD states

The EDPD States are defined as follows:

Training Phase I: The MCR generates a look-up table for the PD coefficients
need to perform the EDPD function. During this phase call processing is blocked
on the associated Tx Port

Training Phase II: After generating enough of the look-up table, the MCR begins
operation but cannot support full power. The associated Tx Port shall operate at a
derated Short-term MCA Maximum Power
EDPD: The MCR performs Enhanced Digital Predistortion. This stage monitors
amplifier temperature and Tx power. With these values the MCR identifies changes
of amplifier state and supplies the most optimal PD coefficient set from a library of
stored sets of PD coefficients.

In Adaptive EDPD, the stored PD coefficients are consistently refreshed with

newly calculated values.
In non-adaptive EDPD, the PD coefficients are static and may become outdated
and less useful in keeping spectral growth low, primarily because of path gain
drift.

EDPD craftshell commands

The existing OP:CELL and OP:CELL-CDM-CBR output reports include CLGC and
EDPD status information for a specified CBR within a specified CDM. The reports
include the following additional information:

CLGC status

EDPD status
The Short-term MCA Maximum Power derated by 3 dB (if applicable)

All this information is provided for input commands entered for a range of MCRs or
for an individual MCR for the given CDM.
EDPD/CLGC alarm severity

EDPD
configured
on

EDPD/CLGC Status

Alarm
Severity

Tx Port
Status

Training Phase I

Critical

off-normal

Training Phase II

Major

off-normal

Adaptive EDPD

Normal

enabled

Non-Adaptive EDPD

Minor

off-normal

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Enhanced Digital Predistortion (EDPD)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLGC
configured
on

EDPD/CLGC Status

Alarm
Severity

Tx Port
Status

CLGC Enabled

Normal

enabled

CLGC Disabled

Major

off-normal

Short-term MCA Maximum

Power derated

Major

off-normal

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-40

Diagnostic tests

Calibration philosophy

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Calibration philosophy
Definition

Arithmetic calibration The method of RF path calibration selected to ensure RF power

output is within specifications (in the Tx direction) and that the Receive Signal
Strength Indicator (RSSI) measurement is sufficiently accurate (in the Rx direction).
RF calibration process

In arithmetic calibration there is a calibration of the RF paths in the factory where

the base station is assembled. By doing this calibration, the total path gain between the
radio and the base station output (the primary RF path) is determined. In addition,
the loss between the base station output and the feedback detection point (the
measurement RF path) is determined. This calibration is facilitated by the use of an
RF power meter attached to the base station Equipment Antenna Connector (EAC),
which acts as an independent confirmation of base station output power.
The manual and automatic portions of the calibration process are as follows.

The calibration values are measured, calculated, and stored in the base station.
The base station is restored to service.

The feedback detection point (which is in a unit called the Test and Diagnostic
unit, or TDU) is monitored.

The RF output of the base station adjusted to accommodate changes in the primary
RF path gain. These changes are due to temperature, component aging, and so on.

This automatic calibration process is called Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC).
Other parameters

In addition to the factory calibration, a variety of parameters are determined and stored
within the primary RF modules in the base station, namely the radio cards (UCRs), the
filter panels, and the TDU. These stored parameters are programmed into each module
by the supplier of the module. These parameters are used, along with the factory
calibration coefficients, to determine the gain or loss of RF components that are not
explicitly calibrated, such as cables, discrete couplers, splitters, combiners, and
amplifiers. There is an additional factory calibration coefficient which only applies
when a redundant TDU is supported.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

Parameter descriptions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Parameter descriptions
Measurement diagram

The following figure shows the paths used to calculate the Closed Loop Gain Control.

Signal

Description

Red - solid arrows

values calibrated as part of the module manufacturing

process; these come from the modules supplier.

Purple - dashed line

RF paths measured as part of the calibration process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-42

Diagnostic tests

When field re-calibration is needed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When field re-calibration is needed

Note: The 9216 Compact with C1PAMs without EDPD and without CLGC must be
calibrated when the room temperature is between 20-30C (68-86F).
UCR replacement

When the UCR is replaced, the new UCR brings with it its calibration coefficients R1
through R6. Although the new UCR might have somewhat different Tx path RF
characteristics, the factory-calibrated parameters are still correct because they span
from the filter panel to the UCR interface; internal calibrated UCR coefficients will
compensate for differences between the old and new UCR cards.
Replacement of cables, amplifiers, splitter, combiners, and/or CLGC coupler

All of the components relevant to this section are in the Tx Primary RF Path and do
not carry any calibration coefficients within them. Any change to the characteristics of
these components, when replaced either singly or as a group, will render the
factory-calibration-derived value inaccurate to some degree. CLGC will compensate for
the difference.
Replacement of the filter-to-radio Rx cable

Replacement of this cable will render the factory-calibration-derived value inaccurate

to some degree. This is budgeted in the RF path. The cable budget is 0.2 dB, which is
pretty generous for a lot-to-lot variation of a cable that is not very long.
Replacement of the filter panel

Replacement of the Filter Panel affects both the Primary RF Path and the Measurement
RF Path. The impact on the Measurement RF Path is to change the stored value. This
new value cannot be predicted because small impedance mismatches in the cable
connection cannot be predicted. Hence, a field re-calibration is needed.
The impact on the Primary RF Path could also render some factory-calibration-derived
coefficients somewhat inaccurate. In one case, CLGC will compensate for the
difference. Field re-calibration is needed to obtain another value and will refresh the
other values as well.
Replacement of the Filter-to-TDU cable

Replacement of the Filter-to-TDU cable affects the Measurement RF Path. The impact
on the Measurement RF Path is to change one of the stored values. This new value
cannot be predicted because small impedance mismatches in the cable connection
cannot be predicted. Hence, a field re-calibration is needed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Diagnostic tests

When field re-calibration is needed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replacement of the TDU

Replacement of the TDU affects the Measurement RF Path. The impact on the
Measurement RF Path is to change the stored value. This new value cannot be
predicted because small impedance mismatches in the cable connection cannot be
predicted. Hence, a field re-calibration is needed.
Replacement of RF components in groups

Because there are no sequential steps for re-calibration any RF paths, there is no
difference between replacing RF components singly versus replacing them in groups.
Even if an entire Primary RF Path is replaced, as long as the Measurement Path (TDU,
cable, and filter) is unchanged, CLGC will compensate for the changes in the Primary
RF Path.
Translation Application Note

Refer to the following documents for the latest calibration procedures.

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437
CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438
CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0, Microcell, and
CDBS, 401-703-439

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-44

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-5: CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 13-5: CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

Overview

A ROP message, TRANSMIT GAIN LOOP OUT OF RANGE, indicates that RF

power is more than 2 dB off. This condition occurs on a 9218 Macro using Closed
Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The ROP displays this error message when CLGC will
not maintain the power at the original set level when the cell has a faulty RF
component.
CLGC description

Closed Loop Gain Control maintains the RF power ratio between CLGC reference
level in the UCR and the RF post-amplifier power. A feedback path within the base
station ensures that each transmit path in the cell maintains output RF power within
plus/minus 0.5 dB of the set value. CLGC adjusts RF power 0.1 dB every 30 seconds
(within plus/minus 2 dB range).
Problem description

The error occurs when CLGC does not compensate for loss greater than plus/minus 2
dB, the transmit power meets a transmit gain out of range condition. A ROP message
displays a TRANSMIT GAIN LOOP OUT OF RANGE error message. The system
displays a major alarm on the 2121 status display page (SDP) and the 2138 page
displays an alarm for the CBR Transmit Port status. OMC-RAN GUI shows the CBR
Transmit Port Status major alarm
Only 9218 Macro using CLGC reports this error condition. Improper RF calibration or
faulty RF components on 9218 Macro system can result in RF power being out of
range.
ROP error message example

A ROP example of the TRANSMIT GAIN LOOP OUT OF RANGE message is shown
below:

1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
**04 REPT:CELL 112 CDM 1, CBR 2, HEH SUPPRESSED MSGS: 0 ERROR TYPE: ONEBTS
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

MOD

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-5: CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
DEVICE - tty
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Isolate alarm condition

If the RF power out of range condition exists, then the following steps should be
taken:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check SDP, OMC-RAN GUI and ROP for Transmit Amplifier alarms, filter alarms etc.
If no specific transmit path component alarms are visible, then the cause could be due
to other reasons.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Visit the cell and check if there is any indication of a failed RF component via LED
alarms. If there are LED alarms replace the faulty component and re-calibrate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify the respective B3 value(s).

If the values are not within range (Typical range is 40.5 to 43) do a re-calibration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify the B3 value after re-calibration. If it is outside the typical range then search for
a faulty component in the RF transmit path.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Isolate faulty component

The following procedure isolates a defective component that may be degrading the RF
transmit path but not generating an alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check to insure that all the RF connections are torqued . Torque the SMA amplifier
connections to 1.5 Nm (14 in-lb), if applicable. Torque all N-type connections to 4.5
Nm (40 in-lb). Torque antenna connections to 25 Nm (221 in-lb).
Then check to see if the RF transmit power changed. If it changed by more than 0.5
dB, re-calibrate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the corresponding UCR and measure the RF output power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

13-46

Diagnostic tests

Procedure 13-5: CLGC out-of-range fault isolation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! Wait 15 to 20 minutes for your power meter to stabilize. This will ensure
that the CLGC has finished its adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Compare the RF transmit power change to the amount that the B3 value is off from the
typical B3 value. If the values are similar then it is probable that the UCR was
defective.
Re-calibrate the carrier and insure that the B3 value is within the typical range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace each associated LAM and measure that change in the RF transmit power. If
this has changed by more than 0.5 dB, then it is probable that the LAM is defective
Re-calibrate the cell and insure that the B3 value is within the typical range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace each corresponding cable and check the RF transmit power. If the power
changes by more than 0.5 dB then re-calibrate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the corresponding filter. Check the change in RF transmit power. If the change
is more than 0.5 dB then re-calibrate and verify that the B3 value is within the typical
range.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

TX out of range script

Alcatel-Lucent has also developed a script to detect the Transmit Gain Out Of Range
Condition HEH error message from ROP and will inform the Cell Technician in real
time.
You can download the TX out of range script from the Alcatel-Lucent Support extranet
site at following internet address: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/ut_tools/
Select Tx Out of Range Script to download the script.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
13-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Part III: Replace and repair

components

Overview
Purpose

This part is designed to enable the field replacement of failing components and the
performance of on-site repairs. Given the modularity of the base stations, repairs will
essentially be accomplished through replacement of the faulty component.
Contents
Chapter 14, Replacement/repair process

14-1

Chapter 15, Replace and repair common components between base

stations

15-1

Chapter 16, 9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement and

repair

16-1

Chapter 17, 9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

17-1

Chapter 18, 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

18-1

Chapter 19, 9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

19-1

Chapter 20, 9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

20-1

Chapter 21, 9234 d2U Distributed component replacement and repair

21-1

Chapter 22, Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

22-1

Chapter 23, Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

23-1

Chapter 24, Other types of maintenance

24-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
III-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

14

14
Replacement/repair
process

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the replacement and repair process for the CDMA base stations.
Contents
Procedure 14-1: Replacement/repair process

14-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
14-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replacement/repair process

Procedure 14-1: Replacement/repair process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 14-1: Replacement/repair process

Overview

The replacement/repair process follows the identification of a failed Field Replaceable

Unit (FRU).
Depending on the FRU, the process may require a simple swap of the unit, or it may
require resetting or re-calibrating cell operating parameters.
General directions

Adhere to the following safety guidelines:

Follow Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) protection procedures.

Use only recommended tools, especially when using a torque wrench.

Do not mishandle cables and connections.

Before you begin

The following table shows whether a cabinet needs to be powered down during
replacement of the various modules.
Module name

Cabinet must be powered down

(Yes/No)

Filter

No

DLM

No

Amplifier

Yes

BBU

Yes

Fresh Air Filter

No

Heater

Yes

Process outline

The process for replacing a failed unit is as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify that the component is out-of-service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If required, change cell configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace and return to service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

14-2

Replacement/repair process

Procedure 14-1: Replacement/repair process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Test, and if necessary, calibrate.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Hot swap capability

All digital shelf circuit packs, in addition to the TDU have the capability of insertion
or removal while the board is powered. That is, the circuit breaker for the shelf can be
left on while replacing the board.
One pin (or two, depending on circuit pack) on each backplane connector is designed
for last contact (ground is first contact) on the card. These pins are connected to an
on-board hot swap controller which senses the presence of applied power and ramps-up
the on-board voltages to their required levels, prevented any potential damage to
components during an insertion or extraction when power is applied.
TxAMPs, loss combiners, filter panels and fan trays do not have hot swap capability,
in that they may not be inserted or extracted while they are powered for safety reasons.
However, they may be inserted or extracted while the rest of the system is powered
and operational.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
14-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

15

15
Replace
and repair
common components
between base stations

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes processes/procedures to replace and/or repair common

components between base stations.
Contents
Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

15-2

Replace the TxAMP

15-7

Replace the CTU

15-10

Replace the UCR

15-11

Replace the MCR

15-13

Replace a CMU

15-15

Replace the URC

15-20

Procedure 15-2: Replace Ethernet Backhaul URC with firewall and

security enabled

15-28

Replace the OM

15-30

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor cabinets

15-32

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

Description

Important! There are no CTRMs for the 9218 Macro.

CTRMs for the base station TDU will be taken out-of-service, unless it already has
been, via a Technician Interface (TI) command. A TDU can be taken out-of-service via
the RMT. Reactivating the TDU involvement can only take place after the TDU has
passed its self tests, and re-entered the ARCNET system and placed back into service.
In addition, any functional tests or diagnostic tests are blocked, if that TDU is being
replaced; this occurs automatically whenever a TDU is taken out-of-service. If the
second TDU is being replaced, one that is only involved in the CLGC measurements,
the functional tests associated with the first TDU can remain enabled.
Conditions for the replacement of a TDU

During replacement, the cell can remain in service. Only the TDU needs to be taken
out-of-service. Replacement of the TDU requires the re-calibration of the RF path, and
that requires the use of an RMT.
Conditions

Value

Hot swappable (Y/N)

Need for re-download

(Y/N)

Need to calibrate power

(Y/N)

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

Comments

See for more information on

the calibration process.

See the following documents for power calibration procedures.

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0, Microcell, and

CDBS, 401-703-439

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-2

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commands for the replacement of a TDU

Item

Value

Comments

Command to take unit

out-of-service

rmv:cell a, tdu b

This command places the

TDU out-of-service.

a= cell number 1-max

cells
b = tdu number 1-4

Command to restore unit

rst:cell a, tdu b

Message if successful

RST:CELL a,TDU,ATP

This command restores the

TDU to service.

Hot-swappability

The TDU is hot-swappable, that is, the base station is not required to be powered-down
in order to replace a TDU.
TDU cables

All operational interface to and from the TDU survive the removal and re-application
of connectors. These include the CTU Timing Pulses, the 15-MHz reference, the
ARCNET cables and all of the Filter Panel coupled ports and CLGC coupling ports.
The following figure displays all cables with the exception of the Filter Panel coupled
ports.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TDU replacement process

The TDU is not only responsible for performing functional and diagnostic tests for the
9218 Macro, but is also involved in CLGC functionality.
In a single frame base-station, the TDU is at the end of the ARCNET bus and provides
the ARCNET termination.
1. Prior to any action, the TDU will be taken out-of-service, unless it already has
been, via a craftshell command. The most likely mechanism for activating this
mode is automatically based on a failure. In addition, a TDU can be taken
out-of-service via the RMT.
2. Remove the ARCNET cable connecting the IOU and the TDU first and insert a
TDU termination in the IOU. This keeps the ARCNET between the URC and other
components active allowing the hot-swap capability.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-4

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3. When the primary frame has two TDUs, the first TDU receives the ARCNET cable
from the IOU. If there is a growth frame, the non-failed TDU also connects to the
growth frame.
4. Reactivating the TDU involvement in RF measurements can only take place after
the TDU has passed its self tests, and re-entered the ARCNET system and placed
back into service. In addition, any functional tests or diagnostic tests are blocked; if
the first TDU is being replaced, this occurs automatically whenever a TDU is taken
out-of-service. If the secondary TDU is being replaced, one that is involved in
CLGC, the functional tests associated with the primary TDU can remain enabled.
Remove the first TDU
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the TDU is in service, first remove it from service

rmv: cell a, tdu b
where:

a = cell number

b = tdu number (1-4)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Pull the ARCNET cable connecting the TDU to the IOU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the termination plug into the IOU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Label and remove each cable from the face of the TDU.
Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove screws and set aside for later use.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the replacement TDU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the face of the TDU re-insert the cables removed earlier.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-insert the ARCNET cable in the IOU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restore the TDU to service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-1: Replace the TDU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

rst: cell a, tdu b

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-6

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the TxAMP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the TxAMP

Conditions for the replacement of a TxAMP

Important! There are no TxAMPs in the 9218 Macro HD. The TxAMPs
supporting the 9218 Macro HD reside in the Series II cabinets so alarms in TxAMP
refer to those amplifiers.
The conditions and commands for replacing the TxAMP are summarized below. Make
sure you turn the power off.
Conditions

Value Comments

Hot swappable (Y/N)

For safety, the circuit breaker should be

turned off.

Need for re-download (Y/N)

Download of Tx amplifiers is done

automatically at restore.

Need to calibrate RF power

(Y/N)

Y/N

Without CLGC you need to calibrate. With

CLGC you do not need to calibrate when
replacing a TxAMP.

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

Other Issues

None

RV/C impact and RV/C equipage rules for the P2PAM and/or C2PAM amplifier
installed in the 9218/9228 Macro, 9228 Macro LP, 9228 Macro Distributed, and 9228
Macro HDcan be found in the Power Throttling of PHPAM (P2PAM) and CHPAM
(C2PAM) Amplifiers section of the Alcatel-Lucent Base Stations Macro 9218, 9228,
9228 LP, 9228 HD, and 9228 Distributed System Description, 401-703-486.
Commands for the replacement of a TxAMP

Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface. Label each cable before you remove it.
Purpose

Value

Comments

To take unit out-of-service

rmv:cell a, TxAMP b

This operation places the

cell amplifier out-of-service.

a=cell number 1-max

cells
b=TxAMP number
To restore unit

rst:cell a, TxAMP b

This operation places the

cell back into service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the TxAMP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Value

Comments

Message if successful

RST:CELL a,ATP

Be sure to wait a sufficient amount of time for the TxAMP to come back into
service, after one of the scenarios listed below occurs:
1. Power cycling a TxAMP (i.e., turn OFF and ON a TxAMP circuit breaker
2. Digital cable disconnection
3. Restoring a TxAMP
An improperly seated digital cable may result in misinterpretation of the Alarm
reported at the switch, that ends up indicating that the TxAMP has failed, when in
reality it has not. Misinterpretation of this alarm message may promote the removal
of a TxAMP when not required.
The following messages are displayed at the ROP if the following occurs:
Indicator

Error message

If the cable is disconnected or intermittent

before the amplifier initializes

Initialization Failure

If the cable is disconnected or intermittent

after the amplifier initializes

Communication Lost between TxAMP and

URC

Record the following information and contact Wireless Technical Support Center at
the following address:
1. Serial Number of the cabinet
2. Serial Number of the TxAMPs
3. Customer Information if known
4. Location of Warehouse where cabinet is stored
5. Contact person with phone number and email address.
Wireless Technical Support Center
Alcatel-Lucent
6200 East Broad Street
Columbus, OH 43213-1569
Within the United States: 1 800 356 8574
From all other countries: +1 614 860 3760

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-8

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the TxAMP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

60WCPAM installation/replacement considerations (FID 12860.8)

The following information applies to the installation/replacement of the 60WCPAM in

the 9224 Sub-Compact/EN and 9216/9226 Compact:

60WCPAM shares the same license quantity with C2PAM using the CHPAM
license.
60WCPAM needs CLGC/EDPD to be on to work well no matter whether FID
12860.8 is in or not.
For one radio port with type chpamhe, only one 60WCPAM can be equipped and
used. When 60WCPAM is used paralleling with a C2PAM or another 60WCPAM,
only type chpam can be configured and in this scenario the 60WCPAM can only
support 40 W power output.
Before FID 12860.8 is installed, the 60WCPAM can only be used as CHPAM
and can only support 40 W power output.
After FID 12860.8 is installed, the 60WCPAM can support 60 W output and up to
3 carriers with 20 W each. More carriers should not be configured even though the
software does not restrict this. That is to say, 4 carriers with 20 W each can be
configured on one 60WCPAM without error; RC/V does not have a check on this
going above 3 carriers.

When the MSC load includes FID 12860.8, but cell load does not, do not configure
chpamhe type for 60WCPAM, although RC/V can. Otherwise the system cannot
work well.

Before FID 12860.8 is installed and the cell has a 60WCPAM, when doing the
calibration the technician should reduce the single-carrier power by 10 dB. See
CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,
9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437 for the power calibration instructions.

RV/C impact and RV/C equipage rules for the 60WCPAM amplifier installed in the
9224 Sub-Compact/EN can be found in the Power Throttling of 60WCPAM Amplifiers
(FID 12860.8) section of the Alcatel- Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact / EN
System Description, 401-703-488.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the CTU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the CTU

Conditions for the replacement of the CTU

Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface. Label each cable before you remove it.
This replacement requires that the unit be taken out-of-service. The conditions and
commands for replacing the CTU are summarized below.
Conditions

Value Comments

Hot swappable (Y/N)

The CTU is hot swappable but taking the

primary CTU out-of-service will cause the
loss of service.
The standby CTU is hot-swappable and
replacing it will not cause a loss of
service.

Need for re-download (Y/N)

Need to calibrate power (Y/N)

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

Download is automatically done at restore.

Other Issues

Commands for the replacement of the CTU

Important! In the command syntax tfu represents the CTU.

Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to take unit

out-of-service

rmv:cell a, tfu
x;ucl

This command takes the

CTU out-of-service.

a=cell number 1-max

cells
b=micro number 1-6
x=ctu number 1-8
Command to restore unit

rst:cell a, tfu
x;ucl

This command places the

CTU back into service. The
complete CTU restore
request will be delayed until
GPS timing is acquired.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-10

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the UCR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the UCR

Conditions for the replacement of the UCR

Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface. Label each cable before you remove it.
This replacement requires that the cell be taken out-of-service. The conditions and
procedures for replacing the UCR are summarized below.
Conditions

Value Comments

Hot swappable (Y/N)

Need for re-download

(Y/N)

Download is automatically done at restore.

Need to calibrate power

(Y/N)

Y/N

Without CLGC you need to calibrate. With CLGC

you do not need to calibrate when replacing a
UCR.

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

Other Issues

See the following documents for power calibration procedures:

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438
CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0, Microcell, and
CDBS, 401-703-439

Commands for the replacement of the UCR

Important! In the command syntax cbr represents the UCR.

Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to take unit

out-of-service

rmv:cell a, cdm b,
cbr x;ucl

This command takes the

UCR out-of-service.

a=cell number 1-max

cells
b=cdm number 1-16
x=ucr number 1-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the UCR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to restore unit

rst:cell a, cdm b,
cbr x;ucl

This command places the

UCR back into service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-12

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the MCR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the MCR

Conditions for the replacement of the MCR

Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface. Label each cable before you remove it.
This replacement requires that the cell be taken out-of-service. The conditions and
procedures for replacing the MCR are summarized below.
Conditions

Value

Comments

Hot swappable (Y/N)

Need for re-download (Y/N)

Download is automatically done at restore.

Need to calibrate power

(Y/N)

Y/N

Without CLGC you need to calibrate.

With CLGC you do not need to calibrate
when replacing a MCR.

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

Other Issues

See the following documents for power calibration procedures.

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0, Microcell, and

CDBS, 401-703-439

Commands for the replacement of the MCR

Important! In the command syntax cbr represents the MCR.

Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to take unit

out-of-service

rmv:cell a, cdm b,cbr

x;ucl

This command takes the

MCR out-of-service.

a=cell number 1-max cells

b=cdm number 1-16
x=mcr number 1-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the MCR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to restore unit

rst:cell a, cdm b,cbr

x;ucl

This command places the

MCR back into service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-14

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace a CMU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace a CMU
Conditions for the replacement of a CMU

Important! To insure good seating with the backplane use your thumbs to apply
firm pressure to top and bottom of the card as you insert it.
The replacement of a CMU requires that the cell be taken out-of-service only when the
cell is equipped with a single CMU. If the cell is equipped with two or more CMUs,
calls are supported by the second CMU during the replacement. The conditions and
commands for replacing a CMU are summarized below.
Conditions

Value

Hot swappable (Y/N)

Need for re-download (Y/N)

Need to calibrate power

(Y/N)

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

Other Issues

Comments

Download is automatically done at restore.

CMU-IVB and CMU-V require a capacity

license per circuit pack serial number.

Configuration caution

In configurations with high growth potentials, the 9228 Macro configurations or 3rd
carrier DO) use of a CMU-III or EVR can block access to incremental firewire bus
resources that are available to the SB-EVM and eventually to the CMU-V. The
additional firewire bus will be required for optimum performance in mixed voice/DO
cells of over 9 carriers and all cells grown to a 3rd DO carrier. CMU-IIIB, CMU-IV,
CMU-IVB or CMU-V are the recommended channel cards for all 9228 Macro
configurations. EVR-B is the recommended receive card to support DO in these cells.
In 9228 Macro where a 3rd carrier DO will eventually be desired, the following
configuration rule applies:

If SB-EVM and URC-II are configured together with CMU-III (BNJ37) or EVR
(BNJ48), the following configuration limitations apply: EVM installed in slot 12 and no CMU-III or EVR in slots 8 and SB-EVM installed in slot 11 - and no
CMU-III or EVR in slots 4 and 7.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace a CMU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commands for the replacement of a CMU

Important! In the command syntax ccu represents the CMU.

Purpose

Command

Command to
take unit
out-of-service

rmv:cell a, cdm b, ccu c

Comments

Where a = cell number 1-max cells

b = CDM number 1-16
c = CMU number 1-12 (1-18 in the
outdoor cabinet)

Command to
restore unit

rst:cell a, cdm b, ccu c

Where a = RCS number 1-max cells

b = CDM number 1-16

If needed, this operation

places the cell back into
service.

c = CMU number 1-12 (1-18 in the

outdoor cabinet)
Message if
successful

rst:cell a, ccu c, atp

Before a CMU is removed

Important! For OOS limits, 9218 Macro uses the 3G-1X OOS Limit fields in the
following forms in order cell3g -> cell2 -> ecp3g -> ecp forms. The
btseqp form is also impacted as follows
btseqp -> cell3g -> cell2 -> ecp3g -> ecp. 9218 Macro does not use
the Total OOS limit fields in the cell2 and ecp forms. The default 3G-1X OOS
limit is 100 for major alarms and 49 for minor alarms.
Before a CMU is removed unconditionally (UCL) or conditionally (CDL) from
service (either manually, or as the result of a fault), the following actions occur:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Taking the CMU out-of-service is subject to the following criteria.

For CDL (conditional) remove, if the major OOS limit is exceeded, the remove is
rejected.

For UCL (unconditional) remove, the remove is allowed, regardless of whether the
OOS limit was ever exceeded. A warning will be sent to MSC.

The OOS limit has a separate threshold values than the CMU, which are customer
defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCL or CDL remove of CMUs is allowed. Camp-on is followed before the remove.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-16

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace a CMU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the major OOS limit is exceeded, CDL remove is rejected, and the UCL remove
proceeds. The MSC is notified of the OOS limit being exceeded.

After a CMU is restored

If the CMU, both conditional (CDL) and unconditional (UCL), restore failed after the
replacement, make sure CE (Channel Element) provisioning value for the new CMU is
correct. Also make sure the license for the new CE controlled CMU is installed on the
B-Server. For the CMUs with CE provisioning feature (CMU-II since R21.0,
CMU-IVB, since R27.0), CE provisioning must be set or the CMU will be OOS. For
the CMUs without the CE provisioning feature (CMU-III(B), CMU-IV), CE provision
can not be set or the CMU will be OOS. For the CMUs with the CE license controlled
feature (CMU-V since R29.0; CMU-IVB since R30.0), the license must be installed on
B-Server or the CMU will be OOS. For detailed license installation procedures refer to
Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance, 401-662-108
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check the CCU type. Type:

op:cell #, cdm #, inventory

the output will include the CCU type (if this command is inhibit because
INVENTORY feature is not turned on, you need to set CELL. Use the following table
shows the inventory.
CMU Type

Function Code

APP Code

CMU-II

FUNC CODE=CMUII

APP CODE-BNJ59

CMU-III

FUNC CODE=CMUIII

APP CODE=BNJ37

CMU-IIIB

UNC CODE=CMUIIIB

APP CODE=BNJ37B

CMU-IV

FUNC CODE=CMUIV

APP CODE=BNJ55

CMU-IVB

FUNC CODE=CMUIVB

APP CODE=BNJ55B

CMU-V

FUNC CODE=CMUV

APP CODE=BNJ83

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace a CMU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check BTSEQP form for the CCU Tech Type, CE Max, and CE Enable located on
SDP Pages 14-17. The value for the CCU Tech Type for all CMUs should be set to
1X. Use the following table values to populate the CE Max and CE Enabled fields.
CE Board Type

CE Max

CE Enabled

CMU-II

32

Blank (8, 16, 24 or 32)

CMU-III(B)

Blank

Blank

CMU-IV

Blank

Blank

CMU-IVB

128

Blank for Release 30.0 / (32, 64,

96, or 128) for R27.0 - R29.0

CMU-V

256

Blank

A wrong configuration causes the CCU to become out-of-service.

Important! In R30.0 or higher, the CMU-IVB, and in R29.0 or higher, the CMU-V
are controlled by a license instead of the QFAF, which is populated by the RC/V
mask. The btseqp form should be configured on the CDMA Channel Unit (CCU)
Information section to the following values: CE Max = 128, CE Enabled = blank
for the CMU-IV and CE Max = 256, CE Enabled = blank for the CMU-V.
For more information on FID 8859.8 and FID 13459.0, see the following:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA2000 Wireless Networks CMU-IVB Optional Feature

Description, 401-612-857

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network CDMA Modem Unit - V (CMU-V) Channel

Card and Related Features Optional Feature Description, 401-612-896

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restore CCU after the correct CE Max and CE Enabled values are updated. Type:
rst:cell a, cdm b, ccu c

Procedure to physically move a CMU from one cell to another cell

Perform the following procedures to physically move a CMU from one cell to another
cell which are located in the same MSC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the CMU from service. Type:

rmv:cell a, cdm b, ccu c

This will release the CMU license (either CMU-IVB or CMU-V).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-18

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace a CMU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Physically remove the CMU from the cell.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Physically install the CMU into the new cell located in the same MSC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the btseqp RC/V screen (pages 14-17) enter the appropriate CE Max and
CE Enabled values for the replaced CMU, see After a CMU is restored (p. 15-18)
above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restore the cell with the new CMU. Type:

rst: cell a, cdm b, ccu c

Error Message

If the following error message is displayed license in use enter the following
command to release the old license and restore the CMU again:
refresh:license, feature cmu#, hostid xxx; ucl

To get the CMUs serial number which is the host id, enter the following command:
op:cell a, cdm b, inventory

Restore the CMU. Type:

rst: cell a, cdm b, ccu c

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the URC

Conditions for the replacement of the URC

Important! When the URCII is used as a spare controller and the main URCII
goes OOS, it will take approximately 8 to 10 minutes for the spare URCII to
become active.
Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface. Label each cable before you remove it.
The conditions and commands for replacing the URC are summarized below.
Conditions

Value

Hot swappable (Y/N)

Need for re-download

(Y/N)

N if
initialization
is successful
Y if
initialization
fails

Comments

After the URC has completed its Board

Level Self-Test (BLST), the board
initializes and checks the board NVM. If
the board contains the correct image, there
is no need for technician intervention.
Perform the op:cell x, cdm y, generic
command to check the generic. If it is not
the correct image, the technician must
perform a download.

Need to calibrate power

(Y/N)

RMT required for

operation (Y/N)

If download is required, it can be

performed either from the RMT or through
a TI command.

Other Issues

N/A

When the output message is REPT

SECURITY ALERT, contact your Security
Administrator (as per local procedures) to
decipher cause codes and facilitate URC
replacement. Codes 04003 and 05003 are
for information only and may be ignored.
Codes 04004, 04005, 05004, and 05005
require Security Administrator intervention.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-20

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commands for the replacement of the URC

Important! In the command syntax cdm represents the group of components

configured with that URC and crc represents the URC.
Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to take unit

out-of-service

rmv:cell a, cdm b, crc

This command takes the

cell out-of-service.

Where a=cell number

1-max cells
b=CDM number 1-16

Command to restore unit

rst:cell a, cdm b, crc

Message if successful

RST:CELL a,ATP

This command places the

cell back into service.

Removing existing URC boards from service

Follow the steps below to remove URC from service at the Switch Center (NOC) and
remove the URC boards at the site.
Important! Starting with Release 28.0, the URC 44WA50A and URC 44WA50 do
not have enough flash memory to be able to store the software download. A new
URC-B 44WW70B and URC-IIB 44WW65B controllers must be installed to
accommodate the larger flash file system for all types of 9218 Macro, 9216
Compact , and 9218 Macro HD frames.
NOTE: An external Memory Upgrade Kit installation is another option to upgrade
9218 Macro or 9216 Compact URC 44WA50A. This type of URC upgrade is not
part of this procedure.
See Firewire Flash Memory Solution for URC located in the following manuals:

Alcatel-Lucent Base Stations Macro 9218, 9228, 9228 LP, 9228 HD, and 9228
Distributed System Description, 401-703-486

Alcatel-Lucent 9222 and 9222 Base Stations Micro Distributed (formerly

Alcatel- Lucent CDMA Base Station 2400) System Description, 401-703-487

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel- Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact / EN System Description,

401-703-488

Alcatel- Lucent 9216/9226 Base Station Compact Series (formerly Modular Cell
4.0/4.0B Compact Series) System Description, 401-703-489

Step

Action

Allow Automatic Key Exchange (remains allowed for a 3 hour period) via
OMP:
su - rcelltch
cfgcellssh a <cell_id>, <cell_id>

Where <cell_id> = a cell number of one or more URC(s) to be replaced.

Note: If you do not have an OMP login, you must contact NOC personnel to
run this command before attempting URC replacement.
Note: The cfgcellssh tool only needs to be run if IPBH security is enabled.
See the following topics for information:IPBH Security (p. 15-22) and
cfgcellssh tool (p. 15-23)
Note: If Restrict Root Login (FID 13003.2) is enabled, the login process has
changed. Refer to CDMA network login with RRL (p. 25-4) for details.
This feature enhances MM-AP security by restricting access to MM-AP
resources and information.
2

Command to take unit out-of-service:

rmv:cell a, cdm b, crc

Where a = cell number 1-max cells b=CDM number 1-16

Note: When the CDM is a Parent Voice CDM, then the corresponding child
EVDO CDM will also go out-of-service.
3

Remove URC 44WA50A or 44WA50 boards from the frame.

Note: When parent controller is removed an EVDO child controller can be
also removed for replacement if needed.

IPBH Security

A cell site can run IPBH Security when IPBH Security Services Capable is enabled on
the cco form. Contact the Security Administrator to determine if IPBH Security is
running. With IPBH Security enabled, SSH Key Exchange must be configured between
the IPBH URCs (both 1X and EVDO) and NVM Download servers, at the MSC. The
Security Administrator controls whether or not this exchange occurs automatically.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-22

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

After replacing a URC, the following ROP messages indicate SSH Key Exchange was
successful:

04003 (for 1X IPHB URCs)

05003 (for EVDO URCs)

After replacing a URC, the following ROP messages indicate SSH Key Exchange was
not successful:

04004 and 04005 (for 1X IPHB URCs)

05004 and 05005 (for EVDO URCs)

The Security Administrator must be contacted if SSH Key Exchange was not
successful. Failure to configure SSH Key Exchange does not affect call processing.
FID 13006.11 (New Tool to Configure SSH for Replacement URCs) introduces the
new UNIX tool cfgcellssh. The cfgcellssh tool simplifies URC replacement by enabling
a non-privileged user (i.e., a non-Security Administrator such as a cell tech) to allow
automatic SSH Key Exchange for selected IPBH cell IDs so the new URC can be
initialized.
cfgcellssh tool

The functionality of the cfgcellssh tool is as follows:

Allows for a maximum number of 20 cells to be listed.

Allows Automatic Key Exchange for a 3 hour period of time from when the cell is
added to the list. Key Exchange is allowed even if the Allow Automatic Key
Provisioning: IPBH Network field on the mscsec RC/V form is set to N (if Allow
Automatic Key Provisioning: IPBH Network is set to N the Key update is reported
to the ROP). When the 3 hour time limit expires, cells are automatically removed
from the list the next time the tool is executed.

Allows for only one instance of the tool to run at any given time. Multiple Users
can add/delete cells from list, but only one instance of the tool is allowed to run at
a time.

Supports logging of all user actions, including failed attempts.

The following table provides an overview of the syntax associated with the cfgcellssh
tool.
Add cell ID
cfgcellssh a <cell_id>, <cell_id>, . . . <cell_id>

Delete cell ID
cfgcellssh d <cell_id>, <cell_id>, . . . <cell_id>

Query

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add cell ID
cfgcellssh q

Help
cfgcellssh h

Install the URC-II boards

Follow the steps below at the site to install URC-II (44WW65B) or URCB
(44WW70B) boards and reconnect a cable at the site.
Important! In most cases of that project URC-II boards will be used to replace
URC boards.
Step

Action

Install new URC-II (44WW65B) or URCB (44WW70B) boards.

Note: If spare URC controller is equipped at the frame, replace spare URC
with URC-II at the same time.
If a new URC installed is a URC-II then go to Step 2.
If a new URC installed is a URCB then go to Step 3.

If URC-II is a parent voice controller for EVDO through the Ethernet hub or
parent for CLGC for Ethernet hub then reconnect cables.
Warning: When URC board replaced by URC-II boards, reconnect the
Ethernet cable from the Ethernet hub directly to the URC-IIs faceplate
Ethernet jack.
Go to Step 3.

Inform Switch Center (NOC) that URC-II boards are installed and have green
STAT LEDs.
Note: If a green STAT LED does not appear in 10-12 minutes, replace the
board with another one. Mark that URC-II board as a bad.

Restore the URC Units

Follow the steps below at NOC to restore controller boards.

Step

Action

Verify from the Control and Status Display Page 2131 that SL is up on CDM
with the replaced URC board.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-24

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Step

Action

Perform the op: cell a, cdm b, generic command to check the generic.
If the generic is present and correct, go to Step 4.
If the generic is not present or correct, go to Step 3.

Download generic through TI command:

Send:cell a, cdm b, generic FxxxxDBGA.00 (to the voice CDM), or
Send:cell a, cdm b, generic FxxxxEBGA.00 (to the DO CDM) or
Send: cell a, generic FxxxxDBGA.00 to the cell with a Spare URC.

Update fields CRC Controller Type on the BTSEQP form, screens 2, or and
5, or and 8.
Note: If URCB board 44WW70B installed, there is no update to BTSEQP
form.
Note: If a spare URC controller replaced with URC-II board, then update
BTSEQP form, Screen 1, field Spare CRC Type

Note: This step is only required if there are changes to the cell configuration,
such as changing the URC type, adding new controllers, and so on. This step
is not required when swapping out a bad URC without changing the cell
configuration.
Restart RCS and then verify the proper response from restored CDM:
Restart:rcs # from TICLI.

Verify normal operation

Use the following procedure to verify the cell is not reporting alarms or has units OOS
at a cell with Voice or EVDO carriers.
Step

Action

Type the following command from the TICLI input terminal:

op:cell a, extern

Verify there are no alarms reported.

If alarms are reported, clear all alarms. Note: Not including any pre-existing
alarms noted at the beginning of the upgrade.
If alarms are not reported, go to the next step.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Step

Action

Verify that CELL SUMMARY shows an act (or green) from the Control &
Status Display Page 2131, a.
If Cell Summary shows oos or trbl find the OOS unit(s) and restore it.
Note: Use the other Control & Status Display Pages if necessary: 2136, a;
2138,a,b; 2139,a,b,c
If Cell Summary shows act continue to step 4.

The upgrade has been completed.

At the Cell Site ensure the following before leaving the site:

Verify with Switch Center (NOC) that all data sheets are completed

The doors and panels to all Modcell cabinets are secure.

URC Troubleshooting Table

See table below for some possible problem resolutions and frequently asked questions.
Problem or FAQ

Possible Cause

Resolution

URC-II board installed in a

slot with known good T1,
but green STAT LED does
not appear.

URC-II board is bad.

Replace the URC-II board.

Controller contains
required generic with Bad
status.

File is corrupted.

Re-send generic to the

CDM.

Sending generic to the

CDM fails with message
Invalid file from
RCS-AP

Sending generic to one

CDM and using incorrect
generic file name.

If generic send to Voice

CDM, then use file name
FxxxDBGA.yy
If generic send to EVDO,
then use file name
FxxxEBGA.yy

What is required minimum

generic for URC-II boards?

Cell software release R25.

Can URC-II boards be used

on Modcell 1, 2 or 3
frames?

No. URC-II controllers are

only for Modcell 4.0,
Compact 4.0, Modcell 4.0B
and BS 8420.

What is required minimum

generic for new URCB
board 44WW70B?

Cell software release R26.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-26

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the URC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Problem or FAQ

Possible Cause

Resolution

Can URC-II and URC

boards coexist in one
frame?

Yes.

Is a new URCMB board

available for Modcell 1, 2
and 3?

New URCMB board is

available. It is 44WW71B
board. New URCMB board
required minimum cell
software release 27.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-2: Replace Ethernet Backhaul URC with

firewall and security enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 15-2: Replace Ethernet Backhaul URC with firewall

and security enabled
Before you begin

This is an Optional Feature (FID 13096.0) - IP Firewall. When EBH is present, the
replacement of URC will require the technician to check whether the port on the EIU
has been port security with its MAC address. If the MAC address is port security,
the technician must work with OMC-RAN/MST technicians to remove the old settings
and add the new settings by performing the following procedure.
Important! This is only applicable to the following base stations:

9218/9228 Macro

9216/9226 Compact
9224 Sub-Compact

9222 Micro Distributed

Purpose

Perform Replace the URC (p. 15-20) to take the URC out-of-service and replace the
URC. This procedure should only be performed if the Ethernet Backhaul Optional
Feature has been installed. The work is performed from the OMC-RAN/MST
remotely with a technician that is familiar with the OMC-RAN application. When
replacing the URC, the URC being replaced will be OOS in order to properly
configure the new URC. Note that the old URC address must be removed from the
OMC-RAN/MST before a new URC can be added to the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Execute Enable port security on URC port macro.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Execute Set Bridge Aging to 1800 sec (default is 300 sec).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the MST-CLI cut through window, verify that the URC port has learned the MAC
address by typing show port-security dynamic <interface>, where <interface> is the
assignment of the URC. The table Interface table (p. 15-29) shows the <interface>
identifiers.
Repeat this step until one dynamic learned MAC address does not show up in the
table. Then send a ping request from the RCS AP to the LIU in question.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-28

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-2: Replace Ethernet Backhaul URC with

firewall and security enabled

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Execute Move Dynamic MAC addresses to static MAC addresses to move the
dynamically learned MAC address to the static table stored in the EIU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On MST-CLI cut through window type show port-security <interface> to check the
port-security state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On MST-CLI cut through window type show port-security static <interface> to

ensure that the MAC address is moved to the static table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the default bridge Aging time back to 300 sec by executing Set Bridge Aging.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Interface table

The following table lists the <interface> equivalents. These are the ports that the URC
connects to on the EIU. The numbering is not intuitive. For example if you have
URC1 connected to J1 jack, then the <interface> # would be a-9.
RJ-45 jack#

<Interface> #

RJ-45 jack#

<Interface> #

J1

a-9

J9

a-17

J2

a-10

J10

a-18

J3

a-11

J11

a-19

J4

a-12

J12

a-20

J5

a-13

J13

a-21

J6

a-14

J14

a-22

J7

a-15

J15

a-23

J8

a-16

J16

a-24

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the OM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the OM
Conditions to replace the OM

Important! Re-attaching the cables incorrectly will lead to confusion in the user
interface. Label each cable before you remove it.
The conditions and commands for the replacement of the OM (rubidium or crystal
oscillator) are summarized below.
Conditions

Value Comments

Hot swappable (Y/N)

Need for re-download (Y/N)

Need to calibrate power (Y/N)

RMT required for operation

(Y/N)

The temperature of the OM must stabilize

after replacement before the cell can be
restored to service.

Other Issues

See the following documents for power calibration procedures.

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0, Microcell, and

CDBS, 401-703-439

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-30

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Replace the OM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commands to replace the OM

Important! In the command syntax tfu represents the CTU.

Purpose

Command

Comments

Command to take unit

out-of-service

rmv:cell
a, tfu b

This command takes the cell out-of-service

if it is the primary CTU.

Where:
a = cell
number 1-max
cells
b = CTU
number 1-8
Command to restore
unit

rst:cell
a, tfu b

Message if successful

RST:CELL a,
ATP

This operation places the cell back into

service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets
Purpose

The Heat Exchanger weighs approximately 43 kg (95 lb) and appropriate lifting
devices and/or techniques should be used to prevent personal injury. This procedure is
a two person minimum operation and requires the use of a back support/brace.
Important! There are no Heat Exchangers in the 9218 Macro HD.
Important! For the outdoor 9216 Compact Heat Exchanger assembly being
replaced, the AC to the heater assembly must be powered down prior to the
removal from the frame.
Materials/tools/test equipment requirements

The following equipment is needed to perform this procedure:

Table 15-1

Tools for heat exchanger replacement

Equipment/Tools

Description/Comcodes

F9000 Cordless screwdriver, 30

in-lb

Deep Well 6-Point Socket 3/8 Drive

Digital Fan Tray Assembly (2

Fan Version)

Comcode: 407968916 (+24 VDC)

Cable Assemblies

Comcode: 848180220 (WH20), Lucent Comcode:

848206603 (WH22)

Assembly, Enclosure, Test

Comcode: 848546529

Power Supply

Model: Sorensen DCS 33-33 or Equivalent (24

VDC), the current limit is 30A.

Comcode: 408321222 (-48 VDC)

Model: HP 6574 A or Equivalent (-48 VDC), the

current limit is 35A.
110 VAC Source

McLean Controller with Special

Firmware for Heat Exchanger
Testing

P/N: M-14731 (24 VDC), Spares Are Advised.

Torque-Limiting Driver, 20 in-lb

ASG Torque or Equivalent

P/N: M-14757 (-48 VDC), Spares Are Advised

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-32

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table contains materials and quantities of items needed to perform this
procedure.
Description

Comcode

Quantity

Heat Exchanger for +24 VDC

407968957

1 each

Heat Exchanger for -48 VDC

408323996

1 each

Screw, Spanner, M4 x 17 mm L, 18-8 S.S.

901368846

42

Washer, M4 Alcatel-Lucent

901325373

42

Lock Washer, M4

901311266

36

Pre-inspection procedure

Perform the following to pre-inspect the heat exchanger:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the foam from the top of the heat exchanger.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stand packing box upright on its base and remove the heat exchanger by sliding it
forward.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Visually inspect the heat exchanger for the following:

Scratches, dents, finish, flatness overall appearance.

Blower gaskets for rips/tears or missing gaskets.

Loose hardware and labels. Refer to mechanical drawing, Comcode 848337929.

The following figure of the 9218/9228 Macro, shows the area where the heat
exchanger is located.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-34

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Heat exchanger electrical test

Perform the following procedure to test the heat exchanger electrical.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the Controller (Comcode 407968965/408322386) inside the digital fan tray
assembly (Comcode 4079689/408321222) by McLean Controller with special firmware
for each exchanger testing (McLean P/N: M-14731/M-14757) for 24/-48 VDC, on
which the dip switch setting is configured as follows:
Switch

Position

H1

On

H2

Off

H3

On

H4

Off

D1

Off/On1

D2

Off/On1

A1

Off

A2

Off

Notes:

1.

D1 or D2 can be set as off or on.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

As shown in the figure, plug in power supply for 24 VDC system, or -48 VDC system
(WH22 Cable) to connector labeled (J3) and (J4) to the heat exchanger, along with AC
Power (100 VAC) by assembly (Comcode: 848546529) to (J1) of the heat exchanger.
Do not run self test on start up. The software should be programmed in a manner to
test as quickly as possible upon application of DC power. Stick one side of a piece of
paper above the exhaust of the ambient side and enclosure side of the heat exchanger
for airflow check.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform the following electrical testing steps:

Power up the heat exchanger

Press the Quick Test button and hold for two seconds. Clear all previous alarms.

All LEDs should flash red-green-red-green and stop at ALL GREEN.

All fans should spin up to 1500 RMS for approximately 30 seconds. Check for
airflow by watching the paper that was placed on the exhaust.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If H1 is working properly with the speed exceeding 1400 RPM, the heater will turn
on when the test sequence reaches the heater test (LED of HEAT), the heater test
observes that the meter reads approximately 8 A. The heater should remain on
during the remainder of the test. All LEDs should remain green unless a fault
occurs.
Criteria for heater test (Pass): AC meter reading is within the range of 8 2 A, and
LED of HEAT stays on GREEN after the test sequence is completed.
Criteria for heater test (Fail): AC meter reading is out of range of 8 2 A, or LED
of HEAT stays on RED after test sequence is completed.
Then all fans should ramp to FULL speed for 10 seconds. Listen for vibration,
excess noise, etc.

Check the controller to ensure all LED(s) are GREEN. If there is an alarm(s), such
as, LED(s) stay RED, it indicates the corresponding part(s) failure. This process
requires approximately 2 minutes.

After the test is run, the Heater turns OFF, fans should spool down to OFF and
hold, LEDs should remain GREEN unless there is a failure. If a failure is present,
the corresponding LED will go to RED and hold until power is removed or quick
test is pressed.

Turn off AC power and remove AC cable for the heat exchanger, remove the DC
cable and signal cable from the heat exchanger. It is not required to remove the DC
power.

After electrical test is completed, stage heat exchanger for mechanical assembly. To
test next heat exchanger, attach cables, apply AC voltage and repeat the above steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mechanical assembly, mount the heat exchanger to the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position the heat exchanger in front of the cabinet door, align the door mounting studs
and mount the heat exchanger temporarily. Note: heat exchanger should rest on the
bottom door flange. The lifting tabs are part of the heat exchanger assembly and are
recommended for aid in lifting the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the heat exchanger to the two stop door studs using M4 hardware (washers,
lock washers, nuts) and hand tighten. Note: check for alignment of mounting holes on
the front of the door with heat exchanger thread inserts and adjust if necessary. Then
re-tighten the M4 hardware when holes are aligned.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

15-36

Replace and repair common components between base

stations

Procedure 15-3: Replace the heat exchanger for outdoor

cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure with M4 washers, then M4 lock washers and M4 x 16 mm spanner head

screws. Make sure to first hand tighten screws with hand tool. Torque all screws to 20
in-lb. Tighten in spiral pattern, to ensure all screws are fully torqued. Start tightening
screws at top and bottom windows. Equally tighten screws both top and bottom in
order to maintain equal pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install remaining M4 hardware to secure heat exchanger to the inside of the cabinet
door and torque to 20 in-lb.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tighten the screws on the heat exchanger to 20 in-lb to ensure screws are torqued
uniformly.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
15-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

16

16
9218/9228
Base Station
Macro component
replacement and repair

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the component replacement and repair processes and procedures
for the indoor and outdoor 9218/9228 Base Station Macro cabinets.
Contents
Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218 Macro cabinets

16-2

Procedure 16-2: Replace the Fan Tray for outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet

16-8

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro cabinet

16-10

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro cabinet

16-14

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM

16-18

Replace circuit packs

16-22

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

16-24

Modify or decommission battery box for outdoor cabinets with

integrated power and batteries only

16-47

Procedure 16-7: Realign Door on outdoor cabinet

16-48

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218

Macro cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218 Macro
cabinets
Purpose

The fan trays located in the indoor 9218 Macrocabinet, may need to be replaced in the
field whenever a malfunction occurs. There is one fan tray provide within the indoor
cabinet. The fan trays provide protection for the Digital Shelf and Amplifier Shelf.
While it is recommended that the cell be powered down during fan tray replacement,
the procedure may be performed by experienced personnel with minimal component
overheating risk involved.
NOTE: fan settings for the Amplifier shelf (A12) Fan Tray do NOT need to be
changed when adding carriers to the Macro cabinet.
Amplifier Fan Tray Replacement

Perform the following to remove the Amplifier Fan Tray:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use this procedure to remove the Fan Tray. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four (4) mounting screws M5 securing fan tray
to cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-2

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218

Macro cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218

Macro cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Toggle CB5 Power Connector J16 on the PDP to the off position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a small Phillips-head screwdriver loosen screws and disconnect fan power
connector from the Amplifier Fan Tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure to set aside any cable obstruction and proceed to pull and slide Amplifier Fan
tray out and away from cabinet frame.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-4

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218

Macro cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install new Amplifier Fan Tray

Install the new Amplifier Tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure that all obstructions are removed, carefully slide fan tray onto its corresponding
location in the indoor cabinet frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure fan tray to frame by installing four (4) mounting screws (M5). Tighten screws
using an 8-mm nutdriver or a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. Torque screws to 25 in-lb.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect Fan Power Connector to Amplifier Fan Tray. Then using a small Phillips-head
screwdriver, secure connector by tightening its set screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Toggle CB5 Power Connector J16 on PDP to the on position.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Digital Shelf Fan Tray replacement procedure

Perform the following to remove the Fan Tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fan Tray. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver,

remove the four (4) mounting screws M5 securing the fan tray to the cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218

Macro cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cut the tie wraps to the power cables that present on the right side of the fan tray. This
will give you better access to remove the fan tray from the cabinet by lifting the cables
out of the way.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-6

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-1: Replace the Fan Trays for indoor 9218

Macro cabinets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fan Tray from the base station and replace with the new tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, screw the four (4) M5

screws to secure the fan tray back to the cabinet frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reattach the tie wraps as they were originally found using new tie wraps.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-2: Replace the Fan Tray for outdoor 9218

Macro cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-2: Replace the Fan Tray for outdoor 9218

Macro cabinet
Relate information

The fan trays located in the outdoor 9218 Macro cabinet, may need to be replaced in
the field whenever a malfunction occurs. While it is recommended that the cell be
powered down during fan tray replacement, the procedure may be performed by
experienced personnel with minimal component overheating risk involved. The
following procedure is applicable for replacement of the Fan Tray. The procedure is
suitable for a single person operation.
Important! Fan settings for the Amplifier shelf (A12) Fan Tray do NOT need to be
changed when adding carriers to the Macro cabinet.
Fan Tray Replacement
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! Note that the power cables located to the right of the fan tray may be
in the way and may need to be lifted out of the way in order to gain access to the
M5 screws.
Remove the fan tray. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove
the four M5 mounting screws securing the fan tray to the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a small #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen screws and disconnect the fan
power connector from the fan tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure to set aside any cable obstruction and proceed to pull and slide the Fan Tray
out and away from the cabinet frame.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! Note that the power cables to the right of the fan tray may be in the
way and need to be moved out of the way in order to gain access to the screws.
Slide the new Fan Tray into the cabinet. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, install the four M5 mounting screws securing the fan tray to the cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-8

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-2: Replace the Fan Tray for outdoor 9218

Macro cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the power cable to the Fan Tray. Using a small #2 Phillips-head screwdriver ,
reinstall the screws to the power connector.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro cabinet

Conditions for replacing the PDP

Important! Ensure the appropriate environmental protection measures are taken

before opening the front door on the cabinet.
Important! The cabinet door, especially during strong winds, can cause serious
personal injury. To ensure that the door is properly operated and secure, and to
avoid its contact with any part of your body, follow the instructions in the users
manual and always wear a safety helmet. To avoid ESD damage to the frame and
components contained within, be sure to wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside
the base station before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure the
ESD wrist strap is grounded to the frame.
Power down the base station

These procedures apply to both the integrated and non-integrated powered base station.
Non-integrated power only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station.

1. For DC only cabinets, power down the base station by setting the circuit breakers
on the PDP (CB1, CB2, and CB3) to the off position.
2. In the power cabinet (the DC supply to the base station) set the breakers for the
base station power feed to the off position.
Integrated power only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station.

1. For integrated power cabinets, set all breakers (CB1, CB2, and CB3) on the Power
Distribution Panel (PDP) to the off position.
2. Set the breakers for the base station power feeds to the off position which is
located on the AC PDA beneath the rectifier shelf (bottom right).
AC PDA

1 20VAC
OUTLET

CABN
I

ET

HEATER

BATTER Y
HEATER

RECT F
I E
I
1 & 3

RS

RECT F
I E
I

RS

2 & 4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-10

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure shows the faceplate of the PDP-6.

Disconnect the cables from the PDP

Perform the following procedure to disconnect the cables from the PDP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the J1-J6 cables from the front of the PDP. Remove the cables from J7
from A(17) to H(14).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refer to the following table for power and data cabling connections.
Power Cable (D-Sub)

Data Cable (RJ-45)

From

To

From

To

LAM 13

PDP-6 J1

LAM 1

PDP-6 J7 C (13)

LAM 14

PDP-6 J2

LAM 2

PDP-6 J7 H (14)

LAM 15

PDP-6 J3

LAM 3

PDP-6 J7 B (15)

LAM 16

PDP-6 J4

LAM 4

PDP-6 J7 F (16)

LAM 17

PDP-6 J5

LAM 5

PDP-6 J7 A (17)

LAM 18

PDP-6 J6)

LAM 6

PDP-6 J7 E (18)

AMP Fan Pwr

PDP-6 J8

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Remove the PDP

Perform the following procedure to remove the PDP from the frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the two screws located on the front of the PDP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the PDP from the unit.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new PDP

Perform the following procedure to install the new PDP-6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the new PDP into the PDP slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the PDP with two screws. Torque to 14 in-lb (1.5 N-m).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect and secure the corresponding cables of the PDP from the previous table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dress all cables away from the door and fan shelves to ensure the cables will not
interfere with the door or the door latch.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System Test

Perform the following procedure to ensure that everything was performed correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers on the frame power supply to the on position. For base station with
integrated power and the Circuit Breaker Box, set the breaker for the base station AC
Power Input to the on position. For the base station without Integrated Power, set the
breakers for the base station feed to the on position, which is located in a separate
power frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set all breakers (CB1, CB2, and CB3) on the PDP-6 to the on position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers for the base station power feeds to the on position which is located
on the AC PDA beneath the rectifier shelf (bottom right).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wait for the GPS receiver to indicate a GPS LOCK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-12

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-3: Replace the PDP-6 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed with system testing.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Securing the frame door

Perform this procedure to secure the frame door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make sure all cables will not interfere with the closing of the front door.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close the front door of the Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lock the front door, if applicable.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro cabinet

Conditions for replacing the PDP

Important! Ensure the appropriate environmental protection measures are taken

before opening the front door on the cabinet.
Important! The cabinet door, especially during strong winds, can cause serious
personal injury. To ensure that the door is properly operated and secure, and to
avoid its contact with any part of your body, follow the instructions in the users
manual and always wear a safety helmet. To avoid ESD damage to the frame and
components contained within, be sure to wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside
the base station before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure the
ESD wrist strap is grounded to the frame.
Power down the base station

These procedures apply for both the DC Power and Integrated Power Cabinets.
DC Power Only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station.

1. Set LAM and Fan breakers (CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4 and CB5) on the Power
Distribution Panel (PDP) to the off position in the order stated.
2. Set the Digital Shelf Power and Fan Tray Power breakers to the off position.
These breakers are located below the IOU on the Digital Shelf (bottom left).
3. Set both breakers on the TDU shelf to the off position. These breakers are
located in the power frame/supply for the base station.
Integrated Power Only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station.

1. Set LAM and Fan breakers (CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4 and CB5) on the Power
Distribution Panel (PDP) to the off position in the order stated.
2. Set the Digital Shelf Power and Fan Tray Power breakers to the off position.
These breakers are located below the IOU on the Digital Shelf (bottom left).
3. Set both breakers on the TDU shelf to the off position. These breakers are
located on the AC PDA, beneath the Rectifier Shelf (bottom right).
The following figure shows the faceplate of the PDP-12.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-14

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the cables from the PDP

Perform the following procedure to disconnect the cables from the PDP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the J1-J12 cables from the front of the PDP. Remove the cables from J13
from A(5) to H(2) and from J14 from A(11) to F(8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refer to the cabling table for power and data cabling connections.
Power Cable (D-Sub)

Data Cable (RJ-45)

From

To

From

To

LAM 1

PDP-12 J1

LAM 1

PDP-12 J13-C(1)

LAM 2

PDP-12 J2

LAM 2

PDP-12 J13-H(2)

LAM 3

PDP-12 J3

LAM 3

PDP-12 J13-B(3)

LAM 4

PDP-12 J4

LAM 4

PDP-12 J13-F(4)

LAM 5

PDP-12 J5

LAM 5

PDP-12 J13-A(5)

LAM 6

PDP-12 J6)

LAM 6

PDP-12 J13-E(6)

LAM 7

PDP-12 J7

LAM 7

PDP-12 J14-C(7)

LAM 8

PDP-12 J8

LAM 8

PDP-12 J14-F(8)

LAM 9

PDP-12 J9

LAM 9

PDP-12 J14-B(9)

LAM 10

PDP-12 J10

LAM 10

PDP-12 J14-E(10)

LAM 11

PDP-12 J11

LAM 11

PDP-12 J14-A(11)

LAM 12

PDP-12 J12

LAM 12

PDP-12 J14-D(12)

AMP Fan Pwr

PDP-12 J16

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the PDP

Perform the following procedure to remove the PDP from the frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the (2) M4 x 12mm screws located on the front of the PDP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the PDP from the unit.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new PDP

Perform the following procedure to install the new PDP-12.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the new PDP into the PDP slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the PDP with two M4 x 12 mm screws. Torque to 14 in-lb (1.5 N-m).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect and secure the corresponding cables of the PDP from the table above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dress all cables away from the door and fan shelves to ensure the cables will not
interfere with the door or the door latch.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System Test

Perform the following procedure to ensure that everything was performed correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers on the frame power supply to the on position. For base station with
integrated power and the Circuit Breaker Box located on the TDU shelf, set the
breaker for the 9218 Macro AC Power Input to the on position. For the base station
without Integrated Power (DC Power Only), set the breakers for the base station feed
to the on position, which is located on the TDU shelf in a separate power frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the Digital Shelf Power and Fan Tray Power breakers to the on position. These
breakers are located below the IOU on the Digital Shelf (bottom left).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-16

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-4: Replace the PDP-12 for 9218 Macro

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set all breakers (CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4, and CB5) on the PDP-12 to the on position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wait for the GPS receiver to indicate a GPS LOCK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed with system testing.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Securing the frame door

Perform this procedure to secure the frame door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make sure all cables will not interfere with the closing of the front door.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close the front door of the Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lock the front door, if applicable.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM

Purpose

Perform the following procedures to replace the EEPROM on the backplane of the
digital module for the 9218/9228 Macro.
Important! Ensure the appropriate environmental protection measures are taken
before opening the front door on the cabinet.
Important! To avoid ESD damage to the frame and components contained within,
be sure to wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside the 9218/9228 Macro before
continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure the ESD wrist strap is
grounded to the frame.
Important! When using the RMT, it must be the self-installed version.
Replace the EEPROM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the rear panel of the cabinet. For the indoor cabinet, use 5/16-in. nutdriver and
remove all eight bolts and lift off the rear access panel. For the outdoor cabinet, use
7/16-in. nutdriver and turn all four latches counter clock wise (approximately 1/4 turn)
and lift off rear access panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate the EEPROMs on the backplane, which are located on the upper right corner of
the backplane. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-18

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect to the URC #1 via the Ethernet port on the IOU. Make sure the DIP switch
setting on the IOU is for URC #1. (You will need to change the DIP switch setting to
the corresponding URC for each of the four EEPROMs.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect to the cell using the RMT or equivalent tool to load the data from the
EEPROMs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Once connected to the URC, save the old EEPROM setting to a file. The settings in
this file will be loaded onto the new EEPROM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check if the data in the old EEPROM was saved to a file. If the data was stored
correctly, power off the digital shelf by turning off the circuit breaker on the front of
the digital shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify the EEPROM pin number position. Note that the dot on the EEPROM
corresponds to pin 1 on the backplane. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the ESD wrist strap, remove the four EEPROMs (Atmel part number 25640 or
ST Microelectronics part number 95640).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the four new EEPROMs (Atmel P/N 25256 or ST Microelectronics P/N
M95256W). Again, note that the dot on the EEPROM corresponds to pin 1 on the
backplane.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-20

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

With the new EEPROMs installed, turn on the circuit breaker on the digital shelf.
Open a TIP window for URC #1. Set the boot configuration back for URC #1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Once the boot configuration for URC #1 is complete, connect the RMT or equivalent
tool, to load the new EEPROMs data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Load the new EEPROM with the data that was saved from the old corresponding
EEPROM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Change the DIP switch on the IOU for URC #2 and repeat the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

The procedure is completed when all four EEPROMs for each URC are programmed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Reinstall the rear access panel.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Replace circuit packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace circuit packs

Replace circuit packs for 9218 Macro/9216 Compact cabinet

The following table provides information on replacement of the cell equipment. This
table also provides information on which packs can be hot-swapped and whether
they have to be re-NVMd for the 9218 Macro/9216 Compact cabinet.
Circuit
Pack

Hot
swappable

Re-NVM

Calibrate RF

CPC

Filter

TDU

TxAMP

CTU

UCR

MCR

CMU

EVM

URC

OM

Filter
Simulator

PIM

Fan Tray

Heater

TTTM

DLM

Rectifier

Y1

Controller for
Rectifier

SPM

no CLGC

CLGC

Notes:

1.

Rectifier is hot swappable if the 9222 Micro Distributed is equipped with battery backup.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-22

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Replace circuit packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refer to CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact

Distributed, 9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN,
9218/9228 Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437, for power calibrations on the
following radio cabinets:

9218/9228 Macro
9216/9226 Compact

9216 Compact Distributed

9228 Macro LP
9228 Macro IN

9224 Sub-Compact EN

9224 Sub-Compact
9222 Micro

Refer to CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228
Macro MCPA, 401-703-438, for power calibration procedures. The RMT is needed for
all calibration.
Replace circuit packs for 9218/9228 Macro HD cabinet

The following table provides information on replacement of the cell equipment. This
table also provides information on which packs can be hot-swapped and whether
they have to be re-NVMd for the 9218/9228 Macro HD cabinet.
Circuit
Pack

Hot
swappable

Calibrate RF

CMU

CPC

CTU

EVM

Filter

LAC

N/A

MCR

OM

TDU

TxAMP

UCR

URC

no CLGC

CLGC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

Before you begin

Perform this procedure to add a new URC for an IP Backhaul cell.

It is assumed that the operator has sufficient experience with the 9218/9228 Macro, T1
Concentrator, router, and MSC equip forms. Detailed explanations of the uses of these
components is outside the scope of this document. It is assumed that an operational
IPBH configuration is already present. This document does not cover the complete
configuration of the IPBH network.
Backplane (RMT)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Load Release 25.0 GA RMT software into a laptop.

Note: It is required that the client-based RMT be loaded on a personal computer
with 2 GB of RAM (FID 14152.0).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use the RMT to check the cell generic of each URC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Load Release 25.0 or later cell generic to the URC through the RMT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change the backplane version to version 4 and sub-identifiers 8 if current version in

not version 4.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-24

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Recall TGCP and ILTP files for each IPBH URC. These files are bundled with R25.0
or higher GS RMT, under C:\Program Files|Lucent
Technologies\RMT\config\IEH\BMP\cdma2k-Voice\Modcell 4.0-URC\T1\IP Backhaul
[Record Version 4]. Pick the correct file based on CDM number.
The TGCP file names are:

TGCP = URC - CDM1-CDM5-CDM9 - IPH - T1.xml

TGCP-URC-CDM2-CDM6-CDM10-IPBH-T1.xml
TGCP-URC-CDM3-CDM7-CDM11-IPBH-T1.xml

The ILCP file names are:

ILCP-URC-CDM1-CDM5-CDM9-IPBH.xml

ILCP-URC-CDM2-CDM6-CDM10-IPBH.xml

ILCP-URC-CDM3-CDM7-CDM11-IPBH.xml

TGCP RMT example:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-26

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The above example shows the URC has 4 T1s, so the Selected TGMs at
the lower right corner has 4 TGMs (T1) checked. Unchecked unused T1s to match
the T1 configuration of the cell.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use RMT to retrieve BPSN (backplane serial number) for each URC and make sure
they are the same within the same cabinet and unique across cabinets, write down the
BPSN and pass it over to the switch tech. The switch tech will populate the BPSN on
the btseqp form.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The BPSN is 03TR02006573 as shown in the middle of the screen. Do not
confuse that with the BTS Serial Number as shown in the top of the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Program Unit Type Descriptor (IEH 238-311), BTS Primary RF Path Map
(IEH-238-312) and BTS RF Test Path Map (IEH 238-313) the same way as frame
relay.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Router changes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration - an IP address of URC/MLG - static

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-28

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The URC has a point-to-point interface with the router - Multilink Group (MLG). It is
required to have an IP address for both sides of the point-to-point interface. There are
several steps to take when adding a new MLG configuration to the router. A summary
of the steps is as follows:

Add a new unit to the AS-PIC (LSQ)

Decompose additional T1s from the channelized OC3/12 interface

Attach the new LSQ unit to the T1s which will make up the MLG

Make sure Class of Service is applied to the new unit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration Add a new unit to the LSQ

Each AS-PIC is defined as an LSQ in the router. In addition the location of the AS-PIC
defines the LSQ uniquely. For instance from the below configuration lsq-0/2/0 is the
AS-PIC in chassis slot location 0/2/0.
To create a new MLG, a new unit must be assigned under the lsq. This unit provides
all the addresses associated with the MLG and additional configurational parameters
that may be assigned at the global level. The family inet configuration assigns the
router IP for the MLG (address), the OneBTS IP for the MLG(destination) and the
destination-profile which provides the address of the BHCS to the OneBTS using IPCP.
Both the router and URC MLG IP addresses need to be within the same 256 address
range due to gateway provisioning on the OneBTS.
Additional parameters under the unit are common for all MLGs and are most likely
already provisioned at the group level. The lsq-failure-options associate an OC3/12
interface with the AS-PIC for failure scenarios. This needs to be done only during the
addition of a new AS-PIC or lsq.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration Parameters Description:

1. Parameter Name:Encapsulation
Description:Multilink PPP
Values: On
2. Parameter Name: PFC
Description: ACFC Packet Header compression
Values: On
3. Parameter Name: Fragment Delay Threshold
Description: Maximum fragment size
Values: >UDPmux packet size, 384 bytes is acceptable
4. Parameter Name: Minimum Links
Description: Minimum links in T1 bundle
Values: 1
5. Parameter Name: IP Source address
Description: IP address for router side of Multilink group
Values: Based on IP addressing scheme

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-30

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6. Parameter Name: IP Destination add

Description: IP address for OneBTS side of Multilink group
Values: Based on IP addressing scheme
7. Parameter Name: Drop Timeout
Description: Maximum time to wait for next fragment
Values: 10 msec
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration - an IP address of the BHCS

This configuration creates the destination profile for the MLG. It is common to the
entire MSC and does not need to change with the addition of each MLG. It just needs
to be attached to the new UNIT for the MLG under the LSQ.
The BHCS address is the connection server address associated with each MSC. It is
derived for the Control Subnetwork. The router will provide this address to the
OneBTS URC each time a MLG is initiated with it. The OneBTS URC will use the
address to query the BHCS process running on one of the FMM-APs to provide MSC
resource locations to the OneBTS.
Example router configuration:
This defines the profile for the BHCS addresses for the MSC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration - Decompose new T1s from the Channelized OC3/12 interface.

To add a new MLG the T1s from the channelized interface must be available. If they
are not it may be necessary to further decompose the channelized interface. This
decomposition comes from partitioning the channelized interface. If the channelized
interface is partitioned down to its lowest level then nothing further needs to be done
and the spare T1s from unused portions can be used.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Protect Circuit Router:

Channelization for VT partitioning

subslice portioning

Channelization for M13 partitioning

Subinterface portioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-32

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration - Attach the new LSQ unit to the T1s which will make up the MLG
Once the new LSQ unit is configured and the channelized interface is portioned such
that additional T1s are available, then the T1s to be used to create the MLG need to be
associated with the new LSQ unit. This is accomplished by adding the new lsq unit
under the unit 0 family mlppp configuration of the T1s that are to make up a MLG.
The size of MLG groups can vary between 1 and 4 T1s for a URC I and between 1
and 8 T1s for URC II. The size of the MLG is dependant on the users desire.
Example router configuration is shown as follows:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration Parameters Description - T1

Configuration Parameters:
1. Parameter Name: Line Buildout
Description: Amplification setting for driving T1 line length
Allowed Values: 0-132 feet, 133-2000 feet
Default: 0-132 feet
2. Parameter Name: Framing
Description: Frame type
Allowed Values: ESF,SF
Default: ESF
3. Parameter Name: Speed
Description: Bit speed
Allowed Values: T1, E1
Default: T1
4. Parameter Name: Clocking
Description: Source of T1 clocks
Allowed Values: Internal, External
Default: Internal if T1 Concentrator is External
External if T1 Concentrator is internal

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-34

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5. Parameter Name: Line Encoding

Description: Encoding method over physical interface
Allowed Values: B8ZS, ami
Default: B8ZS
6. Parameter Name: Byte Encoding
Description: Encoding method over T1 frame
Allowed Values: Nx64K
Default: Nx64K
7. Parameter Name: Error Check
Description: CRC error checking
Allowed Values: 16, 32
Default: 16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration Verify Class of Service is assigned to new lsq unit

The Class of Service needs to be assigned to the lsq units including the new one just
created for the new MLG. The below configuration shows that the COS is already
associated with all units under lsq-0/2/0. The * descriptor is a wildcard that
encompasses all units. Further if the configuration read lsq-* unit * then all lsqs and
all units under the lsqs are covered and nothing further needs to be done. Also the
t1-* covers all t1s so newly added t1s are covered under this as well.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration - APS Switchover

All T1s from the OneBTS will be concentrated onto channelized OC3 interfaces at the
T1 Concentrator and forwarded to the routers. To provide redundancy for router failure
and OC3 link failure the Automatic Protection Switching mechanism of Sonet will be
used.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

One router is configured as the working OC3 and the other as the protect. If a failure
occurs on the working OC3 link an APS switchover will occur to the protect OC3. The
failure of the working OC3 can be caused by the physical link or the hardware on the
router associated with the OC3. The following depicts parameters associated with the
OC3 interface.
Configuration Parameters:
1. Parameter Name: Protect OC3 IP address
Values: Loopback address of backup router
2. Parameter Name: APS group
Values: Group number on backup router
3. Parameter Name: Channelization
Values: VT or M13 partitioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration - MLG MLPPP support APS-Switchover

The MLPPP bundles must be duplicated on both the primary and secondary routers.
This includes the IP addresses for the URC and the router. When an APS switchover
occurs the MLPPP bundle for a URC will go down and then be renegotiated at the
second router when the APS switch occurs. There is a momentary traffic path outage
when this occurs. It is not acceptable to grow T1s of the same MLG onto different
channelized interfaces. This would cause problems if a SONET failover occurred.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Configuration - DiffServ code point

Traffic originated at the URCs and MSC components will be required to mark egress
traffic packets with differentiated code points. The differentiated code points reside in
the TOS byte of the IP header. The routers will classify packets based on these
markings. Once classified the router is able to prioritize the traffic as required by the
traffic type. The DiffServ code point values are derived from IEEE 802.1P and are
defined for each traffic type are as follows:
Traffic Type

DSCP Class

Code Point Value

OA&M Control and

Signaling IP packets (TCP)

af11 (assured forwarding)

001010

NVM Download (TCP)

be (best effort)

000000

Voice and Data (UDPmux)

ef (expected forwarding)

101110

Network Control

nc1, nc2 (best effort)

110000, 111000

Example router configuration is shown below.

The following define the dscp Code Point markings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-36

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the interfaces are configured as below no additional changes need to be made for the
added MLG. This is due to the wildcards associated with the T1, lsq and ge interfaces.
If wildcards are not used then the newly added T1s and lsq unit needs to be added
with the configurations below.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T1 Concentrator

The following is a general configuration for the T1 Concentrator. There are too many
versions of the T1 Concentrator to show the exact configuration.
Perform the following steps in the CLI or GUI of the T1 Concentrator:
To create a T1 cross-connect between OneBTS side and router side of the T1
concentrator and Router side

Select the Card, Interface, Group and T1 on the OneBTS side of the T1
Concentrator
Select the Card, Interface Group and T1 on the router side of the T1 Concentrator

Select the mode, VT or M13

Select 2 Way Hairpin configuration.

RC/V Changes

The following RC/V changes are displayed below:

1. btseqp
Screen 1: Provision Backplane a Serial Number per URC (step 1)

Screen 2: Set Backhaul Mode to IP (step 2)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-38

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Screen 14: Each carrier that is equipped with a CBR must have an entry populated in
the Carrier/SOC/BHS in cell2 form (step 4)

Below is the cell2 form changes:

1. cell2 form
Screen 26: Specify each carrier associated with a BHS (step 3)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Screen 28: Set IP Backhaul Enabled to y (step 6) Enable MLG Sharing for Bearer
Traffic will be set to y automatically.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-40

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Below is the apeqp form changes:

1. Screen 6: Set RCS IP Services Enabled to y (step 5)

Below is the eqp form changes:

1. Screen 52: set IP Backhaul Control Network address

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5E BHS

To add a new IPBH cell(s) for IPBH, the following procedures are required from 5E
BHS:
BPH Engineering;
1. Verify that there is enough BHS capacity to handle new IPBH cell.
To determine the number of Serving BPHs based on 100% IPBH penetration,
calculate the number of vocoders on the PSU and the Soft Handoff factor (SHO),
refer to the following formula:
Number of Serving BPHs = ROUNDUP (Number of Vocoders * SHO Factor /
BPH (PHE3) Capacity)
To calculate the number of Serving BPHs (PHE3) using the total number of traffic
Channel Elements (CE) homed to a PSU and the CE utilization factor, refer to the
following formula:
Number of Serving BPHs = ROUNDUP (Number of CEs * CE Utilization Factor /
BPH (PHE3) Capacity)
See CDMA 2000 IP Backhaul Capacity Engineering Guidelines.
2. If there is no need for new BHS, then add/update carrier/SOC/BHS assignments on
cell2 form.
3. If there is a need for adding a new BHS pair, the following must be done:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-42

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Determine IP addresses of new BHS

Ensure that MLS has ports to connect the new BHS and other MLS resources

The new pair must be grown on a PSU in to carrier geographic clustering

considerations

Add carrier/SOC/BHS assignments on cell2 form

5E BHS Addition

The following describes the addition of a new BHS pair to the MLS. It is up to the
user to decide when the addition of a new BHS pair is necessary.
After deciding on a FastEthernet port location the following configuration needs to be
added to both MLS.

The following configuration needs to be added to the MLS as shown. There are a few
differences between the two MLS as noted.
The priority statement on the VLAN allows for manual selection of the HSRP master.
The higher priority between the two MLS becomes master. The default value is 100.
The MLS VLAN to be made master can be set to 200.
The standby delay minimum statement is used only on the higher priority HSRP.
The standby IP is common between both MLS.
The standby IP needs to be provisioned as the 5E BHS gateway address in the MSC
forms.
The IP address of the 5E pair should be known from the 5E provisioning
It is up to the user to determine if the new 5E pair will reside under an existing 5E
VLAN or whether a new VLAN needs to be created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The subnet of the 5E pair added must be included in the OSPF area as a network
statement. If the IP address of the new pair falls in the range of an existing subnet then
no new network statement needs to be added.
The VLAN to which the 5E pair is owned must be included as a passive-interface.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-44

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Port-Channel and the associated Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces must include the
VLAN of the added 5E BHS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-6: Add new URC for IPBH cell

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

See CDMA Backhaul Networks, IP Backhaul and Ethernet Backhaul, 401-710-090, for
5E BHS provisioning information.
FMM AP

The maximum active cells that can be assigned to a primary FMM-AP could be 10, 12,
or 20 depending on which faf is active.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-46

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Modify or decommission battery box for outdoor cabinets

with integrated power and batteries only

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify or decommission battery box for outdoor cabinets with

integrated power and batteries only
Purpose

This topic provides information where to get instructions for removing batteries from
an outdoor 9218/9228 Macro with Integrated Power and Batteries. Also provided is
information where to get instructions to decommission the Battery Box or modify the
Battery Box to include a cooling fan.
Important! Not all Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro are affected. Only outdoor base
stations with internal batteries are affected.
Some of the cells described above may have batteries that develop the following
condition: bulging, cracking, and leaking.
Important! Proper care shall be executed when working on an IN-SERVICE cell
site to avoid service interruptions. Always read and understand the entire
instructions before starting this procedure. Always be cognizant of what
consequences may occur for each action taken.
Where to obtain Instructions to modify or decommission the battery box

Instructions to modify or decommission the battery box are provided in a separate

document from this OA&M manual.
Please refer to NETWORK WIRELESS SYSTEMS OUTDOOR 9218/9228 Base Station
Macro (Formally known as MODCELL 4.0/4.0B) Engineering Change Procedure
(ECP) Class: AC Global Radio Access Network Methods and Procedures Modify or
Decommission the Battery Box , document number: CN CG2003.2CB / ECP
CG2003.2CB September 5, 2008
This document can be accessed from CIC.
Where to get instructions to decommission the Battery Box or modify the Battery Box to
include a cooling fan.

Instructions to modify or decommission the battery box that includes a cool fan are
provided in a separate document from this OA&M manual.
Please refer to 4.0B Outdoor Battery Box Exhaust Fan Installation Guideline for Field
Upgrade Ver. 4.0.2 Kit instructions CC#109678425 .
This document can be accessed from OLCS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-7: Realign Door on outdoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 16-7: Realign Door on outdoor cabinet

Purpose

Under certain conditions a small number of outdoor 9218/9228 Macro cabinets may
experience door closure difficulties. In the cases where this condition exists, perform
the following door roller bearing realignment procedure.

Realignment procedure

The top surface of the door should be flush to the top surface of the cabinet +/- 1 mm
when closed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

16-48

9218/9228 Base Station Macro component replacement

and repair

Procedure 16-7: Realign Door on outdoor cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Turn height adjustment screw 3 turns counter-clockwise.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Loosen the 6 clamping screws by 1 full turn.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Move the wheel upward until the bracket contacts the height adjustment screw, then
tighten the clamping screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the wheel needs to be lifted higher, repeat the previous steps but turn the height
adjustment screw 1 turn at a time.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
16-49
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

17

17
9216/9226
Compact
component replacement
and repair

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the component replacement and repair processes and procedures
for the indoor and outdoor 9216/9226 Compact cabinets.
Contents
Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216 Compact

17-2

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

17-6

Procedure 17-3: Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector for outdoor 9216
Compact

17-10

Summary for replacing circuit packs

17-13

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for outdoor 9216 Compact

17-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216

Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216 Compact

Conditions for replacing the PDP

Important! Ensure the appropriate environmental protection measures are taken

before opening the front door on the cabinet.
Important! The cabinet door, especially during strong winds, can cause serious
personal injury. To ensure that the door is properly operated and secure, and to
avoid its contact with any part of your body, follow the instructions in the users
manual and always wear a safety helmet. To avoid ESD damage to the frame and
components contained within, be sure to wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside
the base station before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure the
ESD wrist strap is grounded to the frame.
Power down the base station

These procedure apply for both the DC Power and Integrated Power Cabinets.
DC Power Only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station .

1. For DC only cabinets, power down the base station by setting the circuit breakers
on the PDP (CB1, CB2, and CB3) to the off position.
2. In the power cabinet (the DC supply to the base station ) set the breakers for the
base station power feed to the off position.
Integrated Power Only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station.

1. For integrated power cabinets, set all breakers (CB1, CB2, and CB3) on the Power
Distribution Panel (PDP) to the off position.
2. Set the breakers for the base station power feeds to the off position.
AC PDA

1 20VAC
OUTLET

CABN
I

ET

HEATER

BATTER Y
HEATER

RECT F
I E
I
1 & 3

RS

RECT F
I E
I

RS

2 & 4

The following figure shows the hybrid PDP, showing the location in the 9216/9226
Compact cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-2

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216

Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216

Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the PDP from the frame

Perform the following procedure to remove the hybrid shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Depending on the frame (indoor/outdoor), remove the side covers and then the fan
ducts. If outdoor, when removing the digital module fan cover, disconnect the drip
tubing. Save the mounting hardware for re-installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the 4 M5 x 12 screws from the fan shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the tie wraps holding the Tx cabling to the
fan. Remove the fan from the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tag and disconnect the RF cables going to the amplifiers, CTUs and radios. Leave the
filter side connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the power and digital cables from the amplifiers and internal PDP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the HIOU cabling and ground.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the clock cables from the CTUs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the circuit packs and amplifiers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the 4 M5 x 12 screws from the hybrid shelf. There are 6 screws if the A3
PDP bracket is installed in the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Carefully remove the hybrid shelf and set aside.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Perform the procedure Procedure 16-5: Replace the EEPROM (p. 16-18). This is
important because the information from the old shelf needs to be loaded onto the new
shelf backplane.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-4

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-1: Replace the Hybrid PDP for 9216

Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new hybrid PDP shelf

Perform the following procedure to install the new hybrid PDP shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the new PDP shelf into the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the shelf with (4) screws, (6) if the A3 PDP bracketed is installed. Torque to 25
in-lb (2.8 N-m).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect and secure the corresponding cables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to re-install all other components in reverse order of disassembly.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Perform System Test

Perform the following procedure to ensure that everything was performed correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers on the frame power supply to the on position. For base station with
integrated power - in the Circuit Breaker Box, set the breaker for the base station AC
power input to the on position. For the base station without integrated power, set the
breakers for the base station feed to the on position, which is located in a separate
power frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set all breakers (CB1, CB2, and CB3) on the PDP to the on position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers for the base station power feeds to the on position which is located
on the AC PDA beneath the rectifier shelf (bottom right).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wait for the GPS receiver to indicate a GPS LOCK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed with system testing.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

Conditions for replacing the PDP

Important! Ensure the appropriate environmental protection measures are taken

before opening the front door on the cabinet.
Important! The cabinet door, especially during strong winds, can cause serious
personal injury. To ensure that the door is properly operated and secure, and to
avoid its contact with any part of your body, follow the instructions in the users
manual and always wear a safety helmet. To avoid ESD damage to the frame and
components contained within, be sure to wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside
the base station before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure the
ESD wrist strap is grounded to the frame.
Power down the base station

These procedure apply for both the DC Power and Integrated Power Cabinets.
DC Power Only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station.

1. For DC only cabinets, power down the base station by setting the circuit breakers
on the PDP (CB1, CB2, and CB3) to the off position.
2. In the power cabinet (the DC supply to the base station ) set the breakers for the
base station power feed to the off position.
Integrated Power Only

Perform the following procedure to power down the base station .

1. For integrated power cabinets, set all breakers (CB1, CB2, and CB3) on the Power
Distribution Panel (PDP) to the off position.
2. Set the breakers for the base station power feeds to the off position.
AC PDA

1 20VAC
OUTLET

CABN
I

ET

HEATER

BATTER Y
HEATER

RECT F
I E
I
1 & 3

RS

RECT F
I E
I

RS

2 & 4

The following figure shows the faceplate of the A3 PDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-6

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A3PD- P

J9

J8

J7

Disconnect the cables from the PDP

Perform the following procedure to disconnect the cables from the PDP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the J1-J3 cables from the front of the PDP.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Remove the PDP

Perform the following procedure to remove the PDP from the frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the (4) screws located on the front of the PDP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the PDP from the unit.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new PDP

Perform the following procedure to install the new A3 PDP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the new PDP into the PDP slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the PDP with (4) screws. Torque to 14 in-lb (1.5 N-m).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect and secure the corresponding cables of the PDP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dress all cables away from the door and fan shelves to ensure the cables will not
interfere with the door or the door latch.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System Test

Perform the following procedure to ensure that everything was performed correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers on the frame power supply to the on position. For base station with
integrated power - in the Circuit Breaker Box, set the breaker for the base station AC
Power Input to the on position. For the base station without Integrated Power, set the
breakers for the base station feed to the on position, which is located in a separate
power frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set all breakers (CB1, CB2, and CB3) on the A3 PDP to the on position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the breakers for the base station power feeds to the on position which is located
on the AC PDA beneath the rectifier shelf (bottom right).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wait for the GPS receiver to indicate a GPS LOCK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed with system testing.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-8

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-2: Replace the A3 PDP for 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Securing the frame door

Perform this procedure to secure the frame door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make sure all cables will not interfere with the closing of the front door.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close the front door of the Frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lock the front door, if applicable.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-3: Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector

for outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 17-3: Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector for

outdoor 9216 Compact
Purpose

This procedure provides the description and replacement procedures for the Z-IDC Gas
Tube Protector (Surge Protector). This unit provides the T1/User/Power Alarms for the
9216 Compact.
The following equipment is needed in order to perform this procedure:

Insulated Handle Needle Nose Pliers

Standard flathead screwdriver

Orderable Parts
Part Name

Comcode

Protector Unit for Z-IDC

107971525

Z-IDC G3B-100 Spare Part Kit Replacement Gas Tube

Protectors (100 pieces)

107973463

Z-IDC Module

107665473

Z-IDC Unit Protector Cover

107660532

Procedure

Locate the Z-IDC Mounting Bracket on the I/O Panel which is mounted in the cell on
the upper left hand side. Unscrew the four screws on the bracket. See the following
figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Pull the Z-IDC Mounting Bracket assembly from the I/O Panel. There is sufficient
slack in the wires to effectively remove the assembly without disconnecting any of the
wires.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-10

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-3: Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector

for outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Z-IDC Unit Protector cover from the Protector Unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the Insulated needle nose Pliers, remove the faulty Gas Tube Protector from the
Protector Unit as shown in the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-3: Replace the Gas Tube Surge Protector

for outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new Gas Tube Protector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the protective cover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the Protector Unit to the Z-IDC Module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the Z-IDC Mounting Bracket assembly on the I/O Panel.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-12

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Summary for replacing circuit packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Summary for replacing circuit packs

Replacement of circuit packs for 9216 Compact

The following table provides information on replacement of the cell equipment. This
table also provides information on which packs can be hot-swapped and whether
they have to be re-NVMd for the 9216 Compact.
Circuit
Pack

Hot
swappable

Re-NVM

Calibrate RF

CPC

Filter

TDU

TxAMP

CTU

UCR

MCR

CMU

EVM

URC

OM

Filter Simulator

PIM

Fan Tray

Heater

TTTM

DLM

Rectifier

Y1

Controller for Rectifier

SPM

no CLGC

CLGC

Notes:

1.

Rectifier is hot swappable if the 9222 Micro Distributed is equipped with battery backup.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Summary for replacing circuit packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refer to the following for power calibration procedures (RMT is needed for all
calibration):

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9216 Compact/Compact Distributed,

9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9224 Sub-Compact/Sub-Compact EN, 9218/9228
Macro, 9228 Macro LP/IN, 401-703-437

CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Macro HD and 9228 Macro
MCPA, 401-703-438

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-14

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for

outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for outdoor

9216 Compact
Installation

Below is a table indicating the materials required to perform this procedure.

Description

Qty

Comcode

Description

Qty

Heater Assembly

848987129

Cable Assembly
Power,
Connectorized

M5 x 12, Sem. Screw

Prepare Heater Assembly

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepare Heater Assembly. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for

outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect cable of the Heater element and connect cable power conectorized to cable.
Connect one end to the thermostat sensor. Dress cable as shown below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect AC cable from Rectifier Shelf and connect the Intrusion Alarm cable. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-16

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for

outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Heater to the cabinet. See the following figures.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
17-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9216/9226 Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 17-4: Replace the Heater Assembly for

outdoor 9216 Compact

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure with (2) M5 SEM screws. Torque per the Table below.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

17-18

18

18 Micro/Micro
9222
Distributed component
replacement and repair

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the component replacement and repair processes and procedures
for the 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed cabinets.
Contents
Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module (PIM)

18-2

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

18-24

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

18-32

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

18-36

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

18-43

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

18-47

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

18-54

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

18-58

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module (PIM)

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace a PIM in the9222 Micro/Micro Distributed

cabinet.
Required tools
Tool

Tool

Diagonal Flush Cut Pliers

10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver

#3 flathead screwdriver

7/16-in. Nutdriver

1/4 inch Drive 10-mm Deep Socket, 6 pt.

10-mm Nutdriver

T25 Torx Bit Driver

Small Phillips-head screwdriver

Small flathead screwdriver

ESD Strap

Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the PIM

Use this procedure to remove the PIM from the 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Turn off and disconnect the power to the 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open the lower side panel of the cabinet; remove the side I/O panel and disconnect the
PIM power cables from the terminals of the rectifier shelf. See the following figures.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-2

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BD 5
PIM INTERFACE
PORTS

J1
A

H
J2

J3

J4

JACK
NUMBER
J1-A

T1,T2/LIU1 ETHERNET

J1-B

T3,T4

J1-C

USER ALARM 8-13

J1-D

FRAME/AUX ALARMS

J1-E

T5,T6/LIU2 ETHERNET

J1-F

T7, T8

J1-G

USER ALARM 14,15/RS485

J1-H

USER ALARM 0-2, 4

J2-A

AMPLIFIER I2C

J2-B

TTTM POWER/I2C

J2-C

MCC1 (RMT1)

J2-D

DLM POWER/SENSE

J2-E

RF FILTER I2C

J2-F
STAT OT

J3

DC

DLM FUSE FLT

+24

FUNCTION

NOTE

MCC2 (RMT2)
FAN POWER/ALARM

J4

AUX I2C/POWER

J7

AMPLIFIER POWER

J7

RTN

GND

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-4

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the PIM power cables from the cabinet. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the wire ties securing the RJ-45 digital cables. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove all of the RJ-45 digital cables from the PIM. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-6

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the wire ties securing the fan and amplifier power cables to the fan tray
bracket. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-8

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unscrew and remove the amplifier and fan power cables from PIM. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the ground strap from the cabinet. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-10

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Loosen the captive retaining screws at the top and bottom of the PIM faceplate. See
the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Make sure all cables are free from the front of the PIM and use the ground strap and
PIM faceplate handle to pull the PIM from the digital cage. See the following figure.
Note: It may take a significant force to remove the PIM from the digital shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-12

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Remove the ground strap from the PIM and set aside for re-use. See the following
figure.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-14

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the PIM

Follow these procedures to replace the PIM in the 9222 Micro Distributed Cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new/replacement PIM in to the digital cage. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-16

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the PIM with the captive retaining screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attach ground strap removed from the PIM in Step 11 of the Remove the PIM
(p. 18-2) procedure to the new PIM and cabinet. See the following figure. Torque to 25
in-lb.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attach the fan power cable to J3 and amplifier power cable to J7 on the PIM, tighten
connector screws and dress cables. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-18

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Attach the RJ-45 digital cables as listed in the following table and dress as shown in
the following figure.
Table 18-1

PIM cable connections for 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet

CABLE FUNCTION

FROM

TO

COMCODE

AMP POWER

PIM J7

PAM J3

849042593

FAN POWER ALARM

PIM J3

FAN TRAY J1

849042585

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 18-1

PIM cable connections for 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet

(continued)

CABLE FUNCTION

FROM

TO

COMCODE

FRAME ALARMS

PID J1D

SPM J26

849042601

E1/T1 (1&2)

PIM J1A

SPM J17

848619243

E1/T1 (3&4)

PIM J1B

SPM J18

848619243

USER ALARMS (8-13)

PIM J1C

SPM J24

848619243

E1/T1 (5&6)

PIM J1E

SPM J19

848619243

E1/T1 (7&8)

PIM J1F

SPM J20

848619243

RS-485/USER
ALARMS 14 &15

PIM J1G

SPM J25

848619243

USER ALARMS
(0,1,2,4)

PIM J1H

SPM J23

848619243

AMP IC2

PIM J2A

PAM J4

848619243

TTTM POWER/IC2

PIM J2B

TTTM J31

848619243

FILTER IC2

PIM J2E

FILTER

858619284

DLM POWER/IC2

PIM J2D

DLM J9

848619243

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-20

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Route the PIM power cables over the RJ-45 digital cables, down the right side of the
cabinet and on the top of the SPM. See the following figure. Note: Make sure no
cabling interferes with door latches.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the PIM power cables, per the cable markings; to the terminals on the side of
the rectifier shelf. See the following figure. Be careful not to fray any of the stranded
wire.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-22

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-1: Replace the Power Interface Module

(PIM)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace a rectifier in the9222 Micro/Micro Distributed

cabinet.
Required Tools

The following table provides the tools required to perform this procedure.
Tools
Diagonal Flush Cut Pliers

10-in., #2 flathead screwdriver

ESD Strap

7/16-in. Nutdriver

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the Rectifier

Use this procedure for the removal of the Rectifier.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the RJ-45 DLM power cable. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-24

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Push cabling in front of the rectifier towards the right side of the cabinet until the
space in front of the rectifier is free of any cables. See the following figures.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-26

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Loosen the rectifier tab. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the rectifier out the rectifier shelf and remove it from cabinet. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-28

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-30

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-2: Replace the Rectifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new rectifier

Perform the following procedure to install the new rectifier in the 9222 Micro
Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make sure the area in front of the rectifier shelf is free of any cables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the rectifier into the rectifier shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lock the rectifier into the rectifier shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect the RJ-45 DLM power cable to the DLM.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace a Rectifier Controller in the9222 Micro/Micro

Distributed cabinet.
Required tools

The following table lists the tools required to remove and replace the Rectifier
Controller in the 9222 Micro/Micro Distributed cabinet.
Tools
Diagonal Flush Cut Pliers

10-in., #2 flathead screwdriver

ESD Strap

7/16-in. Nutdriver

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the Rectifier Controller
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Push the cabling in front of the rectifier controller towards the rightside side of the
cabinet until the space in front of the rectifier is free of any cables. See the following
figures.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-32

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the RJ-45 alarm cable connected to the alarms port. See the previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Loosen the captive screws on the controller faceplate. See the previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the controller out of the rectifier shelf and remove it from the cabinet.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new rectifier controller

Perform the following procedure to install the new rectifier controller in the 9222
Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make sure the area in front of the rectifier shelf is free of any cables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the controller into the right side of the rectifier shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-34

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-3: Replace the Rectifier Controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure the controller using the captive screws on the controller faceplate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect the RJ-45 alarm cable into the alarms port on the controller.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Fan Tray in the9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
10 in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver

ESD Strap

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the Fan Tray
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cut the wire ties from the cables in front of the fan tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the power cable on the front faceplate of the fan tray. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-36

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the two M5 screws located on the top of the fan tray using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Pull the cables in front away from the front of the fan tray. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-38

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the fan tray out of the cabinet using the handle on the faceplate.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the fan tray is being replaced the bracket located on the top must be removed and
installed on the replacement fan tray. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (3)
M5 screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-40

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-4: Replace the Fan Tray

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray

Perform the following procedure to install the fan tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the bracket onto the new fan tray. Place bracket onto the fan tray lining up the
holes for the screws. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver screw the bracket onto the fan
tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide fan tray back into the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Screw the (2) M5 screws onto the digital cage using a Phillips-head screwdriver
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the power cable to the face plate of the fan tray.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-tie new wire ties to the cables.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-42

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the DLM in the9222 Micro/Micro Distributed
cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
Diagonal Flush Cut Pliers

10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver

Small Phillips-head screwdriver

7/16-in. Nutdriver

ESD Strap

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the DLM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the cabling from the DLM. See the following figure. Note: Due to limited
visibility/access of the RF filter, it is recommended that cables be labeled with DLM
port locations for easier re-assembly.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the DLM from the DLM/TTTM bracket by removing the (2) M4 SEMs. See
the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-44

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-5: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the DLM

Use this procedure to install the new DLM on the PIM.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set DIP switch on DLM to the proper positions; if required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the DLM in place with DIP switches and RJ-45 connector towards the right and
secure using (2) M4 SEMs. See the previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable DLM per table below.

DLM connection

Cable

DLM RXA IN

FILTER J4

DLM RXB IN

FILTER J24

DLM RXA OUT

MCR1 RX1

DLM RXB OUT

MCR1 RX2

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-46

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Heater in the9222 Micro/Micro

Distributed cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver

10-in., #1 Phillips-head screwdriver

ESD Strap

Remove the Heater

Perform this procedure to remove the heater from the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cut the wire ties on the heater assembly. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unplug the heater assembly. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-48

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-49
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unplug the pressure sensor tubing. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-50

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, unscrew the (2) M3 screws to remove the

thermostat from the digital shelf. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, unscrew the (2) M4 screws. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-51
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the heater out of the cabinet.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-52

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-6: Replace the heater

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the heater

Perform this procedure to install a new heater in the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the new heater into the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, screw the (2) M4 screws on the faceplate, see
Step 5 above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, reattach the thermostat cable (red) located under
the Digital Shelf. See Step 4 above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Plug the Pressure Sensor Tubing back into its appropriate location on the faceplate of
the heater, see Step 3 above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-plug the heater. See Step 2 above.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-53
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the TTTM in the9222 Micro/Micro

Distributed cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Description
8-mm wrench

10-mm nutdriver

8-mm nutdriver

Remove the TTTM

Perform the following procedure to remove the TTTM in the cabinet

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the DLM from the front of the TTTM. See Procedure 18-5: Replace the
DLM (p. 18-43) for procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unplug all cables going to the TTTM. There are 5 cables on the top of the unit and 3
cables on the bottom of the unit. Make sure to label the cables being removed for
proper identification when installing the new components. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-54

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 8-mm wrench, remove the (4) M5 nuts from the unit. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-55
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-56

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-7: Replace the TTTM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the component from the cabinet by pulling it toward you out of the cabinet.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Install the TTTM

Perform the following procedure to install the TTTM in the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the TTTM into the cabinet by sliding it into the slot in the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using an 8-mm wrench, replace the (4) M5 nuts securing the component to the
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Plug the cables back into the TTTM, there are 5 cables for the top of the unit and 3
cables on the bottom of the unit.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-57
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the SPM in the9222 Micro/Micro Distributed
cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
8-mm Nutdriver

10-mm Nutdriver

Remove the SPM

Perform the following procedure to remove the SPM from the cabinet. There are
connections on the front of the SPM and the component is removed from the side of
the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove and label all connection cables from the front of the unit. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-58

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-59
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unlock and open the side lower cover of the cabinet by unlocking the security lock. If
a solar shield is present, remove the solar shield first, refer to Re-install Side Solar
Shield (if present) (p. 23-32). See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the side of the cabinet remove the (6) 10-mm screws holding the faceplate, using a
25 Torx bit. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-60

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the (4) M5 nuts which hold the SPM to the rectifier shelf using a 8-mm
nutdriver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unscrew the grounding strap from the bottom of the cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-61
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Pull the back of the SPM out first, then remove the unit from the frame. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-62

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
18-63
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9222 Micro/Micro Distributed component replacement and

repair

Procedure 18-8: Replace the SPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install new SPM

Perform the following procedure to install a new SPM into the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the SPM into the cabinet. There are 4 studs on the Rectifier Shelf which the
SPM slides onto.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the 8-mm nutdriver screw the (4) M5 screws to secure the SPM back into the
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the ground strap to the bottom of the cabinet using a 10-mm nutdriver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall all the cable connections to the front of the SPM as well as the side of the
SPM.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

18-64

19

19 Ultra-Compact
9223
component replacement
and repair

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the component replacement and repair processes and procedures
for the 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinets.
Contents
Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

19-2

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

19-16

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

19-23

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

19-34

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor cabinet

19-49

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor cabinet

19-58

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the RF filter in the9223 Ultra-Compact

cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to replace the RF filter in the indoor/outdoor
9223 Ultra-Compact.
Tools
10-in. #2 Phillips 8-mm screwdriver (for M5 SEMS screws)
1-1/2 inch socket ratchet (for M29 nuts)

The following table lists the parts, comcodes and quantity needed to perform this
procedure.
Description

PN/Comcode

Quantity

Filter

409061900 or 409061918

Filter Bracket Front

849079637

Rear Filter Bracket

849079629

M5 SEMS screws

901382143

M29 nuts

848596064

Indoor Mounting Shelf

849072483

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the indoor RF filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the (6) M29 nuts and washers from the back of the cabinet, using a 1-1/2 inch
socket ratchet. Place these in a secure place to be reused when installing a new Filter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-2

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the four M5 SEMS screws, using a 10-in. #2 Phillips 8-mm screwdriver. Note
that the right two M5 SEMS screws are securing the towel bar. Remove the towel bar.
Remove the filter from the left side of the mounting shelf. See the following figure.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-4

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the indoor filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the new filter, install the front mounting brackets. Using a 10-in., #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, secure these brackets to the top and bottom of the filter with M5 SEMS
screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the indoor mounting shelf for any damage.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-6

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the filter into the left side of the indoor mounting shelf. Using a 10-in., #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, secure the filter with (2) M5 SEMS screws. The other (2)
M5 SEMS screws will be installed later when installing the towel bars in the BBU
section. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install rear filter brackets to the filter with (2) M29 nuts, using a 1-1/2 inch socket
ratchet. Then secure these brackets to the indoor mounting shelf. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-8

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the outdoor filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 1-1/2 inch socket ratchet, remove the (6) M29 nuts and washers from the back
of the cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-10

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (4) M5 SEMS screws. Note
that the right set of M5 SEMS screws are also securing the towel bar. Remove the
filter from the left side of the mounting shelf. See the following figure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outdoor Filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the new filter, install the front mounting brackets. Using a 10-in., #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, secure the brackets to the top and bottom of the filter, using M5 SEMS
screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-12

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the filter into the left side of the outdoor mounting shelf. Using a 10-in., #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, secure the filter with (2) M5 SEMS screws. The other (2)
M5 SEMS screws will be used when installing the towel bar to the filter, see Remove
the outdoor BBU (p. 19-41). See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install rear filter brackets to the filter with (2) M29 nuts, using a 1-1/2 inch socket
ratchet. Then secure the brackets to the outdoor mounting shelf. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-14

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-1: Replace the RF filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the DLM in the9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
ESD Strap

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

DLM Assembly

The following table lists the equipment need to perform these procedures.
Description

PN/Comcode

Quantity

DLM Assembly

849075502

M5 SEMS Screws

901382143

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-16

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Indoor DLM

Use this procedure to remove the Indoor DLM from the mounting shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the cabling from the front faceplate of the DLM. See the following figure. It
is recommended that cables be labeled with DLM port locations for easier re-assembly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the DLM from the indoor mounting
frame located next to the RF Filter by removing the (2) M5 SEMS screws and pulling
the unit away from the cabinet. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-18

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Indoor DLM

Use this procedure to install the new DLM into the mounting frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the DLM assembly into the indoor
mounting frame next to the filter and secure with (2) M5 SEMS screws. See previous
figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable the DLM per the table below.

DLM connection

Cable

DLM RXA IN

FILTER J4

DLM RXB IN

FILTER J24

DLM RXA OUT

MCR1 RX1

DLM RXB OUT

MCR1 RX2

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the outdoor DLM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the cabling from the front faceplate of the DLM. It is recommended that
cables be labeled with DLM port locations for easier re-assembly. See the following
figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the DLM from the indoor mounting shelf
located next to the RF Filter by removing the (2) M5 SEMS screws and pulling the
unit out away from the mounting shelf. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-20

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-2: Replace the DLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outdoor DLM

Use this procedure to install the new DLM.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the DLM assembly into the outdoor
mounting shelf next to the filter and secure with (2) M5 SEMS screws. See the
previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cable the DLM per the table below.

DLM connection

Cable

DLM RXA IN

FILTER J4

DLM RXB IN

FILTER J24

DLM RXA OUT

MCR1 RX1

DLM RXB OUT

MCR1 RX2

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-22

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Amplifier in the9223 Ultra-Compact

cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
ESD Strap

The following table lists the parts, comcodes, and quantity of items needed to perform
this procedure.
Description

PN/Comcode

Quantity

Amplifier Module

849073606

M5 SEMS Screws

901382143

Mounting L Bracket

849076658

M5 flathead Screws

901342089

Amplifier Module Fan

Assembly

849071360

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the Indoor Amplifier Assembly
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the cabling from the front of the Amplifier. It is recommended that the cables
be labeled with port locations for easier reassembly. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (4) M5 SEMS screws holding the
Amplifier to the indoor mounting shelf. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-24

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the amplifier from the indoor mounting shelf by pulling the unit out of the
shelf.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Indoor Amplifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Indoor Fan Tray Assembly into the left side of the amplifier module frame.
Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, secure the Fan Tray Assembly to the frame using
the captive screw provided with the Fan Tray. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the Amplifier Mounting Brackets with (4)
M5 flathead screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-26

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the amplifier box into the indoor
mounting shelf next to the DLM and secure it with (2) M5 SEMS screws. The other
(2) M5 SEMS screws will be installed at a later step. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-28

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the outdoor Amplifier Assembly

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the cabling from the front of the amplifier. It is recommended that the cables
be labeled with port locations for easier re-assembly. See the following figure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (4) M5 SEMS screws holding the
amplifier to the outdoor mounting shelf. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the amplifier from the outdoor mounting bracket.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-30

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outdoor Amplifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outdoor Fan Tray Assembly into the left side of the amplifier module frame.
Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, secure the Fan Tray Assembly to the frame using
the captive screw provided with the Fan Tray. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the amplifier mounting brackets with (4)
M5 flathead screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the amplifier box into the outdoor
mounting shelf next to the DLM and secure it with (2) M5 SEMS screws. The other
screws will be installed at a later step. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-32

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-3: Replace the Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the BBU in the9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
ESD Strap

The following table lists the parts needed to perform this procedure.
Description

PN/Comcode

Quantity

BBU

849079447

Mounting Brackets

849076658

M5 flathead screws

901342089

M5 x 10-mm SEMS screws

901382143

Terminal Block

409064441

M4 x 30 mm screw

901340125

Cable Bars

849079611

Digital Module Fan

Assembly

849055736

Blank

848872008

Refer to SFWO for

quantity

BNJ28C, Circuit Back,

CDMA Radio, 850 (URC)

108492702

Refer to SFWO for

quantity

RJ-45 Terminator

40854551

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Remove the Indoor BBU
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the (2) M5 SEMS screws securing the right towel bar to the amplifier, using a
#2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-34

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove all cables from the front of the BBU, labelling them for re-installation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the (2) M5 SEMS right screws securing the BBU to the indoor mounting
frame, using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the digital circuit packs from the digital portion of the frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the BBU from the indoor mounting frame.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Indoor BBU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the indoor fan tray assembly into the left side of the digital module by sliding
the fan into the bracket. Secure with the captive hardware screw, using a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-36

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the RJ-45 terminator into the RJ-484 port on the digital module. See the
previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the mounting brackets on the digital module with (4) M5 flathead screws, using
a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the circuit packs into the BBU per Shop Floor Work Order (SFWO). See the
previous figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the BBU assembly next to the amplifier in the indoor mounting shelf and secure
it with (4) M5 SEMS screws, using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-38

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the towel bar by securing it with the
previously removed (2) M5 SEMS screws, also securing the BBU to the mounting
shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the terminal block on the front of the Amplifier assembly and secure it using a
M4 x 30 mm screw. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-40

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-attach the cables previously removed from the face of the BBU.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Remove the outdoor BBU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, unscrew the (2) M5 SEMS screws securing the
right towel bar to the amplifier. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-42

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove all cables from the front of the BBU, labelling them for re-installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, unscrew the (2) M5 SEMS screws securing the
BBU to the mounting frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the digital circuit packs from the digital portion of the frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the BBU from the outdoor mounting frame.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outdoor BBU

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outdoor Fan Tray Assembly into the left side of the digital module by
sliding the fan into the bracket. Secure with the captive hardware screw, using a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the RJ-45 terminator into the RJ-484 port on the digital module. See the
previous figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-44

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the circuit packs into the BBU per Shop Floor Work Order (SFWO). See the
previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the mounting brackets on the digital module with (4) M5 flathead screws, using
a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the BBU assembly next to the amplifier in the outdoor mounting shelf and
secure it with (4) M5 SEMS screws, using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the terminal block on the bottom right front of the cabinet and secure using a
M4 x 30 mm screw. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-46

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the towel bar to the amplifier on the
mounting shelf by securing with the (2) M5 SEMS screws, also securing the BBU to
the mounting shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the terminal block on the front of the Amplifier assembly and secure it using a
M4 x 30 mm screw. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-4: Replace the Baseband Unit (BBU)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-attach the cables previously removed from the faceplate of the BBU.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-48

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor cabinet

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor 9223
Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Related information

The fan trays are located at the bottom of the outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compactcabinet.
Outdoor cabinets, may need to be replaced in the field whenever a malfunction occurs.
While it is recommended that the cell be powered down during fan tray replacement,
the procedure may be performed by experienced personnel with minimal component
overheating risk involved. The following procedure is applicable for replacement of the
fan tray. The procedure is suitable for a single person operation.
There are fan trays for the Amplifier and BBU which are located in frame of the
Amplifier and BBU, see the following for replacement procedures:
Amplifier

Install the Indoor Amplifier (p. 19-26)

Install the outdoor Amplifier (p. 19-31)

BBU

Install the Indoor BBU (p. 19-36)

Install the outdoor BBU (p. 19-44)

Before you begin

The following table lists the tools needed to perform this procedure.
Tools
#2 Phillips 8-mm screwdriver - 10 inch (for M5 SEMS screws)
1-1/2 inch socket ratchet (for M29 nuts)

The following table lists the parts, comcodes and quantity needed to perform this
procedure.
Description

PN/Comcode

Quantity

Fan Tray

M5 SEMS screws

901382143

M29 nuts

848596064

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-49
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! Make sure all appropriate ESD procedures are followed.

Replace Fan Tray for Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the outside cover, located on the bottom of the cabinet, from the base station.
Remove the (4) M5 SEMS screws, using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the
following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the D-Sub Connector from the Terminal Block that was installed in Step 6
of the Install the outdoor BBU (p. 19-44). See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-50

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fresh Air Filter Housing/Fan Tray Assembly Unit. Using, a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (10) M5 SEMS screws from the bottom of the
base station that holds the unit. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-51
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (4) M5 SEMS screws holding the
Fan Tray Assembly to the Fresh Air Filter Housing. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-52

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-53
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray for the Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Place the new fan tray on top of the Fresh Air Filter Housing while aligning up the
bolt holes. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, install the (4) M5 SEMS screws in
order to hold the Fan Tray Assembly to the Fresh Air Filter Housing. See the following
figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, re-install the Fresh Air Filter Housing/Fan Tray
Assembly to the base station with the (10) M5 SEMS screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-54

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect the D-Sub Connector to the Terminal Block . See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-55
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-56

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-5: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the outside cover located on the bottom of the cabinet to the base station.
Secure the (4) M5 SEMS screws, using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the
following figure.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-57
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor cabinet

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9223
Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Relate information

The fan trays located in the indoor and outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact Cabinets may
need to be replaced in the field whenever a malfunction occurs. While it is
recommended that the cell be powered down during fan tray replacement, the
procedure may be performed by experienced personnel with minimal component
overheating risk involved. The following procedure is applicable for replacement of the
fan tray. The procedure is suitable for a single person operation.
Fan Tray Replacement for Compact Indoor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fan Tray. Remove the Fan Power Connector from the front of the fan tray.
Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four (4) M5
mounting screws securing the fan tray to the cabinet. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-58

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-59
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the fan tray from the cabinet.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray for the 9216 Compact Indoor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the new fan tray into the cabinet. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, reinstall the four (4) M5 mounting screws securing the fan tray to the
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the Fan Power Connector on the faceplate of the fan tray.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan Tray Replacement for outdoor 9216 Compact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fan Tray. Remove the Fan Power Connector from the front of the fan tray.
Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four (4) M5
mounting screws securing the fan tray to the cabinet. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-60

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
19-61
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9223 Ultra-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 19-6: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor

cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the fan tray from the cabinet.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray for the outdoor 9216 Compact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the new fan tray into the cabinet. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, reinstall the four (4) M5 mounting screws securing the fan tray to the
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the Fan Power Connector on the faceplate of the fan tray.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

19-62

20

20 Sub-Compact
9224
component replacement
and repair

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides procedures to replace and repair the 9224 Sub-Compact base
station.
Contents
Procedure 20-1: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224 Sub-Compact
cabinet

20-2

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact
EN cabinet

20-5

Procedure 20-3: Replace the front-door filter

20-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
20-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-1: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224

Sub-Compact cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 20-1: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224

Sub-Compact cabinet
Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224 Sub-Compact
cabinet.
Related information

The fan trays located in the outdoor and indoor 9224 Sub-Compact Cabinets may need
to be replaced in the field whenever a malfunction occurs. While it is recommended
that the cell be powered down during fan tray replacement, the procedure may be
performed by experienced personnel with minimal component overheating risk
involved. The following procedure is applicable for replacement of the fan tray. The
procedure is suitable for a single person operation.
Replace Fan Tray in outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fan Tray. Remove the Fan Power Connector from the front of the fan tray.
Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four (4) M5
mounting screws securing the fan tray to the cabinet. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

20-2

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-1: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224

Sub-Compact cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the fan tray from the cabinet.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Install the Fan Tray for the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the new fan tray into the cabinet. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, reinstall the four (4) M5 mounting screws securing the fan tray to the
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the Fan Power Connector on the faceplate of the fan tray.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
20-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-1: Replace the Fan Tray in the indoor 9224

Sub-Compact cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan Tray Replacement for indoor 9224 Sub-Compact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fan Tray. Remove the Fan Power Connector from the front of the fan tray.
Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four (4) M5
mounting screws securing the fan tray to the cabinet. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the fan tray from the cabinet.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray for the indoor 9224 Sub-Compact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the new fan tray into the cabinet. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, reinstall the four (4) M5 mounting screws securing the fan tray to the
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the Fan Power Connector on the faceplate of the fan tray.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

20-4

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor 9224

Sub-Compact EN cabinet
Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor 9224
Sub-Compact EN cabinet.
Related information

The fan trays located in the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet, may need to be
replaced in the field whenever a malfunction occurs. While it is recommended that the
cell be powered down during fan tray replacement, the procedure may be performed by
experienced personnel with minimal component overheating risk involved. The
following procedure is applicable for replacement of the fan tray. The procedure is
suitable for a single person operation.
Replace Fan Tray
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the ducting frame and fan tray. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, remove the four (4) M5 mounting screws securing the ducting frame and
fan tray to the cabinet frame. The M5 mounting screws hold both the ducting frame
and the fan tray to the cabinet frame.
Note that the power cables to the right of the fan tray may be in the way and need to
be moved out of the way in order to gain access to the screws. See the following
figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
20-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cut the tie wraps that are holding the black power cables together in order to loosen
them for lifting capability in order to remove the ducting frame and fan tray. Make a
note where the tie wraps were fastened to the cables. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

20-6

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure to set aside any cable obstruction and proceed to pull and slide the ducting
frame first then the fan tray out and away from the cabinet.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
20-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-2: Replace the Fan Tray in the outdoor

9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the Fan Tray

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the new fan tray into the cabinet. Replace the ducting frame in front of the fan
tray. Using an 8-mm nutdriver or #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, reinstall the four (4)
M5 mounting screws securing the ducting frame and fan tray to the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the tie wraps that held the power cables in their appropriate spot.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note:

For the 9224 Sub-Compact EN the fan tray is installed upside down and is located at
the bottom of the cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

20-8

9224 Sub-Compact component replacement and repair

Procedure 20-3: Replace the front-door filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 20-3: Replace the front-door filter

Purpose

This procedure describes how to replace the front-door filter in the 9224 Sub-Compact
cabinet.
Remove the filters

Perform the following procedures to remove the filters from the front door of the 9224
Sub-Compact. Make sure to inspect the filters and front screen before performing this
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unlock the front door temper screws using a #25 pinhead torque bit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Take off the screws to the right of the cabinet door using a 1/4-inch nutdriver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Take the panel off the front of the cabinet. You will see a pre-filter which is velcroed
on to the frame. Remove this pre-filter to gain access to the metal bracket which is
holding the filter in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the metal bracket by removing the four (4) screws using the 1/4-inch
nutdriver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the main filter from the bracket.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install the new main filter. Screw the metal bracket back onto the frame using the
1/4-inch nutdriver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the pre-filter to the Velcro holders. Check the mesh screen on the cover. If the
mesh screen has visible dirt, use the McMaster Carr, P/N 7080T83 and brush the dirt
from the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install the cover to the cabinet by screwing the cover to the frame.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
20-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

21

21 d2U Distributed
9234
component replacement
and repair

Overview
Purpose

The following chapter contains information on component replacement and repair for
the 9234 d2U Distributed.
Contents
9234 d2U Distributed component replacement

21-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
21-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement and repair

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement

Overview

The 9234 d2U Distributed base station consists of two main types of units, a BBU, and
a RRH, together with optional ancillary equipment for power and battery back-up,
surge protection, GPS timing, tower mounted amplifiers, and antenna Remote Electrical
Tilt (RET). A single BBU can support multiple RRHs in star and/or daisy-chain
configuration, which are interconnected through the Common Public Radio Interface
(CPRI) links. The 9234 d2U Distributed base station hardware can be configured to
support multiple sectors and multiple carriers.
Field replacement of BBU components depends upon the configuration. The BBU
consists of the LP-BBU/d2U, together with any housing, ancillary equipment, and
power plant. The base unit is available in several different forms, including:

Indoor, DC powered, 19-inch rack-mounted LP-BBU/d2U

Indoor, DC powered, wall-mount LP-BBU/d2U

Outdoor, DC powered, wall-/floor-mount cabinet

Outdoor, AC powered with battery back-up, wall-/floor-mount cabinets.

Within the BBU, the only items in an indoor variant that can be replaced are the
discrete URC-II, channel cards, and fan cartridge. For the outdoor BBU, it is basically
the same.
The RRH contains no field serviceable parts. If anything within the RRH fails, the
whole unit is replaced.
BBU maintenance functions

The LP-BBU/d2U main board is part of the unit assembly and is not a field
replaceable item. Any failure of the main board necessitates the replacement of the
complete LP-BBU/d2U.
The LP-BBU/d2U houses three plug-in units, that are field replaceable or upgradeable.
Note that there are two variants of the backplane for accepting these three circuit
packs, a channel card only variant and a CDMA EV-DO variant. For the CDMA
EV-DO variant, slot 3 has the pinouts for an URC-II. The BBU can accommodate the
following replaceable circuit packs:

CMU-IV or CMU-V (for 3G1x)

SBEVM (for 1xEV-DO)

URC-II (when separate controllers are required for 3G1x and 1xEV-DO)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

21-2

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement and repair

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The maintenance system will identify faulty units and allow them to be hot swapped in
the field. The maintenance system can extract inventory information from these circuit
packs such as unit serial number, hardware and software information, and other
information.
The following figure shows the front of the BBU, showing the locations of the card
slots.

The maintenance system can also extract inventory information from the non-field
replaceable units within the base unit, such as the backplane, main board, input/output
unit and power unit, in order to allow the hardware to be identified. The inventory
contained within these units replicates that used by the associated OneBTS Macrocell
FRUs (URC-II, CTU-II, OCM-II, CPC, IOU), even though they are no longer field
replaceable.
The indoor unit contains a fan tray for thermal management. This is a field replaceable
item that can be hot swapped. There is a fan alarm associated with this unit.
The outdoor unit uses a different fan tray for thermal management, together with a
cabinet heater, to allow operation down to -45C (-49F). This fan tray is field
replaceable. There is a fan alarm associated with this unit.
In addition, the outdoor cabinet uses fresh air cooling and hence a Fresh Air Filter is
required, which may need replacing within the BBU lifetime. This Fresh Air Filter is
accessible for field servicing, without taking the unit out-of-service. There is an alarm
associated with a blocked Fresh Air Filter. If the Fresh Air Filter Nearing End of Life
alarm is not implemented, then Filter Replacement will need to be based on scheduled
inspection/maintenance.
The outdoor unit also contains a protection module that provides surge protection for
all external copper signal interfaces (excluding DC Power).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
21-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement and repair

9234 d2U Distributed component replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1U of user space is provided in the outdoor unit. This User Equipment is expected to
be powered from the same DC supply that powers the LP-BBU/d2U. This user space
DC supply cannot be isolated, hence the whole unit will have to be powered down in
order to add / remove the User Equipment in the field.
Equipment fitted in the Base Unit user space, is expected to be maintained separately
using its own maintenance interface.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

21-4

22

22
Remote
Radio Head
component replacement
and repair

Overview
Purpose

This chapter presents component replacement information that pertains to the CDMA
Remote Radio Head (RRH).
Contents
Field replaceable unit

22-2

RRH maintenance functions

22-3

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

22-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
22-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

Field replaceable unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field replaceable unit

Overview

RRH is a field replaceable unit. The entire RRH must be replaced if it fails.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

22-2

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

RRH maintenance functions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RRH maintenance functions

Overview

The RRH provides an Ethernet interface for use to communicate with a maintenance
tool. This interface allows field technicians to monitor, reprogram, configure and test
RRHs in the field. The maintenance port duplicates the control functionality supported
by the optical fiber interface.
The RRH also incorporates a front-panel mounted power switch to allow the RRH to
be powered on or off; the switch enables the internal PSU to turn on the regulated
internal power rails. This power switch is accessible and may be used to recycle the
input power as a field maintenance procedure.
The RRH provides inventory data, read/write via maintenance tool, and support
downloading site specific data from the BBU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
22-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

rrheqp form

This form is used to support RRH Equipage and RRH Carrier Equipage parameters.
The key field is Cell Site Number. The rrheqp form is inserted before btseqp
form. Through the rrheqp form, the data in the rrheqpdb can be read and written.
The rrheqp form presents the following screens for RRH configurations:
Screen 1 (CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE) displays the Cell Site Number
associated with the RRHs. See the following figure.

12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
_______________________________________________________________________
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| CDMA
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 1 of 8 |
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Cell
Site
Number.......................
*1)
___
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
Screen 2 (CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE) displays the relationship between
the RUI and RRHs, RRH PAF, RRH antenna application, and RRH receiver imbalance
threshold. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

22-4

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| CDMA
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 2 of 8 |
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Cell ___
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
3) RRH Equipage:
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Row
RRH
RRH
RUI
RUI
RRH
PAF
Prim
Sec
Rx
Imbl
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Num Num
Stat Num Asm PAF Unit Ant Ant Thrshld
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
4) @5) @6) @9) @10) 11) 12)
14)
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [1] 1
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [2] 2
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[3]
3
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [4] 4
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [5] 5
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [6] 6
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
22-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| CDMA
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 2 of 8 |
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Cell ___
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
3) RRH Equipage:
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Row
RRH
RRH
RUI
RUI
RRH
PAF
Prim
Sec
Rx
Imbl
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Num Num
Stat Num Asm PAF Unit Ant Ant Thrshld
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
4) @5) @6) @9) @10) 11) 12)
14)
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [1] 1
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [2] 2
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[3]
3
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [4] 4
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [5] 5
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [6] 6
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
Screen 3 (CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE) displays the RRH 1 Carrier
Equipage information. The information on Screen 3 is repeated on screens 4-8 for
RRH 2-6. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

22-6

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| CDMA
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 3 of 8 |
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Cell ___
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
29) RRH 1 Carrier Equipage:
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Row Carr Carr Carr Max
RRH Pging Acc Max Acc BCCH FCCCH REACH|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Num
Num
Chnl
Type
Pwr
Att Chnls Chnls Chnls Chnls Chnls Chnls|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
@30) 33)
34) 35)
36) @37) @38)
39)
40)
41)
42) |
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [ 1] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [ 2] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [ 3] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[
4]
__
____
__
____
____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [ 5] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [ 6] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [ 7] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[
8]
__
____
__
____
____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[
9]
__
____
__
____
____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| [10] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
cmodeqp form

Screens 10-12 are used to set the contact polarity of the RRH user alarm in the CDMA
Modular Cell Equipage Form. Screen 10 displays alarms for RRH 1 and 2 (see the
following figure), Screen 11 displays alarms for RRH 3 and 4, and Screen 12 displays
alarms for RRH 5 and 6.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
22-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Remote Radio Head component replacement and repair

RC/V forms for RRH/RUI configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| CDMA
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
| Networks
CDMA MODULAR CELL EQUIPAGE (cmodeqp)
Screen 10 of 14|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
157)
RRH
1
User
Alarms
160)
RRH
2
User
Alarms
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
RRH
User
Eqp
Polarity
RRH
User
Eqp
Polarity
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
Alarm#
158)
159)
Alarm#
161)
162)
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[1]
1
n
_
[1]
1
n
_
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[2]
2
n
_
[2]
2
n
_
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[3]
3
n
_
[3]
3
n
_
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[4]
4
n
_
[4]
4
n
_
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[5]
5
n
_
[5]
5
n
_
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
[6]
6
n
_
[6]
6
n
_
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|
|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
|______________________________________________________________________|
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

22-8

23

23
Clean
screens/replace
filters on outdoor base
stations

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides procedures to clean screens and replace Fresh Air Filters on
outdoor CDMA base stations.
Contents
Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

23-3

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

23-4

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

23-9

Country PM10 Level Classification

23-10

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

23-11

Maintenance requirements for screens and acoustic mufflers

23-12

Procedure 23-1: Inspect and clean front heat exchanger intake screen

23-13

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler screen

23-15

Procedure 23-3: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-20

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace filters

23-22

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-23

Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

23-24

Procedure 23-5: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-29

Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet

23-31

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

23-33

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-34

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

23-35

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-40

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

23-45

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-46

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-47

Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-50

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace filters

23-52

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-53

Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-54

Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-59

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

23-61

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-62

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-63

Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-66

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

23-68

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-69

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if applicable)

23-70

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel screens

23-74

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

23-80

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

23-85

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean screens/replace filters

23-88

Maintenance requirements for screens

23-89

Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct

23-90

Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-93

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-2

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Overview
Purpose

This section describes the maintenance requirements when servicing outdoor base
station screens and Fresh Air Filters.
Contents
Fresh Air Filter maintenance

23-4

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

23-9

Country PM10 Level Classification

23-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Overview

Outdoor CDMA base stations and products are equipped with a Fresh Air Filter. This
filter helps prevent airborne contaminates and pollutants from entering the base stations
and damaging the internal hardware. Procedures are provided for the following base
stations:

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN

Outdoor 9216 Compact V1

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro without heat exchanger

Outdoor CDMA 450 Remote Unit

Outdoor CDMA 850 Remote Unit

In order to ensure highly reliable service, the Fresh Air Filter may need to be replaced
during the service life of the base station. By promptly replacing the Fresh Air Filter,
users can be assured of receiving high-quality operation from the base station for many
years to come.
Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) provides expected
replacement cycles for the Fresh Air Filters, expressed in months, for the listed
products and are based on the PM10 levels listed in the table. Actual life of the filters
will depend on actual PM10 conditions of the site. Use only Alcatel-Lucent approved
Fresh Air Filters as non-approved filters may result in loss of service or cause damage
to the base station. User must not attempt to clean the Fresh Air Filters.
The useful life of the Fresh Air Filter varies depending on the amount of airborne
contaminants and pollutants at the installation site. Higher levels of airborne
particulates will require more frequent replacement of the Fresh Air Filter. As an aid to
the user, Country PM10 Level Classification (p. 23-10), provides a table that
classifies many of the largest markets into four tiers, with a typical and severe range
given for each tier. The classification is based on measurements from government and
non-government sources for selected locations within each country. Note that the PM10
ranges are yearly average values, and may vary significantly from measurements taken
on any particular day. Since the local conditions may vary significantly from these
values, it is recommended that measurements from local sources be used for
determining the tier level of the site. If there is any doubt about the PM10 level of the
site, the user should assume the severe classification. Severe conditions are most
often found near heavily industrialized areas or where high levels of dust are generated

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-4

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(for example, along dirt roads). Systems should not be installed in locations where the
average PM10 level exceeds 250 g/m3 (contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account
Representative for alternate configurations or installation options).
Note: PM10 is a measure of airborne particulates that is widely used and typically
available from local sources. It is defined as the density of particulate matter measuring
10 m in size or less.
The following information describes the maintenance schedule for the screens and
Fresh Air Filters provided on the outdoor CDMA base stations:
Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed

The 9222 Micro Distributed base station is designed with protective screens and a
Fresh Air Filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. The 9222 Micro Distributed base station is
equipped with a Fresh Air Filter alarm to notify the user if the Fresh Air Filter has
reached the end of its useful life. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than
expected, the Fresh Air Filter may alarm before its scheduled replacement. If this
occurs, the Fresh Air Filter should be replaced within 14 days. When replacing the
Fresh Air Filter, or if the frame or asset over-temperature alarms have occurred, inspect
the following items to verify the proper operation of the cooling system:

Verify Fan Tray is operating properly.

Remove the intake duct and clean all screens.

Inspect the Fresh Air Filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the Fresh Air Filter or over-temperature alarms will clear.

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact

The outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact base station is designed with protective screens and a
Fresh Air Filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. The 9223 Ultra-Compact base station is equipped
with a Fresh Air Filter alarm to notify the user if the Fresh Air Filter has reached the
end of its useful life. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than expected, the Fresh
Air Filter may alarm before its scheduled replacement. If this occurs the Fresh Air
Filter should be replaced within 14 days. When replacing the Fresh Air Filter, or if the
frame or asset over-temperature alarms have occurred, inspect the following items to
verify the proper operation of the cooling system:

Verify Fan Tray is operating properly.

Remove the intake duct and clean all screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the Fresh Air Filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the Fresh Air Filter or over-temperature alarms will clear.

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact

The 9224 Sub-Compact cabinets are designed with protective screens plus a main filter
and a pre-filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per the
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. The 9224 Sub-Compact are equipped with a Fresh
Air Filter alarm to notify the user if the Fresh Air Filter has reached the end of its
useful life. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than expected, the Fresh Air Filter
may alarm before its scheduled replacement. If this occurs, both filters should be
replaced within 14 days. When replacing these filters, or if the frame or asset
over-temperature alarms have occurred, inspect the following to verify the proper
operation of the cooling system:

Verify Fan Tray is operating properly.

Remove the front louver and clean all screens.

Inspect the pre-filter and main filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the Fresh Air Filter or over-temperature alarms will clear.

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN

The 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinets are designed with protective screens plus a main
filter and a pre-filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per the
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. The 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinets are equipped
with a Fresh Air Filter alarm to notify the user if the Fresh Air Filter has reached the
end of its useful life. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than expected, the Fresh
Air Filter may alarm before its scheduled replacement. If this occurs, both filters
should be replaced within 14 days. When replacing these filters, or if the frame or
asset over-temperature alarms have occurred, inspect the following to verify the proper
operation of the cooling system:

Verify Fan Tray is operating properly.

Remove the front louver and clean all screens.

Inspect the Prefilter and main filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the Fresh Air Filter or over-temperature alarms will clear.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-6

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1)

The 9216 Compact (V1) cabinets are designed with protective screens plus a pre-filter
and a main filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per the
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. The 9216 Compact V1 base stations are equipped
with a Fresh Air Filter alarm to notify the user if the Fresh Air Filter has reached the
end of its useful life. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than expected, the Fresh
Air Filter may alarm before its scheduled replacement. If this occurs, both filters
should be replaced within 14 days. When replacing these filters, or if the frame or
asset over-temperature alarms have occurred, inspect the following to verify the proper
operation of the cooling system:

Verify Fan Tray is operating properly.

Remove the front louver and clean all screens.

Inspect the pre-filter and main filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the Fresh Air Filter or over-temperature alarms will clear.

Outdoor 9226 Compact (V2)

The 9226 Compact (V2) cabinets are designed with three mesh screens. The screens
should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the unrestricted flow of cooling air
necessary for proper cell operation. Clogged screens or other restriction may set off
frame an/or asset level over-temperature alarms. Should these alarms occur, inspect the
following items to verify the proper operations of the cooling system:

Verify that the Fan Tray is operating properly.

Inspect the intake and exhaust ducts and clean all screens.

Verify that the over-temperature alarms will clear.

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro

The outdoor 9218/9228 Macro cabinets are designed with protective screens and a
Fresh Air Filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per the
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. The 9218/9228 Macro cabinets are equipped with a
Fresh Air Filter alarm to notify the user if the Fresh Air Filter has reached the end of
its useful life. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than expected, the Fresh Air
Filter may alarm before its scheduled replacement. If this alarm occurs, or if the frame
or asset over-temperature alarms have occurred, inspect the following items to verify
the proper operation of the cooling system:

Verify that the Fan Tray is operating properly.

Inspect the intake and exhaust ducts and clean all screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Fresh Air Filter maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the Fresh Air Filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the Fresh Air Filter or over-temperature alarm will clear.

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units

The CDMA 450/850 Remote Units are designed with protective screens and a Fresh
Air Filter. The screens should be cleaned every 3 to 6 months to ensure the
unrestricted flow of cooling air. It is recommended that the filter be replaced per the
schedule given in Table 23-1, Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according
to the local PM10 range at the site. Should a site have a larger PM10 level than
expected, the frame or asset over-temperature alarms may trigger. Should this occur,
inspect the following items to verify the proper operation of the cooling system:

Verify that the Fan Tray is operating properly.

Inspect the intake and exhaust ducts and clean all screens.

Inspect the Fresh Air Filter and replace as necessary.

Verify that the over-temperature alarms will clear.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-8

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

The following table shows the life expectancies of the Fresh Air Filter based on the
tier markets.
Table 23-1

Cabinets

Fresh Air Filter Life Expectancies

Tier Market

Tier 1

Tier 2

Tier 3

Tier 4

Condition

Markets

Markets

Markets

Markets

PM10 Range

Normal

Severe

Normal

Severe

Normal

Severe

Normal

Severe

<25

25-50

<40

40-100

<80

80-200

<150

150-250

g/m3

9226 Compact

Filter

66

33

41

17

21

11

9222 Micro
Distributed

Filter

85

43

53

21

27

11

14

9223
Ultra-Compact

Pre-Filter

24

24

24

24

24

12

12

Main Filter

90

90

90

90

90

36

36

18

9224
Sub-Compact1

Pre-Filter

24

24

24

24

24

12

12

12

Main Filter

60

60

60

60

60

36

48

24

9224
Sub-Compact
EN 1

Pre-Filter

24

24

24

24

24

12

12

Main Filter

60

60

60

60

60

24

24

12

9228 Macro

Filter

66

33

41

17

21

11

CDMA
450/850
Remote Units

Filter

120

60

75

30

38

15

20

12

Notes:

1.

For 9224 Sub-Compact and 9224 Sub-Compact EN Tier 1, Tier 2 and Tier 3 - Normal:
Replace the Pre-Filter at 24 month intervals for the first two replacements. At 60 months,
replace both the Pre-Filter and Main Filter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Base station screen/Fresh Air Filter maintenance

Country PM10 Level Classification

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Country PM10 Level Classification

The following table lists the country PM10 level classifications by tier markets and
associated countries.

Legend:

Based on Air Pollution in World Cities (PM10 Concentrations), a World Banks

Development Economics Research Group study of PM10 levels weighted by population.
Available at: (http://econ.worldbank.org/WBSITE/EXTERNAL/EXTDEC/EXTRESEARCH/0,
,contentMDK:20785646~pagePK:64214825~piPK:64214943~theSitePK:469382,00.html PM10 ) - PM10 is defined as particulate matter measuring 10 microns in size or less.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-10

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace

filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9218/9228 Macro cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens and acoustic mufflers

23-12

Procedure 23-1: Inspect and clean front heat exchanger intake screen

23-13

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler screen

23-15

Procedure 23-3: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-20

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Maintenance requirements for screens and acoustic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mufflers

Maintenance requirements for screens and acoustic mufflers

Inspection

It is recommended that the heat exchanger inlet screen, and rear acoustic muffler
screen be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on the outdoor 9218/9228 Macro
cabinet. The screens may house a buildup of debris which may impairing proper cell
function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is required.
Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain access and
clean these screens.
Screen Cleaning

There are two types of heat exchangers that the 9218/9228 Macro cabinet can be
equipped with. The first is a front heat exchanger and the second is a rear heat
exchanger. The rear of the cabinet has a screen located at the bottom of the acoustic
muffler. This screen can accumulate debris and other pollutants, thus impairing proper
cell function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is in order.
Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain access to these
screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-12

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-1: Inspect and clean front heat exchanger
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
intake screen

Procedure 23-1: Inspect and clean front heat exchanger

intake screen
Overview

Preform the following procedures to clean the front heat exchanger intake screen on
the 9218/9228 Macro cabinet.
Remove and clean the front heat exchanger intake screen

Preform the following procedure to remove and clean the front heat exchanger intake
screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #8 tamper proof spanner driver, remove three (3) spanners securing intake
screen to front of the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide screen upward along its groove until it is free from cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a plastic bristle brush such as the McMaster Carr (P/N 7080T83), proceed to
remove any debris accumulated along the screens mesh surface.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Re-install front heat exchanger intake screen

Preform the following procedure to re-install the front heat exchanger intake screen on
the 9218/9228 Macro cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide screen downward along groove until it rests at bottom lip of groove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a #8 tamper proof spanner driver, install three spanners to secure intake screen
to front of the cabinet, as shown below. Torque spanners to 14 in-lb.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-1: Inspect and clean front heat exchanger
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
intake screen

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-14

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screen

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler

screen
Overview

Preform the following procedures to clean the acoustic muffler on the 9218/9228
Macro cabinet.
Remove and clean the rear acoustic muffler screen

Preform the following procedure to remove and clean the acoustic muffler.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Loosen top two (2) spanners, using a #14 tamper proof spanner driver.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove bottom two (2) spanners, using a #14 tamper proof spanner driver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully slide muffler upwards until top spanners are at bottom of elongated hole.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lift and pull muffler away from rear of cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate meshed screen at bottom of muffler and using a McMaster Carr brush (P/N
7080T83), remove any buildup of debris on both sides of the screen.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner" can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before re-installing the muffler, check and clean amplifier fins as described in Clean
amplifier fins (p. 23-17).

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-16

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screen

Clean amplifier fins

Preform the following procedure to clean the amplifier fins on the 9218/9228 Macro
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If necessary, refer to Remove and clean the rear acoustic muffler screen (p. 23-15) to
remove the rear acoustic muffler.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

With the muffler removed, locate the bottom of the cooling fins on the amplifiers.
Inspect for any visible debris.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a long reach plastic bristle brush, such as McMaster Carr part # 7208T1, clean
the amplifier fins by using small circular sweeps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

After cleaning the amplifier fins, re-install the rear acoustic muffler as described in
Re-install rear acoustic muffler (p. 23-19).

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-18

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-2: Inspect and clean rear acoustic muffler
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screen

Re-install rear acoustic muffler

Preform the following procedure to re-install the acoustic muffler on the 9218/9228
Macro cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position muffler in place, ensuring the previously loosened top two (2) spanners on
cabinet fit over the elongated hole of the muffler. Then, allow the muffler to move
downward until spanners are located in narrow portion of elongated hole.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Align bottom holes of muffler with corresponding holes on the cabinet. Then, proceed
to install bottom two (2) spanners.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tighten the bottom two (2) spanners using a #14 tamper proof spanner driver. Torque
to 14 in-lb.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Similarly, tighten the top two spanners using the same tool and torque value.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-3: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-3: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

If the outdoor 9218/9228 Macro cabinet includes a Fresh Air Filter. It is recommended
that the filter be replaced according to the schedule given in the Fresh Air Filter Life
Expectancies (p. 23-9) and based on the local PM10 range at the site.
Replace the Fresh Air Filter

Preform the following procedure to Replace the Fresh Air Filter on the 9218/9228
Macro cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the front cover from the door by opening the door and removing the 12 M6
screws from the inside of the door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Top Filter Bracket and loosen the Filter Bracket to remove the filter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-20

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-3: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace the Fresh Air Filter with new replacement filter. Do not touch the filter media.
Note the orientation of the gasket around the perimeter of the filter when installing the
new filter. The gasket should be facing the door. Make sure that the label marked This
side up is facing upward. Center the air filter with respect to the brackets. Torque all
M6 hardware to 2.8 N-m (25 in-lb).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When installing the cover, the top flange will rest on the upper filter bracket. This will
help align the cover vertically and horizontally with respect to the door. Install the M6
screws that were removed in Step 1 and torque to 2.8 N-m (25 in-lb).
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean

screens/replace filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-23

Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

23-24

Procedure 23-5: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-29

Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet

23-31

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-22

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance requirements for screens

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
Screen Cleaning

The outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet includes a mesh screen located on the
access panel. The screens may house a buildup of debris which may impair proper cell
function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is required.
Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain access and
clean the screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

Overview

The following procedures describe how to access and clean the side panel screen on
the outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
Remove Side Solar Shield (if present)

Perform the following procedure to remove the Side Solar Shield (if present) on the
outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 7/16-in. nutdriver, unscrew the four (4) bolts on the Solar Shield located on
the lower panel of the cabinet. Save all hardware for re-installation later in the
procedure. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Solar Shield from the cabinet. Lift the shield up and away from the
cabinet. Place the solar shield along a wall or another cabinet to prevent the shield
from falling over or being blown away by the wind.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-24

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Remove side access panel (p. 23-25) to continue the procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Remove side access panel

Perform the following procedure to remove the side panel on the outdoor 9222 Micro
Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 7/16-in. nutdriver, unscrew the four (4) bolts on the access panel located on
the lower portion of the cabinet. Save all hardware for re-installation later in the
procedure. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the lower access panel from the cabinet. Place the access panel along a wall
or another cabinet to prevent the panel from falling over or being blown away by the
wind.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Inspect and clean side-panel bug screen (p. 23-27) to continue the procedure.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-26

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen

Inspect and clean side-panel bug screen

Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean side-panel bug screen on the
outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the bug screen located on the inside of the access panel. Using a plastic bristle
brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris from the area. See the
following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacturer and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment
located nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying the
screen.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4: Inspect and clean side panel screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform one of the following to continue the process:

If the Fresh Air Filter requires replacement, go to Procedure 23-5: Inspect and
replace the Fresh Air Filter (p. 23-29)
If the maintenance is complete, go to Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet (p. 23-31)

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-28

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-5: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Procedure 23-5: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

The outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet includes a Fresh Air Filter. It is
recommended that the filter be replaced according to the schedule given in the Fresh
Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) and based on the local PM10 range at the site.
The part number for the Gore Cooling Filter is Comcode 409013406.
Replace Fresh Air Filter

Preform the following procedure to replace the Fresh Air Filter on the outdoor 9222
Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 10-mm nutdriver, remove the ten 10-mm flange nuts from the bottom and top
bracket holding the Fresh Air Filter in place. Save hardware for re-installation later in
the procedure. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-5: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fresh Air Filter from the cabinet by pulling the filter away from the
cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace or re-install the Fresh Air Filter. Do not touch the membrane of the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before securing the Fresh Air Filter brackets the flange nuts need to be coated with
anti-sieze compound. Using a 10-mm nutdriver, replace the ten (10) screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet (p. 23-31) to re-install the side access panel
and/or the Solar Shield (if present).
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-30

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet

Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet

Overview

The following procedures are used to close the side access panel and Solar Shield on
the outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
Re-install side access panel

Perform the following procedure to re-install the side panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position side access panel over lower opening in the cabinet as shown in the following
figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 7/16-in. nutdriver, screw in the four bolts to secure the side access panel.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-6: Close cabinet

Re-install Side Solar Shield (if present)

Perform the following procedure to re-install the Side Solar Shield (if present) on the
outdoor 9222 Micro Distributed cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position Side Solar Shield over side panel as shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 7/16-in. nutdriver, screw in the four bolts to secure the Side Solar Shield.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-32

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean

screens/replace filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-34

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

23-35

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-40

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Maintenance requirements for screens

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Screen Cleaning

The outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet includes a mesh screen located on the access
panel. The screens may house a buildup of debris which may impair proper cell
function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is required.
Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain access and
clean the screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-34

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

Overview

The following procedures describe how to access and clean the access panel screen on
the outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
Remove bottom cover

Perform the following procedure to remove the bottom cover on the outdoor 9223
Ultra-Compact cabinet
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four (4) screws on the access
panel located on the bottom portion of the cabinet. Save all hardware for re-installation
later in the procedure. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the bottom access panel from the cabinet. Place the access panel along a wall
or another cabinet to prevent the panel from falling over or being blown away by the
wind. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-35
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Inspect and clean inside bug screen (p. 23-36) to inspect and clean the bug
screen.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect and clean inside bug screen

Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean the inside bug screen on the
outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the pre-filter from the access panel before inspecting the bug screen.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-36

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the bug screen located on the inside of the access panel. Using a plastic bristle
brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris from the area. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-37
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacturer and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment
located nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying the
screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

After cleaning the bug screen, reattach the pre-filter to cover the bug screen.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-38

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-7: Inspect and clean access panel screen

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter (p. 23-40) to inspect
and replace the Fresh Air Filter.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-39
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

The outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact cabinet includes a Fresh Air Filter. It is

recommended that the filter be replaced according to the schedule given in the Fresh
Air Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) and based on the local PM10 range at the site.
Replace Fresh Air Filter

Perform the following procedure to replace the Fresh Air Filter on the 9223
Ultra-Compact
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (10) M5 SEMS screws from
the bottom of the base station which are securing the Fresh Air Filter Housing/Fan
Tray Assembly. Save hardware for re-installation later in the procedure. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-40

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a 10-in., #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the (4) M5 SEMS screws from
the Fresh Air Filter Housing. This separates the Fresh Air Filter Housing from the Fan
Tray Assembly. See the following figure. Note that there are only 2 screws showing,
there are a total of 4 screws.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Fresh Air Filter from the Fresh Air Filter Housing by pulling the filter up
and away from the housing. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-41
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-42

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace or reinstall the Fresh Air Filter. Do not touch the membrane of the filter as
this could cause damage to the filter, which would result in not properly cleaning the
air flow to the base station. Note that the gasket on the Fresh Air Filter will go with
the gasket towards the inside.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install the Fan Tray Assembly to the Fresh Air Filter Housing. Using a 10-in., #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, secure the (4) M5 SEMS screws to the Fresh Air Housing
Assembly. See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the outside cover located on the bottom of the cabinet to the base station.
Secure the (4) M5 SEMS screws, using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-43
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9223 Ultra-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-8: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-44

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace

filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-46

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-47

Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-50

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-45
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Maintenance requirements for screens

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet.
Screen Cleaning

The outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet includes two (2) mesh screens located on the
front louver cover. The screens may house a buildup of debris which may impair
proper cell function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is
required. Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain
access and clean these screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-46

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

Overview

The following procedures describe how to access and clean the front louver cover on
the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet.
Remove front louver cover

Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean front louver cover.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect front louver cover. If necessary, use a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr, P/N
7080T83) to remove any visible debris from exterior surface of louver cover. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-47
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a TR-25 Torx center pin screw bit, remove eight tamper resistant screws
securing front louver cover to cabinet. Then carefully pull cover away from cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the inside of the cover, inspect the two (2) mesh screens located on inside part of
cover. One along the cover inner surface and the other along the covers bottom plane.
See the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris
from the area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner" can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-48

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-9: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter (p. 23-50) to inspect
and replace the Fresh Air Filter.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-49
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

The outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet includes one pre-filter and one main filter. It is
recommended that the filter be replaced per the schedule given in the Fresh Air Filter
Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according to the local PM10 range at the site. Perform the
following to replace the pre-filter or main filter.
Replace Fresh Air Filter

Perform the following procedure to replace the Fresh Air Filter on the 9224
Sub-Compact cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

With cover removed, the pre-filter is exposed. Replace if necessary by pulling filter
away from Hook and Loop band securing filter to cabinet frame as shown in the
following figure. Make sure to remove filter residue on Loop and Loop. Use a lint
removal brush.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Once pre-filter has been removed, the Fresh Air Filter is exposed. Inspect this Fresh
Air Filter for visible debris. Replace if necessary by removing eight tamper resistant
screws as shown in the following figure. Use a TR-25 Torx screw bit.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-50

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-10: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install replacement Fresh Air Filter and secure to cabinet with the previously removed
eight (8) screws. Make sure the gasket is pointed inward for proper sealing.
Important! Do not touch the membrane of the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install replacement pre-filter and secure to cabinet by pressing filter perimeter along
the Hook and Loop band.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install front louver cover and secure to cabinet using previously removed four (4)
screws each along left and right sides of cover. Use a TR-25 Torx screw bit.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-51
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean

screens/replace filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-53

Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-54

Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-59

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-52

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance requirements for screens

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet.
Screen Cleaning

The outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet includes four mesh screens located on the
inside front louver cover. The screens may house a buildup of debris which may impair
proper cell function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is
required. Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain
access and clean these screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-53
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

Overview

The following procedures describe how to access and clean the front louver cover on
the outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet.
Remove front louver cover

Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean front louver cover on the outdoor
9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect front louver cover. If necessary, use a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr, P/N
7080T83) to remove any visible debris from exterior surface of louver cover. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-54

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the inside of the cover, inspect the four (4) mesh screens located on inside part
of the cover. One along the cover inner surface and the others near the bottom and
sides of the cover. Using a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean
any visible debris from the area. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-55
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-56

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner" can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-57
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-11: Inspect and clean front louver cover
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter (p. 23-59) to inspect
and replace the Fresh Air Filter.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-58

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

The outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN cabinet includes one pre-filter and one main filter.
It is recommended that the filter be replaced per the schedule given in the Fresh Air
Filter Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according to the local PM10 range at the site.
Perform the following to replace the pre-filter or main filter.
Replace Fresh Air Filter

Perform the following procedure to replace the Fresh Air Filter in the 9224
Sub-Compact EN cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

With cover removed, the pre-filter is exposed. Replace if necessary by pulling filter
away from Hook and Loop band securing filter to cabinet frame as shown in the
following figure. Make sure to remove filter residue on Loop and Loop. Use a lint
removal brush.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Once pre-filter has been removed, the Fresh Air Filter is exposed. Inspect this Fresh
Air Filter for visible debris. Replace if necessary by removing eight tamper resistant
screws as shown in the following figure. Use a TR-25 Torx screw bit.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-59
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9224 Sub-Compact EN clean screens/replace

filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-12: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install replacement Fresh Air Filter and secure to cabinet with the previously removed
eight (8) screws. Make sure the gasket is pointed inward for proper sealing.
Important! Do not touch the membrane of the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install replacement pre-filter and secure to cabinet by pressing filter perimeter along
the Hook and Loop band.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install front louver cover and secure to cabinet using previously removed four (4)
screws each along left and right sides of cover. Use a TR-25 Torx screw bit.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-60

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace

filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-62

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

23-63

Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-66

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-61
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Maintenance requirements for screens

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) cabinet.
Screen Cleaning

The outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) cabinet includes a mesh screen located on the front
louver cover. The screens may house a buildup of debris which may impair proper cell
function. If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is required.
Perform the following procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain access and
clean these screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-62

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

Overview

The following procedures describe how to access and clean the front louver cover on
the outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) cabinet.
Remove front louver cover

Perform the following procedure to inspect and clean front louver cover on the outdoor
9216 Compact (V1) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect front louver cover. If necessary, use a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr, P/N
7080T83) to remove any visible debris from exterior surface of louver cover. The filter
comcode is 848944674.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a TR-25 Torx center pin screw bit, remove 18 tamper resistant screws securing
front louver cover to cabinet. Then carefully pull cover away from cabinet. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-63
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the mesh screen on inside of the cover. Using a plastic bristle brush (McMaster
Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris from the area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner" can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
cover away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-64

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-13: Inspect and clean front louver cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Go to Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter (p. 23-66) to inspect
and replace the Fresh Air Filter.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-65
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

The 9216 Compact (V1) cabinet includes one pre-filter and one main filter. It is
recommended that the filter be replaced per the schedule given in the Fresh Air Filter
Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according to the local PM10 range at the site. Perform the
following to replace the pre-filter or main filter.
Replace Fresh Air Filter

Perform the following procedure to replace the Fresh Air Filter in the 9216 Compact
(V1) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

With cover removed, the pre-filter is exposed. Replace if necessary by pulling filter
away from Hook and Loop band securing filter to cabinet frame as shown in the
following figure. Make sure to remove filter residue on Loop and Loop. Use a lint
removal brush.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Once the pre-filter has been removed, the Fresh Air Filter is then exposed. Inspect this
filter for visible debris. Replace if necessary by removing the Fresh Air Filter from the
frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-66

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V1) clean screens/replace filters

Procedure 23-14: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install replacement Fresh Air Filter. Make sure that the arrow located on the top of the
Fresh Air Filter is pointing toward the inside of the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Install replacement pre-filter and secure to cabinet by pressing filter perimeter along
the Hook and Loop band.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install front louver cover and secure to cabinet using previously removed eighteen
(18) screws. Use a TR-25 Torx screw bit.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-67
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-69

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if applicable)

23-70

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel screens

23-74

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

23-80

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

23-85

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-68

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Maintenance requirements for screens

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
Screen Cleaning

The outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet includes up to three meshed screens which
may house a buildup of debris and other pollutants, thus impairing proper cell function.
If inspection reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process need to be performed.
Perform the following procedure in the sequence given in order to gain access to these
screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-69
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
applicable)

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if

applicable)
Overview

This section describes the procedures to remove and clean the top and rear solar shield
screens on the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
Remove Top Solar Shield (if applicable)

Important! If the Top Solar Shield is not present, proceed to the next section,
Remove Rear Solar Shield (if applicable) (p. 23-72).
Perform the following procedure to remove and clean the top solar shield screens on
the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Un-lock the front door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Release the latch by pulling on it.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Pull to open the front door of cabinet. The front door should be opened throughout this
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the four (4) tamper resistant screws securing the shield to the cabinet, using a
TR-25 Torx screw bit. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Push the shield toward the rear of the cabinet. Lift the shield up and away from
cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Place the shield along a wall or another cabinet to prevent it from falling over or being
blown by the wind.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save all hardware for re-installation later in the procedure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-70

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
applicable)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-71
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
applicable)

Remove Rear Solar Shield (if applicable)

Important! If Rear Solar Shield is not present, proceed to the next section
Remove left duct panel (p. 23-74).
Perform the following procedure to remove and clean the rear solar shield screens on
the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the three (3) tamper resistant screws securing the shield to the cabinet, using a
TR-25 Torx screw bit. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Push the shield upwards and tilt towards the back and away from the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position the shield to expose the meshed screen making it accessible for cleaning. See
the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to remove from the screen any visible debris, using a (McMaster Carr, P/N
7080T83 brush), as shown in the following figure. If available, a water hose may be
used, but away from the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When finished cleaning, place the shield along a wall or another cabinet to prevent it
from falling over or being blown by the wind.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save all hardware for re-installation later in the procedure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-72

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-15: Remove and clean solar shields (if
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
applicable)

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-73
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screens

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel screens

Overview

This section describes the procedures to remove and clean the side duct panels screens
on the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
Remove left duct panel

Preform the following procedure to remove the left duct panel and clean the panel
screens on the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inside the left front of the cabinet, locate and remove the two (2) M5 bolts, shown in
the following figure (5A), securing the left duct panel in place.
Important! If the cabinet is not equipped with a Heat Exchanger proceed to Step 3
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If heat exchanger is installed, remove three (3) screws located at the lower edge of the
left duct. See the following figure (5B). This will free the bottom of the left duct
facilitating removal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Push the panel upward and then towards the rear and away from the cabinet, as shown
in the following figure (5B).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position the panel to expose the meshed screen, making it accessible for cleaning. See
the following figure (5C).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to remove from the screen any visible debris, using a McMaster Carr, (P/N
7080T83) plastic brush. See the following figure. If available, a water hose may be
used but away from the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When finished cleaning, place panel along a wall or another cabinet to prevent it from
falling over or being blown by the wind.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the left side of amplifier fan for inlet blockage. If necessary, remove any
buildup of debris using a (McMaster Carr, P/N 7080T83) plastic brush. See the
following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-74

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screens
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save all hardware for re-installation later in the procedure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-75
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screens

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-76

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screens

Remove right duct panel

Perform the following procedure to remove the right duct panel and clean the panel
screens on the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate and remove six (6) M5 nuts securing Cover to cabinet (see the following figure
(6A)). Then, pull cover away from the cabinet (see the following figure (6B)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inside the right front of the cabinet, locate and remove the three (3) M5 bolts, shown
in the following figure (6C), securing the right duct panel in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

As per left panel removal, push the right panel upward and then towards the rear and
away from the cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position the panel to expose the meshed screen, making it accessible for cleaning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to remove from the screen any visible debris, using a (McMaster Carr, P/N
7080T83) brush. See the following figure. If available, a water hose may be used away
from the cabinet. Remove excess water with towel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

When finished cleaning, place shield along a wall or another cabinet to prevent it from
falling over or being blown by the wind.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save all hardware for re-installation later in the procedure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-77
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screens

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-78

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-16: Remove and clean side duct panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
screens

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-79
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

Overview

This section describes the procedures to re-install the right and left side duct panels on
the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
Re-install right duct panel

Perform the following procedure to re-install the right duct panel on the outdoor 9216
Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position right duct panel in place by aligning panel tabs with tabs on the cabinet. Then,
push panel downward until panel snaps in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to push panel towards front of the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inside the right front of the cabinet, re-install the three (3) M5 bolts, securing the right
duct panel in place. Torque to 25 in-lb. See the following figure (7A).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate growth interface box to cabinet. See the following figure (7B).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install six (6) M5 nuts securing growth interface box to cabinet, using an 8-mm
socket wrench. See the following figure (7C).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-80

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-81
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-82

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install left duct panel

Perform the following procedure to re-install the left duct panel on the outdoor 9216
Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position left duct panel in place by aligning panel tabs with tabs on the cabinet (see
the following figure (8A)). Then, push panel downward until panel snaps in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to push panel towards front of the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Proceed to re-install three (3) screws at power edge of left duct, if applicable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! If the cabinet is not equipped with a heat exchanger, proceed to Step 4.
Inside the left front of the cabinet, re-install the two (2) M5 bolts, securing the left
duct panel in place. Torque to 25 in-lb. See the following figure (8B).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-83
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-17: Re-install side duct panels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-84

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

Overview

This section describes the procedures to re-install the top and rear solar shields (if
applicable) on the outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) cabinet.
Re-install rear solar shield (if applicable)

Perform the following procedure to re-install the rear solar shield on the outdoor 9216
Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Position rear solar shield against the back of the cabinet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure shield to cabinet using the previously removed three (3) tamper resistant
screws. See the following figure. Use a M5 TR-25 Torx screw bit.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-85
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install top solar shield (if applicable)

Perform the following procedure to re-install the top solar shield on the outdoor 9216
Compact (V2) cabinet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lay top solar shield on top of cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-86

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor 9216 Compact (V2) screen Cleaning

Procedure 23-18: Re-install solar shields (if applicable)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Secure shield to cabinet using the previously removed four (4) tamper resistant screws.
Use a M5 TR-25 Torx screw bit. See the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close the cabinet door.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ensure to push latch inward until it snaps shut and using a proper key, lock the front
door.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-87
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
Overview
Purpose

This section describes the procedures to clean screens and replace filters on the
outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units.
Contents
Maintenance requirements for screens

23-89

Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct

23-90

Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

23-93

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-88

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance requirements for screens

Maintenance requirements for screens

Inspection

It is recommended that the screens be inspected and cleaned every 3 to 6 months on

the outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units.
Screen Cleaning

The CDMA 450/850 Remote Units includes a mesh screen located on the front cover.
The screens may house debris which may impair proper cell function. If inspection
reveals that this is the case, a cleaning process is required. Perform the following
procedure in the sequence given, in order to gain access and clean these screens.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-89
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct

Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct

Overview

The following procedure describe how to Remove air intake duct from the outdoor
CDMA 450/850 Remote Units.
Remove air intake duct

Preform the following procedure to remove and clean the air intake duct on the
outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the Air Intake Duct by removing the M5 security screws. Use a TR-25
Tamper resistant pin in head Torx bit, 1/4-in. drive (McMaster-Carr P/N 7377A47).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the mesh screen located on the bottom of the Air Intake Duct. Using a plastic
bristle brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris from the area.
See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-90

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner" can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby. Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-91
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-19: Remove and clean air intake duct
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carefully rinse the cleaned areas with water and let dry. All parts must be dry before
reassembly. Avoid splashing water on the cell or other equipment located nearby.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-92

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

Overview

The following procedure describe how to replace the Fresh Air Filter on the outdoor
CDMA 450/850 Remote Units.
Replace Fresh Air Filter

The CDMA 450/850 Remote Units Outdoor configuration includes a Fresh Air Filter. It
is recommended that the filter be replaced per schedule given in the Fresh Air Filter
Life Expectancies (p. 23-9) according to the local PM10 range at the site. Perform the
following to replace the Fresh Air Filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove the top and bottom filter clamping brackets to remove the filter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-93
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replace Fresh Air Filter with a new replacement filter. Note the orientation of the
gasket around the perimeter of the filter when installing the new filter. The gasket
should be facing the cabinet. Do not touch the membrane of the filter. Torque all M5
hardware to 2.8 N-m (25 in-lb).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

23-94

Clean screens/replace filters on outdoor base stations

Outdoor CDMA 450/850 Remote Units clean

screens/replace filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-20: Inspect and replace the Fresh Air Filter

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
23-95
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

24

24
Other
types of
maintenance

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the following maintenance procedures:

VRLA battery maintenance

Repair EZBFo Fan

Contents
Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

24-2

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

24-6

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat Exchanger inspect and
clean

24-14

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat Exchanger inspect and
clean

24-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

Important information

These procedures apply to all 12 V mono-block valve regulated lead-acid (VRLA)

batteries used in, or with, Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base station products. These batteries
employ an absorbed glass mat (AGM) technology and are classified as non-spillable
according to Code of Federal Regulations Tile 49, (49 CFR), revised 10/1/05, section
173.159 (d).
Storage

All VRLA batteries are shipped from the manufacturer in a charged condition. If
batteries are not placed in service immediately they should be stored in a cool 15 to
25C (60 to 77F), clean area. While in storage, the batteries should be recharged
within six months of the date of manufacture, or before the charge by date on the
outside of the transportation packaging. Batteries in storage that are recharged must be
charged according to the manufacturers instructions. The serial number, date code, and
date of recharge, must be recorded and retained. Storage of batteries for longer than six
months is not recommended. If a second recharge is required due to extended storage
time a charge/discharge and recharge cycle shall be performed to insure the batteries
provide a minimum of 90% of their rated capacity before placing into service. If the
storage time and/or temperature are not known, measure the open circuit voltage before
placing the battery in service. If the battery voltage is between 12.46 V and 12.06 V,
recharge the battery before placing in service. If the battery voltage is below 12.06 V,
do not place it in service and contact your Alcatel-Lucent account manager or the
battery manufacturer for advice.
In-service maintenance

The following minimum maintenance procedures must be followed and the data
recorded for all batteries at a cell site. Insufficient records and/or failure to perform
maintenance on the batteries may void the manufacturers warranty.
Important! The model numbers, and manufacturer of the test equipment used
should be the same for all measurements made over the lifetime of the batteries
tested. Battery testers made by different manufacturers will provide different
impedance, conductance or other terms, such as resistance measurement values (in
Ohms). Each type of tester may also have different test characteristics. Therefore, it
is essential to use the same tester. The absolute values the test equipment provides
for internal impedance may not be a reliable indicator of battery health. Therefore,
it is important to record the measurements and compare the trend. A substantial
change of one measurement compared to previous measurements can indicate
battery failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-2

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

During initial installation

Perform the following procedure for the initial installation of the batteries.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Record the serial number for each battery at the site.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the open circuit voltage for each battery. (before connecting to the
system)
Note: If any battery voltage measures below 12.46 V, recharge and equalize all the
batteries before placing in service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the temperature of each battery (a non-contact commercial grade
infrared thermometer is recommended).
Note: Measure case temperature of the battery, not the battery, not the terminal posts or
surrounding material.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the internal impedance of each battery. (Telecom VRLA battery
tester)
Note: If the impedance of any battery varies by more than 20% of the average of all
other batteries, do not install the battery.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the float voltage of each battery after connecting to the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the temperature of each battery. (Measure case temperature of the
battery not the battery, not terminal posts or sounding material.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the ambient air temperature at the site.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Six month intervals

Perform the following procedure every six months.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the system float voltage.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the float voltage of each battery. (before disconnecting from the
system)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the open circuit voltage for each battery.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the temperature of each battery. (a non-contact commercial grade
infrared thermometer, is recommended)
Note: Measure case temperature of the battery, not the terminal posts or surrounding
material.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the internal impedance of each battery (Use the same manufacturer
and model tester for accurate trending).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Measure and record the impedance of the inter-cell connections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Visually inspect the battery and terminals for signs of leakage and/or physical damage.
If slight signs of leakage are noticed clean battery with mixture of water and baking
soda.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check the torque of all battery connection at least once per year.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Battery Diagnostics

During each six month maintenance check, compare the newly recorded data against
the data recorded during previous maintenance checks. If a significant change is noted
for a particular battery or string of batteries, the string should be replaced.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-4

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-1: VRLA battery maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Conditions for replacement

Observe the batteries with the following conditions:

1. Battery shows signs of leakage - If slight acid leakage is observed on top of or
around the battery terminals, clean with a solution of water and baking soda. Then
make a note of this observation in the battery maintenance records. During the next
maintenance check, examine the battery again for signs of acid leakage. Replace
the battery if signs of leakage reappear. If the battery shows signs of significant
acid leakage (acid is observed on the battery and/or if acid is observed between the
bottom of the battery and the shelf) replace the battery immediately.
2. Battery float voltage is less than 0.3 V lower than the average float voltage of the
other batteries in the system Replace battery.
3. Battery open circuit voltage is less than 12.01 V Replace battery.
4. Battery impedance measures 50% greater than the average of other batteries in the
system Replace battery.
5. Battery impedance measurement changed by more than 20% of the value recorded
during the previous maintenance check or 50% of the value recorded during the
initial installation.
6. Battery temperature measures 15F or 8C greater than the average of all other
batteries in the same cabinet Replace battery.
Important! When replacing a failed battery, replace all batteries in the same string
unless the other batteries are less than two year old and test good (above 95%
capacity).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

Required tools

The following tools are needed to repair an EZBFo Fan assembly.

Tyco Electronics (AMP), connector contact extractor tool: Part number 305183 or
1804030-1.
Phillips-head screwdriver

Silicone RTV Sealant

Personal risk

Anytime you work around batteries:

Do not smoke, light matches or cause sparks while working near batteries
Remove rings, metal watchbands and jewelry before working near batteries

Do not place tools or metal objects on batteries

Use insulated tools when working near batteries

Ensure proper ventilation for any build up of battery gases by waiting 10 minutes
after opening of the battery cabinet door.

Procedure

Perform the following procedure to repair the EZBFo Battery Cabinet fan assembly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before opening the EZBFo Battery Cabinet, if you hear the fan running the wiring is
correct. There is no need to continue with this procedure. If the fan is not running,
open the front door and locate the three pin connector for the fan on the front door.
See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-6

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unplug the connector and remove the two screws that hold together the two halves of
the strain relief at the rear of the connector. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Determine if the fan wiring is correct or incorrect. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-8

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If incorrect, use the pin extractor tool to remove the black wire (Pin1) and the red wire
(Pin2) from the connector. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the contact on the red wire into Position 1 of the connector and the contact
on the black wire into Position 2. Then apply a small amount of silicone RTV sealant
as shown. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-10

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reinstall the two halves of the strain relief to the rear of the connector with the two
screws. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before reconnecting the fan, locate the end on the fan control thermostat cable
assembly coming from the radio cabinet. Disconnect the connectors and measure the
voltage between pin 1 and pin 2 on the connector from the radio cabinet. Voltage
should measure approximately +27 VDC. Plug the fan connector directly to the cable
coming from the radio cabinet to by pass the thermostat. Verify the fan operates.
Disconnect the fan connector and reconnect all connections to the original positions as
at the start of this procedure. See the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-12

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-2: Repair EZBFo Fan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following notes refer to the table above.

1. Note 1: Installer: Please return completed form to your Installation Supervisor.
2. Note 2: Installation Supervisor: Please collect updated EZBFo serial numbers into
single spreadsheet and forward to: jaolivieri@alcatel-lucent.com
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat Exchanger

inspect and clean
Purpose

This procedure is used to inspect and clean the outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat
Exchangers during semiannual preventive maintenance cycles.
When the outside half of the heat exchanger is clogged the inside air that is circulated
through the door is not cooled resulting in overheating. This is more prevalent in
6-sector.3-carrier sites. Usually, when the site is clogged there is little or no airflow out
of the top vent. Checking airflow should become a semiannual PM for the 9228
Macro.
Check airflow

Perform the following procedure to check for proper airflow through the outdoor 9228
Macro front Heat Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Visually check the lower intake vents on the front and rear heat exchangers for dirt and
debris.

If there is adequate air flow through the top exhaust vents, continue with this
procedure.
If there is little or no air flow through the top exhaust vents, continue with the
following procedure, Clean front heat exchanger bug screens (p. 24-14), for the
front heat exchanger, or for the rear heat exchanger.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make note of the condition of the heat exchangers and repeat maintenance check in 6
months.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure completed.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Clean front heat exchanger bug screens

Perform the following procedure to clean the external bug screens on the 9228 Macro
front Heat Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove three screws from both top and bottom bug screens and slide the screens off
the heat exchanger as shown in the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-14

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris
from the screen.
If debris is still clogging the bug screen, a citrus based surfactant, such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner", can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to
ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby.
Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set bug screens aside and continue with the following procedure, Remove lower fan
tray (p. 24-15).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Remove lower fan tray

Perform the following procedure to remove the lower fan tray in the front Heat
Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open front door of the 9228 Macro cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate and disconnect the power cable from the Heat Exchanger Controller as shown
in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove screws from across the top and bottom of the back cover on the back of the
Heat Exchanger, and remove cover, as shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate and disconnect fan tray connector as shown in the following figure. Store
connector as shown.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-16

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove four screws from the corners of the mounting plate and rotate right side down
slightly to pull fan tray out of Heat Exchanger as shown in previous figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the fan tray aside and continue with the following procedure, Wash out front Heat
Exchanger fins (p. 24-17)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Wash out front Heat Exchanger fins

Perform the following procedure to wash out the front Heat Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Clean the Heat Exchanger fins with one of the following techniques:
Pouring 5-6 gallons of water from side-to-side through the top exhaust vent washing
out the fins. The water will pour out of the bottom of the exchanger.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a hand-pumped pressure washer, example shown, spray wash the exchanger as
shown in the following figure. Spray wash from the top and bottom of the exchanger.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

With a dry cloth or compressed air dry out the vent and fan tray area. Let air dry for 2
hours.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-18

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Continue with the following procedure, Re-install Fay Tray (p. 24-19), to reinstall
fan tray and bug screens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Re-install Fay Tray

Perform the following procedure to wash out the re-install the Fay Tray and close up
the front Heat Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide Fay Tray back inside Heat Exchanger. Secure with previously removed screws as
shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect the Fan Tray cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-position back cover and secure with the previously removed screws from across the
top and bottom of the cover, as shown in the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Locate and reconnect the power cable to the Heat Exchanger Controller as shown in
the following figure. Verify that the fan is working.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Slide the screens back onto the Heat Exchanger and secure with the previously
removed screws as shown in the following figure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-20

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-3: Outdoor 9228 Macro front Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat Exchanger

inspect and clean
Purpose

This procedure is used to inspect and clean the outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat
Exchanger during semiannual preventive maintenance cycles.
When the inside of the heat exchanger is clogged the inside air that is circulated
through the door is not cooled resulting in overheating. This is more prevalent in
6-sector.3-carrier sites. Usually, when the site is clogged there is little or no airflow out
of the top vent. Checking airflow should become a semiannual PM for the 9228
Macro.
Check airflow

Perform the following procedure to check for proper airflow through the outdoor 9228
Macro rear Heat Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Visually check the lower intake vents on the front and rear heat exchangers for dirt and
debris.

If there is adequate air flow through the top exhaust vents, continue with this
procedure.
If there is little or no air flow through the top exhaust vents, continue with the
following procedure, Remove rear heat exchanger (p. 24-22), for the front heat
exchanger, or for the rear heat exchanger.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Make note of the condition of the heat exchangers and repeat maintenance check in 6
months.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure completed.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remove rear heat exchanger

Perform the following procedure to remove the 9228 Macro rear Heat Exchanger.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Turn screws 1/4 turn to detach rear Heat Exchanger as shown in the following figure.
Disconnect fan power cable before pulling exchanger completely away from cabinet.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-22

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lay exchanger on a flat surface and remove screws holding exchanger cover on as
shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a plastic bristle brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris
from the screens and cover (inside and outside). Lay aside when finished.
If debris is still clogging the screens, a citrus based surfactant, such as "Goo Gone
Patio and Furniture Cleaner", can be used to clean the screen. Be sure to remove the
screen away from the cell and carefully test the product on a small section first to

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ensure that it does not damage the finish. Follow the directions provided by the
manufacture and avoid contaminating other parts of the cell or other equipment located
nearby.
Important! Use protective gloves and splash goggles when spraying screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspect and clean all exterior surfaces and fins of the exchanger with a plastic bristle
brush (McMaster Carr P/N 7080T83), clean any visible debris as necessary. Take care
not to damage the Heat Exchanger fins.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If the fins cannot be cleaned with a brush, continue with Wash out rear Heat
Exchanger fins (p. 24-24).

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wash out rear Heat Exchanger fins

Perform the following procedure to wash out the rear Heat Exchanger fins.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Clean the Heat Exchanger fins with one of the following techniques:
Pour 1-2 gallons of water through the fins as shown in the following figure. Rotate
exchanger 180 and pour water through fins again. The water will pour out of the
bottom of the fins. Repeat as necessary.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-24

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using a hand-pumped pressure washer, spray wash the exchanger fins as shown in the
following figure. Rotate exchanger 180 and spray water through fins again. The water
will pour out of the bottom of the fins. Repeat as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

With a dry cloth or compressed air, dry out the vent and fan tray area. Let air dry for 2
hours.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Continue with the following procedure, Re-install rear Heat Exchanger (p. 24-26), to
reinstall fan tray and bug screens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
24-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Other types of maintenance

Procedure 24-4: Outdoor 9228 Macro rear Heat

Exchanger inspect and clean

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Re-install rear Heat Exchanger

Perform the following procedure to re-install the rear Heat Exchanger.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lay exchanger on a flat surface, lay cover over exchanger, and secure with screws
previously removed from cover as shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Possible rear Heat Exchanger near rear of cabinet, reconnect fan power cable, hold
exchanger against cabinet and turn screws 1/4 turn to attach rear Heat Exchanger to
cabinet as shown in the following figure.

END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

24-26

Part IV: Configuration

management

Overview
Purpose

This chapter reviews the procedures necessary to perform configuration management

on an Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9218 Macro or 9218 Macro HD. These procedures
include: initialization of the base station, Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) updates, and
growth and degrowth (removal) of software components. These procedures are used
when adding components and carriers to a base station, or when changing the cell site
configuration.
Contents
Chapter 25, Security management

25-1

Chapter 26, Before you begin

26-1

Chapter 27, Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

27-1

Chapter 28, Growth procedures

28-1

Chapter 29, Degrowth procedures

29-1

Chapter 30, Voice interface DS0 functionality

30-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IV-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

25

Security management
25

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes the Restrict Root Login (RRL) and Role-Based Access Control
(RBAC) features and their impact on CDMA Networks for non-privileged users.
Contents
Feature description - Restrict Root Login Phase 1: RBAC Roles and
Centralized User Account Management for MM-APs (FID 13003.2)

25-2

Enabling RRL

25-3

CDMA network login with RRL

25-4

Relevant documentation

25-5

RRL and RBAC feature summary

25-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
25-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Security management

Feature description - Restrict Root Login Phase 1: RBAC

Roles and Centralized User Account Management for
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MM-APs (FID 13003.2)

Feature description - Restrict Root Login Phase 1: RBAC

Roles and Centralized User Account Management for
MM-APs (FID 13003.2)
As part of the overall Alcatel-Lucent security offering to meet customer security
requirements and industry best practices, the feature provides privilege minimization
and separation with the implementation of Role Based Access Control (RBAC) and
centralized user account management for Alcatel-Lucent wireless networks. As the
initial phase of this implementation, the feature delivers the RBAC profiles and
provides centralized user account management capabilities for MM-APs. Specifically,
providing the following functionality:

Create the following RBAC roles for human user access on the MM-APs:
Security Administrator

Systems Administrator

Application Administrator
Support non-privileged individual user accounts on the MM-APs that can be used
to identify individual users for logging and access control purposes.
Support the ability to assign RBAC roles to the newly created individual user
accounts. Technicians can use individual user accounts for login and then acquire
role-based privileges to perform their specific job functions. The intent is to reduce
the need to login as root or to acquire full root privileges.
Provide a tool centrally located on the OMP to enable customers to add, modify,
and delete user accounts uniformly across all MM-APs, and to enable customers to
manage the passwords for these user accounts as well as for the root account and
RBAC role accounts on the MM-APs.
Alcatel-Lucent has reserved a certain UID range for creation of individual user
accounts via centralized user account management tool provided by the feature. In
order to enable the customer to identify any potential conflict of existing user
accounts with the reserved UID range, a tool is provided for customers to check if
any user accounts with UID falling into this reserved UID range and report such
UIDs to customers for mitigation of the identified UID conflict.

In the scope of the feature, MM-AP includes FMM-AP (both diskful and satellite AP),
MMCv1-AP, and MMCv2-AP.
All customer-visible tools and procedures that were executed with root privileges are
now under RBAC control whenever possible. The customer-visible tools/procedures are
those that are documented in customer documentation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

25-2

Security management

Enabling RRL

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enabling RRL
RC/V secctrl form

Important! The Security Administrator has the ability to enable RRL.

Check with the Security Administrator for the status on RRL. With Release 32.0, RRL
is enabled through the RC/V secctrl form, RBAC and Centralized Account
Management for MM-AP field, If this field is set to no, logging into the OMP and
MM-APs is the same as in Release 31.0.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
25-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Security management

CDMA network login with RRL

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CDMA network login with RRL

Network login

Wherever the procedures within this document ask the user to log into the OMP or an
MM-AP as root, the login steps have changed. When the RRL feature is enabled, the
user must initially log in using their personal login and password. Then to use certain
tools, on MM-AP, the user must use su rolename, not su - rolename. On OMP,
the user should use su - to login as rmmsecad.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network RRL and RBAC Feature Description,
401-662-119, for a list of MM-AP tools that can be used from the rsysadm and
rappadm login accounts.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

25-4

Security management

Relevant documentation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Relevant documentation
Non-privileged users

Feature information specific to non-privileged users (Application Administrator) is

detailed in the document, Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network RRL and RBAC Feature
Description, 401-662-119, and provides the following information:

Prerequisites for software, hardware, and interface requirements.

RLL and RBAC overviews describing the functionality of each feature.

RBAC Roles/Accounts and Profiles for roles for human and machine accounts,
application, system, security, and license administration, machine accounts, and
rights profiles.
Feature descriptions for FIDs 10737.9, 14295.0, and 13003.2.

Feature interactions between the RRL and RBAC and the described FIDs.

Impact on UNIX scripts/tools (MM-AP and 1xRNC AP) and designated RBAC
roles,

Implementing and activating the RLL and RBAC features is outside the scope of
this document. Refer to Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Centralized Security
Management Security Administration Guide, 401-662-112, for details.
Determine role(s) assigned to your login

Determine tools associated with a given role

Assume a RBAC role

Administer MM AP user password

Privileged users

Feature information specific to privileged users (Security Administrators) are detailed

in the restricted document, Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Centralized Security
Management Security Administration Guide, 401-662-112.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
25-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Security management

RRL and RBAC feature summary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RRL and RBAC feature summary

Overview

The RRL and RBAC features are being introduced into the CDMA Network to provide
security for both 3G1X and 1xEV-DO network elements and to provide traceability of
user actions within the network elements. These features are being introduced in a
phased approach across multiple software releases.
RRL functionality

The main goal of restricting root login is to support an operational environment where:

each person logs into to the system using his/her own account (not root/onexev
account) and acquires a limited set of privileges to perform assigned operations,
administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P), and
using the root/onexev accounts to log into the system is restricted to console
port or disabled completely.
Note that the onexev account can only be disabled completely and cannot be
restricted since it is a machine account.

Avoiding using the root/onexev accounts for everyday activities also reduces the
risk of pilot error, and allows a meaningful audit trail. The Restrict Root Login features
address the Least Privilege Security Principal in ANSI T1.276, and the Access Control
and Non-Repudiation security services in ITU-T X.800.
However, many of the OAM&P commands, utilities, and scripts used by service
provider maintenance personnel require privilege user to run in order to add, modify,
or delete system level objects such as configuration files, drivers etc. Some of them
need remote command execution (rsh, remsh, ssh), or remote file copy (rcp/scp)
capabilities to complete the task. To grant non-privilege users the ability to run
privilege commands, the Solaris Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) capability is used.
RBAC functionality

RBAC was introduced in Solaris 8. Using RBAC, users can be given privileges on a
per-command basis. RBAC allows organizing privileged commands into rights
profiles for assignment to specific individuals according to their job needs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

25-6

Security management

RRL and RBAC feature summary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The basic concept of RBAC consists of the following components:

Users these are the logins people use to access the system. Root account is a user
with user id (uid) equals to 0.

Roles these are configured just like users are, however one cannot log into the
system directly as a role. User logs into the system using the user account then
assumes the role by issuing su command and password. Only users that are
given the permission to assume a particular role can assume the role.
Rights profiles these are configuration files that collect a list of commands,
authorizations and uid, effect uid (euid), and/or group ID (gid) when commands are
executed through RBAC. The user privilege is temporarily adjusted when uid, euid,
and group ID are changed for the duration of executing the command. Rights
profiles are assigned to roles or users.

Without RBAC, a user would need to either log into the system as root/onexev
directly, or as an individual and then su to root/onexev. Either way it means
root/onexev password is known by many people, creating a major security gap.
With RBAC, a user logs into the system using their individual account, then to su to
the role for the specific OAM&P tasks. User assumes a role without needing to know
root/onexev password, and is only allowed to execute a pre-defined set of
commands with special privilege.
Important! Alcatel-Lucent does not support customers modifying or deleting the
pre-defined rights profiles.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
25-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

26

Before you begin

26

Overview
Purpose

This chapter describes reference material for the configuration management procedures.
Contents
References

26-2

Translations

26-4

Configuration options

26-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
26-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before you begin

References

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

References
Overview

Before you undertake growth or degrowth procedures, check that the configuration and
cabling requirements that are listed in this section have been met. Check that all
interfaces and related documentation is available, and that all systems and
documentation are up-to-date.
Assumptions

It is assumed that the following requirements have been met:

If installing a new base station, a vacant cell (RCS) number has been identified by
the customer.
If adding components to an existing base station, the base station is currently
running.

The pair of application processors that contain the new RCS are already integrated
into the APC.

The DS1 spans on the application processor and the 5ESS Switch have already
been configured.

All circuit packs have been installed.

Any additional DS1 lines that are needed have been run to the cabinet, and
required components have been added at the 5ESS Switch.
The following Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) forms already exist: ecp, iun, link,
apeqp, cgsa, cdhfl, cdhnl, and fci.

Required interfaces

The following interfaces are used for the APC growth procedures.

UNIX RTR Shell (or access through the OMP), for the following databases: MSC
RC/V and MSC RC/V Equipment Configuration Data (ECD)

5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) Supplemental Line Trunk Work Station
(SLTWS), for access to the 5ESS Switch RC/V

Element Management System (EMS), for configuration of managed objects and

command execution from one of the following: EMS Graphical User Interface
(EMS GUI) or Command Line Interpreter (CLI)
APC Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT), to control application processor module
power and execute application processor platform-level commands using:
Emergency Interface (EI) and the Console Program (QmodemPro)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

26-2

Before you begin

References

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration Management reference documents

Refer to the following Alcatel-Lucent documents for detailed reference information.

Table 26-1

Configuration Management reference documents

Topic

Refer to document

RC/V forms used in

these growth/degrowth
procedures

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Database Update Manual,

401-610-036

Command line formats

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

MM-AP operation and

maintenance

Alcatel-Lucent 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processor

Cluster Operations, Administration, and Maintenance,
401-710-201

RCS growth and

software updates

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Radio Cluster Server

Operations, Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-102

Individual component
installation

Instructions provided with kit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
26-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before you begin

Translations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Translations
Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) forms

The MSC maintains a database that contains equipment configuration data, call
processing configuration data, and subscriber data. This data is managed through
translations, known as the RC/V feature. This feature allows the user to make changes
to the data from a central location, instead of having to be at the cell site.
Reference

For more information, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Database Update
Manual, 401-610-036.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

26-4

Before you begin

Configuration options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuration options
Supported configurations for 9218 Macro

A 9218 Macro site supports the configurations listed below.

1-3 sector, 1-4 carrier (indoor)

1-3 sector, 1-6 carrier (outdoor)

Adjunct to a Modular Cell 1.0 - 3.0 (now 9218 Macro)

Supported configurations for 9218 Macro HD

An 9218 Macro HD frame supports:

1-3 sector, 1-6 carrier (indoor)

Outdoor 9218 Macro configuration with integrated power

The following figure shows some of the configurations possible with the outdoor 9218
Macro with integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
26-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before you begin

Configuration options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

26-6

Before you begin

Configuration options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Outdoor 9218 Macro configuration without integrated power

The following figure shows some of the configurations possible with the outdoor 9218
Macro without integrated power.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
26-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Before you begin

Configuration options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indoor 9218 Macro configurations

The following figure shows some of the configurations possible with the indoor 9218
Macro.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

26-8

Before you begin

Configuration options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Indoor 9218 Macro configurations with mixed frame

The following figure shows some of the configurations possible with the indoor mixed
frame 9218 Macro.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
26-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

27

27
Initialize
base station and
update non-volatile
memory

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides information on base station initialization and Non-Volatile

Memory (NVM) updates.
NVM download

The activity of downloading software images from the Application Processor or RMT
and storing the image in FFS of the base station component is known as NVM
download or software download.
Contents
Base station initialization or RCS reboot process

27-2

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update process

27-4

Procedure 27-1: Update NVM

27-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
27-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Base station initialization or RCS reboot process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Base station initialization or RCS reboot process

Overview

The initialization of the 9218 Macro includes the reset of the radio controller and all
associated circuit packs, the reload of appropriate generics to the radios, and the
establishment of signaling links between the RCS and the base station.
Component hardware initialization failures are recorded in each specific components
NVM.
Command format

To complete a manual initialization, use the restart command to reboot the RCS
(restart:rcs a) or perform a stable clear on the base station (init:cell a:sc).
When the restore command and/or stable clear procedures are used, the initialization
time starts with the time stamp on the ROP and ends with the time stamp that indicates
the completion of the initialization.
Initialization process

The 9218 Macro initialization and bootstrap procedures involve the following actions.
1. Reset the 9218 Macro.
2. Establish the signaling link with the RCS.
3. Perform local initialization for the URC.
4. Reset and initialize the radios.
5. Update the NVM of the radios.
6. Reach the normal operating stage (ready for call processing).
URC initialization

Upon power-up, or as the result of a power cycle or reset, the URC performs
initialization functions. Upon successful completion of the initialization process, the
URC is in its Power-on, IDLE state. The URC has successfully booted itself, and is
capable of communicating via the signaling link to either the RCS or the RMT.
UCR initialization

Upon power-up, or as the result of a power cycle or reset, the UCR performs a Board
Level Self Test (BLST), boots on to its NVM image, and establishes communication
with the RCS via the URC.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

27-2

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Base station initialization or RCS reboot process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Role of the signaling link during the initialization process

The signaling link is used by the URC to respond to a message (either from the RCS
or the RMT) that will specify which NVM image to load from the NVM file area. The
URC loads and executes that image if available, or reports an error back after the boot
generic has been loaded to the requesting RCS.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
27-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update process

Overview

A complete executable image (or set of images) of the current software generic is
stored locally at the base station in an NVM area. An executable image of the NVM
software is also loaded into executable memory (RAM) on individual circuit packs.
Definitions

Active generic - The active generic is the one currently in use by the base station or
RCS. The active generic cannot be deleted from the database.
Alternate generic - Alternate generics are loaded in the database as back-ups.
RCS boot or reboot - An RCS boot or reboot restarts the entire RCS. This should be
done if a new generic is available for the RCS, as well as for all associated base
stations.
Base station initialization - Base station initialization performs a stable clear on just a
single base station. This should be done if only the base station-specific portion of the
generic has changed.
Example of generic structure

An NVM generic is similar to the following:

Fxxxxxx.vv

xxxxxx = RCS generic

vv = Cell site-specific generic

NVM update process

The update is done in the following stages:

1. The first stage transfers the images from the RCS or RMT to the URC.
2. The second stage occurs automatically as part of the initialization and downloads
these images to the CMUs, UCRs, and CTU from the URC.
Once the generic version string is sent to the base station, the base station checks a
local file system to see if it has all of the NVM files associated with the generic. One
of two things will occur:

If the versions are compatible, the base station reboots onto the required generic.

If the versions are not compatible, the RCS marks the URC associated with the
base station as out-of-service and reboots onto the boot generic

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

27-4

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The operator can bring an out-of-service base station back into service in one of two
ways:

Perform an NVM download procedure for the required generic and restore the base
station.
Instruct the base station to boot from a good generic already contained on the base
station.

Command format

To download a new generic image to a CDM, use:

send:cell a,cdm b, generic c

Advantages of base station storage

The storage of the images locally in non-volatile form allows a base station to be
booted faster than if software were to be downloaded from the application processor as
part of each base station initialization event. This minimizes overall cell site downtime,
and downtime on an individual carrier basis.
Downtime is also minimized because NVM is used only for storage purposes, while
ordinary RAM is used for the actual execution of software.
NVM update characteristics

New images are downloaded from the RCS (or via the RMT) when available on a
scheduled basis. NVM images are originally installed via tape onto the OMP-FX, and
then onto the application processors. After the base station boots, the memory image of
each processor in the base station is read by its processor and loaded into RAM for
execution. Passive units, such as filters, do not have their own NVM to store their
memory images, and do not have updatable NVM images.
Available generics

The base station can store three generics of NVM images for call processing: an
active image, an alternate image, and a third image depending on space available.
These images will be kept at the FFS in the URC. The URC load includes NVM
images for the URC, CMUs, and UCRs. The alternate image can be used to test a new
official generic before it is marked official (via RC/V). This enables the service
provider to return to the active generic to ensure continued base station operation with
a known, working generic in the event that a new NVM update does not meet
customer expectations.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
27-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) update process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Role of the signaling link on the NVM process

Downloads to the base station do not require the base station to be out-of-service.
However, the signaling links between the RCS (or RMT) and the base station must be
operational. If no valid generic is in the base station, the boot generic (a special
firmware boot image) is capable of initializing the signaling links and downloading a
new NVM generic.
NVM downloads are performed on the backup signaling link. If the backup signaling
link is down (or not provisioned), the NVM downloaded will use the primary signaling
link, which could impact call processing.
Cell site storage

Within a target URC, the downloaded executables are stored in a special NVM device
called the Flash File System (FFS). The FFS device mimics a hard disk, and in doing
so, supports basic file I/O capabilities (open/close, read/write, compress/uncompress,
create/delete directory, etc.).
Reference

A step-by-step description of the NVM RCS load procedure is covered in

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Radio Cluster Server Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance, 401-710-102.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

27-6

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Procedure 27-1: Update NVM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 27-1: Update NVM

Overview

An NVM generic update can be done for the RCS or for the base station.
Before a new NVM generic can be downloaded to a base station, it must be installed
on the application processor. Refer to Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Radio Cluster
Server Operations, Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-102 for this procedure.
Important! Changes to NVM generics may be service affecting.
It is recommended that changes be made when call volume is low.
Update the cell2 form

Update the cell2 form to enter the new generic into the database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the appropriate cell2 form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter the new generic information into the form.

If

then change fields:

a new RCS generic,

Cell Generic - Version Name

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Cell Site RCS
Revision Number
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Software Revision Number

a change in the cell site portion of the

generic only,

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Cell Site RCS

Revision Number
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Software Revision Number

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the cell2 form.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Download new generic

Use the procedure below to download the new generic to the base station. Perform
these steps from the TIpdunix.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
27-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Procedure 27-1: Update NVM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To view a list of available generics already loaded on the base station, enter:
op:cell a,cdm b, generic

Result: A list of generics available on the system and their characteristics (active, good,
bad, loading, or missing) will be displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To make room on the system, delete an obsolete generic. Enter:

del:cell a,cdm b, generic Fxxxxxx.vv

Result: The system will respond with a repeat of the command and a response that the
deletion has been completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To download the new generic, enter:

send:cell a,cdm b, generic Fxxxxxx.vv

Result: The system will respond with a repeat of the command and a response that the
download has been completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To confirm the download, view a list of available generics on the base station. Enter
the command:
op:cell a,cdm b, generic

Result: A list of generics available on the system and their characteristics (active, good,
bad, loading, or missing) will be displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restart the RCS or initialize the base station to complete the update.
If

Then

a new RCS generic,

restart the RCS. Enter:

restart:rcs a

a = RCS number
a change in the cell site portion of the
generic only,

initialize the base station. Enter:

init:cell b:sc

b = cell site number

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify results.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

27-8

Initialize base station and update non-volatile memory

Procedure 27-1: Update NVM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The system should respond with verification that the boot phase has been
completed, and SDP 2131 and OMC-RAN GUI Signaling Path View should display the
specified RCS and associated base stations as in-service.
END OF STEPS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
27-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

28

Growth procedures
28

Overview
Purpose

Important! Forms pptg and cmodpptm do not apply to IPBH cells.

This chapter describes the software procedures required to grow a 9218 Macro and
RCS. The growth procedures are listed in sequential order, and are organized by RC/V
form name. The RC/V forms to be updated are as follows:

cell2

cell3g

cmodeqp

rrheqp

btseqp

cmodpptm (for each packet pipe)

fci (for each face)

ceqface (for each face)

pptg

ecp

General order of growth procedures

The typical sequence of growth procedures is as follows.

1. Verify installation of hardware.
2. Access apxrcv to update the required RC/V forms.
This step does not apply to IPBH cells. Create the RCS at the EMS CLI.
3. Restore the RCS at the EMS CLI.
4. Restore the base station to service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table format

The tables that accompany the following procedures provide mandatory values when
appropriate, and ranges with default values (if available) in parentheses for
customer-specific information.
Important! Before beginning growth or degrowth procedures, specify the desired
end carrier/sector configuration.
Before you begin

Ensure that the following steps have been completed before beginning to grow a
CDMA base station or CDMA distributed baseband unit (BBU).
1. The 2130 Status Display Page (SDP) and OMC-RAN GUI BTS Overview has been
reviewed and shows that cell y is unequipped.
2. Verify that the cell is unequipped. At the EMS CLI, enter: op:cell y
3. The hardware for the base station is installed and powered up.
Contents
Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

28-3

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

28-24

Carrier assignment and activation

28-28

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the network

28-30

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-2

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

Component information

If only installing a single component (such as UCR, TxAMP, LNA, CMUs, MCA, or
CTU), refer to the descriptive information before each procedure to determine which
forms and fields need to be updated.
Important! TxAMP, MCA, LNA, and CTU information is entered on the
cmodeqp form. UCR, CMU, and URC information is entered on the btseqp form.
OCM-II information is entered on the rrheqp form.
Access RC/V database

Use the AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access menu, located under the AUTOPLEX
OMP Technician menu, or enter the following command from an MSC UNIX/RTR
terminal to access the MSC RC/V subsystem:
apxrcv

Important! RC/V form modifications cannot be completed unless the iun and
apeqp forms have been inserted for the application processor pair that will support
the RCS.
Reference

For detailed information on specific fields and values in the RC/V forms, refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Database Update Manual, 401-610-036
Insert cell2 form

Create a cell2 form for the new cell to define cell site information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

cell2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

Cell Site Number

1-max cells

Cellular Geographic Service Area

1-16 (1)

Switch Identification

1-16 (1)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field name

Value

CDMA Switch Identification

1-16

Cell Site Status

e or g

Notes:

1.

The base station can be put in a growth state so that diagnostics can be run before the
base station is equipped.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 2, under Frame Technology Type: (Controller) Frame 0 enter:

rcs_mod

The additional growth frames should contain a value of u, unequipped.

Important! This step does not apply to IPBH cells. On screen 3, for the CDMA
Packet Pipe Trunk Group field, enter a value from 1-2000.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 4, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

Cell Generic - Version Name

alphanumeric sequence

-R5 Compatible

Flexent RCS Revision Number

0-99

Flexent Software - Revision Number

0-99

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 10, under Cell Site Optional Features, enter y for the CDMA field. Enter y
(if PCS cell site) or n (cellular or HD cell site) for the PCS CDMA field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 11, under Cell Site Optional Features (cont.), enter y for the CDMA PP 16
field if the number of DS0 channels in the cmodpptm form is equal to 1 or greater
than 8, or n if not. Enter y for the CDMA PPOPTMT field if the CDMA PP 16 field is
y, or enter y or n.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 18, under CDMA Cell Site Information only, enter in form the CRC
Overload Class (%) (allowed values 50-95).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-4

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 23, under CDMA Carrier, enter information into the Channel Number
(allowed values 1-1260) and Band Class (1900 for PCS or 850 for cellular or HD)
fields.
Result A Warning:Insert PPTG xxx with Switch ID y message may

appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Enter i to insert the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Insert cell3g form

Create a cell3g form for the new cell to define cell site information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

cell3g
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

Important! For OOS limits, 9218 Macro uses the 3G-1X OOS Limit fields in the
ecp3g and cell3g forms. 9218 Macro does not use the Total OOS limit fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, for CDMA 3G1X Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%) and CDMA
3G1X Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%) fields, enter a value from 1 to 100.
The default 3G-1X OOS limit is 100 for major alarms and 49 for minor alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to insert the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert cmodeqp form

Create a cmodeqp form for the new base station. CTU and LNA information is
entered on this form on screen 2, TxAMP information is entered on screen 3, and
MCA information is entered on screen 4. In the tables, c = carrier and s = sector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

cmodeqp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the information below.

Field name

Value

Cell Site Number (base station RCS)

1-max cells

Cell Configuration

1bts_mod

Primary Application Processor

Number

1-8, 11-18, 21-28

Alternate Application Processor

Number

1-8, 11-18, 21-28

CDMA Test Radio Module Status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On Screen 2, enter the information below:

Field name

Value

Routine Diagnostics Enabled

Routine Diagnostics Type

Time of Day for Routine Diagnostics (hr)

0-23 (0)

(min)

0-59 (0)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 3, enter information under RF Test Unit Information to enable or disable

the antenna test. In the RF Antenna Test Enable field enter n to disable or y to enable
the antenna test.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-6

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the antenna test timers in the Time of Day for RF Tests (hr) (allowed values
0-23 (0)) and the Time of Day for RF Tests (min) (allowed values 0-59 (0))
fields. Also set the test interval in the RF Antenna Test Measurement Interval field
(allowed values 10-1440, blank)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 4, enter information under TFU Equipage: Stat to equip the CTUs. Allowed
values are e (for equipped) and u (default value, unequipped).
Num 1 (must be equipped, enter e)
Num 2 (recommended to be equipped, but not required, enter e or u, default is u)
Num 3-8 (must be unequipped, enter u).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Also on screen 4, enter information under TDU Equipage: Stat to equip the TDUs.
Allowed values are e (for equipped) and u (default value, unequipped).
Num 1-8 (equipage varies with configuration).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Also on screen 5, enter information under Rx Amp and TTLNA Equipage: Stat to
equip the LNAs or TTLNAs. Allowed values are e (for equipped) and u (default value,
unequipped).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 6, enter information under MCA Equipage: Stat to equip the MCAs.
Allowed values are e (for equipped) and u (default value, unequipped). Up to 36
TxAMPs can be equipped for the 9218 Macro.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

On screen 7, enter PLAM (PCS), CLAM (cellular), or CLAC (HD) under MCA Equipage:
MCA Type.

Important! Users must know which amplifier types apply to the cell type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Also on screen 7, enter information under Phy Ant. Allowed values are 0-6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Also on screen 8, enter information under Tx Amp Numbers. Allowed values are
1-36. Assign one unique TxAMP per carrier.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

On screen 8, enter information under User Alarm Parameters.

Field name

Value

Eqp

y or n (default is n)

Polarity

0-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

On screen 10, set the contact polarity of the RRH user alarms (up to six) for RRH 1
(perform as applicable).
Screens 10-12 are used to set the contact polarity of the RRH user alarm in the CDMA
Modular Cell Equipage Form. Screen 10 displays alarms for RRH 1 and 2 (see the
following figure), Screen 11 displays alarms for RRH 3 and 4, and Screen 12 displays
alarms for RRH 5 and 6.
Note: User Alarms for RRH 4, 5, and 6 (Screens 11 and 12) are for future
enhancements.

1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
CDMA
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Networks
CDMA MODULAR CELL EQUIPAGE (cmodeqp)
Screen 10 of 14
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
157) RRH 1 User Alarms
160) RRH 2 User Alarms
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
RRH User Eqp Polarity
RRH User Eqp Polarity
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Alarm#
158)
159)
Alarm#
161)
162)
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[1]
1
n
_
[1]
1
n
_
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[2]
2
n
_
[2]
2
n
_
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[3]
3
n
_
[3]
3
n
_
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[4]
4
n
_
[4]
4
n
_
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[5]
5
n
_
[5]
5
n
_
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[6]
6
n
_
[6]
6
n
_
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Enter Review, Change-insert, Validate, screen#, or Print:
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Field name

Value

Eqp

y or n (default is n)

Polarity

0-1 (A value of 0 is defined as logical state High or closed

position; a value of 1 is defined as a logical state Low or

opened position)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-8

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Repeat Step 14 for RRH 3 (Screen 11).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Enter i to insert the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Update ceqface form

Update the ceqface form to define cell equipage face information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

ceqface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter u to initiate the Update operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

Cell Site - Number

1-max cells

-Physical Antenna Face

1-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 8, enter information into the Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index (allowed
values 0-511) field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 10, under Base Assisted Soft Handoff (BAHO):, enter 0.0 into the BAHO
Quality Threshold (dB) field and n into the BAHO Mobile Type fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter u to update the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert rrheqp form

Note: If the following BBUs are not being configured, skip this procedure and
continue with Insert btseqp form (p. 28-13):

9234 Base Station d2U Distributed

9228 Macro Distributed9228 Base Station Macro LP

9222 Micro Distributed

Create an rrheqp form for the Remote Radio Heads (RRHs).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

rrheqp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the Cell Site Number (range 1-500).

1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
CDMA
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 1 of 8
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Cell Site Number............................. *1) 59
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Enter Review, Change-insert, Validate, screen#, or Print:
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 2 (RRH Equipage), enter the following information to configure the RRH
equipage.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-10

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
CDMA
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 2 of 8
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Cell 59
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
3) RRH Equipage:
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Row RRH
RRH RUI RUI RRH PAF Prim Sec Rx Imbl
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Num
Num
Stat Num Asm PAF Unit Ant Ant Thrshld
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
4) @5) @6) @9) @10) 11) 12)
14)
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[1] 1
e
1
1
4
1
1
2
05.0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[2] 2
e
1
1
5
1
1
2
05.0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[3] 3
e
3
1
6
1
1
2
05.0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[4]
4
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[5] 5
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[6] 6
u
_
_
_
_
_
_
____
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Enter Review, Change-insert, Validate, screen#, or Print:
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Field name

Value

RRH Stat

e=equip, g=growth, u=unequip

RUI Num

1-6: (Example: OCM-II in slot 1 and

slot 3)
RUI Asm

1-4: digital shelf identifier (Example:

1=first digital shelf)

RRH PAF

1-6: sectors=1 RRH per sector (PAF

= Primary Antenna Face)

PAF Unit

1-6: default=1 (for future

enhancement)

Pri Ant

1-8: default=1 Tx antenna on RRH

Sec Ant

1-8: default=2 TxRx antenna on RRH

Rx Imbl Thrshold

0.5-15.0 dB in .5 dB steps:

Diversity imbalance alarm threshold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 3 (RRH 1 Carrier Equipage), enter the following information to configure

the RRH carrier equipage.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
CDMA
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Networks
CDMA REMOTE RF HEAD EQUIPAGE (rrheqp)
Screen 3 of 8
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Cell 59
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
29) RRH 1 Carrier Equipage:
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Row Carr Carr Carr Max
RRH Pging Acc Max Acc BCCH FCCCH
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
REACH
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Num Num Chnl Type Pwr
Att Chnls Chnls Chnls Chnls Chnls
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Chnls
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
@30) 33)
34) 35)
36) @37) @38)
39)
40)
41)
42)
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 1] 4
425
1X
05.0 10.0
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 2] 7
500
1X
05.0 10.0
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 3] 10 575
DO
05.0 10.0
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[
4]
__
____
__
____
____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 5] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 6] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 7] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 8] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[ 9] __ ____ __
____ ____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
[10]
__
____
__
____
____
1
1
_
0
0
0
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Enter Review, Change-insert, Validate, screen#, or Print:
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Field name

Value

Carr Num

1-33

Carr Chnl

Carrier Channel

Carr Type

1X or DO

Max Pwr

1.0 32.0 in 0.1 dB increments

RRH Att

0 30 dB in 0.1 dB increments

Pging Chnls

0 1

Acc Chnls

0 6

Max Acc Chnls

2-6 default=blank

BCCH Chnls, FCCCH Chnls, REACH Chnls

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 5 for RRH 2 and RRH 3 Carrier Equipage, Screens 4 and 5.
Note: Screens 6-8 are for future enhancements.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-12

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Insert btseqp form

Create a btseqp form for each new CDM to enter information on URC status,
signaling links, CMU status, and UCR equipage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

btseqp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

Cell Site Number

1-max cells

Assemblage Number

Important! On screen 2, fill the Signaling Link Width field with value supplied
by your company. If in doubt, use the number 1. Note that the AP Signaling Link
information for connections at the AP, and the Digital Module Signaling Link
information for connections at the CDM, do not apply to IPBH cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screens 4 (CDM 1), 8 (CDM 2), and 12 (CDM 3), enter the information to equip
the digital shelves. Screens 4, 7, and 10 are used for ATM Backhaul Information: field
entries. Screens 3, 6, and 9 populate the database with the frame relay/DS1 information
necessary to connect the URC with the MSC.
Field name

Value

CRC Status

Transmission Facility Type

l, s, m

Flexent Software Rev Number

0-99, or default of blank

AP Signaling Link Information for Connections at the AP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field name

Value

Primary AP: DS1

1-4 for 1st generation AP

1-8 for MM-AP
1-24 for T1

DS0

1-31 for E1
1-4 for 1st generation AP;

Alternate AP: DS1

1-8 for MM-AP

1-24 for T1

DS0

1-31 for E1

On screen 6, enter the required information under CDMA Digital Module DS1 Info.
Field name

Value

Status

u or e

Type

cas or ccs (E1); blank (T1)

Data Rate

64 for T1; 64 for E1

On screen 8, enter the required information for Digital Module Signaling Link
Information for Connections at the CDM.
Field name

Value

CRC Primary DS1

1-4

CRC Primary DS0

1-24 (T1); 1-31 (E1 ccs); 1-15, 17-31 (E1 cas)

CRC Alternate DS1

1-2

CRC Alternate DS0

1-24 (T1); 1-31 (E1 ccs); 1-15, 17-31 (E1 cas)

On screens 3, 7, and 11 add Ethernet Backhaul information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 14, enter the required information to equip the CMUs under CDMA
Channel Unit Information. Allowed CCU Status values are e (equipped), u
(unequipped), and g (growth). The CMUs can be placed in a growth state (g) to run
diagnostics before the base station is equipped.
Also assign the CMUs that are equipped to a URC via the CCU CRC field (allowed
values 1-3). All equipped URCs must be assigned at least one CMU.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-14

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Each CMU can be associated with two carriers for 3 sector configurations, 3 carriers
for 2 sector configuration, 6 carriers for 1 sector configuration, 1 carrier for 4, 5, 6
sector configuration. (1-6) in the CCU Carriers field.
For the CMU with CE provisioning feature (CMU-II, CMU-II, CMUIV, CMU-IVB,
CMU-V since R29), CE Max and CE Enable are required.
CMU-Vs have up to 256 CE and 4 ASIC. 64 CEs per ASIC. Supports 6 carrier paths
per ASIC Block for a total of 24 sector-carriers.
Carrier support without Intelligent Antenna (IA Disabled)

1-sector configuration: maximum 6 carriers per ASIC

2-sector configuration: maximum 3 carriers per ASIC

3-sector configuration: maximum 2 carriers per ASIC

4 to 6 sector configurations: 1 carrier per ASIC

Carrier support with Intelligent Antenna (IA Enabled)

1 to 3-sector configuration: 1 carriers per ASIC

4 to 6-sector configuration: Not supported in IA.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 19, enter the required information to equip the UCRs under CBR Equipage.
In the status field, the UCRs can be placed in a growth state (g) to run diagnostics
before the base station is equipped.
Field name

Value

CBR Stat

e, u, or g

For 3-sector configurations, equip 3 UCRs/carrier.

For 2-sector configurations, equip 2 UCRs/carrier.
For 1-sector configurations, equip 1 UCRs/carrier.
CBR CRCs

1-3

MCA Number

1-18

Phy Ant

0-6

Base Class

JTC (PCS), IS95 (cellular

or HD)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 20, update the RXAMPS fields associated with the CBRs with the
assemblage number.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screens 20-26, enter the required information to associate the UCRs with carriers
under CBR Carrier Equipage.
Field name

Value

Carr

1-6

Max Pwr

16 (PCS); 20 (cellular or HD)

Number Paging Channels

0-1

At least 1 channel per sector is recommended to be

on a common carrier.
CBR Atten

0.0-30.0 (PCS or
cellular); 5.5-30.0 (HD)

The Carr Chnl field is populated from the cell2 or cgsa form where carrier numbers
are assigned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Repeat steps 1-8 for each CDM in the base station.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert pptg form

Important! This section does not apply to IPBH cells.

Create a pptg form to define the packet pipe trunk group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

pptg
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

CDMA Switch Identification

1-16 (1)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-16

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field name

Value

Trunk Group Number

1-2000

Cell Site Number

1-max cells

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to insert the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Insert cmodpptm form

Important! This section does not apply to IPBH cells.

Create a cmodpptm form to define the packet pipe trunk member number. Up to 96
packet pipe trunk group members may exist for each base station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

cmodpptm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

CDMA Switch Identification

1-16

Trunk Group Number

1-2000

Trunk Member Number

1-96

Trunk Status

Physical CRC Number

1-3

Logical CRC Number

1-3

DS1 Number

1-2

DS0 Channels

1-24 (T1)
1-31 (E1 with ccs)
1-15, 17-31 (E1 with cas)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Field name

Value

CCU Numbers

1-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to insert the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Assign trunk groups at the 5ESS Switch Master Control Center (MCC)

At the 5ESS Switch MCC, have MSC support assign trunk groups for the base station
by filling out the following forms.
If ...

Then ...

a T1 facility,

enter information into the:

an E1 facility,

5.1 (Trunk Group) and

5.5 (Trunk Member) forms

enter information into the:

4.1 (Trunk Group Number) and

4.3 TRKNR (Trunk Group Number and Member Number) forms

Configure DS0 connection to application processor

Important! This section does not apply to IPBH cells.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the 5ESS Switch MCC, have MSC support configure the primary and alternate
application processors for the application processor/base station DS0 connections.
If ...

Then ...

a T1 facility,

enter information into the 7.11 (Nail-Up and Hairpin

Specification) form

an E1 facility,

enter information into the 6.6 RTPER (Semi-Permanent

Connection) form

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-18

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Insert fci form

Insert the fci form to define the inter-MSC and intra-MSC handoff information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

fci
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to initiate the Insert operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

Cell Site Number

1-max cells

Server Group

Antenna Face Number

1-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 15, under CDMA Principle Neighbor List and screens 16-20 CDMA
Alternate Neighbor List, enter the following data:
Field name

Value

Cell Site

1-max cells

Ant Face

0-6

Pilot PN

0-511

Pri Grp

0-3

Anlg Ant Face

0-6

Eqvl Srv Grp

0-1

Anlg Only Pilot

y/n

Ngbr Conf

0-3

Band Class

1900 (PCS), 850 (cellular or HD)

Hard Handoff Only

y/n

Extended System ID DCS

0-16

Extended System ID ECP

0-15

Extended System ID SYS

1-32767

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 22, under CDMA Directed Handoff Neighbor List, enter the following data:
Field name

Value

Cell Site

1-max cells

Ant Face

0-6

Hard Handoff Only

y/n

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter i to insert the form.

Important! The fci forms for the base stations entered in the neighbor lists must be
updated to include the new base station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-20

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update neighbor fci forms

Update the fci forms for the neighbor cells to enter information about the new base
station into the Neighbor Lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

fci
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter u to initiate the Update operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter the information below to recall the correct form.

Field name

Value

Cell Site Number

1-max cells

Server Group

Antenna Face Number

1-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 22, under CDMA Directed Handoff Neighbor List, enter the following data:
Field name

Value

Cell Site

1-max cells

Ant Face

0-6

Hard Handoff Only

y/n

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter u to insert the form.

Important! Repeat steps 1-4 for each neighbor of the base station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update ecp form

Update the ecp form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the apxrcv prompt, enter:

ecp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter u to initiate the Update operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 1, enter information into the Executive Cellular Processor Identification

field to obtain the correct form.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 39, enter the following data:

Field name

Value

Flexent RCS Forward Power Report

crc

CRC Overload Control

80

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On screen 43, enter information into the Paging Cell Site List (allowed values
1-max cells) field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter u to update the form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Enter < to exit and return to the apxrcv prompt.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update cdhnl/cdhfl forms

Prior to restoring the base station, the appropriate cdhnl/cdhfl forms must be updated
by permitted personnel to account for any RF optimization changes, and to add the
newly created base station to the neighbor list. These forms need to be updated if the
customer wants to support 3G-1x inter-frequency handoff.
Update cell2 form

Update the cell2 form to turn on the CDMA QFAF. Enter y in the CDMA field under
Cell Site Optional Features on screen 10.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-22

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-1: RC/V database updates

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Integrate the base station into the network

To continue integrating the base station into the network, continue on to the next
section, and refer to the following:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Radio Cluster Server Operations, Administration,

and Maintenance, 401-710-102
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

Or, contact technical support at https://wireless.support.lucent.com for information

on:

Creating an RCS
Booting the cell

Performing NVM updates

Diagnostics and testing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

Overview

The 9218 Macro supports both the standard and load sharing configurations. The load
sharing configuration is recommended given the improvement to system reliability.
Standard configuration

The standard configuration of a CDM models that of the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base
station. A URC has a mutually exclusive relationship to specific carriers. If a URC
fails, all carriers associated with that URC are lost. The typical configuration is one
URC per two carriers in a 3-sector configuration.
Standard configuration diagram

The following figure shows a pictorial view of the standard configuration with three
URCs (3 sector, 6 carrier)

When implementing the Standard Configuration it is recommended that the customer

assign every equipped URC to every equipped UCR and ultimately use the carrier to
CMU association to achieve the carrier to URC mapping. This allows for more
flexibility to convert to the Load Sharing Configuration in the future.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-24

Growth procedures

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Standard configuration example

A 4-carrier system requires 8 CMUs (2 CMU per carrier where each CMU has 64
CEs).
For the standard configuration shown in Standard configuration diagram (p. 28-24),
carriers should be assigned as shown in the following table. This example shows the
CMU Carrier/URC assignment for 4-carrier standard configuration.
Table 28-1

Standard CMU/URC configuration

URC #

CMU #

Carrier 1

Carrier 2

URC 1

CMU 1

CMU 2

CMU 3

CMU 4

CMU 5

CMU 6

CMU 7

CMU 8

URC 2

Load sharing configuration

The recommended configuration is Load Sharing. In the Load Sharing configuration,

the URCs share support for all carriers. Only CMUs and packet pipes are dedicated to
a specific URC. UCRs and associated RF components (MCAs/TxAMPs) are shared
across all URCs. If a URC fails, only the CMUs and PPs physically associated with
that URC are lost which translates into a loss of capacity. However, all carriers are still
operational unless all active URCs fail. This configuration is especially desirable to
allow for URCs to share processing since a single URC has the processing capability
to support the equivalent capacity of two fully loaded carriers. In that case, two URCs
can combine to support 3-4 fully loaded carriers and three URCs to support 5-6 fully
loaded carriers.
Load sharing diagram

The following figure shows a pictorial view of the typical load sharing configuration
with three CRCs (3 sector, 6 carrier)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Load sharing example

The following table provides an example of CMU Carrier/URC assignment for

4-carrier load sharing configuration.
Table 28-2

CMU/URC load sharing configuration example

CRC #

CCU #

Carrier 1

Carrier 2

URC 1

CMU 1

CMU 2

CMU 3

CMU 4

CMU 5

CMU 6

CMU 7

CMU 8

URC 2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-26

Growth procedures

Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carrier configuration considerations

The following must be considered when configuring carriers to CMU.

Even distribution of carriers to CMUs

The CMU is assigned to a URC and must support carriers configured on UCR also
assigned to that URC. Carriers that are not supported by UCRs assigned to the
URC can not be supported by CMUs assigned to the URC. This is to ensure a
CMU and UCR carrier assignment is consistent.

For every carrier assigned to a UCR, there must be at least one CMU with that
same carrier assigned to each URC associated with the UCR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-27
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Carrier assignment and activation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carrier assignment and activation

CMU to carrier assignment

In 9218 Macro the CMUs can be assigned up to 2 carriers per board for 3-sector
configurations. This allows for the following advantages.

Improved system reliability

Reduces number of required CMUs.

For more information see Standard Configuration vs. Load Sharing Configuration
(p. 28-24).
CMU-Vs have up to 256 CE and 4 ASIC. 64 CEs per ASIC. Supports 6 carrier paths
per ASIC Block for a total of 24 sector-carriers.
Carrier support without Intelligent Antenna (IA Disabled)

1-sector configuration: maximum 6 carriers per ASIC

2-sector configuration: maximum 3 carriers per ASIC

3-sector configuration: maximum 2 carriers per ASIC

4 to 6 sector configurations: 1 carrier per ASIC

Carrier support with Intelligent Antenna (IA Enabled)

1 to 3-sector configuration: 1 carriers per ASIC

4 to 6-sector configuration: Not supported in IA.

CMU-IVB and CMU-V CE capacity can be added without changing the equipage by
adding a license with increased quantity. After a license is updated, a manual restore is
required to activate the additional capacity.
Carrier activation

The Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9218 Macro UCR transmits and receives up to 3 carriers in
a 5-MHz band. Carrier activation is controlled through payment of Right To Use
(RTU) fees on the radio which is managed by the QFAF. As carriers are configured in
the btseqp form the count in the QFAF file is adjusted up or down depending on the
configuration change and the number of activations purchased. This is managed on an
MSC level.
This provides flexibility such that the service provider can activate only the carriers
needed and later add further carriers.
Example

For example, assume that all carriers are activated on all sectors of a 3 sector, 3 carrier
Modcell 4.0. This will count as 9 activations of the feature.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-28

Growth procedures

Carrier assignment and activation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Carrier assignment criteria

When assigning UCR carriers the system will check that you stay within the carrier
limit. The following list shows the other criteria to follow when adding carriers.

If the UCR is equipped at least one CBR CDMA Carrier Number must be
non-blank.
The associated CDMA Carrier Numbers are defined in the CELL2 or CGSA
database.
Each carrier assigned to the UCR must be unique.

Each carrier on all UCRs with the same PAF must be unique.

At least one CMU supporting the same Carrier Number must be equipped on each
URC assigned to a UCR.

If the UCR PAF is 0, all equipped UCRs must have distinct carrier numbers.
Note: When carrier information is changed, the associated URCs and URCs need to
be removed and restored so that the new carrier information can be used by the
cell.
Without doing this, the cell will continue to use the old carrier information until
either a remove/restore of the URC and UCs/URCs is done a stable clear of the
cell is performed.
To unequip a URC in a OneBTS Cell, the customer must remove the URC first.

Carrier activation procedure

Find the procedure to add carriers at Step 1 of Insert btseqp form (p. 28-13).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-29
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the

network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the network

Initiate a Command Line Interface (CLI) session

Initiate a Command Line Interface (CLI) session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click the mouse in the blue workspace of the OMP-FX console.
Result A drop-down menu appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select AUTOPLEX OMP Technician Window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Element Management System.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Command Line Interface (CLI).

Result The system should respond with an EMS CLI prompt.

Enter <Ctrl> d to exit from the EMS CLI back to the OMP Technician Window.
E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify proper RCS and base station generic software

Verify that the proper RCS and base station generic software has been loaded on the
primary and alternate application processors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For the primary application processor, enter:

op:ap x,version
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Repeat the process for the alternate application processor. Enter:

op:ap y,version

Result The desired RCS will not be present until it is created.

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View list of all equipped RCSs and DS1s

Important! Note that DS1s do not apply to IPBH RCSs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-30

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the

network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

View the list of all equipped RCSs and DS1s on the primary and alternate application
processors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify that the new RCS number does not already exist on the primary application
processor. Enter:
op:ap x,status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Repeat the process for the secondary application processor. Enter:

op:ap y,status

Important! Repeat the above commands for all application processors on the
system.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Download generic software

Download the generic software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the EMS CLI, enter:

send: cell a,cdm b, generic c
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Create RCS

Important! This section does not apply to IPBH cells.

Perform the following procedure to create the RCS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure the RC/V rcslink form

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the EMS CLI, enter:

create:rcs y
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify that the RCS has been created. Enter:

op:ap y,status
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-31
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the

network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Restore RCS

Restore the RCS to service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the EMS CLI, enter:

rst:rcs y

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Diagnose the hardware

Diagnose the hardware.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For all URCs, enter:

dgn:cell y,cdm x, urc
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For all CMUs, enter:

dgn:cell y,cdm x, cmu y
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For all UCRs, enter:

dgn:cell y,cdm x, urc y
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For all CTUs, enter:

dgn:cell y,ctu x

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update RC/V forms to equip base station (if in growth state)

Important! The cfgcellssh tool needs to be run before the cell inits. See topic on
the cfgcellssh tool: cfgcellssh tool (p. 15-23).
If the base station was placed in the growth state for diagnostics purposes, update the
RC/V forms to equip the base station.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the value in the Cell Site Status field on the cell2 form to e if the value had
been previously entered as g.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

28-32

Growth procedures

Procedure 28-2: Integrate the base station into the

network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

On the btseqp form, update the values for the CCU Status and CBR Stat fields to e
if g had been previously entered.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

Review SDPs

Review SDPs to ensure that the ending configurations are as shown below.
SDP command

End configuration

SDP 2130

Cell Y equipped

SDP 2131,Y

CDMs equipped

SDP 2132,Y

Call Processing Allowed

SDP 2136,Y

TDU, TFU and TxAMP active

SDP 2138,Y,Z

CRC, CE, PP, and CBR active

SDP 2139,Y,Z

CCU and CE active

Notes:

1.

CTU = TFU

2.

URC = CRC

3.

CMU = CCU

4.

UCR = CBR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
28-33
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

29

Degrowth procedures
29

Overview
Purpose

The chapter provides procedures to a 9218 Macro.

General order of degrowth procedures

Elements are usually removed in the reverse order from that in which they were
grown. The typical sequence of degrowth procedures is as follows.
1. Remove the base station from service.
2. Important! >This step does not apply to the IPBH cells. Delete the RCS at the
EMS CLI.
3. Update RC/V forms for the cell site using apxrcv.
4. Remove the hardware and verify degrowth.
Contents
Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station

29-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
29-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Degrowth procedures

Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station

Overview

This section provides the procedures to degrow a CDMA Base Station.

Reference

Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Database Update Manual, 401-610-036

for details on the fields and values required in the RC/V forms.
Delete the RCS

Important! This section does not apply to the IPBH cells.

Delete the RCS at the EMS CLI.
Reference

Refer to the following documents for details on this command:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

Before you begin

Important! Note that the packet pipes do not apply to the IPBH cells.
Before updating or deleting the RC/V forms, use the rmv: command to remove the
base station and packet pipes from service.
Refer to the following documents for details on using the rmv: command:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Input Messages, 401-610-055

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Network Output Messages, 401-610-057

Update the required forms

Access apxrcv and update/delete the following forms as required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the cell2 form to turn the CDMA QFAF off. Enter n in the CDMA field under
Cell Site Optional Features on screen 10.
Important! This step does not apply to IPBH cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete the cmodpptm forms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

29-2

Degrowth procedures

Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete references to the T1/E1 facilities being degrown on the 5ESS Switch Recent
Change/Verify forms.
Note: This step does not apply to IPBH cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete the pptg form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: If the following BBUs are not being configured, skip this procedure and
continue with Step 6:

9234 d2U Distributed

9228 Macro Distributed

9222 Micro Distributed

Delete the rrheqp form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the btseqp forms for each sector. Enter u in the CRC Status, CCU Status,
and CBR Status fields to unequip the URC and its associated components. Enter for
MCA Number, Max Pwr, CDMA Carr, CBR Atten, and Base Class to null out these
fields related to the UCR. After the form has been updated, re-enter each btseqp form
and delete it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete the cmodeqp form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update the cdhnl/cdhfl forms to remove references to the base station being degrown.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update fci forms for neighbor cells to null out the information about the base station
being degrown on the CDMA Directed Handoff Neighbor List.
Important! The base station being degrown must be removed from the fci forms
for all neighbor cells before the fci form for the base station itself can be deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Delete the fci form.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Delete the cell2 form.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ND OF STEPS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
29-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Degrowth procedures

Procedure 29-1: Degrow a base station

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete the RCS at the EMS CLI

Delete the RCS at the EMS CLI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the EMS CLI prompt.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

At the EMS CLI, verify that the RCS is shown as OOS on both APs. Enter:
op:ap x,status

Important! This step does not apply to IPBH cells.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To delete the RCS, enter:

delete:rcs y
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify deletion of the RCS. Enter:

op:ap x,status

E
ND OF STEPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Complete degrowth

To complete the degrowth of the base station, perform the steps listed below.
1. Use the RMT to reset the Boot Memory Parameters to the new base station
configuration.
2. Power down the base station, and remove the hardware.
3. Review SDP 2130 to ensure that Cell Y is unequipped.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

29-4

30

30
Voice
interface DS0
functionality

Overview
Purpose

This chapter provides the general procedure to add the voice interface DS0
functionality to a CDM.
Voice interface module

The base station contains a voice interface module. The voice interface is used to allow
a technician at the cell site to communicate with counterparts at the MSC and
OMP-FX. The voice interface module is designed for outgoing calls only, and does not
allow for the reception of incoming calls. There is one voice port available for each
CDM. Three RJ-11 jacks for the communication ports are located at the lower right
corner of a frame. Each communication port requires a single DS0 channel, that is
dedicated for use on the T1/E1 facility servicing that CDM. The DS0 channel is routed
between the base station and the 5ESS switch.
Contents
Grow the voice interface DS0 functionality to a CDM

30-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
30-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Voice interface DS0 functionality

Grow the voice interface DS0 functionality to a CDM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Grow the voice interface DS0 functionality to a CDM

Overview

This section provides the general procedure to add the voice interface DS0
functionality to a CDM.
Description

The voice interface allows a technician to communicate with the MSC or OMP-FX via
POTS functionality. The voice interface uses software in the CRC of the base station to
support this communication path. The CRC must be active and running on a base
station software generic before this feature can be used. The technician will use an
RJ11 port, which is located in the appropriate base station frame of the CDM in use
for communication.
Before you begin

Contact technical support at https://wireless.support.lucent.com for a service that

provides the 5ESS switch planning, engineering, and implementation of this feature.
General order of procedures

To add the voice interface DS0 functionality:

Plan, engineer, and implement the 5ESS trunk groups, members, and line routing.
Update the btseqp form to specify the DS0 to be used by the voice interface
module.

Plan, engineer, and implement

Consult technical support at https://wireless.support.lucent.com to plan the trunk

groups, members, and routing, and to determine if the Land Line Cellular Option has
been implemented for the existing 5ESS switch. Support to complete these tasks is
currently provided in a Netcare engineering service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

30-2

Voice interface DS0 functionality

Grow the voice interface DS0 functionality to a CDM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update btseqp form

Update the btseqp form to specify information on the DS0 dedicated for voice
interface use. Refer to the following table.
Screen Field

Value

1 - 4

CRC VIM: DS1

*One or two T1/E1 lines can be

associated with a CDM. Specify the
T1/E1 facility for the DS0 channel
used.
CRC VIM: DS0

1-31 for E1; 1-24 for T1

*The VIM DS0 can only be assigned

if the VIM DS1 is assigned.

*Assign a number that is dedicated on

the T1/E1 facilities for voice. This
must be a unique DS0 that is not
assigned to packet pipes or signaling.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
30-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Appendix A: Product
conformance statements

Overview
Purpose

This appendix presents the product conformance statements that apply to the following
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA base stations:

9218 Base Station Macro (Modular Cell 4.0)

9218 Base Station Macro HD (Modular Cell 4.0 High Density)

9228 Base Station Macro (Modular Cell 4.0B)

9228 Base Station Macro HD (Modular Cell 4.0 HD)

9228 Base Station Macro LP (BTS 8420)

9216 Base Station Compact (Modular Cell 4.0 Compact)

9216 Base Station Compact LX (Modular Cell 4.0 Compact LX)

9226 Base Station Compact (Modular Cell 4.0B Compact)

9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact (BTS 3300)

CDMA Remote Radio Head (BTS 9234)

9224 Base Station Sub-Compact (BTS 4400)

9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN (BTS 4401)

9222 Base Station Micro (BTS 2400)

In regions such as North America and the European Union, the statements that are
required are determined primarily by national or multi-national regulations. However,
in some regions, contract terms determine which statements are required.
The presence of the statement indicates that the product does comply with that
statement wherever it is required to do so.
Contents
Antenna exposure statements

A-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FCC conformance statements

A-4

Industry Canada conformance statements

A-7

China

A-10

European Union

A-12

United States

A-17

Eco-environmental statements

A-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-2

Product conformance statements

Antenna exposure statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Antenna exposure statements

Overview

The statements that follow are the antenna exposure statements that apply to this
equipment.
Antenna exposure statements

Antenna installations for this equipment shall be performed in accordance with all
applicable manufacturers recommendations, and national laws and regulations. To
ensure correct antenna installation, the antenna installer shall perform all necessary
calculations and/or field measurements to evaluate compliance with applicable national
laws or regulations regarding exposure to electromagnetic fields. The antenna
manufacturer or supplier shall deliver all technical data necessary to perform this
compliance evaluation (e.g., antenna gain pattern, antenna dimensions, etc.).
Information on the methodology and results of the compliance evaluation shall be
available for inspection by officials of the governing authorities.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

FCC conformance statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FCC conformance statements

Purpose

This section presents the product conformance statements that apply to the following
cabinets:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station Macro and 9228 Base Station
Macro LP

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9222 Base Station Micro and 9222 Base Station Micro
Distributed

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact and 9224 Base Station
Sub-Compact EN

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9216 Base Station Compact and 9226 Base Station Compact

In regions such as North America and the European Union, the statements that are
required are determined primarily by national or multi-national regulations. However,
in some regions, contract terms determine which statements are required.
The presence of the statement indicates that the product does comply with that
statement wherever it is required to do so.
Overview

The statements that follow are the FCC conformance statements that apply to this
equipment.
Important! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Alcatel-Lucent
could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Pursuant to 47 CFR Part 1, Subpart 1, all installations must be evaluated for
requirements contained in Table 1, Limits for maximum permissible exposure, in
Section 1.1310.
Part 1 Statement

Pursuant to 47 CFR Part 1, Subpart I, all installations must be evaluated for

requirements contained in Table 1, Limits for maximum permissible exposure, in
section 1.1310.
Part 15 Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-4

Product conformance statements

FCC conformance statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FCC Part 15, Subpart B Unintentional Radiators, Class A Digital Device

with9218/9228 Macro HD and Indoor 9216 Compact Distributed for China
Applications

Important! This statement applies to the 9218/9228 Macro HD and the indoor
9216 Compact Distributed for China Applications.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at the users expense.
FCC Part 15, Subpart B Unintentional Radiators, Class B Digital Device with
products except 9218/9228 Macro HD and Indoor 9216 Compact Distributed for
China Applications.

Important! This statement applies to products covered by this manual with the
exception of 9218/9228 Macro HD and Indoor 9216 Compact Distributed for China
Applications.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Part 2 Statement

This device complies with Part 2, Subpart J Equipment Authorization Procedures, of

the FCC Rules.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

FCC conformance statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Part 22 Statement

This device complies with Part 22, Subpart H Cellular Radiotelephone Service for
Cellular 850 products.
Part 24 Statement

This device complies with Part 24, Subpart E Broadband PCS, of the FCC Rules for
1900 MHz PCS products.
Part 68 Statement

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted
by the ACTA. At the upper right hand corner inside the cabinet assembly of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the
format of AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the
telephone company.
There is no need of any ringer equivalence number for this equipment.
The T1 network interface on this equipment is hardware to a punch-down block, which
meets the FCC specifications.
The Facility Interface Code for this equipment is 04DU9-1SN. The service Order Code
for this equipment is 6.0N. These two numbers are required when the customer orders
service from the telephone company.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required.
However, if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the
customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary
modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
may request that you disconnect this equipment until the problem is resolved. If trouble
is experienced with this equipment repair or warranty information may be obtained by
contacting:
Technical Support Services
Alcatel-Lucent
Within the United States: 1 866 582 3688, prompt 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-6

Product conformance statements

Industry Canada conformance statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Industry Canada conformance statements

Introduction

The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
following cabinets when deployed in Canada:

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station Macro and 9228 Base Station
Macro LP (401-703-486)

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9222 Base Station Micro and 9222 Base Station Micro
Distributed (401-703-487)

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact and 9224 Base Station
Sub-Compact EN (401-703-488)

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9216/9226 Base Station Compact (401-703-489)

Conformance statements

ICES-003: Interference-Causing Equipment Standard Digital Apparatus

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet apperiel
numrique de la classe A est conforme norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IC CS-03: Specification for Terminal Equipment, Terminal Systems, Network
Protection Devices, Connection Arrangements and Hearing Aids Compatibility

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.

RF approval

RSS-132: Cellular Telephones Employing New Technologies Operating in the

Bands 824-849 MHz and 869-894 MHz

The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that the
Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
RSS-133: PCS Radio Standards Specifications

The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that the
Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Product safety conformance

The cabinets are Safety Certified ITE by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and UL
Canada.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

Industry Canada conformance statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This Certification is marked on the equipment main nameplate label. Should the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) require prior or additional verification of this
Certification, a Product Certificate of Compliance can be obtained from the specific
Certification Body by the Business/Product Unit Applicant for the product or by
contacting:
Technical Support Services, within Canada: +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2
Any modifications to this equipment are not permitted without review and official
written authorization from the specific Certification Body. Unauthorized changes may
violate the Product Safety Certification. Modifications or changes authorized by official
CN/CNN are assumed to have received prior approval from this Lab.
Indoor applications

This equipment is intended for installation in restricted access locations where access is
controlled or where access can only be gained by service personnel with a key or tool.
Access to this equipment is restricted to qualified service personnel only.
Antenna exposure

Antenna installations for the product shall be performed in accordance with all
applicable manufacturers recommendations, and national laws and regulations. To
ensure correct antenna installation, the antenna installer shall perform all necessary
calculations and/or field measurements to evaluate compliance with applicable national
laws or regulations regarding exposure to electromagnetic fields. The supplier of radio
equipment, the supplier of antenna equipment and the integrator and builder of the site
must provide sufficient information so that the limits of the exclusion zones can be
determined. Any changes to the antenna or other equipment in the transmit path may
require reevaluation of the exposures to electromagnetic fields.
Human exposure

Pursuant to Health Canada Safety Code 6, Limits of Human Exposure to Radio

frequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, all
installations must be evaluated against the Maximum Exposure Limits as described in
Chapter 2, Health Canada 99-EHD-237.
Optical transmitters

Alcatel-Lucent declares that the product complies with the International

Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards IEC 60825-1 Edition 2.0 (2007) and IEC
60825-2 Edition 3.1 (2007). It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems
product under the IEC classifications.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-8

Product conformance statements

Industry Canada conformance statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This
product does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not
contain embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly
increases the risk of eye damage.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services Environmental Health and Safety organization. For installations not performed by
Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center at:
Technical Support Services, within Canada: +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

China

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

China
Introduction

The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
product when deployed in China.
EMC Compliance

The equipment complies with the following electromagnetic compatibility

specifications:

CISPR 22 Class B

Product safety conformance

The equipment complies with the following product safety specifications:

EN 60950-1:2001

EN 60215:1989

Optical transmitters

Alcatel-Lucent declares that the product complies with the International

Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards IEC 60825-1 Edition 2.0 (2007) and IEC
60825-2 Edition 3.1 (2007). It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems
product under the IEC classifications.
This product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This
product does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not
contain embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly
increases the risk of eye damage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-10

Product conformance statements

China

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services Environmental Health and Safety organization. For installations not performed by
Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center at:
Technical Support Services, within China : +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2
Material content compliance

The Peoples Republic of China Ministry of Information Industry has published a

regulation (Order #39) and associated standards regarding restrictions on hazardous
substances (China RoHS). Currently, the legislation requires all Electronic and
Information Products (EIP) to comply with certain labeling and documentation
requirements. Alcatel-Lucent products manufactured on or after 1 March 2007, that are
intended for sale to customers in the China market, comply with these requirements.
In accordance with the Peoples Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard
Marking for the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Product
(SJ/T11364-2006), customers may access Alcatel-Lucents Hazardous Substances Table
information at either of the following URLs (for the convenience of our diverse
customer base):

Access via the Alcatel-Lucent Corporate web site at: (http://www.alcatel-lucent.

com/cn)
Access via the Alcatel Shanghai Bell web site at: (http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/
product_solution/in4.asp)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

European Union

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

European Union
Introduction

The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
product bearing the CE Marking and when deployed in the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity for radio and telecommunication terminal equipment under the
scope of Directive 1999/5/EC

Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that the equipment documented in this publication is in

compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is
kept at the Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For more
information please contact your local Alcatel-Lucent Customer Service Organization.
CE marking

This product has been CE-marked in accordance with the following European
Directive:

Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment (R) 1999/5/EC

EMC and radio spectrum compliance for the 850 MHz product

The equipment complies with the following EMC and radio spectrum specifications:

EN 300 339 V1.1.1 (1998-06)

ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 (2005-09)

ETSI EN 301 489-26 V2.3.1 (2005-07)

ETSI EN 301 908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10)

Code of Federal Regulations FCC part 24(E)

IS 3GPP2 - C.S0010-B

EMC and radio spectrum compliance for the 450 MHz product

The equipment complies with the following EMC and radio spectrum specifications:

ETSI EN 301 449 V1.1.1 (2005-05)

ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 (2005-09)

Code of Federal Regulations FCC part 24(E)

IS 3GPP2 - C.S0010-B

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-12

Product conformance statements

European Union

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Product safety conformance

The equipment complies with the following product safety specifications:

EN 60950-1:2001
EN 60215:1989

Telecommunications Standards

The equipment complies with the following telecommunication specifications:

Technical Basis Regulation TBR 13

Antenna exposure

Antenna installations for the product shall be performed in accordance with all
applicable manufacturers recommendations, and national laws and regulations. To
ensure correct antenna installation, the antenna installer shall perform all necessary
calculations and/or field measurements to evaluate compliance with applicable national
laws or regulations regarding exposure to electromagnetic fields. The supplier of radio
equipment, the supplier of antenna equipment and the integrator and builder of the site
must provide sufficient information so that the limits of the exclusion zones can be
determined. Any changes to the antenna or other equipment in the transmit path may
require re-evaluation of the exposures to electromagnetic fields.
Pursuant to

European Council Recommendation 1999/519/EC On the limitation of exposure of

the general public to electromagnetic fields dated 12 July 1999 and

ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionising Radiation Protection)

Guidelines for limiting exposure to time-varying electric, magnetic, and
electromagnetic fields,
all installations must be evaluated against the Reference Levels, and if necessary
exclusion zones for public and installation workers defined.

The following information on Alcatel-Lucent supplied equipment is available from

customer representatives:

Output power and antenna characteristic, if the product is equipped with an integral
antenna.

A detailed description of at least one typical normal configuration, including

antenna system (feeders, connectors, combiners, antennas etc.), if the product is
intended to be used with external antennas.
Limit distances for general public and occupational exposure. If the product is
intended for use with external antennas, limit distances shall be given for the given
typical system configurations.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

European Union

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Information how to specify exposure levels and limit distances for any optional
system configuration not specified in detail.

Information on how to install the equipment/system or the external antennas in

order to ensure that the separation between the radiating antenna and general public
are exceeding the maximum allowed distances.

Information on the methodology used for the determination of RF safety compliance

distances and exclusion zones, and the results of the compliance evaluation shall be
available for inspection by officials of the governing authorities.
Optical transmit

Alcatel-Lucent declares that 9216/9226 Compact cabinet complies with the CENELEC
standards EN 60825-1 Edition 1994 and its amendment 1 (2002) and amendment 2
(2001) and EN 60825-2 Edition 2004. It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber
communication systems product under the IEC classifications.
This product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This
product does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not
contain embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly
increases the risk of eye damage.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-14

Product conformance statements

European Union

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services Environmental Health and Safety organization. For installations not performed by
Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center at:
Technical Support Services, from all countries: +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2
Recycling / take-back / disposal of product

Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below when put on the
market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life, in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation. They
shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may
be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and
human health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.

Important! In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin
indicates that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products
displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers. For information regarding take-back of
equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more information regarding the requirements for
recycling/disposal of product, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or
Alcatel-Lucent Takeback Support at:
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

European Union

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Material content compliance

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, Restriction of the use of certain

Hazardous Substances (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium,
hexavalent chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic
equipment. This Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the
EU market after 1 July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for lead
solder in network infrastructure equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU
after 1 July 2006 comply with the EU RoHS Directive.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-16

Product conformance statements

United States

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

United States
Introduction

The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
product when deployed in the United States.
Federal Communications Commission

Important! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Alcatel-Lucent,

Inc. could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
FCC Part 15 Class A

Important! This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protections against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at the users expense.
FCC Part 15 Class B

Important! This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

United States

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FCC Part 68

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted
by the ACTA. On the cabinet assembly of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format of AAAEQ##TXXXX. If
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.

FIC 04DU9-1SN
SOC 6.0N

The T1 network interface on this equipment is hard wired to a punchdown block,

which meets the FCC specifications.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required.
However, if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the
customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary
modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
FCC regulations prohibit the connection of customer-provided equipment to central
office implemented systems. Connection to party lines is subject to tariffs; users should
contact their state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation
commission for information.
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment repair or warranty information may be
obtained by contacting:
Technical Support Services, within the United States: +1 630 224 4762, prompt 2
RF approval

This equipment complies with Part 2, Subpart J - Equipment Authorization Procedures,

of the FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 22 - Public Mobile Services, Subpart H - Cellular
Radiotelephone Services
This equipment complies with Part 24 - Personal Communications Services, Subpart E
- Broadband PCS.
This equipment complies with Part 27 - Miscellaneous Wireless Communications
Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-18

Product conformance statements

United States

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FDA/IEC optical transmitter product compliance

Alcatel-Lucent declares that 9216/9226 Compact cabinet complies with the Food and
Drug Administrations Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH)
regulations 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11. It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber
communication systems product under the FDA.
This Product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This
product does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not
contain embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly
increases the risk of eye damage.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
Product safety conformance

The 9216/9226 Compact cabinet is Safety Certified ITE by Underwriters Laboratory

(UL) and UL Canada.
This Certification is marked on the equipment main nameplate label. Should the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) require prior or additional verification of this
Certification, a Product Certificate of Compliance can be obtained from the specific
Certification Body by the Business/Product Unit Applicant for the product or by
contacting:
Technical Support Services, within the United States: +1 630 224 4762, prompt 2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

United States

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Any modifications to this equipment are not permitted without review and official
written authorization from the specific Certification Body. Unauthorized changes may
violate the Product Safety Certification. Modifications or changes authorized by official
CN/CNN are assumed to have received prior approval from this Lab.
Indoor applications

This equipment is intended for installation in restricted access locations where access is
controlled or where access can only be gained by service personnel with a key or tool.
Access to this equipment is restricted to qualified service personnel only.
Antenna exposure

Antenna installations for the product shall be performed in accordance with all
applicable manufacturers recommendations, and national laws and regulations. To
ensure correct antenna installation, the antenna installer shall perform all necessary
calculations and/or field measurements to evaluate compliance with applicable national
laws or regulations regarding exposure to electromagnetic fields. The supplier of radio
equipment, the supplier of antenna equipment and the integrator and builder of the site
must provide sufficient information so that the limits of the exclusion zones can be
determined. Any changes to the antenna or other equipment in the transmit path may
require re-evaluation of the exposures to electromagnetic fields.
Pursuant to 47 CFR Part 1, Subpart I, subject to the provisions of section 1.1307, all
installations must be evaluated for requirements contained in Table 1, Limits for
maximum permissible exposure, in section 1.1310.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services Environmental Health and Safety organization. For installations not performed by
Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center at:
Technical Support Services, within the United States: +1 630 224 4762, prompt 2
Material content compliance

The following notification applies to Alcatel-Lucent products distributed for sale, resale
or use.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-20

Product conformance statements

United States

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This product, part, or both may include a lithium-manganese dioxide battery, which
contains very small amounts of a perchlorate substance. Special handling may apply.
For California:
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See (http:\\www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Product conformance statements

Eco-environmental statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Eco-environmental statements
Overview

The statements that follow are the eco-environmental statements that apply to the
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 9218/9228 Base Station Macro and 9216/9226 Base Station
Compact.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field Services /
Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
For installations not performed by Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent
Customer Support Center at:
Technical Support Services, Alcatel-Lucent.
Within the United States: 1 866 582 3688 prompt 1
From all other countries: +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2
Recycling/Take-Back/ Disposal of Product

Waste electrical and electronic products must be handled appropriately, in compliance

with applicable legislation. They must not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal
waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or
batteries, the environment and human health may be negatively impacted as a result of
inappropriate disposal.
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below shall be collected
and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicable legislation.
They shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials
that may be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the
environment and human health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate
disposal.
The following figure is placed on some products and components to indicate that the
item cannot be discarded as unsorted municipal Product conformance statements waste;
instead, special measures are required for the treatment of waste electrical and
electronic equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

A-22

Product conformance statements

Eco-environmental statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Important! In the European Union, the solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin
indicates that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Note: In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates
that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life, or products displaced by
Alcatel-Lucent offers.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Takeback Support at
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com.
Material Content Compliance

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, Restriction of the use of certain

Hazardous Substances (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium,
hexavalent chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic
equipment. This Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the
EU market from 1 July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for
lead solder in network infrastructure equipment. Lucent products shipped to the EU
from 1 July 2006 will comply with the RoHS Directive.
Peoples Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T 113-64-2006 (China
RoHS): Products manufactured after 1 March 2007 and sold in China will comply with
the product marking (EFUP label) and product documentation (HST).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
A-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Symbols
(UIP)

See UIP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics
5ESS-2000 Switching Platform DCS

A multiple application digital cellular switch (DCS) that manages the connectivity
between the cell site and the various networks. It supports AMPS, CDMA, GSM, and
TDMA wireless; landline POTS; the intelligent network; operator services; and ISDN.
850 CDMA

CDMA technology in the cellular frequency band (824-894 MHz).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

access manager

Consists of the ECP and the OMP (Operation Management Platform). An Access
Manager provides mobility management functionality for its wireless subsidiary units.
Each Access Manager supports the required number of subscribers.
Acculink

A piece of hardware in the switch that multiplexes 24 DS0 data links from 24 cell site
notes (CSNs) onto a single T1. To test the link, an Acculink device sends a known test
pattern out through the data transmission line and expects the same pattern back.
ACU ((analog conversion unit))

In the PCS minicell, the ACU combines the output of a given CDMA clusters CCUs. A
given ACU supports two CDMA clusters. ACUs are duplex, equipped as primary and
standby.
advanced mobile phone service ((AMPS))

See AMPS
AFI ((alarm/FITS interface) )

AGC ((automatic gain control))

A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

function of input level or another specified parameter. Automatic gain control amplifiers
are often used in a communications receiver to hold various points of the receiver
circuitry at predetermined power levels.
Alarm Testing

One of the tests to verify the integrity of the fixed alarms at a cell site, using a UNIX
terminal.
AMI ((alternate mark inversion))

This line coding codes the transmitted marks (1s) as alternating positive and negative
voltages on the T1/E1 transmission line; that is, the first mark will be transmitted as a
positive voltage, the next mark as a negative voltage. Spaces (0s) are transmitted as 0
voltage. AMI prevents the generation of DC currents on the transmission line. Reception
of two consecutive marks of the same polarity is a line error, termed a bipolar violation.
AMPS ((advanced mobile phone service))

Refers to analog (FM) technology radios.

analog conversion unit (ACU)

See ACU
AP

An AP is a central processing unit (CPU) that provides generic computing facilities to

host a wide range of applications in a Alcatel-Lucent CDMA wireless network. The APs
perform the call-processing and underlying OA&M functions for the radio cabinets in a
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network. Pairs of APs host the Radio Cluster Server (RCS)
application for Alcatel-Lucent CDMA radio cabinets. The APs provide an integrated
high-availability hardware and software platform that offers increased reliability,
availability, and maintainability for its subtending network elements.
APC ((application processor cluster))

An Application Processor Cluster (APC) is the set of all APs that reside in an APF.
APF ((application processor frame))

An Application Processor Frame (APF) is the cabinet that houses the APs and several
other hardware modules in a Alcatel-Lucent CDMA wireless network. The modules are
rack-mounted in the APF. The APF is compatible with the Alcatel-Lucent 5ESS-2000
Digital Cellular Switch (DCS).
application processor

Generic term used to refer to both the first generation AP and the MM-AP.
application processor cluster ((APC))

See APC
application processor frame ((APF))

See APF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-2

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

application-specific integrated circuit ((ASIC))

See ASIC
APX ((AUTOPLEX))

apxrcv

Recent Change/Verify command. Use this UNIX command to update and review
databases.
ARCNET ((attached resource computer network))

ARCNET defines the physical and the data link layer of the OSI protocol stack. An
ARCNET software driver located at the host processor interacts directly with the
ARCNET controller hardware and shields the rest of the application from the ARCNET
hardware.
ASCII ((American standard code for information interchange))

ASIC ((application-specific integrated circuit))

An integrated circuit which has been built for a specific application. Manufacturers use
it to consolidate many chips into a single package, reducing system board size and
power consumption.
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

See ATM
ATM ((asynchronous transfer mode))

A high bandwidth, controlled-delay, fixed-size packet switching and transmission system.

Uses fixed-size packets also known as cells; ATM is often referred to as cell relay.
ATM will provide the basis for future broadband ISDN standards.
ATP ((all tests passed))

attached resource computer network ((ARCNET))

See ARCNET
AUTOPLEX System 1000

A cellular platform architecture developed by Alcatel-Lucent.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B8ZS ((bipolar 8 zero suppression))

A coding scheme that is used to prevent long strings of 0s on the T1/E1 transmission
line which could lead to receiver clock generation problems. B8ZS replaces strings of
eight 0s with a special code containing bipolar violations. The receiver detects this code
and reinserts the eight 0s.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

base unit ((BU))

See BU
baseband unit ((BBU))

See BBU
BBU ((baseband unit))

Refers specifically to the low-profile BBU which is a digital-only BU with no RF

components. RRHs are connected to the BBU RUI to provide RF capabilities.
BCI ((bar code identifier))

BLST ((board-level self test))

The first stage of testing, Board Level Self-Test (BLST), is invoked from software that
resides in boot memory for each of the processing components in the radio cabinet.
These tests represent a core set of low-level hardware tests designed to verify the basic
functionality of a processor module.
board-level self test ((BLST))

See BLST
BU (Base Unit)

This is a OneBTS frame and, in the RRH context, specifically a OneBTS frame with an
RUI to which RRHs are connected. A specific type of BU is the LP-BBU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CAD ((cabling diagrams))

Cabling diagrams are part of the schematic drawings set.

call processing test

A test of the ability of a cell site to process calls. At least one land-to-mobile,
mobile-to-land, and mobile-to-mobile call is placed to ensure that calls are going through
the cell site, the transmission lines, and the switch successfully. A mobile phone call is
also placed on every traffic channel element of a cell site. The test verifies trunking to
the DCS.
Call processing tests should be performed during off-peak hours when call traffic is low.
CATP ((conditional ATP))

CBR ((CDMA baseband radio))

Receives the digitally combined baseband forward signal from the CCU-20s and converts
it to a low power level, modulated RF signal.
CCMS (common channel message set )

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-4

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CCS (common channel signalling )

CCU ((CDMA channel unit))

The CCUs provide the channel coding and decoding functions for CDMA.
CCU-20

CCU with 20 channel elements.

CDL ((conditional))

Priority of craft action applies to remove (rmv) of a maintenance object.

CDM ((CDMA digital module))

The functions of the CDMA Digital Module (CDM) are as follows: communicate with
the MSC via T1 or E1 data links, convert the MSC formatted information on the
downlink, and provide other cell site control functions.
CDMA ((code division multiple access))

CDMA uses spread-spectrum digital modulation techniques.

CDMA baseband radio ((CBR))

See CBR
CDMA channel unit ((CCU))

See CCU
CDMA digital module ((CDM))

See CDM
CDMA modem unit ((CMU))

See CMU
CDMA radio controller ((CRC))

See CRC
CDMA system time ((CST))

See CST
CDMA test radio module ((CTRM))

See CTRM
CE ((channel element))

Voice processing unit that converts between analog and digitally encoded voice signals.
Cell

A geographical area, usually depicted as hexagon-shaped, that is served by a cellular

system. Cellular technology is based on the premise that a group of radio frequencies
used within one cell can be used again in distant cells.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cell site

An installation located within a cell housing the equipment needed to set up and
complete calls on cellular telephones; for example, FM radio transmitter and receiver
equipment, antennas and computers.
cellular geographic service area ((CGSA))

See CGSA
CFM ((common fiber optic module))

The CFM provides the optical interface to/from each sectors Remote Unit.
CFMA ((common fiber optic module adapter))

An adapter in the Remote Unit along with CFM in the Base Unit provides the interface
between the Base Unit and the Remote Unit via fiber optic cable.
CGSA ((cellular geographic service area))

A basic coverage area served by a cellular system.

channel element ((CE))

See CE
channel service unit ((CSU))

See CSU
CLGC ((closed loop gain control))

CLGC is a method by which a feedback path is used within the basestation to ensure
each Tx paths output RF power is maintained to a set value within plus/minus 0.5 dB.
CLI ((command line interface))

Instead of clicking on icons to manipulate files, you type instructions to the operating
system. For contrast see GUI.
closed loop gain control ((CLGC))

See CLGC.
CMU ((CDMA modem unit))

The CMU contains the channel elements that provide the signal spreading and
de-spreading. In the transmit path, the CE spreads the signal and passes it on to the
UCR.
CNI ((common network interface) )

CNI ((common network interface) )

CNI/IMS

The CNI/IMS, also known as the CNI/IMS ring, is a duplicated message switch. Nodes
in the CNI/IMS terminate datalinks from minicells, the 5ESS-2000 DCS, the 3B21D
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-6

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

computer, and other cellular systems. The CNI/IMS downloads the software from the
3B21D computer, and takes over most of the call processing functions.
CNI/IMS

The CNI/IMS, also known as the CNI/IMS ring, is a duplicated message switch. Nodes
in the CNI/IMS terminate datalinks from minicells, the 5ESS-2000 DCS, the 3B21D
computer, and other cellular systems. The CNI/IMS downloads the software from the
3B21D computer, and takes over most of the call processing functions.
CNI/IMS ring

See CNI/IMS
CNI/IMS ring

See CNI/IMS
code division multiple access ((CDMA))

See CDMA
command line interface ((CLI))

See CLI
common fiber optic module ((CFM))

See CFM
common fiber optic module Adapter ((CFMA))

See CFMA
common power converter ((CPC))

See CPC
common public radio interface ((CPRI))

See CPRI.
common timing unit ((CTU))

See CTU
CP ((call processing))

Command line argument in the craftshell to perform some action on call processing.
CPC ((common power converter))

Common power converter (CPCA and CPCB) provides power to the digital shelf.
CPI ((communications processor interface) )

CPRI ((common public radio interface))

This is an initiative to define a publicly available specification that standardizes the

protocol interface between the radio equipment control (REC) and the radio equipment
(RE) in wireless base stations. This allows interoperability between equipment from
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

different vendors and preserves the software investment made by wireless service
providers.
CRC ((CDMA radio controller))

In the CDMA radio cabinets, the major functions performed by the CRC are as follows:
interface to two T1/E1 lines, transport voice data between CCUs and T1/E1 lines via the
packet bus, control cell hardware via the peripheral bus, perform cell-level call
processing and OA&M functions, and provide control function to CDMA Test Radio
Module (CTRM).
CRFU ((CDMA radio frequency unit) )

CRT ((cathode ray tube))

The display tube that is used in several computer terminal. Generic reference to a
terminal.
crystal oscillator ((XO))

See XO
CSC ((cell site controller))

CSN ((cell site node))

A communications node that provides an interface between the cell site and the IMS
ring.
CSN ((cell site node))

CST ((CDMA system time))

An ASCII string representing the current timestamp retrieved by the Timing and
Frequency Unit (TFU) from the Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) network. CST is
synonymous with GPS time, and is the number of seconds elapsed since January 6,
1980, 00:00:00 UTC (uncorrected for leap seconds).
CSU ((channel service unit))

Provides two major functions: it serves as an interface between the network and the
customer premises equipment (CPE), and it provides an additional set of
manufacturer-specific features.
CTRM ((CDMA test radio module))

The CTRM provides the ability to verify the RF paths and the functionality of the
CDMA system by placing calls through the radio cabinet. The CTRM appears to the cell
as another customer mobile, and is under operation at times while the radio cabinet is
active with other callers. The CTRM utilizes a module, similar to a mobile, which is the
test radio itself in establishing CDMA loopback calls.
CTS ((customer technical support))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-8

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTSI ((customer technical support and information) )

CTU ((common timing unit))

The CTU is the reference frequency and CDMA time-based unit that receives the timing
signal from the GPS to maintain synchronization for the 9218 Macro with the other
radio cabinets in the CDMA network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

data link

A time slot that can route through several T1 spans for controlling a cell site.
DC ((direct current))

DCS ((digital cellular switch))

The AUTOPLEX System 1000 switch that terminates all voice trunks in the cellular
system (for example, 5ESS-2000).
DCS-1800

A DCS working in the 1800 MHz range.

DFI ((digital facilities interface))

A DS1 board, located in Series II cell sites, that contains either one or two T1/E1
facilities. It is a circuit pack used as a T1 interface for cell site and DCS equipment.
DI ((diagnostic image))

The DI is a set of testing and diagnostic instructions that is downloaded to the

appropriate boards and stored in their respective NVM. The diagnostic routines are part
of the cell generic in the radio cabinet. The diagnostic image is not used in the radio
cabinet.
diagnostic image ((DI))

See DI
diagnostic testing

A set of tests performed to check cell site equipment and verify that no equipment is
OOS.
digital pre-distortion ((DPD))

See DPD
directory

A collection of related files on a computer.

DPD ((digital pre-distortion))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Detects characteristics of the transmitted signal and adjusts the transmitted signal in the
UCR, in the digital domain, to achieve a superior output signal in terms of spectral
purity. DPD comes in two types; simplex and enhanced.
DS0 ((digital signal, level 0))

The lowest level of signal in the digital hierarchy. A DS0 consists of a digital signal of
64 kbps.
DS1 ((digital signal, level 1))

A signal that consists of 24 DS0 channels. The DS0 channels are combined by time
multiplexing. A DS1 signal has a bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps. A T1 facility or span carries
a DS1 signal.
DS2 ((digital signal, level 2))

For a T1 line, a 6.312-Mbps channel that consists of four DS1 channels; for an E1 line,
an 8.45-Mbps channel that consists of four DS1 channels.
DS3 ((digital signal, level 3))

A 44.736-Mbps line consisting of seven DS2 channels. A DS3 line is also called a T3
line.
DSLP ((digital shelf lower panel))

DSX ((digital signal cross-connect))

A network element that cross-connects channels within digital signals. During call setup,
an end-to-end connection is established by allocating a channel on each leg of the
connection. The DSX permits the channel to use a different carrier on each leg.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E1

A four-wire voice and data trunking facility that carries 30 duplex channels in 64-kbps
time slices. E1 facilities are standard for digital telecommunications in all continents
except for North America.
ECP ((executive cellular processor))

A Alcatel-Lucent 3B21D computer and its associated input/output devices, which

controls system operations. The ECP is responsible for mobility management, call
processing, system maintenance, technical interfaces, and system integrity.
ECPless configuration

Term that refers to the process of migrating the functionality of the ECP and CNI/IMS
ring to 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processors (9290 MM-APs). This migration
gives service providers higher, scalable capacity and supports an increased number of
base stations per MSC. Formerly called ECP Migration or Ringless MSC.
EDPD ((enhanced digital pre-distortion))

See DPD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-10

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EEPROM ((electronically-erasable programmable read-only memory))

EFIM (enhanced facilities interface module)

Used in outdoor radio cabinets as a lightening protected interface/demarcation point

between customer and radio cabinet for T1/E1 and user alarm cable connections.
electrostatic discharge ((ESD))

See ESD
element management system (EMS)

See EMS
EMS ((element management system))

The EMS is used for configuration of managed objects and to execute commands from
the EMS Graphical User Interface (EMS-GUI) or Command Line Interface (CLI).
enhanced facilities interface module

See EFIM
enhanced variable rate coder ((EVRC))

See EVRC
ESD ((electrostatic discharge))

A transfer of electric charge between bodies of different electrostatic potential in

proximity or through direct contact. Proper ESD practices must be followed whenever
handling circuit packs or working inside a cell cabinet.
ESF ((extended superframe))

A digital signal coding scheme.

ESF ((extended superframe))

EVRC ((enhanced variable rate coder))

The algorithm provides improved voice quality comparable to 13 kbps voice quality, and
it does so while maintaining 8 kbps system call capacity and RF coverage.
executive cellular processor ((ECP))

See ECP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

facilities interface module ((FIM))

See FIM
facilities interface tray ((FIT))

See FIT
FER ((frame error rate))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The FER is defined as the number of frames with errors divided by the total number of
frames transmitted. This provides a way to measure the quality of voice calls.
FFS ((flash file system))

The FFS device mimics a hard disk, and in doing so, supports basic file I/O capabilities
(open/close, read/write, compress/uncompress, create/delete directory, etc.). These FFS
capabilities allow for some degree of sophistication especially in terms of economy
in the way software images are maintained in NVM, on the basis of not only whole
generics but also selective portions of generics.
FIM ((facilities interface module))

The FIM is responsible for providing secondary lightning protection and switching
functionality for the CDMA radio cabinet.
FIP ((filter interface panel))

FIT ((facilities interface tray))

The Facilities Interface Tray (FIT) houses the punchdown block for the incoming T1/E1
lines and user alarms for the CDMA radio cabinet.
flash file system ((FFS))

See FFS
Flywheel

The TFU relies on the GPS unit to regulate the 15-MHz signal from the OM, and to
provide the 1 pulse/second and the UTC time signals. If the GPS unit loses lock on the
GPS satellites, it relies on the OM to provide a timebase until satellite lock can be
reacquired. This reliance on the OM is referred to as flywheeling.
FPGA ((field programmable gate array))

A specialized microprocessor that has no physical connections between its logic gates
when manufactured, but has potential connections which can be made by a
programmer/user.
frame error rate ((FER))

See FER
frame relay packet handler ((FRPH))

See FRPH
FRPH ((frame relay packet handler))

The FRPH provides the interface between the packet pipes and the packet switching
platform. A single FRPH can handle 64 CDMA calls when either 8 or 13kbps vocoders
are employed. A single FRPH can terminate three packet pipes carrying up to 32 DS0s,
but not more than a total of 64 calls.
FRU ((field replaceable unit))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-12

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FS ((functional schematics))

A portion of the schematic drawings set.

FTP ((file transfer protocol))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

general purpose instruments bus ((GPIB))

See GPIB
GFCI ((ground fault circuit interrupter))

An electrical/mechanical device which will automatically disconnect when a difference

in current is detected.
global positioning system ((GPS))

See GPS
GPIB ((general purpose interface bus))

General Purpose Interface Bus is the common name for the communication interface
system defined in ANSI/IEEE Standards 488.1-1987 and 488.2-1987.
GPS ((global positioning system))

A Space Based Radio Positioning/Navigation System Of 18 Satellites Providing

Worldwide, Extremely Accurate, 3-D Position & Velocity Information Coordinated With
Universal Time.
graphical user interface ((GUI))

See GUI
ground fault circuit interrupter ((GFCI))

See GFCI
GUI ((graphical user interface))

Pronounced gooey. A software interface based on pictorial representations and menus

of operations and files. Opposite of command line interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

hardware error handler ((HEH))

See HEH
hardware identification ((HWID))

See HWID
HDLC ((high-level data link control))

This process monitors a received bit stream until a flag character (a string of six ones) is
read. It then interprets the following bits as an LAPD frame until a trailing flag
character is received. Bit destuffing is performed when indicated, and a CRC check is
done on the received frame. The converse is performed in the transmit direction.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-13
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

HEH ((hardware error handler))

Automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the hardware error handler
(HEH) software subsystem. HEH receives error reports from hardware boards, functional
tests, and call-processing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore,
remove) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.
high-level data link control ((HDLC))

See HDLC
HPDA ((High Power Distribution Assembly))

The Modcell 4.0 uses a frame level DC distribution center called High Power
Distribution Assembly (HPDA). The HPDA receives it DC input from the internal
rectifiers or internal/external backup batteries.
HWID ((hardware identification))

An identifier programmed into the RRH to allow software to distinguish one unit from
another.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I/O ((input/output))

IMACS screen

The login screen for the Acculink Access Controller (AAC).

integrated services digital network ((ISDN))

See ISDN
integration

The final process of system installation prior to RF performance (cluster) testing.

integration support room

Location in the switching center where integration testing input messages are input via
one of the four computer terminals.
integration testing

The process of ensuring the cell site is functioning properly under the control of the
switching center via data transmission lines.
interprocess message switch ((IMS))

See IMS
IOU ((input/output unit))

IRU ((insert review update))

ISDN ((integrated services digital network))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-14

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A digital telecommunications standard for enhanced landline telephone service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

kbps

Abbreviation for kilobits per second.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LAC ((linear amplifier circuit))

Amplifier used in Series II cell sites for radio signal amplification. The reference has
been carried forward to refer to amplifiers in the computer interfaces for later cell
products.
landline

A telephone accessed by landline media.

Landline POTS

plain old telephone service

LAPD ((link access protocol D) )

LBO ((line build out))

This is a T1 attenuation level setting within the CSU used to adjust the transmit signal
level from the microcell to prevent overdriving the network repeater or creating crosstalk
interference with other circuits within the transmission facility.
LEC ((local exchange carrier))

It provides transmission services to the service provider to allow the RCS/AP to be

connected to the remote microcell.
line interface unit ((LIU))

See LIU
LIU ((line interface unit))

The LIU handles the low-level High Level Data link Control (HDLC) protocol
processing of the packet pipes and signaling links. The LIU is part of the CRC in the
CDMA radio cabinet.
LNA ((low noise amplifier))

The LNAs provide low-noise pre-amplification of signals received from each of the
receive antennas after they have passed through the receive bandpass filters.
local exchange carrier ((LEC))

See LEC
low noise amplifier ((LNA))

See LNA

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-15
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

low-profile baseband unit ((LP-BBU))

See LP-BBU
LP-BBU ((low-profile baseband unit))

This is a OneBTS frame and, in the RRH context, specifically a OneBTS frame with an
RUI to which RRHs are connected. An example of a LP-BBU is the 9234 d2U
Distributed.
LPDA ((Low Power Distribution Assembly))

Provides the fuse-protected power for the Courtesy Light and the HE fan in the outdoor
Modcell 4.0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

main cluster controller ((MCC))

See MCC
MCA ((multiple carrier amplifier))

The Multicarrier Amplifier Module (MCA) amplifies the RF signal for up to one
sector/three carriers by receiving the low-level outputs from one to three CBRs,
combining in a low-power combiner, splitting into equal power signals in a low-power
splitter, and amplifying each signal to the required power level in a separate ULAM.
MCC ((main cluster controller))

The MCC is located in the CDMA radio cabinet CRC and controls the devices that hang
off the MCC processor bus. Various functions provided by the MCC include: different
timers, dual serial controller, programmable interrupt controller, loss of clock detection,
SDRAM controller, Ethernet controller, 10Base-T transceiver, programmable user I/O
port, and software trap feature for monitoring bus access to specified memory region.
MCR ((multi-carrier radio))

The MCR is the radio cabinet multi-carrier transceiver. It is a 15 MHz bandwidth radio
versus the 5 MHz for the UCR. The radio is capable of processing up to 11 contiguous
1.25 MHz CDMA carriers. Two versions of the MCR support the Cellular and PCS band
classes. The Cellular MCR transmits and receives up to 8 contiguous carriers spread
over no more than 15 MHz total bandwidth anywhere in the Cellular band. The PCS
MCR transmits and receives up to 11 contiguous carriers spread over no more than 15
MHz total bandwidth anywhere in a block in the PCS band. Unlike the UCR, the MCR
supports internally all functionalities supported by the TDU/ETDU. On the forward link,
the MCR function is to combine the digital I and Q signals from the CMU to RF in the
transmit path and from RF to digital in the receive path.
MCRT ((maintenance CRT))

Location from which maintenance and craft interface activity is controlled.

MEM

memory board
MHz ((megahertz))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-16

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MIN ((Mobile Identification Number))

The 34-bit number that is a digital representation of the 10-digit number assigned to a
mobile station.
MM-AP ((Mobility Manager Application Processor))

The second generation MM-AP uses a Sun-based platform called the Flexent Mobility
Server (FMS). The FMS provides a more powerful, more reliable, and more flexible
platform, which is at the core of numerous Alcatel-Lucent wireless solutions. MM-AP
and its applications take over functions previously performed by the ECP and its ring
nodes, resulting in improved performance for both the ECP and the applications
migrating to the MM-AP.
Mobile Switching Center ((MSC))

See MSC
Mobility manager application processor ((MM-AP))

See MM-AP.
MOST ((mobile station test))

When used as a test station, the MOST mobile unit enables the technician to test
cell-to-mobile unit call processing interface and to check the audio quality on all the
radio voice channels on a given antenna face. When this feature is used, a MOST call is
established over a radio channel enabling the technician to test specific call processing
functions over that radio channel. This works in concert with the functional tests and
CTRM.
MSC ((Mobile Switching Center))

All of the control and switching elements for a cellular system are contained at the
MSC. For an AUTOPLEX System 1000, the MSC consists of the ECP, the CNI/IMS
ring, and the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.
multi-carrier radio ((MCR))

See MCR
multiple carrier amplifier ((MCA))

See MCA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NAM ((Number Assignment Module))

A set of MIN/IMSI-related parameters stored in the mobile station.

NCTE ((Network Channel Terminating Equipment))

This terminates the DS-1 line at the cell site. This may be the CSU in the Microcell, or,
if the network provider requires one, a separate piece of line termination, commonly
referred to as a smart jack.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-17
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

network channel terminating equipment ((NCTE))

See NCTE
network interface

The demarcation between the LEC infrastructure and the Customer Premises Equipment
(CPE). Equipment located at this point is intended to allow the LEC to determine
whether transmission problems are within the network itself or the CPE.
network wireless systems

See NWS
non-volatile memory ((NVM))

See NVM
number assignment module ((NAM))

See NAM
NVM ((non-volatile memory))

Nonvolatile-Memory. NVM is a type of memory that maintains its data contents across
resets and power cycles. It is useful for storing configuration information across
sessions.
NWS ((network wireless systems))

Part of Alcatel-Lucent that designs, develops and manufactures wireless equipment.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OA&M ((operation, administration, and maintenance))

Generic name given to functions such as technical interfaces, diagnostics, service

measurements, and status reports.
OCI ((on-site configuration interface))

A web-based application downloaded from an HTTP server within the RRH to provide a
maintenance interface to the RRH. The OCI may be used in an on-line or off-line mode.
OCM-II ((OneBTS CPRI module))

Provides CPRI-like ports between the BU and one or more RRHs. The OCM-II provides
optical or electrical connections.
OM ((oscillator module))

OMP ((operation management platform))

This component provides a centralized point of access for wireless systems operation
and maintenance. The OMP provides a dedicated processor from which system operators
can perform multiple operations, administration, and maintenance (OA&M) tasks
simultaneously.
The OMP is a separate dedicated processor and the access manager is off-loaded from
the processor. Therefore, OMP can perform dedicated call processing and optional
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-18

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

feature functions. The OMP supports service measurement data, read-only printer (ROP)
stream re-direction to the OMP, disk storage, and recent change and verify (RC/V).
on-site configuration interface ((OCI))

See OCI.
OneBTS CPRI module ((OCM-II))

See OCM-II.
OOS ((out-of-service))

A service state for equipment and ports indicating the unit in question is inactive, cut off
or isolated.
operation management platform ((OMP))

See OMP
operations, administration, and maintenance

See OA&M.
OSC ((oscillator))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Packet Bus

A high speed (100 Mbps) serial bus used to carry traffic packets and control messages
between the MC/LIU and the CCU-16s. Uses IEEE 1394 (Firewire) protocol.
packet pipe ((PP))

See PP
PAM ((power amplifier module))

Amplifiers designed to work with EDPD.

PCS ((personal communications services))

A networking system which provides secure digital wireless communications in a high

frequency range, around 1900 MHz. It uses small low-powered radio cabinets, and
lightweight and compact personal communicators.
PCU ((power converter unit))

The Power Converter Unit (PCU) converts supplied 24 VDC to several DC voltage
levels for the CDMA radio cabinet.
PDA ((power distribution assembly))

The circuit breakers in the CDMA radio cabinet.

peripheral bus

A low speed (312 kbps) serial bus used to carry control messages between the LIU/MC
and the cell components. Intended primarily for communicating with non-CCU
components (CBRs, RFDUs, etc.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-19
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PHV ((protocol handler - voice))

The PHV receives packets from the packet pipe (via the FRPHs) and converts the
variable length packets into PCM voice, then sends them via the TSI to the PSTN. The
PHV can receive packets from multiple cell sites during a Soft-handoff via separate
FRPHs. In the reverse direction, PCM voice received (from the TSI) at the PHV is
converted into variable length packets.
pilot level functional test ((PLFT))

See PLFT
PLFT ((pilot level functional test))

Check that the power level of the pilot channel (and by inference, the power of the radio
cabinet) is set at the right level.
PN ((pseudo-noise))

A noise-like code used in the encryption and decryption of CDMA signals.

POTS ((plain old telephone system))

power converter unit ((PCU))

See PCU
power distribution assembly ((PDA))

See PDA
PP ((Packet Pipe))

A special trunk used to send packet-sized voice and data between a given CDMA Cluster
Controller (CCC) at the cell site and the DCS speech handlers at the switch.
primary LIU/MC

The LIU/MC which performs OA&M functions (including peripheral bus management)
for the cell.
protocol handler - voice ((PHV))

See PHV
PSA ((pilot sync access))

Supervision channels sharing a channel element in the CDMA radio cabinet.

pseudo-noise ((PN))

See PN
PSTN ((public switched telephone network))

The worldwide telephone network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RBAC (Role Based Access Control)

RBAC was introduced in Solaris 8. Using RBAC, users can be given privileges on a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-20

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

per-command basis. RBAC allows organizing privileged commands into rights profiles
for assignment to specific individuals according to their job needs.
RC/V ((recent change and verify system))

Provides the user interface to the database management system.

RCC ((radio control complex))

Contains the controller of a Alcatel-Lucent minicell site; referred to as the CSC by the
ECP.
RCF ((radio channel frame))

This is a Series II cell site frame that houses the processor and/or radio equipment.
RCS ((radio cluster server))

Each RCS application provides call processing and OA&M functionality for up to six
CDMA Microcells or one CDMA base station.
read-only printer ((ROP))

See ROP
remote maintenance panel ((RMP))

See RMP
remote maintenance terminal ((RMT))

See RMT
remote radio head ((RRH))

See RRH
remote unit interface ((RUI))

See RUI
restricting root login ((RLL))

See RLL
RF ((radio frequency))

The electromagnetic wave used for, among other things, cellular voice and data
communications.
RF (cluster test) team

Same as RF performance team.

RF performance team

Same as RF (cluster test) team.

RFDU ((RF diagnostic unit))

RFTG ((radio frequency timing generator))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-21
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RL ((retry later))

The system is unavailable to accept the command at this time.

RLL

Restricting root login supports an operational environment where each person logs into
to the system using his/her own account (not root/onexev account) and acquires a
limited set of privileges to perform assigned operations, administration, maintenance, and
provisioning (OAM&P).
RMP ((remote maintenance panel))

In the CDMA radio cabinet, the Remote Maintenance Panel is an I/O panel that allows
the user to interface with the IS-95A and wideband backplane.
RMT ((remote maintenance terminal))

The RMT-based diagnostics and testing mode is designed to facilitate the performance of
maintenance tasks through a point-and-click graphical interface. The RMT is connected
to the radio cabinet through the Maintenance Test port. That port is accessible through a
connector in the Remote Maintenance Panel.
Role Based Access Control (Role Based Access Control)

See RBAC
ROP ((read-only printer))

A continuous listing of all system activities.

RPM ((revolutions per minute))

RRH ((remote radio head) )

A single sealed unit encapsulating radio, amplifiers, filters, and RF test units functions
normally provided in the BU (RF Head (RFH) was an early version of this term but is
no longer in use). The RRH can be co-located with the BU (connected electrically) or
mounted remotely (connected optically) from 0 to 15 km.
RSP ((RTU switch panel))

It provides routine diagnostics by exercising all channel elements and radio frequency
(RF) paths.
RTR ((remote transmit request))

RU ((receiver unit) )
RUI ((remote unit interface))

A generic term describing the functionality that interconnects a BU digital shelf to an

RRH. Currently, the RUI function resides in the OCM-II. The term is also associated
with the CPRI link.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-22

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SCSI ((small computer systems interface))

A peripheral device high-speed bus, defined by ANSI standard X2.131-1986. Mostly

used for harddisk, scanner, and streamer interfaces.
SCSM ((selective cell site monitoring))

This optional feature allows the technician to have all output messages associated with a
specific cell site routed to a specific terminal.
SD ((schematic drawing))

SDs are multipage documents that support particular applications. Of direct interest to
maintenance personnel will be the SDs that relate to cabling and connections. These SDs
document the circuit paths used in troubleshooting.
SDP ((status display page))

SDPs, sometimes referred to as cartoon pages, graphically represent the hardware and
software subsystems of the radio cabinet site and of the various components of the MSC.
selective cell site monitoring ((SCSM))

See SCSM
Series II advanced mobile phone service

See AMPS
SID ((system ID))

small computer systems interface ((SCSI))

See SCSI
SSU ((special service unit) )

status display page ((SDP))

See SDP
STF ((some tests failed))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T1

A four-wire voice and data trunking facility that carries 24 duplex channels over 56-kbps
time slots.
T1 span

A T1 span (DS1) contains twenty-four 56-kbps time slots capable of handling 24

standard TDM voice trunks.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-23
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TCPIP ((transmission control protocol/internet protocol))

The pair of protocols and also a generic name for the suite of tools and protocols that
form the basis for the Internet. Originally developed to connect systems to the
ARPANET.
TDM ((time division multiplex))

TDMA ((time division multiple access))

TDMA divides each carrier frequency into a number of time slots, each of which
constitutes an independent telephone circuit. Current North American digital systems use
TDMA.
TDU ((test and diagnostic unit))

.The TDU supports digital pre-distortion (DPD), closed loop gain control (CLGC), and
antenna functional tests.
test and diagnostic unit ((TDU))

See TDU.
TFU ((timing and frequency unit))

The TFU is the frequency reference and CDMA time-base unit that synchronizes the
radio cabinet with the other radio cabinets in the CDMA network.
TI ((technician interface))

Time Division Multiple Access ((TDMA))

See TDMA
timing and frequency unit ((TFU))

See TFU
TPFT ((traffic path functional test))

Verifies that a CDMA traffic path can be established and maintained through every
available traffic CE on the radio cabinet.
traffic path functional test ((TPFT))

See TPFT
transmission control protocol/internet protocol ((TCPIP))

See TCPIP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UCL ((unconditional))

Priority of craft action which often applies to remove (rmv) and restore (rst). It is
sometimes pronounced uncle.
UCR ((UTRA CDMA Radio))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-24

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the transmit path, the UCR receives the digitally combined baseband forward signal
from the CMU and converts it to a low power level modulated RF signal. The receive
path is the opposite. The UCR receives an RF signal and converts it to digital signals
suitable for the channel elements.
UIP ((ULAM interface panel))

The UIP acts as a buffer between the baseband radios outputs and transmit amplifier
inputs.
ULAM ((ultra-liner amplifier module))

The Ultra-Linear Amplifier Module (ULAM) provides RF power amplification for up to

three simultaneous 1.25-MHz CDMA carriers within the PCS and Cellular ranges. The
PCS ULAM can provides 16 watts power, and 20 watts for Cellular. The ULAM is a
linearized RF power amplifier designed to provide bus alarm reporting, visual alarm
status indicators, and RF over-drive protection.
ultra-linear amplifier module ((ULAM))

See ULAM
UMC ((universal main controller))

The UMC is a part of the URC that performs the call processing functions of a
CDMA2000 BTS, which include channel element resource allocation and call processing
application processing. The UMC also performs all OA&M processing, including circuit
pack status monitoring and reporting to the RNC.
universal main controller ((UMC))

See UMC
universal radio controller ((URC))

See URC
UNIX

Computer operating system developed at Bell Laboratories and used for the technician
interface. UNIX is not an acronym (It was a pun on MITs MULTICS).
URC ((universal radio controller))

The URC controls the base station and interfaces the T1 or E1 facilities to the base
station.
UTMOST ((user talk MOST))

See MOST (p. GL-17)

UTRA CDMA Radio ((UCR))

See UCR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VAC ((volts AC))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
GL-25
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VCSA ((voice channel selection activity))

VCSA measurements provide detailed information about traffic movement within a

cellular system by recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processing
events at specified cell sites.
VDC ((volts DC))

voice channel selection activity ((VCSA))

See VCSA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WCTS ((wireless technical support center))

An Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Systems technical support organization.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

XO ((crystal oscillator))

The XO OM is an oscillator that provides a highly stable, 15-MHz frequency reference

over temperature variations expected within the radio cabinet. This frequency reference
is used by the synthesizers in the CBRs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ZCS ((zero code suppression))

This is an alternative to B8ZS which prevents zero bytes from being transmitted by
inverting the second LSB (bit 7) of the byte. This corrupts data, but is acceptable for
PCM speech since the bit change is not detected by the listener.
zero code suppression ((ZCS))

See ZCS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

GL-26

Index

Numerics

9216/9226 Compact
CPC alarms, 7-4
9216 Compact LX
CPC alarms, 7-4
9216 Compact Distributed
CPC alarms, 7-4
9216/9226 Compact
CTU alarms, 7-5
9216 Compact LX
CTU alarms, 7-5
9216 Compact Distributed

9216/9226 Compact
alarm information, 7-1
9216 Compact LX
alarm information, 7-1
9216 Compact Distributed
alarm information, 7-1
9216/9226 Compact
component replacement and
repair, 17-1
9218/9228 Macro

OM alarms, 7-5
9216/9226 Compact
alarm collection, 7-2
9216 Compact LX
alarm collection, 7-2
9216 Compact Distributed
alarm collection, 7-2

9218/9228 Macro
fan tray alarms, 6-19
frame alarms, 6-58
intrusion alarms, 6-12
power alarms, 6-49

user alarm cable

connections, 6-46

IOU alarms, 6-11

9216 Compact Distributed

component replacement and

repair, 16-1

CPC alarms, 6-6

9216/9226 Compact

OM alarms, 7-5

9218/9228 Base Station Macro

9218/9228 Macro outdoor

CTU alarms, 6-7

9216 Compact LX

alarm testing, 6-62

CMU alarms, 6-9

CTU alarms, 7-5

OM alarms, 7-5

9218/9228 Macro

OM alarms, 6-7
9218 Macro
PowCom software, 6-60
9218/9228 Macro
TDU alarms, 6-18
TxAMP alarms, 6-14
UCR alarms, 6-13
URC alarms, 6-8
alarm collection, 6-3
alarm information, 6-1
9218/9228 Macro HD

9218 Macro indoor

user alarm cable
connections at the NIU,
6-37
9218/9228 Macro indoor
user alarm requirements,
6-25
9218/9228 Macro outdoor
user alarm requirements,
6-42
9218/9228 Macro
user alarms, 6-20
9222 Micro/Micro Distributed
CTU alarms, 8-4

alarm information, 6-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IN-1
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OM alarms, 8-4

alarm collection, 11-2

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-2

alarm collection, 8-2

alarm information, 11-1

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-2

component replacement and

repair, 21-1

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-2

9222 Micro
alarm information, 8-1
9222 Micro Distributed
alarm information, 8-1

.............................................................
A about this information product,

xxvii
9222 Micro
component replacement and
repair, 18-1
9222 Micro Distributed
component replacement and
repair, 18-1
9223 Ultra-Compact
CTU alarms, 9-4
OM alarms, 9-4
alarm collection, 9-2
alarm information, 9-1
component replacement and
repair, 19-1
9224 Sub-Compact
CTU alarms, 10-4, 10-4
9224 Sub-Compact EN
OM alarms, 10-4, 10-4
9224 Sub-Compact
alarm information, 10-1
9224 Sub-Compact EN
alarm information, 10-1
9224 Sub-Compact
component replacement and
repair, 20-1
9228 Macro LP
alarm information, 6-1
9234 d2U Distributed
CTU alarms, 11-4
OM alarms, 11-4

configuration management,
4-1

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-2

alarm information
9216 Compact Distributed,,
7-1
9216 Compact LX,, 7-1

conventions used, xxxii

9216/9226 Compact,, 7-1

document name changes,

xxix

9218/9228 Macro HD,, 6-1

9218/9228 Macro,, 6-1

fault detection, isolation,

and recovery, 2-1

9222 Micro Distributed,, 8-1

how to use this document,

xxxi

9222 Micro,, 8-1

information product support,

xxxv

9224 Sub-Compact EN,,

10-1

intended audience, xxix

9224 Sub-Compact,, 10-1

product conformance
statements, A-1

9228 Macro LP,, 6-1

product name changes, xxix

reason for reissue, xxvii

9223 Ultra-Compact,, 9-1

9234 d2U Distributed,, 11-1

CDMA Remote Radio
Head,, 12-1

related documentation,
xxxiii

alarm testing

replace and repair

components, 3-1

alarms, 5-1

supported systems, xxix

types of maintenance, 1-1
alarm collection
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-2

9218/9228 Macro, 6-62

alarm types, 5-2

AMP, 6-14, 7-11, 8-10, 9-9,
10-9
amp over-temperature, 8-10,
9-9, 10-9

9216 Compact LX, 7-2

amp overdrive alarm, 6-14,

8-10, 9-9, 10-9

9216/9226 Compact, 7-2

amplifier failure, 7-11

9218/9228 Macro, 6-3

collection, 7-2, 9-2, 11-2

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-2

DC power system, 10-28

intrusion, 7-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

IN-2

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

over-temperature, 7-11

base stations documented, xxvii

CATP, 13-17

reporting, 6-3, 7-2, 9-2,

10-2, 11-2

before beginning configuration

management, 26-2

cdhfl, 28-22

reporting summary, 6-4, 7-3,

8-3, 9-3, 10-3, 11-3

before beginning maintenance,

2-1

RF overdrive, 7-11
RxAMP, 7-15
TxAMP, 7-13
user alarm wiring, 6-21,
7-27, 7-28, 8-17, 8-22
user alarms external
connections, 6-46
user, wiring codes, 6-21,
7-27, 7-28, 8-17, 8-22
alarms types, 5-2
all tests pass
See: ATP
AMP alarms, 6-14, 7-11, 8-10,
9-9, 10-9
amplifier failure
alarm, 7-11
antenna failure, 13-29

before beginning
trouble-clearing
procedures, 2-6
precautionary steps, 2-4
required maintenance
equipment, 2-5
test equipment maintenance,
2-3
before beginning
trouble-clearing procedures,
2-6
before you begin
configuration management,
26-1
BLST, 13-8, 27-2

cdhnl, 28-22
CDM
EDPD, 13-39
CDMA Carrier, 28-3
CDMA Directed Handoff
Neighbor List, 28-19
CDMA PPOPTMT, 28-3
CDMA Principle Neighbor List,
28-19
CDMA Remote Radio Head
alarm information, 12-1
cell site fault detection and
recovery tools
base station maintenance
features, 4-2
drive testing, 4-6

board level self-test, 13-8

fault detection mechanisms

for manual recovery, 4-5

Board Level Self-Test (BLST)

See: BLST

hardware error handling

strategy, 4-3

antenna functional test, 13-27

.............................................................

overload control, 4-8

antenna test, 13-8

C Cable

apxrcv, 28-1

facilities connection, 11-12

performance measurements,
4-7

ARCNET

facilities ~ pin assignment,

11-12

remote T1/E1 monitoring,

4-9

TDU, 15-4
arithmetic calibration, 13-41,
13-41

facilities ~ wire colors,

11-12

cell site fault detection tools,

4-1

ATP

function and description,

11-11

Cell Site Optional Features,

28-3

analysis, 4-3
AWG conversion table, xxxii

calibration coefficients, 13-43

cell site recovery tools, 4-1

camp-on, 15-16

cell2, 28-3, 28-22

carrier activation, 28-28

Channel Number, 28-3

.............................................................
B Band Class, 28-3

base station maintenance

features, 4-2

procedure, 28-29
carrier assignment, 28-28

clean screens
outdoor base stations, 23-2

criteria, 28-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IN-3
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLGC, 13-36
alarm, 13-39
functionality, 15-4
paths, 13-42
CLI, 28-30
cmodeqp, 6-20, 7-18, 8-14,
9-13, 10-12, 10-17
9234 d2U Distributed, 11-10
Remote Radio Head, 12-5
cmodeqp form
RRH/RUI configuration,
22-7
cmodpptm, 28-17
CMU, 13-21
carrier assignment, 28-28
LEDs, 6-9, 7-7, 8-6, 9-6,
10-6, 11-6
replace CMU, 15-15
replacement, 15-15
CMU alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-7
9216 Compact LX, 7-7
9216/9226 Compact, 7-7
9218/9228 Macro, 6-9
9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-6
9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-6
9224 Sub-Compact, 10-6
9224 Sub-Compact EN,
10-6
9234 d2U Distributed, 11-6
Command Line Interface
see CLI, 28-30

compact BU cabinet
user alarm requirements,
7-25
component replacement and
repair

load sharing considerations,

28-26
load sharing example, 28-26
standard, 28-24

9216/9226 Compact, 17-1

standard configuration
example, 28-24

9218/9228 Base Station

Macro, 16-1

without integrated power,

26-7

9222 Micro, 18-1

9222 Micro Distributed,
18-1
9223 Ultra-Compact, 19-1
9224 Sub-Compact, 20-1
9234 d2U Distributed, 21-1
Remote Radio Head, 22-1
conditional all tests pass, 13-17
configuration management, 4-2,
4-1
assumptions, 26-2
before you begin, 26-1

connections
user alarms, 6-46
conventions used, xxxii
CPC
alarm, 9-2, 11-2
bus, 9-2, 10-2, 11-2
LEDs, 6-6, 7-4
CPC alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-4, 7-4
9216 Compact LX, 7-4, 7-4

degrowth procedures, 29-1

9216/9226 Compact, 7-4,

7-4

growth procedures, 28-1

9218/9228 Macro, 6-6

initialize base station, 27-1

CRC Overload Control, 28-3

interfaces, 26-2

CTRM, 15-2

security management, 25-1

CTU

update non-volatile memory,

27-1

alarm, 6-7, 8-4, 9-4, 10-4,

11-4

voice interface DS0

functionality, 30-1

diagnose, 13-21

configurations
9218 Macro, 26-5
9218 Macro HD, 26-5
indoor 9218 Macro, 26-8
indoor mixed frame, 26-9
integrated power, 26-5

hardware errors, 6-7, 7-5,

8-4, 9-4, 10-4, 11-4
LED, 6-7, 8-4, 9-4, 10-4,
11-4
LEDs, 7-5
replace CTU, 15-10
replacement, 15-10

load sharing, 28-25

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

IN-4

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CTU alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-5
9216 Compact LX, 7-5

diagnose the base station,

13-20
diagnostic tests for base
station, 13-12

9218/9228 Macro, 6-7

Enhanced Digital
Predistortion (EDPD),
13-38

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-4

fault detection, isolation,

and recovery, 13-1

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-4

fault isolation principles,

13-6

9216/9226 Compact, 7-5

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-4,

10-4
9234 d2U Distributed, 11-4
customer connection at NIU
punchdown tables for
external user alarm cable
connections, 7-31
.............................................................
D DC power requirements

alarms, 9-27

maintenance hierarchy, 13-4

operation of Closed Loop
Gain Control (CLGC),
13-36
outline of MSC-based
diagnostics, 13-17
parameter descriptions,
13-42
stable clear recovery times,
13-16

states, 13-38
EFIM-12
user alarms, 6-20
electrical test
heat exchanger, 15-35
equipment requirements
heat exchanger replacement,
15-32
ETDU
EDPD, 13-38
.............................................................
F factory calibration, 13-41

fail/pass analysis, 4-4

fan tray
LED, 6-19, 8-13, 9-12,
10-11, 11-9
LEDs, 7-17
fan tray alarms

DC power system alarms, 9-27,

10-28, 11-19, 12-10

testing and diagnostics

framework, 13-8

9216 Compact Distributed,

7-17

degrowth procedures, 4-1, 29-1,

29-4

testing overview, 13-3

9216 Compact LX, 7-17

when field re-calibration is

needed, 13-43

9216/9226 Compact, 7-17

configuration management,
29-1

document name changes, xxix

9218/9228 Macro, 6-19

diagnostic procedures, 13-20

documented products, xxvii

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-13

diagnostic tests, 13-12

door realignment, 16-48

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-11

door roller bearing, 16-48

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-11

drive testing, 4-6, 4-6

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-11

access the base station using

the RMT, 13-23
antenna functional tests,
13-27
Board Level Self-Test
(BLST), 13-10
calibration philosophy,
13-41
CLGC out-of-range fault
isolation, 13-45

DS0 connection
growth, 28-18
.............................................................
E EDPD, 13-38

alarm, 13-39
craftshell commands, 13-39

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-9

fault detection mechanisms for
manual recovery, 4-5
fault detection, isolation, and
recovery, 2-1
alarms, 5-1

process, 13-38
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IN-5
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

cell site fault detection and

recovery tools, 4-1

hardware error handling

strategy, 4-3

.............................................................
G generic, 27-5

diagnostic tests, 13-1

heat exchanger
active, 27-4

fault isolation, 13-6

fault isolation process
FRU, 4-5
fault management, 4-2
fci, 28-19
neighbor, 28-21

replace, 15-32

alternate, 27-4

HEH, 4-3

available, 27-5

hot swap, 14-3

call processing, 13-8

command format, 27-5
current, 27-4
download, growth, 28-31

.............................................................
I

I 2C
alarms, 6-3, 7-2, 9-2, 10-2,
11-2

Field Replaceable Unit

See: FRU

name structure, 27-4

filters

reload, 27-2

information product support

contact information, xxxv

service affecting, 27-7

initialization, 27-2, 27-4

replace outdoor base

stations, 23-2
flywheeling, 6-7, 7-5, 8-4, 9-4,
10-4, 11-4
frame alarms

structure, 27-4

signaling link, 27-2

verify, 28-30

UCR, 27-2

working, 27-5

URC, 27-2

growth

initialize base station

9216 Compact Distributed,

7-49

assumptions, 26-2

9216 Compact LX, 7-49

create RCS, 28-31

9216/9226 Compact, 7-49

diagnose hardware, 28-32

9218/9228 Macro, 6-58

download generic, 28-31

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-23

DS0 connection, 28-18

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-29

interfaces, 26-2

9216 Compact Distributed,

7-9

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-31

restore RCS, 28-32

9216 Compact LX, 7-9

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-31

trunk groups, 28-18

9216/9226 Compact, 7-9

verify generic, 28-30

9218/9228 Macro, 6-12

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-21

Remote Radio Head, 12-6
FRU, 14-2
fault isolation process, 4-5
functional tests
antenna test, 13-8

integrate base station, 28-22

growth procedures, 4-1, 28-33

configuration management,
28-1
growth state, 28-32
cell site status, 28-3
.............................................................
H hardware error handler

See: HEH

configuration management,
27-1
integrated power
user alarms, 6-20
intrusion alarms, 6-12, 7-9, 8-8,
10-7, 11-8, 12-3

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-8
9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-7
9224 Sub-Compact, 10-7
9224 Sub-Compact EN,
10-7
9234 d2U Distributed, 11-8
Remote Radio Head, 12-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

IN-6

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

testing procedures, 6-63

IOU
LED, 6-11, 7-8
IOU alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-8
9216 Compact LX, 7-8
9216/9226 Compact, 7-8
9218/9228 Macro, 6-11
.............................................................
L LAM

LEDs, 6-14, 8-10, 9-9, 10-9

replacement, 15-7
leaky bucket analysis, 4-4
LEDs, 5-2
board, 5-2
CMU, 6-9, 7-7, 8-6, 9-6,
10-6, 11-6
CPC, 6-6, 7-4
CTU, 6-7, 7-5, 8-4, 9-4,
10-4, 11-4
fan tray, 6-19, 7-17, 8-13,
9-12, 10-11, 11-9

load sharing, 28-25

considerations, 28-26
example, 28-26
.............................................................
M maintenance

hierarchy, 13-4
maintenance hierarchy, 13-4
diagram, 13-4
process, 13-4

UCR, 6-13, 7-10, 8-9, 9-8,

10-8
URC, 6-8, 7-6, 8-5, 9-5,
10-5, 11-5

replace, 15-30
OM alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-5

9216/9226 Compact, 7-5

MCR

9218/9228 Macro, 6-7

replace MCR, 15-13

replacement, 15-13
Modify or Decommission the
Battery Box, 16-47
MSC
diagnostic tests, 13-17
ecp (RC/V form), 28-22

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-4
9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-4
9224 Sub-Compact EN,
10-4, 10-4
9234 d2U Distributed, 11-4
operation and maintenance
overview, 1-1

.............................................................

maintenance process, 1-7

N NVM, 27-4

operation versus
maintenance, 1-5

signaling link, 27-5

update process, 27-4

TxAMP, 6-14, 7-11, 8-10,

9-9, 10-9

LEDs, 7-5

maintenance records, 3-3

OCM-II, 6-10, 8-7, 11-7

TDU, 6-18, 7-16

LED, 6-7, 8-4, 9-4, 10-4,

11-4

9216 Compact LX, 7-5

update procedure, 27-7

RRH, 12-4

alarm, 6-7, 8-4, 9-4, 10-4,

11-4

maintenance process, 1-7

IOU, 6-11, 7-8

OM, 6-7, 7-5, 8-4, 9-4,

10-4, 11-4

OM

.............................................................
O OCM-II

LEDs, 6-10, 8-7, 11-7

OCM-II alarms
9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-7
9228 Macro LP/Distributed,
6-10

operation versus maintenance,

1-5
other types of maintenance
replace components and
repair a base station, 24-1
over-temperature alarm, 7-11,
8-10, 9-9, 10-9
9218/9228 Macro, 6-14
overload, 4-8
overload control, 4-8
.............................................................

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-7

P PAM

See: TxAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IN-7
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

performance measurements, 4-7

priority, alarms, 5-2

pin assignment

product conformance
statements, A-1

of facilities cables, 11-12

Pin assignment
user alarms, 11-12
PowCom software
9218 Macro, 6-60
power alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-39

product name changes, xxix

products documented, xxvii
punchdown tables for external
user alarm cable connections
customer connection at NIU,
7-31
.............................................................
R RATP, 13-16

9216 Compact LX, 7-39

RBAC feature summary, 25-6
9216/9226 Compact, 7-39
RC/V, 26-4
9218/9228 Macro, 6-49
form modifications, 28-3
9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-20

RC/V forms, 28-22

recovery times
stable clear, 13-16
red LED, 5-2
related documentation, xxxiii
Remote Radio Headcomponent
replacement and repair, 22-1
remote T1/E1 monitoring, 4-9
replace and repair common
components between base
stations
replace components and
repair a base station, 15-1
replace and repair components,
3-1
replace components and repair
a base station

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-20

btseqp, 28-3, 28-3

clean screens, 23-2

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-22

cdhfl, 28-22

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-22

cdhnl, 28-22

other types of maintenance,

24-1

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-14

cmodeqp, 6-20, 7-18, 8-14,

9-13, 10-12, 10-17, 11-10,
12-5, 28-3, 28-3

Remote Radio Head, 12-7

Power requirements
DC power alarms, 10-27,
10-29
system interface, 11-14

cell2, 27-7, 28-3

cmodpptm, 28-17
ecp, 28-22
fci, 28-19

pptg, 28-16

growth state, 28-3, 28-32

precautionary steps, 2-4

pptg, 28-16

precautions, 2-4

RRH/RUI configuration,
22-4

preventive maintenance, 3-1

maintenance records, 3-3
preventive maintenance
schedule, 3-2

RCS
boot, 27-4
create, 28-31

preventive maintenance
schedule, 3-2

RCS reboot, 27-2

primary frame

reason for reissue, xxvii

command format, 27-2

replace and repair common

components between base
stations, 15-1
replace filters, 23-2, 24-1
replacement/repair process,
14-1
replace filters
outdoor base stations, 23-2
replacement
cables, amplifiers, splitter,
combiners, CLGC coupler,
13-43
filter panel, 13-43, 13-43
filter-to-radio Rx cable,
13-43
Filter-to-TDU cable, 13-43
groups, 13-43, 13-44
TDU, 13-43, 13-43, 15-2,
15-5

user alarms, 6-22, 6-46

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

IN-8

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

replacement/repair process
replace components and
repair a base station, 14-1
replacing a failed unit, 14-2
required maintenance
equipment, 2-5
RF
path calibration, 13-41
RF overdrive, 6-14, 8-10, 9-9,
10-9
alarms, 7-11
RMT, 13-3
access procedure, 13-23
routine audit, 13-16
RRH

.............................................................

replace TDU, 15-2

S screens

replacement, 15-2, 15-2

clean outdoor base stations,

23-2
SCSM
alarm testing, 6-62

replacement procedure, 15-5

TDU alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-16

SDP, 28-2, 28-33

9216 Compact LX, 7-16

security management

9216/9226 Compact, 7-16

configuration management,
25-1
Selectable Cell Site Messaging
See: SCSM
shelf alarms
9216/9226 Compact, 7-12

9218/9228 Macro, 6-18

test equipment maintenance,
2-3
tower top test module alarm
LED
9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-12

signaling link
Translation Application Note
1F, 13-44

2338 - Remote Unit

Interface (RUI) Status
page, 12-18

single time-period analysis, 4-4

trouble isolation, 4-6

alarm information, 12-1

software updates, 4-1

trunk groups

alrarms, 11-23

stable clear, 13-16

degrowth, 29-3
field support, 12-15
frame alarms, 12-6
LEDs, 12-4
operational test, 12-16
RRH alarms
9234 d2U Distributed, 11-23
Remote Radio Head, 12-4

role in NVM, 27-5

recovery times, 13-16

standard Compact cabinet
user alarm requirements,
7-24
supported systems, xxix
System alarms
DC power, 11-19, 12-10
System interface
power, 11-14

RRH/RUI configuration

growth, 28-18
Tx amp
cable error messages, 15-7
Tx RF path
calibration, 13-43
TxAMP
alarms, 7-13
LEDs, 7-11
replace TxAMP, 15-7
TxAMP alarms

.............................................................

RC/V forms, 22-4

rrheqp form

T T1/E1 and alarms cable list

cable information, 7-23

9216 Compact Distributed,

7-11
9216 Compact LX, 7-11

RRH/RUI configuration,
22-4

TDU, 13-36, 13-41

RRL feature summary, 25-6

ARCNET, 15-4

9218/9228 Macro, 6-14

RxAMP

LED, 6-18

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-10

alarms, 7-15

LEDs, 7-16

9216/9226 Compact, 7-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IN-9
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-9

URC

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-9

diagnose, 13-20

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-9

hierarchy, 13-4

types of maintenance, 1-1

before beginning
maintenance, 2-1
operation and maintenance
overview, 1-1
preventive maintenance, 3-1
.............................................................
U UCR

carrier activation, 28-28

user alarm requirements

9218/9228 Macro indoor,
6-25

initialization, 27-2

9218/9228 Macro outdoor,

6-42

LED, 6-8, 8-5, 9-5, 10-5,

11-5

compact BU cabinet, 7-25

LEDs, 7-6
load sharing, 28-25
replacement, 15-20
standard configuration,
28-24
URC alarms

user alarms
9216 Compact Distributed,
7-18
9216 Compact LX, 7-18
9216/9226 Compact, 7-18
9218/9228 Macro, 6-20
9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-14

diagnose, 13-22

9216 Compact Distributed,

7-6

initialization, 27-2

9216 Compact LX, 7-6

LEDs, 6-13, 7-10, 8-9, 9-8,

10-8

9216/9226 Compact, 7-6

9218/9228 Macro, 6-8

re-calibration, 13-43

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-12

replace UCR, 15-11

9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-5

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-10

replacement, 15-11

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-5

UCR alarms

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-5

9216 Compact Distributed,

7-10

9224 Sub-Compact EN,

10-5

9216 Compact LX, 7-10

9234 d2U Distributed, 11-5

9216/9226 Compact, 7-10

9218/9228 Macro, 6-13
9222 Micro/Micro
Distributed, 8-9
9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-8
9224 Sub-Compact, 10-8
9224 Sub-Compact EN,
10-8
update non-volatile memory
configuration management,
27-1

user alarm
routing, 6-20
user alarm cable connections
9218/9228 Macro outdoor,
6-46
user alarm cable connections at
the NIU
9218 Macro indoor, 6-37
user alarm cable connections at
Z-IDC or 110ANA1-25 block
9218/9228 Macro indoor,
6-31, 6-31

9223 Ultra-Compact, 9-13

9224 Sub-Compact, 10-17

User alarms
DC power system, 11-19,
12-10
user alarms
EFIM-12, 6-20
external connections, 6-46
primary frame, 6-22, 6-46
Remote Radio Head, 12-5
requirements, 6-42
RJ-45 pin assignment, 11-12
testing procedures, 6-63
wire colors, 11-12
wiring, 6-21, 7-27, 7-28,
8-17, 8-22
user alarms, integrated power,
6-20

user alarm cables, 6-42, 6-51

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 19 June 2009

IN-10

Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................
V VIM, 30-1

btseqp, 30-2
functionality, 30-2
growth, 30-2
voice interface DS0
functionality
configuration management,
30-1
voice interface module, 30-1
functionality, 30-2
growth, 30-2
.............................................................
W waveform, 13-38

weather
severe, 13-27
weight
heat exchanger, 15-32
wideband
filter, 13-38
Wire colors
of facilities cables, 11-12
user alarms, 11-12
wire cross-sectional area table,
xxxii
wire size table, xxxii
wiring codes
user alarms, 6-21, 7-27,
7-28, 8-17, 8-22
working generic, 27-5
workspace, 28-30
wrist strap, 2-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
401-703-407
IN-11
Issue 19 June 2009
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction